CITY OF BOULDER

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page

INTRODUCTION

(A) Introduction...........................................................................................................................................I-1
(B) DCS Adoption.......................................................................................................................................I-1
(C) Changes Reflected in the DCS..............................................................................................................I-1
(D) Ordinance No. 7088..............................................................................................................................I-5

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................1-1
(A) Intent....................................................................................................................................................1-1
(B) Scope ...................................................................................................................................................1-1
(C) Minimum Standards ............................................................................................................................1-1
(D) Terminology ........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.02 DESCRIPTION AND USE OF THESE STANDARDS ..................................................................1-2
(A) Using these Standards .........................................................................................................................1-2
(B) Restrictions..........................................................................................................................................1-2
(C) Public Improvements Design ..............................................................................................................1-2
(D) Construction Approvals.......................................................................................................................1-2
(E) Public Improvements Construction.....................................................................................................1-3
(F) Standards .............................................................................................................................................1-3
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION APPROVAL ..................................1-4
(A) Documentation ....................................................................................................................................1-4
(B) Engineering Reports............................................................................................................................1-5
(C) Rights-of-Way and Easement Dedications, Permits, and Agreements ...............................................1-6
(D) Construction Plans...............................................................................................................................1-6
(E) Plan and Profile Drawings.................................................................................................................1-10
(F) Submittal and Approval of Construction Plans and Drawings .........................................................1-13
(G) As-Built Drawings.............................................................................................................................1-14
(H) Submittal AND APPROVAL OF AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ........................................................................1-14
1.04 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION...............................1-15
(A) Use.....................................................................................................................................................1-15
(B) Approval............................................................................................................................................1-15
(C) Proof OF CLAIMS ...............................................................................................................................1-15
1.05 ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS, AND WAIVERS .............................................................1-15
(A) Practical Difficulties..........................................................................................................................1-15
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-i
 (B) Criteria...............................................................................................................................................1-15
(C) Application Requirements.................................................................................................................1-16
(D) Decision.............................................................................................................................................1-16

CHAPTER 2
TRANSPORTATION DESIGN
2.01 GENERAL.............................................................................................................................................................2-4
(A) Intent..........................................................................................................................................2-4
(B) Transportation Master Plan ............................................................................................................2-4
(C) Reference Standards .......................................................................................................................2-4
(D) Functional Street Classification ......................................................................................................2-4
2.02 TRAFFIC STUDY.................................................................................................................................2-4
(A) Traffic Assessment .........................................................................................................................2-4
(B) Traffic Study Requirements ............................................................................................................2-4
(C) Responsibilities for Traffic Studies.................................................................................................2-4
(D) Preparation......................................................................................................................................2-4
(E) Coordination with City ...................................................................................................................2-5
(F) Submittal.........................................................................................................................................2-5
2.03 TRAFFIC STUDY FORMAT.............................................................................................................................2-5
(A) Study Requirements........................................................................................................................2-5
(B) Introduction..................................................................................................................................2-5
(C) Site Location and Zoning................................................................................................................2-5
(D) Study Area Boundaries...................................................................................................................2-5
(E) Existing Area Street System Description ........................................................................................2-5
(F) Existing and Projected Roadway and Intersection Traffic Volumes................................................2-5
(G) Existing and Proposed Site Uses.....................................................................................................2-6
(H) Existing and Proposed Land Uses in Vicinity of the Site ................................................................2-6
(I) Travel Demand Management Strategies .........................................................................................2-6
(J) Trip Generation...............................................................................................................................2-6
(K) Trip Distribution/Assignment and Modal Split...............................................................................2-7
(L) Existing and Projected Traffic Volumes ..........................................................................................2-7
(M) Transportation Service Standards...................................................................................................2-9
(N) Level of Service Analysis ...............................................................................................................2-9
(O) Traffic Counts and Analyses Worksheets.....................................................................................2-10
(P) Traffic Control and Signals..................................................................................................................2-10
(Q) Traffic Accidents...........................................................................................................................2-11
(R) Noise Attenuation.....................................................................................................................2-11
(S) Recommendations.........................................................................................................................2-11
(T) Conclusion ....................................................................................................................................2-12
(U) Revisions to Traffic Study ............................................................................................................2-12
2.04 SITE ACCESS ....................................................................................................................................2-12
(A) Access Requirements ....................................................................................................................2-12
(B) Access Permit Required ................................................................................................................2-12
(C) Location of Access .....................................................................................................................2-13
(D) Sight Distance ...............................................................................................................................2-13
(E) Restriction of Turning Movements ...............................................................................................2-13
(F) Traffic Control ..............................................................................................................................2-14
(G) One-Way Access Lanes ................................................................................................................2-14
T-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (H) Speed Change Lanes .....................................................................................................................2-14
(I) Access and Curb Cut Type........................................................................................................2-14
(J) Access and Curb Cut Width......................................................................................................2-15
(K) Access and Curb Cut Radii ...........................................................................................................2-15
(L) Access and Curb Cut Grades.........................................................................................................2-15
(M) Driveways ....................................................................................................................................2-16
2.05 RIGHT-OF-WAY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................2-17
2.06 BASE STREET AND ALLEY STANDARDS.................................................................................2-17
(A) Base Street Standard ....................................................................................................................2-17
(B) Base Alley Standard.....................................................................................................................2-17
2.07 STREET GEOMETRIC DESIGN ...................................................................................................2-18
(A) Minimum Requirements ...................................................................................................................2-18
(B) Right-of-Way ...............................................................................................................................2-18
(C) Lane Width ..................................................................................................................................2-18
(D) Horizontal Alignment ..................................................................................................................2-19
(E) Vertical Alignment.......................................................................................................................2-21
(F) Sight Distance ..............................................................................................................................2-22
(G) Medians...................................................................................................................................2-22
(H) Vertical Clearance of Structures ..................................................................................................2-22
2.08 SIDEWALKS ....................................................................................................................................2-23
(A) Required.......................................................................................................................................2-23
(B) Conformance with the Transportation Master Plan .....................................................................2-23
(C) Compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)..........................................................2-23
(D) Minimum Widths .........................................................................................................................2-23
(E) Vertical Grades ....................................................................................................................................2-23
2.09 RESIDENTIAL STREETS..........................................................................................................2-23
(A) Purpose.............................................................................................................................2-23
(B) Scope............................................................................................................................................2-24
(C) Director Review ...........................................................................................................................2-25
(D) Residential Street Sections...........................................................................................................2-26
2.10 EMERGENCY ACCESS LANES..........................................................................................................2-30
(E) Emergency Access Required .......................................................................................................2-30
(F) When Emergency Access Lane is Required ................................................................................2-30
(G) Secondary Emergency Access ...................................................................................................2-31
(H) Local Emergency Access Lane Standards ...................................................................................2-31
(I) Unobstructed Access .........................................................................................................2-31
(J) Access Identification....................................................................................................................2-32
2.11 BICYCLE FACILITIES DESIGN..................................................................................................2-32
(A) Conformance with Bicycle System Plan ......................................................................................2-32
(B) On-Street Bike Lanes - Streets Without On-Street Parking .........................................................2-32
(C) On-Street Bike Lanes - Streets With On-Street Parking ..............................................................2-32
(D) Off-Street Bike Lanes...................................................................................................................2-32
(E) Bicycle Parking ............................................................................................................................2-32
2.12 STREET LIGHTING.........................................................................................................................2-34
(A) Scope............................................................................................................................................2-34
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-iii
 (B) Guidelines for Street Lighting......................................................................................................2-34
(C) Easements ....................................................................................................................................2-35

CHAPTER 3
STREETSCAPE DESIGN AND TREE PROTECTION
3.01 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................3-1
(A) Intent .........................................................................................................................................3-1
(B) Scope3-1
(C) Reference Standards.......................................................................................................................3-1
(D) City Approval Required .................................................................................................................3-1
3.02 LANDSCAPING PLAN .......................................................................................................................3-1
(A) Landscaping Plan Required ...........................................................................................................3-1
(B) Tree Protection...............................................................................................................................3-1
(C) Landscaping Plan Requirements....................................................................................................3-2
3.03 STREET TREES AND PLANTS........................................................................................................3-2
(A) Tree Selection ................................................................................................................................3-2
(B) Tree Placement in Medians and Landscape Planting Strips...........................................................3-5
(C) Tree Placement in Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits............................................3-6
(D) Plant Selection and Placement for Landscaping in Medians .........................................................3-8
3.04 TREE REMOVAL AND RELOCATION...........................................................................................3-9
(A) Permit Required for Tree Removal or Relocation..........................................................................3-9
(B) Undesirable Trees for Public Rights-of-Way...............................................................................3-10
(C) Tree Removal ...............................................................................................................................3-10
(D) Tree Relocation (Transplanting) ..................................................................................................3-10
3.05 TREE PROTECTION FOR CONSTRUCTION SITES .............................................................3-11
(A) Tree Protection Required .............................................................................................................3-11
(B) Tree Protection Procedures ..........................................................................................................3-11
3.06 GENERAL LANDSCAPING AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ...................................3-14
(A) Protecting Existing Improvements ...............................................................................................3-14
(B) Maintenance of Landscaping .......................................................................................................3-14

CHAPTER 4
GENERAL UTILITIES DESIGN
4.01 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................4-1
(A) Intent....................................................................................................................................................4-1
(B) Utilities Master Plans ..........................................................................................................................4-1
(C) Reference Standards ............................................................................................................................4-1
4.02 UTILITY CONNECTION PLAN .....................................................................................................4-1
(A) Required ..............................................................................................................................................4-1
(B) Plan Requirements...............................................................................................................................4-1
4.03 UTILITY PLAN ....................................................................................................................................4-2
(A) Required ..............................................................................................................................................4-2
(B) Plan Requirements...............................................................................................................................4-2
T-iv DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (C) Utility Plan Approvals.........................................................................................................................4-3
4.04 UTILITIES EASEMENTS ................................................................................................................4-4
(A) General ................................................................................................................................................4-4
(B) Easements Crossing Single-Family Residential Lots..........................................................................4-4
4.05 PIPE STRENGTH ..............................................................................................................................4-5
4.06 SEPARATION OF UTILITIES ........................................................................................................4-5
(A) Parallel (Horizontal) Separation ..........................................................................................................4-5
(B) Pipe Crossings (Vertical) Separation ..................................................................................................4-5
(C) Drainageway and Irrigation Ditch Crossings ......................................................................................4-6
(D) Separation of Utilities from Trees .......................................................................................................4-6
(E) Special Conditions for the Separation of Utilities...............................................................................4-7
4.07 UNDERGROUNDING OF UTILITIES ...........................................................................................4-8
4.08 ABANDONMENT, REPAIR AND UPGRADE OF SERVICE LINES AND TAPS ...................4-8
(A) General ................................................................................................................................................4-8
(B) Abandonment ......................................................................................................................................4-8
(C) Witnessing ...........................................................................................................................................4-8
(D) Tap Upgrade ........................................................................................................................................4-8
(E) Water Services.....................................................................................................................................4-8
(F) Sewer Services ....................................................................................................................................4-9

CHAPTER 5
WATER DESIGN
5.01 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................5-1
(A) Intent ................................................................................................................................................5-1
(B) Water Utility Master Plan ................................................................................................................5-1
(C) Reference Standards ........................................................................................................................5-1
5.02 UTILITY REPORT ............................................................................................................................5-1
(A) Requirement.....................................................................................................................................5-1
(B) Report...............................................................................................................................................5-1
(C) Preliminary Plan ..............................................................................................................................5-2
(D) Connection and Isolation Plan .........................................................................................................5-2
5.03 WATER MAIN EXTENSIONS.........................................................................................................5-3
(A) Water Utility Master Plan ................................................................................................................5-3
(B) Main Extension Agreements............................................................................................................5-3
5.04 DESIGN FLOW ..................................................................................................................................5-3
(A) Water Distribution Mains ................................................................................................................5-3
(B) Water Services .................................................................................................................................5-4
5.05 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION .............................................................................................5-4
5.06 CORROSION PROTECTION ..........................................................................................................5-5
5.07 TRANSMISSION MAINS .................................................................................................................5-5
(A) Specifications...................................................................................................................................5-5
(B) Taps..................................................................................................................................................5-5
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-v
 (C) Valves ..............................................................................................................................................5-5
(D) Relief Valves....................................................................................................................................5-6
(E) Ground Water Barriers.....................................................................................................................5-6
5.08 DISTRIBUTION MAINS...................................................................................................................5-6
(A) Specifications...................................................................................................................................5-6
(B) Taps..................................................................................................................................................5-6
(C) Valves ..............................................................................................................................................5-7
(D) Looping and Terminal Mains ..........................................................................................................5-7
(E) Extensions........................................................................................................................................5-7
(F) Future Connections ..........................................................................................................................5-8
(G) Ground Water Barriers.....................................................................................................................5-8
5.09 WATER SERVICES ..........................................................................................................................5-8
(A) General.............................................................................................................................................5-8
(B) Domestic Services............................................................................................................................5-9
(C) Irrigation Services..........................................................................................................................5-10
5.10 FIRE PROTECTION .......................................................................................................................5-10
(A) Fire Hydrants .................................................................................................................................5-10
(B) Fire Sprinkler Lines .......................................................................................................................5-11
5.11 CROSS-CONNECTION REGULATIONS....................................................................................5-12
(A) Purpose...........................................................................................................................................5-12
(B) Additional Regulations ..................................................................................................................5-12
(C) General Requirements....................................................................................................................5-12
(D) Installation Required......................................................................................................................5-13
(E) Duty to Inspect, Test and Repair ...................................................................................................5-13
(F) Specifications.................................................................................................................................5-13
(G) Records and Reports ......................................................................................................................5-15
(H) Backflow Prevention Assemblies ..................................................................................................5-15
(I) Certified Tester Criteria .................................................................................................................5-15

CHAPTER 6
WASTEWATER DESIGN
6.01 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................6-1
(A) Intent....................................................................................................................................................6-1
(B) Wastewater Utility Master Plans .........................................................................................................6-1
(C) Reference Standards ............................................................................................................................6-1
6.02 UTILITY REPORT ............................................................................................................................6-1
(A) Requirement ........................................................................................................................................6-1
(B) Report ..................................................................................................................................................6-1
(C) Preliminary Plan ..................................................................................................................................6-2
6.03 WASTEWATER MAIN EXTENSIONS ..........................................................................................6-3
(A) Wastewater Utility Master Plan ..........................................................................................................6-3
(B) Main Extension Agreements ...............................................................................................................6-3
6.04 DESIGN FLOW ..................................................................................................................................6-4
(A) Wastewater Collection Mains .............................................................................................................6-4
T-vi DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (B) Wastewater Services............................................................................................................................6-5
6.05 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION .............................................................................................6-5
6.06 COLLECTION MAINS .....................................................................................................................6-5
(A) System Design .....................................................................................................................................6-5
(B) Size ......................................................................................................................................................6-5
(C) Locations .............................................................................................................................................6-5
(D) Depth ...................................................................................................................................................6-5
(E) Slope ....................................................................................................................................................6-6
(F) Alignment ............................................................................................................................................6-6
(G) Separations and Crossings...................................................................................................................6-6
(H) Taps .....................................................................................................................................................6-7
(I) Ground Water Barriers ........................................................................................................................6-7
(J) Extensions ...........................................................................................................................................6-7
6.07 MANHOLES .........................................................................................................................................6-7
(A) Location...............................................................................................................................................6-7
(B) Flow Channels .....................................................................................................................................6-8
(C) Drop Manholes ....................................................................................................................................6-8
(D) Maintenance Access ............................................................................................................................6-8
(E) Covers..................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.08 WASTEWATER SERVICES ............................................................................................................6-9
(A) General ................................................................................................................................................6-9
(B) Connections .......................................................................................................................................6-10
(C) Service Lines .....................................................................................................................................6-10

CHAPTER 7
STORMWATER DESIGN
7.01 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................7-1
(A) Intent ................................................................................................................................................7-1
(B) Comprehensive Flood and Stormwater and Greenways Master Plans ............................................7-1
(C) Reference Standards ........................................................................................................................7-1
(D) Floodplains.......................................................................................................................................7-1
(E) Stormwater Quality and Erosion Control ........................................................................................7-1
(F) Wetlands Protection.........................................................................................................................7-2
(G) Streets...............................................................................................................................................7-2
(H) Irrigation Ditches and Laterals ........................................................................................................7-2
(I) Multiple Functions of Major Drainageways....................................................................................7-2
(J) Definitions .......................................................................................................................................7-2
7.02 CONCEPTUAL DRAINAGE REPORT AND STORMWATER PLAN......................................7-4
(A) General.............................................................................................................................................7-4
(B) Conceptual Drainage Report............................................................................................................7-5
(C) Conceptual Stormwater Plan ...........................................................................................................7-5
7.03 PRELIMINARY DRAINAGE REPORT AND STORMWATER PLAN.....................................7-5
(A) General.............................................................................................................................................7-5
(B) Preliminary Drainage Report ...........................................................................................................7-5
(C) Preliminary Stormwater Plan...........................................................................................................7-8

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-vii

7.04 FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT AND STORMWATER PLAN .....................................................7-9
(A) General.............................................................................................................................................7-9
(B) Final Drainage Report......................................................................................................................7-9
(C) Final Stormwater Plan ...................................................................................................................7-11
(D) Stormwater Construction Plans and Drawings ..............................................................................7-11
7.05 HYDROLOGY..................................................................................................................................7-13
(A) General...........................................................................................................................................7-13
(B) Storm Frequency............................................................................................................................7-13
(C) Rainfall...........................................................................................................................................7-13
(D) Runoff ............................................................................................................................................7-13
7.06 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION ...........................................................................................7-13
7.07 OPEN DRAINAGEWAYS...............................................................................................................7-14
(A) General...........................................................................................................................................7-14
(B) Drainageway Types .......................................................................................................................7-14
(C) Drainageway Flow Computation ...................................................................................................7-16
(D) Drainageway Design Standards .....................................................................................................7-16
(E) Hydraulic Structures ......................................................................................................................7-19
7.08 STORM SEWERS ............................................................................................................................7-19
(A) System Design ...............................................................................................................................7-19
(B) Location .........................................................................................................................................7-19
(C) Depth..............................................................................................................................................7-20
(D) Size.................................................................................................................................................7-20
(E) Slope ..............................................................................................................................................7-20
(F) Alignment ......................................................................................................................................7-20
(G) Separations and Crossings .............................................................................................................7-20
(H) Taps................................................................................................................................................7-20
(I) Ground Water Barriers...................................................................................................................7-20
(J) Extensions......................................................................................................................................7-20
(K) Manholes........................................................................................................................................7-21
(L) Hydraulic Design ...........................................................................................................................7-21
7.09 INLETS..............................................................................................................................................7-21
(A) Specifications.................................................................................................................................7-21
7.10 STREET DRAINAGE ......................................................................................................................7-23
(A) Function of Streets in the Drainage System...................................................................................7-23
(B) Street Classification and Allowable Runoff Encroachment ..........................................................7-23
(C) Hydraulic Street Capacity..............................................................................................................7-23
(D) Cross Street Flow...........................................................................................................................7-24
7.11 CULVERTS.......................................................................................................................................7-24
(A) System Design ...............................................................................................................................7-24
(B) Hydraulic Design ...........................................................................................................................7-24
(C) Structural Design ...........................................................................................................................7-24
(D) Specifications.................................................................................................................................7-24
7.12 DETENTION.....................................................................................................................................7-26
(A) System Design ...............................................................................................................................7-26

T-viii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (B) Design Frequency, Hydraulic Design, and Storage Requirements................................................7-26
(C) Detention Pond Design ..................................................................................................................7-27
7.13 CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER MANAGEMENT..............................................................7-27
(A) Intent ..............................................................................................................................................7-27
(B) Stormwater Management Plan Requirements................................................................................7-28
(C) Inspection and Maintenance Requirements ...................................................................................7-31
7.14 LAND DEVELOPMENT PLANNING USING LID TECHNIQUES .........................................7-32
(A) Intent ..............................................................................................................................................7-32
(B) Requirements for All Developments .............................................................................................7-32
(C) LID Techniques .............................................................................................................................7-32
7.15 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER QUALITY REQUIREMENTS............................7-32
(A) Intent ..............................................................................................................................................7-32
(B) Applicable Development Sites.......................................................................................................7-33
(C) Requirements .................................................................................................................................7-35
7.16 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER QUALITY TREATMENT APPROACH ...........7-36
(A) Selection and Design of SCMs ......................................................................................................7-36
(B) Preliminary Infiltration Feasibility Screening ...............................................................................7-37
(C) Treatment Approach Selection ......................................................................................................7-39
(D) Treatment Approach Design Criteria.............................................................................................7-41
(E) Soil and Infiltration Test Requirements.........................................................................................7-43
7.17 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS ........................7-45
(A) General...........................................................................................................................................7-45
(B) Stormwater As-Built Drawings .....................................................................................................7-46
(C) Post-Construction Acceptance Inspection Required......................................................................7-46
(D) Vegetation Warranty Required ......................................................................................................7-47
7.18 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER QUALITY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................7-47
(A) Applicability ..................................................................................................................................7-47
(B) Inspection and Maintenance Requirements for SCMs ..................................................................7-47
(C) Inspection and Maintenance Guide................................................................................................7-48

CHAPTER 8
TRANSPORTATION STANDARDS
8.1 ADOPTION OF STANDARDS OF THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
(CDOT) WITH MODIFICATIONS 8-2
(A) Section 401, Plant Mix Pavements - General.................................................................................8-2
(B) Section 403, Hot Bituminous Pavement ........................................................................................8-3
(C) Section 608, Sidewalks and Multi-Use Paths ................................................................................8-4
(D) Section 610, Median Cover Material .............................................................................................8-4
(E) Section 703, Aggregates ................................................................................................................8-6
(F) Section 612, Delineators and Reflectors ........................................................................................8-6
(G) Section 614, Traffic Control Devices.............................................................................................8-6
(H) Section 627, Pavement Marking ....................................................................................................8-7
(I) Section 713, Traffic Control Materials ..........................................................................................8-7

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-ix

8.2 TRAFFIC SIGNALS ............................................................................................................................8-7
8.3 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STRIPING....................................................................................................8-8
(A) Required.........................................................................................................................................8-8
(B) Signing and Striping Plan ..............................................................................................................8-8
(C) Conformance with MUTCD ..........................................................................................................8-8
(D) Materials ........................................................................................................................................8-8
(E) Private Street Signs........................................................................................................................8-8
8.4 FIRE LANE SIGN SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................................................8-8
(A) Size .............................................................................................................................................................................8-8
(B) Material..........................................................................................................................................8-8
(C) Colors ..................................................................................................................................................8-8
(D) Wording .........................................................................................................................................8-8
8.5 SIGNING FOR HANDICAPPED PARKING....................................................................................8-9
(A) Materials ........................................................................................................................................8-9
(B) Required Signs...............................................................................................................................8-9
(C) Sign Placement ..............................................................................................................................8-9

CHAPTER 9
UTILITIES STANDARDS
9.01 GENERAL...........................................................................................................................................9-1
(A) Intent..................................................................................................................................................9-1
(B) Scope .................................................................................................................................................9-1
(C) Reference Standards ..........................................................................................................................9-1
(D) City Approval Required ....................................................................................................................9-1
9.02 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING................................................................................................9-1
(A) General ..............................................................................................................................................9-1
(B) Materials ............................................................................................................................................9-2
(C) Execution ...........................................................................................................................................9-4
9.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP) ..........................................................................................................9-10
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-10
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-10
(C) Thrust Restraint ...............................................................................................................................9-11
(D) Connections to the Existing System ................................................................................................9-12
(E) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-12
9.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE..................................................................9-14
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-14
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-14
(C) Thrust Restraint ...............................................................................................................................9-15
(D) Connections to the Existing System ................................................................................................9-17
(E) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-17
9.05 WATER SERVICES ........................................................................................................................9-19
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-19
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-19
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-23
T-x DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
9.06 GATE VALVES ................................................................................................................................9-24
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-24
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-24
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-25
9.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES...................................................................................................................9-26
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-26
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-26
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-27
9.08 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES.............................................................................................9-27
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-27
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-28
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-28
9.09 FIRE HYDRANTS............................................................................................................................9-29
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-29
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-29
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-30
9.10 COMBINATION AIR VALVE .......................................................................................................9-30
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-30
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-30
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-31
9.11 PIPELINE FITTINGS......................................................................................................................9-31
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-31
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-31
9.12 DISINFECTING WATERLINES ...................................................................................................9-32
(A) Scope ...............................................................................................................................................9-32
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-32
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-32
9.13 TESTING OF WATER PIPES........................................................................................................9-33
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-33
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-33
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-34
9.14 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) NON-PRESSURE PIPE........................................................9-35
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-35
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-35
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-36
9.15 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE................................................................................................9-38
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-38
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-39
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-40
9.16 MANHOLES AND INLETS............................................................................................................9-42
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-42
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-42
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-xi
 (C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-43
9.17 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWER PIPELINES AND MANHOLES.........................................9-44
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-44
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-44
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-44
(D) Sanitary Sewer Manholes ................................................................................................................9-46
9.18 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE......................................................................................................9-47
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-47
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-47
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-48
9.19 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP)...................................................................................................9-49
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-49
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-49
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-50
9.20 PIPE BURSTING NON-PRESSURE PIPE ...................................................................................9-52
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-52
(B) Materials ..........................................................................................................................................9-53
(C) Execution .........................................................................................................................................9-53
9.21 TELECOMMUNICATION OR CABLE SYSTEM STANDARDS ............................................9-53
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-53
(B) Underground Facilities ....................................................................................................................9-54
(C) Aboveground Facilities ...................................................................................................................9-55
9.22 ELECTRIC POWER FACILITY STANDARDS..........................................................................9-57
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-57
(B) Underground Facilities ....................................................................................................................9-57
(C) Aboveground Facilities ...................................................................................................................9-58
9.23 GAS DISTRIBUTION FACILITY STANDARDS........................................................................9-59
(A) General ............................................................................................................................................9-59
(B) Underground Facilities ....................................................................................................................9-59
(C) Testing Requirements ......................................................................................................................9-61
(D) Aboveground Facilities ...................................................................................................................9-61

CHAPTER 10
STREETSCAPING STANDARDS
10.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................................10-1
(A) Intent 10-1
(B) Scope 10-1
(C) Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................10-1
(D) City Approval Required.............................................................................................................10-1
(E) Water Conservation.................................................................................................................10-1
(F) Public Lands Other Than Public Rights-of-Way .......................................................................10-1
10.2 SITE PREPARATION.........................................................................................................................10-1
(A) Description ................................................................................................................................10-1
T-xii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (B) Materials ....................................................................................................................................10-1
(C) Construction Requirements .......................................................................................................10-2
10.3 PLANTING ...........................................................................................................................................10-5
(A) Description ................................................................................................................................10-5
(B) Materials ............................................................................................................................................10-5
(C) Construction Requirements .......................................................................................................10-8
10.4 SEEDING/SODDING.......................................................................................................................10-11
(A) Description...............................................................................................................................10-11
(B) Materials ..................................................................................................................................10-12
(C) Construction Requirements .....................................................................................................10-16
10.5 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM.............................................................................10-19
(A) Description...............................................................................................................................10-19
(B) Materials ..................................................................................................................................10-19
(C) Construction Requirements .....................................................................................................10-24

CHAPTER 11
TECHNICAL DRAWINGS

Drawing Title Drawing Number/Page

GENERAL DRAWINGS

Drafting Standards ............................................................................................................................................1.01

TRANSPORTATION DRAWINGS

Curb and Gutter .............................................................................................................................................2.01.A

Curb and Gutter Joints...................................................................................................................................2.01.B
Concrete Walk and Multi-Use Paths .............................................................................................................2.02.A
Integral Curbwalk ..........................................................................................................................................2.02.B
Concrete Walk and Multi-Use Path Joints ....................................................................................................2.02.C
Multi-Use Path Section Detail.......................................................................................................................2.02.D
Crosspan and Radii Curb Return Accesses .......................................................................................................2.03
Flagstone Walk..................................................................................................................................................2.05
Typical Alley Paving Section ...........................................................................................................................2.06
Attached Sidewalk Curb Ramp Options ..........................................................................................................2.07
Survey Monument Range Box ..........................................................................................................................2.11
Intersection Pin Range Box...............................................................................................................................2.12
Valve Box Adjustment......................................................................................................................................2.13
Driveway Ramp, Detached Walk......................................................................................................................2.21
Driveway Ramp, Curbwalk – CDOT Type 1................................................................................................2.22.A
Driveway Ramp, Curbwalk – CDOT Type 2 ................................................................................................2.22.B
Chase Drain, Curbwalk .....................................................................................................................................2.31
Chase Drain, Detached Sidewalk ......................................................................................................................2.32
Median, Paved Cover ........................................................................................................................................2.41
Median, Paved Curb Skirt .............................................................................................................................2.42 A
Median, Brick Curb Skirt ..............................................................................................................................2.42 B
Bicycle Path Cross-Section ...............................................................................................................................2.51

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-xiii

Inverted “U” Bicycle Racks ..........................................................................................................................2.52.A
Inverted “U” Bicycle Racks ..........................................................................................................................2.52.B
Accessible Parking Stall....................................................................................................................................2.54
Non-Residential Street Cross-Section Examples ..........................................................................................2.61 A
Non-Residential Street Cross-Section Examples ..........................................................................................2.61 B
Non-Residential Street Cross-Section Examples ..........................................................................................2.61 C
Residential Collector Cross-Section .................................................................................................................2.63
Residential Street Cross-Section .......................................................................................................................2.64
Rural Residential Street Cross-Section .............................................................................................................2.65
Residential Access Street Cross-Section...........................................................................................................2.66
Residential Access Lane Cross-Section ............................................................................................................2.67
Residential Alley Cross-Section .......................................................................................................................2.68
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement............................................................................................................2.71 A
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ............................................................................................................2.71 B
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ............................................................................................................2.71 C
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement............................................................................................................2.71 D
Straight Retaining Wall Expansion Joint ..........................................................................................................2.72
Sign Installation Details ....................................................................................................................................2.81
Accessible Parking Sign Details .......................................................................................................................2.86
Street Name Sign Mounting Details .................................................................................................................2.87

STREETSCAPE DRAWINGS

Streetscape Tree Spacing and Location ............................................................................................................3.01

Trees and Shrubs Planting Detail ......................................................................................................................3.02
Tree Grate for Sidewalk Planting......................................................................................................................3.03
Grade Change Around Existing Trees ..............................................................................................................3.04
Sample Landscape Protection Plan ...................................................................................................................3.11
Protected Root Zone and Drip Line ..................................................................................................................3.12
Root Loss from Tunnelling ...............................................................................................................................3.13
Irrigation Pressure Vacuum Breaker .................................................................................................................3.21
Irrigation Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly.............................................................................................3.22
Irrigation Pressure Reducing Valve ..................................................................................................................3.23
Irrigation Gate Valve.........................................................................................................................................3.24
Irrigation Drain Valve .......................................................................................................................................3.25
Irrigation Quick Coupling Valve ......................................................................................................................3.26
Irrigation Control Valve ....................................................................................................................................3.27
Irrigation Valve Assembly Spray......................................................................................................................3.28
Irrigation Drip Valve.........................................................................................................................................3.29
Irrigation Quick Coupler ...................................................................................................................................3.31
Irrigation Spray Head ........................................................................................................................................3.32
Irrigation Pop-Up Shrub Spray Head ................................................................................................................3.33
Irrigation Bubbler Detail ...................................................................................................................................3.34
Irrigation Fixed Head and Riser ........................................................................................................................3.35
Irrigation Rotary Head ......................................................................................................................................3.36
Irrigation Drip Details .......................................................................................................................................3.37
Irrigation Typical Trickle Fittings.....................................................................................................................3.38
Irrigation Trenching and Pipe Installation ........................................................................................................3.39
Irrigation System Thrust Blocks .......................................................................................................................3.40
Irrigation System Controller .............................................................................................................................3.41
Irrigation System Wire Connection ..................................................................................................................3.42

T-xiv DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 UTILITIES DRAWINGS

Utility Trenches, 16" Wide or Less...................................................................................................................4.01

Utility Trenches, Wider than 16" ......................................................................................................................4.02
Pipe Bedding .....................................................................................................................................................4.03
Restoration of Asphalt Street Excavations, Streets Less Than 3 Years Old .....................................................4.04
Telecommunications Conduit and Cable Encroachments in Public Right-of-way...........................................4.05
Concrete Encasement ........................................................................................................................................4.06
Stream Crossing ................................................................................................................................................4.07
Groundwater Barrier .........................................................................................................................................4.08
Pipe Casing With Casing Spacers .................................................................................................................4.09 A
Pipe Casing With Wood Skids ......................................................................................................................4.09 B

Water Line Lowering, Utility Line Crossing Only .......................................................................................5.01 A

Water Line Lowering, Culvert Crossing Only ..............................................................................................5.01 B
Water Line Lowering, Drainageway Crossing Only .....................................................................................5.01 C
Sewer Crossing..................................................................................................................................................5.02
Tie Rod Specifications ......................................................................................................................................5.03
Tie Rod and Washer Details .............................................................................................................................5.04
Tie Rod Coupling..............................................................................................................................................5.05
Flange Lug Detail..............................................................................................................................................5.06
Clamp Details for Use with Ductile Iron Pipe Only .........................................................................................5.07
Table of Dimensions for Clamps ..................................................................................................................5.07 A
Combination Flanged Harness Lug Details ......................................................................................................5.08
Mechanical Joint Restraint Details....................................................................................................................5.09
Buried Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Restraint for 12" and Smaller Pipe...................................................................5.10
Valve Box..........................................................................................................................................................5.11
Fire Hydrant Placement.....................................................................................................................................5.12
Fire Hydrant Installation, Types 1, 2, and 3......................................................................................................5.13
Horizontal Thrust Block....................................................................................................................................5.14
Vertical Thrust Block ........................................................................................................................................5.15
Standard 3/4"- 1" Service ..............................................................................................................................5.16 A
Standard Meter Pit, 3/4" - 1" Services...........................................................................................................5.16 B
Standard 1 1/2" - 2" Service ..........................................................................................................................5.17 A
Standard Meter Setting, 1 1/2" - 2" Services.................................................................................................5.17 B
Standard 1 1/2" - 2" Meter Setting ................................................................................................................5.17 C
Standard 1 1/2" - 2" Irrigation Service..........................................................................................................5.17 D
Large Meter in Precast Vault 3” or Larger....................................................................................................5.18 A
Large Meter in Precast Vault 6” or Larger ....................................................................................................5.18 B
Meter Pit Depth Adjustment, 3" and 4” Service ...........................................................................................5.18 D
Combination 3/4" Domestic/Fire Sprinkler Meter Setting ...............................................................................5.19
Combination 1" Domestic/Fire Sprinkler Meter Setting...................................................................................5.20
Valve Box, 1 1/2" - 2" Fire Sprinkler Line .......................................................................................................5.21
Standard Combination Air Valve Manhole.......................................................................................................5.22

Standard Sewer Manhole ..................................................................................................................................6.01

Standard Drop Sewer Manhole .........................................................................................................................6.02
Manhole Invert ..................................................................................................................................................6.03
Standard Manhole, Bolt-Down, Water-Tight, Frame and Cover......................................................................6.04
Extruded Aluminum Manhole Step...............................................................................................................6.05 A
Polypropylene Reinforced Plastic Manhole Step ..........................................................................................6.05 B
Sewer Service Line ...........................................................................................................................................6.06

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-xv

Storm Sewer Manhole.......................................................................................................................................7.01
Storm Sewer Manhole Base ..............................................................................................................................7.02
Flat Top for Shallow Manholes Less Than 6' in Height ...................................................................................7.03
Single No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ...............................................................................7.04 A
Single No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ...............................................................................7.04 B
Double No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box..............................................................................7.05 A
Double No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box..............................................................................7.05 B
Triple No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box................................................................................7.06 A
Triple No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box................................................................................7.06 B
No. 16 Grate and Frame, Adjustable Curb Box ................................................................................................7.07
Type “R” Curb Inlet ......................................................................................................................................7.08 A
Type “R” Curb Inlet ......................................................................................................................................7.08 B
Type “R” Curb Inlet ......................................................................................................................................7.08 C
Type “R” Curb Inlet ......................................................................................................................................7.08 D

GLOSSARY

REFERENCES

LIST OF TABLES
Number Page

CHAPTER 2
TRANSPORTATION DESIGN

Table 2-1: Access Spacing Requirements.................................................................................................2-10

Table 2-2: Access Design Specifications ..................................................................................................2-12
Table 2-3: Base Street Standard Components...........................................................................................2-15
Table 2-4: Base Alley Standard Components ...........................................................................................2-15
Table 2-5: Minimum Street Lane Widths..................................................................................................2-16
Table 2-6: Minimum Horizontal Street Curve Specifications ...................................................................2-16
Table 2-7: Minimum Street Spacing .........................................................................................................2-17
Table 2-8: Minimum Intersection Radii ....................................................................................................2-17
Table 2-9: Maximum Street Grades ..................................................................................................................2-19
Table 2-10: Vertical Curve Design Control ..............................................................................................2-19
Table 2-11: Median Width Design Standards ...........................................................................................2-20
Table 2-12: Minimum Sidewalk Widths .......................................................................................................2-21
Table 2-13: Residential Street Design Standards .....................................................................................2-25

CHAPTER 3
STREETSCAPE DESIGN AND TREE PROTECTION

Table 3-1: Approved Street Tree List for Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting Strips ................3-4
Table 3-2: Limitations on Individual Tree Species ....................................................................................3-5
Table 3-3: Tree Grates and Planting Pits Standards...................................................................................3-6
Table 3-4: Approved Street Tree List for Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits ....................3-7
T-xvi DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
Table 3-5: Approved Median Shrub List ...................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-6: Tree Characteristics ................................................................................................................3-15

CHAPTER 4
GENERAL UTILITIES DESIGN

Table 4-1: Utility Separation Requirements................................................................................................4-5

Table 4-2: Local Drainageways and Irrigation Ditches ...............................................................................4-6

CHAPTER 5
WATER DESIGN

Table 5-1: Peak Day Water Demands .........................................................................................................5-4

Table 5-2: Peak Hour Factors .....................................................................................................................5-4

CHAPTER 6
WASTEWATER DESIGN

Table 6-1: Average Day Load by Development Type ................................................................................6-4

Table 6-2: Factors for Forecasting Wastewater Discharges........................................................................6-5
Table 6-3: Minimum and Maximum Allowable Collection Main Slopes.....................................................6-6

CHAPTER 7
STORMWATER DESIGN

Table 7-1: Design Storm Frequencies........................................................................................................7-16

Table 7-2: Manning’s “n” for Storm Sewers .............................................................................................7-23
Table 7-3: Required Manhole Sizes............................................................................................................7-25
Table 7-4: Standard Inlets ..........................................................................................................................7-26
Table 7-5: Allowable Street Drainage Encroachment................................................................................7-27
Table 7-6: Allowable Cross Street Flow.....................................................................................................7-28
Table 7-7: Treatment Approach Selection Criteria....................................................................................7-44
Table 7-8: Required Inspection Frequency by SCM Type ........................................................................7-51

CHAPTER 8
TRANSPORTATION STANDARDS

Table 8-1: Marshall Method by Street Classification ..................................................................................8-3

Table 8-2: Hot Bituminous Pavement Design Mix.......................................................................................8-4
Table 8-3: Minimum Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA).....................................................................8-4

CHAPTER 9
UTILITIES STANDARDS

Table 9-1: Granular Bedding Material .........................................................................................................9-5

Table 9-2: Flowable Fill Requirements ........................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-3: Tube Size and Sheet Width for Pipe Diameter...........................................................................9-14
Table 9-4: Ductile-Iron Pipe Deflection......................................................................................................9-16
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS T-xvii
Table 9-5: Pipe Laying ...................................................................................................................................9-21
Table 9-6: Required Manhole Diameters...................................................................................................9-41
Table 9-7: Specifications for Air Testing of Sanitary Sewer Pipes............................................................9-46
Table 9-8: Corrugated Base Metal Specifications .....................................................................................9-48

CHAPTER 10
STREETSCAPING STANDARDS

Table 10-1: Topsoil Mechanical Analysis ................................................................................................10-2

Table 10-2: Minimum Root Ball Sizes ................................................................................................................10-7
Table 10-3: Wildflowers..................................................................................................................................10-14
Table 10-4: Grasses.................................................................................................................................10-15
Table 10-5: Soil Amendment Mix Mechanical Analysis ........................................................................10-15

LIST OF FIGURES
Number Page

CHAPTER 7
STORM WATER DESIGN

Figure 7-1: Water Quality Treatment Approach Hierarchy ......................................................................7-40

T-xviii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 CITY OF BOULDER

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

INTRODUCTION
(A) INTRODUCTION
The City of Boulder Design and Construction Standards (DCS) were developed to regulate the design and
construction of public infrastructure, improvements and landscaping in the city’s public rights-of-way and
public easements. The DCS was originally adopted on July 2, 1998 to replace the Design Criteria and
Standard Specifications adopted in July 1982. The November 16, 2000 update replaced the July 2, 1998
manual and addressed changes in engineering practices, construction technology, and city review
processes. The update also attempts to clarify sections that have been identified as unclear or in error by
users of the manual. Updates to chapters 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 and 11 and the Glossary and References were
adopted on May 21, 2019. These updates were related to utilities infrastructure and to comply with
requirements of the city’s State of Colorado Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) permit.

The DCS prescribe minimum standards to be used in the design and construction of public infrastructure
located in public rights-of-way and public easements in the City of Boulder, and the design of private
transportation and utility improvements, such as driveway cuts, utility services and onsite drainage
systems, which are connected to or impact public infrastructure. The standards in the DCS are intended
to provide for the public health, safety and welfare by ensuring the comprehensive design and
construction of adequate and functional public improvements associated with developing, redeveloping
and subdividing lands and providing necessary right-of-way, transportation and utility services. The DCS
requirements reflect accepted and well-founded civil engineering practices, construction industry
specifications and conformance with national safety standards and are consistent with current city
ordinances, standards, policies and practices.

(B) DCS ADOPTION

The updated DCS was adopted at second reading by City Council on October 17, 2000, with the passage
of City of Boulder Ordinance No. 7088. The May 2019 updated DCS was adopted at second reading by
City Council on May 21, 2019, with the passage of City of Boulder Ordinance No. 8324.

Information regarding the adoption of Ordinance No. 7088 can be reviewed at the City of Boulder Central
Records Office as part of the Planning Board agenda materials for September 7, 2000 and the City
Council agenda materials for October 3, 2000 and October 17, 2000.

Information regarding the adoption of Ordinance No. 8324 can be reviewed at the City of Boulder Central
Records Office as part of the Planning Board agenda materials for April 18, 2019 and the City Council
agenda materials for May 7, 2019 and May 21, 2019.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.01 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT .............................................................................................................................................................1
(B) SCOPE ..............................................................................................................................................................1
(C) MINIMUM STANDARDS .....................................................................................................................................1
(D) TERMINOLOGY .................................................................................................................................................1
1.02 DESCRIPTION AND USE OF THESE STANDARDS .............................................................................2
(A) USING THESE STANDARDS ................................................................................................................................2
(B) RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................2
(C) PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS DESIGN ......................................................................................................................2
(D) CONSTRUCTION APPROVALS ............................................................................................................................2
(E) PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS CONSTRUCTION ..........................................................................................................3
(F) STANDARDS .....................................................................................................................................................3
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION APPROVAL ..............................................4
(A) DOCUMENTATION.............................................................................................................................................4
(B) ENGINEERING REPORTS ....................................................................................................................................5
(C) RIGHTS-OF-WAY AND EASEMENT DEDICATIONS, PERMITS, AND AGREEMENTS................................................6
(D) CONSTRUCTION PLANS .....................................................................................................................................6
(E) PLAN AND PROFILE DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................................10
(F) SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND DRAWINGS ........................................................13
(G) AS-BUILT DRAWINGS .....................................................................................................................................14
(H) SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ....................................................................................14
1.04 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................................15
(A) USE ................................................................................................................................................................15
(B) APPROVAL......................................................................................................................................................15
(C) PROOF OF CLAIMS ..........................................................................................................................................15
1.05 ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS, AND WAIVERS ........................................................................15
(A) PRACTICAL DIFFICULTIES ...............................................................................................................................15
(B) CRITERIA ........................................................................................................................................................15
(C) APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................16
(D) DECISION........................................................................................................................................................16

Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-i

1.01 General

(A) Intent
The Design and Construction Standards (“Standards”) are intended to protect the public health,
safety, and welfare in the provision and maintenance of public improvements within the City of
Boulder “City”). These Standards apply to the comprehensive design and construction of adequate
and functional public improvements associated with developing, redeveloping and subdividing
lands and providing necessary right-of-way, transportation, and utility services.

(B) Scope
The City will review, approve, and monitor the design and construction of all public improvements
within the public right-of-way or public easements to ensure compliance with these Standards.
The City has the sole authority for approving, accepting, or denying the design and construction of
any public improvement.

(C) Minimum Standards

(1) These Standards prescribe minimum requirements that shall be met or exceeded when
designing and constructing all public improvements. Whenever the requirements of these
Standards are found to be inconsistent with any other adopted standards, regulations, or
codes, the more restrictive standards, regulations, or codes shall control. Reference to any
code, regulation, standard, criterion, or manual of any technical society, organization, or
association, or to any law or regulation of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the most recently adopted or current
law, code, regulation, standard, criterion, or manual in effect at the time of City approval
of any project.
(2) The design of all public improvements shall be prepared by or under the direct supervision
of a professional Engineer duly registered and licensed in the State of Colorado. The
construction of all public improvements shall be performed in a professional and
workmanlike manner by a contractor licensed by the City as set forth in Chapters 4-6,
“Contractor in the Public Right of Way License,” and 8-5, “Work in the Public Right-of-
Way and Public Easements,” Boulder Revised Code, 1981. The City assumes no
responsibility for supervising or directing construction activities performed by a licensed
contractor.
(3) All materials and equipment used for public improvements shall be of new and good
quality. Recycled materials and equipment may be used if they meet the quality standards
and conditions equivalent to new materials and equipment. All materials and equipment
shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in
accordance with the instructions of the applicable supplier or manufacturer, except as
otherwise prescribed.

(D) Terminology
Terms, words, and abbreviations used in these Standards are defined in the Glossary (Appendix
B).
Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-1
1.02 Description and Use of These Standards

(A) Using these Standards

(1) These Standards are to be used when designing and constructing all public improvements
and infrastructure within the City. For the purposes of this document, public
improvements and infrastructure include without limitation: streets, sidewalks, trails, curb
and gutter, curb cuts, streetscaping, water mains, fire hydrants, water services and meters,
wastewater mains and services, manholes, stormwater mains, inlets, drainage swales and
channels, and other improvements intended for public purposes or for the benefit of the
community located within dedicated public rights-of-way and public easements.
(2) These Standards also provide design and construction requirements to be used when
developing private lands that create an impact on public rights-of-way and public
easements. The required private improvements associated with property development
include without limitation: traffic mitigation, site access and driveway design, stormwater
site drainage and detention ponding improvements, and stormwater quality and erosion
control measures.

(B) Restrictions
The descriptions in this Chapter provide the reader with a general guide to using these Standards.
Nothing in this Chapter is intended to be a substitute for the requirements, criteria, and procedures
contained in these Standards.

(C) Public Improvements Design

(1) These Standards prescribe minimum requirements and specifications for designing
adequate and functional public improvements. However, the design of public
improvements also depends on the land use zoning and comprehensive planning
requirements for the City, as well as the specific site geography of the land to be improved
or developed.
(2) The City review for approval of submitted design plans for public improvements occurs as
part of the development review process that distributes design applications to staff in
multiple departments, divisions, and agencies. The Department of Public Works
development review staff has the primary responsibility for the review and approval of
construction plans for public improvements. An applicant for construction approval
would be well advised to consult with the Department of Public Work’s development
review staff prior to submitting designs for public improvements.

(D) Construction Approvals

(1) An applicant seeking approval to construct public improvements in the City will need to
develop engineering designs and construction plans that comply with the design and
construction standards provided in this manual. In addition to complying with these
Standards, an applicant will need to file the necessary applications and meet the
requirements of the City’s land use regulations, permit standards, and fee assessments as
prescribed in the Boulder Revised Code (B.R.C.), 1981.
(2) An applicant seeking construction approval will need to consult local master plans and the
1-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 location of existing public infrastructure to develop specific project designs.
(3) In order to develop project designs that comply with these Standards, an applicant for
construction approval will need to enlist the services of a professional civil Engineer and
professional land surveyor to meet the requirements for certifying acceptable designs for
public improvements. An applicant may consult local directories for listings of
professional engineering and surveying service providers.

(E) Public Improvements Construction

(1) Right-of-Way Permit: The construction of public improvements in the City public rights-
of-way and public easements requires a right-of-way permit, as set forth in Chapter 8-5,
“Work in the Public Right-of-Way and Public Easements,” B.R.C., 1981. An applicant
for construction approval will need to enlist the services of a contractor licensed with the
City, as set forth in Chapter 4-6, “Contractor in the Public Way License,” B.R.C. 1981, in
order to obtain a permit to construct public improvements.
(2) Variances
(a) When practical difficulties are involved in meeting the provisions of these
Standards, the Director of Public Works (“Director”) may alter, modify, or waive
the strict application of these Standards to allow for the reasonable use of land or
accommodate special circumstances peculiar to such land as set forth in Section
1.04, “Alternate Materials and Methods of Construction,” and Section 1.05,
“Alterations, Modifications, and Waivers,” of these Standards.
(b) Alterations, modifications, or waivers are intended only for the special purposes
described, and are not to be routinely considered or approved. Where it is
necessary to vary from these Standards, an applicant for construction approval
must clearly demonstrate that the provisions of these Standards cannot be met and
the alteration, modification, or waiver will create the minimum variance necessary
to accomplish the intended purpose.

(F) Standards
(1) Transportation: The transportation standards prescribed in Chapter 2, “Transportation
Design,” and Chapter 8, “Transportation Standards,” provide for the study, design, and
construction of site accesses, streets, sidewalks, bicycle facilities, and trails. A traffic
impact study may be required as part of construction approvals to demonstrate adequate
design and mitigation for traffic impacts associated with new streets and driveways.
(2) Streetscapes: The streetscape standards prescribed in Chapter 3, “Streetscape Design and
Tree Protection,” and Chapter 10, “Streetscaping Standards,” provide for the selection,
design, placement, and protection of trees and landscaping along public streets throughout
the community. The City places high value on and strongly encourages the use of
streetscapes as a means to calm automobile traffic, address environmental concerns for
clean air and water quality, and enhance neighborhood qualities. General criteria are also
included related to subsurface work impacting transportation infrastructure.
(3) Water and Wastewater Utilities: The utility standards prescribed in Chapter 4, “General
Utilities Design,” Chapter 5, “Water Design,” Chapter 6, “Wastewater Design,” and
Chapter 9, “Utilities Standards,” provide for the study, design, and construction of water
Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-3
 and wastewater service facilities. These Standards detail required forecasting for sizing
water distribution and wastewater collection mains, specific construction requirements for
ensuring public health standards, and requirements for installing domestic water and sewer
service lines.
(4) Stormwater: The stormwater standards prescribed in Chapter 7, “Stormwater Design,”
and Chapter 9, “Utilities Standards,” provide for the study, design, and construction of
stormwater drainage, stormwater quality and flood control improvements. Detention
ponding, storm sewer and drainageway systems, stormwater quality, and erosion control
measures may be required as part of construction approval to mitigate the impacts of
increased runoff resulting from land development and to comply with the city’s Phase II
Municipal Separate Stormwater System Permit.
(5) Technical Drawings: The standards for construction detail drawings prescribed in
Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” provide design requirements for specific construction
features associated with the general construction of public improvements and
infrastructure. These drawings are intended to supplement the design and approval of
construction plans and ensure consistency in project construction to promote long-term
dependability and maintenance of public improvements and infrastructure.

1.03 Submittal Requirements for Construction Approval

(A) Documentation
(1) An applicant for construction approval shall submit required engineering reports, rights-
of-way and easement dedications, ancillary permits and agreements, and construction
plans in compliance with these Standards. Construction approvals are subject to the
Director’s review, approval, and acceptance.
(2) Prior to approving construction plans, the Director may require an applicant to submit the
following documentation:
(a) Engineering reports
(b) Rights-of-way and easement dedications
(c) Permits and agreements
(d) Financial guarantees
(3) Prior to issuing a right-of-way permit or building permit, the Director may require an
applicant to submit the following documentation:
(a) Documents listed in Section 1.03, Paragraph (A)(1), above
(b) Construction plans
(c) City land use approvals
(d) Financial guarantees
(e) Documents required by Section 8-5-4, “Permit Application,” B.R.C., 1981.
(4) Prior to the final acceptance of public improvements, the Director may require an
applicant to submit the following documentation:

1-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (a) Documents listed in Section 1.03, Paragraphs (A)(1) and (A)(2), above
(b) As-built drawings
(c) Testing results
(d) Inspection approvals
(e) Financial guarantees and warranties

(B) Engineering Reports

(1) Engineering reports required for construction approval shall be prepared as follows:
(a) In compliance with these Standards.
(b) Under the direct supervision of the Engineer certified as an expert in areas
covered in the report, and it shall be signed, sealed, and dated by the Engineer.
(c) Containing adequate information to evaluate submitted findings and designs,
including calculations, details, and references.
(2) Engineering reports required for construction approval may include the following:
(a) Geotechnical Soils Report, which provides geotechnical conditions and design
requirements based on soils investigation and testing and geologic site conditions
in compliance with standard engineering practices for soil mechanics and
groundwater analysis.
(b) Pavement Design Report, which provides geotechnical soils conditions and
adequate pavement design requirements and structural cross-sections for roadway,
sidewalks, trails, and parking lot construction. Pavement design shall be in
accordance with CDOT standards.
(c) Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan, which addresses stormwater conditions,
impacts, and design requirements in compliance with Section 7.04, “Final
Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan.”
(d) Utility Report, which addresses water and wastewater utilities service impacts,
demands, and design requirements in compliance with Sections 5.02, “Utility
Report,” and 6.02, “Utility Report.”
(e) Traffic Study, which identifies traffic impacts from proposed developments or
roadway modifications and proposes transportation design requirements and
mitigation measures in compliance with Section 2.02, “Traffic Study.”
(3) The Engineer shall be responsible for correcting any error or omission in the engineering
report. City approval of the report in no way relieves the Engineer of any responsibility for
errors or omissions in the report.
(4) An applicant for construction approval shall submit at least three copies of any required
engineering report to the Director for review and approval. If acceptable, a City approval
stamp signed and dated by the Director will be placed on each copy of the report. The
City will retain one copy as a record set, one copy as a field copy for construction
inspection, and one copy will be returned to the applicant.
(5) Engineering report approval expires 1 year following the date of approval, unless
Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-5
 construction of improvements under the report has been initiated.

(C) Rights-of-Way and Easement Dedications, Permits, and Agreements

(1) Rights-of-way and easements required for construction approval shall be described by a
licensed professional land surveyor registered in the State of Colorado and dedicated as
follows:
(a) In compliance with these Standards; and
(b) By subdivision platting or by a separate legal instrument that describes a specific
legal description of the dedication.
(2) Agreements required for construction approval shall be executed and may include without
limitation:
(a) Development agreement
(b) Public improvements agreement
(c) Public improvements extensions agreement
(d) Subdivision agreement
(e) Utility oversizing reimbursement agreement
(3) Permits required for construction approval shall be of approved and issued status and may
include without limitation:
(a) City of Boulder floodplain development permit
(b) City of Boulder right-of-way construction permit
(c) City of Boulder revocable right-of-way permit
(d) City of Boulder wetland permit
(e) City of Boulder erosion control permit
(f) Colorado Department of Transportation access permit
(g) Colorado Department of Transportation utility permit
(h) Railroad right-of-way encroachment permit
(i) State of Colorado Public Health and Environment Department 401 permit
(j) State of Colorado general permit for stormwater discharges associated with
construction activities
(k) United States Corps of Engineers 404 permit

(D) Construction Plans

(1) Preparation Standards: Construction plans required for construction approval shall be
prepared as follows:
(a) In compliance with these Standards;
(b) Under the direct supervision of the Engineer certified as an expert in areas
covered in the report, and it shall be signed, sealed, and dated by the Engineer;
1-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 and
(c) With adequate information and detail to evaluate submitted designs and ensure
accurate and functional construction of public improvements.
(2) Drafting Standards: All construction plans shall meet the following minimum drafting
standards to ensure legibility and consistency; to facilitate review, construction, and public
inspection; and to provide a clear public record.
(a) Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic, computer-aided
design and drafting (CADD) formats to allow information to be transferred to the
City’s geographic information system and facilitate clear microfilming or digital
scanning.
(b) Electronic drawing format, or electronic CADD files, shall be in “.DXF” or
“AutoCad.DWG” format on computer media specified by the Director of Public
Works. Construction plan drawings are to be layered in electronic CADD format
by improvement type in a manner acceptable to the Director of Public Works.
Separate layers shall be provided for individual improvement categories including
without limitation base mapping, transportation, landscaping, water, wastewater,
and stormwater.
(c) Hard-copy drawing format shall measure 24 inches by 36 inches and be clean,
clear, and free from objectionable background.
(d) Symbols and line types shall comply with Technical Drawing 1.01 in Chapter 11,
“Drafting Standards,” and shall graphically distinguish between existing and
proposed items.
(e) All drawings are to be numbered in consecutive order.
(f) Abbreviations reflected on the construction plans are to correspond to those
presented in the Glossary.
(g) No hand-drawn or adhesively attached information, such as Kroy lettering,
adhesive backed reproductive film, or tape, may be placed on construction plans.
(3) Cover Sheet: Construction plans required for obtaining construction approval shall
include a cover sheet with the following elements:
(a) Project name, with legal description of the project parcel;
(b) Vicinity map, on a scale reflecting the location of the project and all streets within
1 mile of the project;
(c) Key map, on drawing sets of three sheets or more, of a scale reflecting the entire
project, separate drawing numbers, and street names;
(d) Index of drawings presenting the title of each drawing and drawing number; and
(e) The following standard construction notes:
(i) “All work shall be performed in accordance with the “Design and
Construction Standards” of the City of Boulder, and shall be completed to
the satisfaction of the Director of Public Works. In the event that a design
element does not reflect City standards, the matter must be immediately
brought to the attention of the Engineer and the Director of Public Works.
Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-7
 The Engineer shall be responsible for recommending a solution or
alternative solutions to the City for review and approval.”
(ii) “The approval of a Construction Plan does not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility of constructing workable public improvements. All
revisions and/or corrections required will be solely the Contractor's
responsibility, and at their expense.”
(iii) “These Plans have been checked by the City of Boulder only for
conformance with the “Design and Construction Standards,” compliance
with development agreement conditions, and for general conceptual
approval of public improvements as shown. The City’s review does not
verify or ensure the accuracy of existing or proposed dimensions, lines,
coordinates, or grades shown, including all existing utilities shown or not
shown.”
(iv) “Utility locations shown reflect available record data. The Contractor
shall take precautionary measures to protect all utility lines shown and
other utility lines otherwise located. The Contractor shall contact the
“Utility Notification Center of Colorado” at 1-800-922-1987 or 811 for
utility locates 24 hours prior to beginning construction.”
(v) “Before work begins, the Contractor shall obtain a permit to work in the
right-of-way from the City and must notify the City Right-of-Way
Inspection staff at least 24 hours in advance of commencing construction
activities.”
(vi) “The Contractor shall obtain and maintain a complete and approved set of
Construction Plans. These drawings, and any required permits, shall be
available at the project site at all times and shall be made available to City
staff upon request. If construction plans are not readily available at the
project site, the Director of Public Works may issue a stop work order and
halt all construction activities pending compliance by the Contractor.”
(vii) “The Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of the Traffic
Control Plan and the current edition of the “Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices,” “Temporary Traffic Control” section, for construction
signage and traffic control.”
(viii) “All surplus materials, tools, and temporary structures, furnished by the
Contractor, shall be removed from the project site by the Contractor. All
debris and rubbish caused by the operations of the Contractor shall be
removed, and the area occupied during construction activities shall be
restored to its original condition, within 48 hours of project completion,
unless otherwise directed by the Director of Public Works.”
(ix) “The Contractor shall provide tree and landscape protection as set forth in
Chapter 6-6, “Protection of Trees and Plants,” Boulder Revised Code
(B.R.C.) 1981 and the City of Boulder Design and Construction
Standards (DCS). All landscaping shall be provided and maintained in
compliance with the approved Landscaping Plan, B.R.C. and DCS.”
(x) “The Contractor is required to provide and maintain erosion and sediment
control measures in accordance with the Urban Drainage and Flood
1-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 Control District “Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual Volume 3”, the
M-Standard Plans of the Colorado Department of Transportation, and the
approved stormwater management plan. The Director of Public Works
may require the contractor to provide additional erosion control measures
due to unforeseen erosion problems or if the plans do not function as
intended.”
(xi) "The City of Boulder requires that sidewalks constructed have a cross
slope of less than 2%. Sidewalks shall be designed and constructed with
cross slopes sufficiently less than 2% to ensure that they do not exceed
the 2% maximum."
(4) Plan Sheets: Construction plans required for construction approval may include without
limitation the following plan sheets:
(a) Stormwater Management Plan, prepared in compliance with Subsection 7.13,
“Construction Stormwater Management.”
(b) Utility Plan, prepared in compliance with Section 4.03, “Utility Plan.”
(c) Final Stormwater Plan, prepared in compliance with Section 7.04, “Final
Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan.”
(d) Traffic Control Plan, when construction plans have an impact on existing
transportation facilities, such as utility or access construction within existing
public streets, sidewalks, or trails. The plan is to be prepared in compliance with
Section 8.04, “Temporary Traffic Control Plan,” of these Standards, the current
edition of the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,” “Temporary Traffic
Control” section and as set forth in Section 8-5-10, “Temporary Traffic Control,”
B.R.C., 1981. Plans shall include adequate provision for the detour of vehicular,
bicycle, and pedestrian traffic.
(e) Transportation Striping and Signage Plan, when construction plans include
transportation traffic control measures, such as stop signs, centerline striping, and
trail signage. The plan is to be prepared in compliance with the current edition of
the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,” and should include the
following standard construction notes:
(i) Contact the City of Boulder Sign Shop (303-413-7122) for location of all
signs prior to installation and for sign layout/details prior to ordering.
(ii) All sign sheeting to be Class XI (DG3 material) with 3M 1150 overlay
film.
(iii) All signs shall be 0.100 gauge aluminum.
(iv) All sign posts to be 12 gauge 2 inch unistrut.
(v) All sign bases to be 12 gauge 2-1/4 inch unistrut.
(vi) Sign post lengths will vary, but 7 foot minimum clearance from bottom of
sign to ground level is required.
(vii) All sign mount hardware to be Gator Lock System.
(f) Construction Phasing Plan, when projects are planned to be constructed in phases.
The plan is to illustrate the entire project site and delineate and label each separate
phase.
(g) Landscaping Plan, when construction plans include streetscaping improvements
Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-9
 or landscaping that has an impact on public rights-of-way or public easements.
The plan is to be prepared in compliance with Subsection 3.02, “Landscaping
Plan.”
(5) Survey Information: Construction plans shall refer horizontally to the Colorado State
Plane Coordinate System NAD83, and are to include at least two horizontal and two
vertical control points presenting appropriate x, y, and z coordinates. Electronic base map
and survey control monument information is available from the City and should be used as
a basis for construction plan drawings.
(a) Horizontal control monuments reflected on drawing sheets and survey lines are to
correspond to City-recognized horizontal control points. Horizontal locations for
design features are to be presented in terms of survey line stationing and offset or
x, y coordinates.
(b) Vertical elevation control points reflected on drawing sheets are to be tied to City-
recognized benchmarks with reference to the City’s vertical control network.
Vertical elevations for design features are to be presented as a z coordinate.

(E) Plan and Profile Drawings

(1) Required Elements: Plan and profile drawings are required as part of the construction
plan to ensure accurate and functional construction by the contractor when the
construction is for public improvements. Plan and profile drawings are to be prepared on
standard engineering plan and profile grid sheets and shall contain the following elements:
(a) Drawing border at least one-half inch from all edges of the drawing;
(b) Title block located inside the border in the lower portion of the sheet that includes
the following information:
(i) Project name, location, and sheet title;
(ii) Name, address, and telecommunication numbers of the engineering
consultant preparing the drawing, and the name of the supervising
professional Engineer;
(iii) Date designed, drawn, surveyed, and checked;
(iv) Date prepared, and dates of all revisions;
(v) Drawing number and total number of drawings; and
(vi) Name of electronic file;
(c) North orientation arrow and scale;
(d) Certification space: a 2-inch by 2-inch space near the title block reserved for the
seal and signature of the Engineer;
(e) Approval space: a 3-inch by 3-inch space in the lower-right corner of each
drawing sheet reserved for the City’s approval stamp;
(f) Revisions information space: space for noting all revisions, separate from the
original plan preparation date, that includes revision numbers, a brief description
of what was revised, and the date of the revision;

1-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (g) Survey information;
(h) Property boundaries, lot lines, public rights-of-way, and public easements, which
are to be clearly labeled by type and dimension. Dedications previously recorded
are to be referenced by applicable film and reception numbers;
(i) Subdivision block, and lot numbering; and
(j) Street names.
(2) Plan Drawing: The “plan view” is to be located on the upper half of the drawing sheet
and drawn to a scale of 1 inch equals 20 feet. This view contains the following
information:
(a) Existing and proposed public improvements and structures, including without
limitation all grading, transportation, landscaping, City-operated and non-City-
operated public utilities (including telephone, gas, electric, cable television, fiber
optics), irrigation ditches, and other significant features.
(b) Match lines connecting information between drawings.
(c) Utility information required in Section 4.03, “Utility Plan,” and the following:
(i) Pipe type, size, class and joint restraint.
(ii) Separation distance between existing and proposed water and wastewater
mains and services, with horizontal and vertical location of sewer
crossings requiring special construction.
(iii) Angles at alignment changes.
(iv) Horizontal and vertical locations and sizing of water service lines and
meters with ties to property lines.
(v) Horizontal and vertical locations, sizing, and types of valves, fittings,
control devices, and fire hydrants.
(vi) Horizontal and vertical locations and sizing of manholes, cleanouts, and
service lines for sanitary sewers.
(vii) Horizontal locations of soil borings.
(viii) Horizontal locations of structures.
(d) Stormwater information required in Section 7.04, “Final Drainage Report and
Stormwater Plan,” and the following:
(i) Existing and proposed contours of at least 2-foot intervals.
(ii) Existing and proposed storm drainage facilities and details, including
storm sewers, inlets, manholes, culverts, swales, detention ponds and
drainageways.
(iii) Horizontal and vertical locations and sizing of manholes and inlets for
storm drainage.
(iv) Horizontal and vertical location of existing and proposed drainage outfall
points.

Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-11

 (e) Survey, transportation, and surface improvements information including without
limitation:
(i) Survey lines and stations based on center line or flowline stationing, and
equated to flowline at bubbles, cul-de-sacs, horizontal curves, and other
departures from normal street cross sections.
(ii) Stations and elevations of flowlines at all existing and proposed curb
returns, such as horizontal points of curvature (PC’s), points of tangency
(PT’s), and points of compound curvature (PCC’s); at the high or low
point on all vertical curves; at inlets (including invert); and at intervals of
no more than 50 feet along the streets.
(iii) Existing and proposed curb return radii.
(iv) Handicap access ramps.
(v) Complete horizontal curve data: radius (R), delta (D), arc length (L), and
tangent length (T).
(vi) All crown lines, where they depart from the normal cross sections
(transitions to existing roadways), with appropriate transition starting
elevation.
(vii) Centerline stations at all intersecting streets.
(viii) Stations of drainage facilities, including inlets, manholes, and storm
water outfalls, and directional drainage flow arrows.
(ix) Full width of right-of-way, intersecting roadways, street cross sections,
sidewalks and trails, existing curb cuts, and other relevant features along
all roadways abutting the project.
(x) Traffic control devices, including striping, markings, signage, and signals.
(3) Profile Drawing: The “profile view” is to be located directly below the plan view along a
matching survey line and stationing and is to be drawn at a horizontal scale of 1 inch
equals 20 feet and a vertical scale of 1 inch equals 5 feet. This view shall contain the
following information:
(a) Original and proposed ground elevations.
(b) Stationing sequence, left to right.
(c) Elevations labeled on both left and right sides of the drawing sheet.
(d) Match lines.
(e) Elevations based on center line, flow line, or invert of pipe. (Top of pipe is
acceptable only for existing utilities.)
(f) Stations and elevations of existing and proposed grade breaks.
(g) Crossings of existing and proposed utilities.
(h) Elevations of manhole inverts and rims, and service line inverts.
(i) Elevations of inlets, top of curb, flowline, inverts, and connection locations.

1-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (j) Slopes or grades of wastewater and stormwater sewers.
(k) Existing and proposed finished grades over utilities.
(l) Street profiles, including:
(i) Stations and elevations of existing and proposed horizontal PC, PT, PCC,
PRC.
(ii) Vertical curves with VPI, VPC, VPT, high point or low point (not middle
ordinate) stations and elevations.
(iii) Center line stations of all intersecting streets.
(iv) Grades for all profiles.
(v) Curb flowlines at 25-foot minimum intervals, and at all vertical sags or
crests.
(vi) Curb return profiles to ensure positive drainage at ramp locations.
(4) Detail Drawings: Detail drawings are required for construction details not provided in
Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings.” Detail drawings illustrate construction details for
critical design features such as concrete paving sections, mechanical pipeline connections,
and detention ponding release structures. Detail drawings are to include dimensioning,
materials, specifications, and specific construction notes appropriate to each construction
detail.
(5) Cross-Sectional Drawings: These drawings are required with all construction plans that
include varying or transitional features, such as street sections, fill slopes, and drainage
channels. Cross-Sectional drawings reflect dimensions, elevations, stationing, and any
other detailed information necessary to ensure accurate construction.

(F) Submittal and Approval of Construction Plans and Drawings

(1) Submittal: An applicant for construction approval shall submit at least three drawing sets
of any required construction plans to the Director for review and approval, including:
(a) Original black-lined drawing set prepared by the Engineer to be stamped and
approved by the City and returned to the Engineer
(b) 2 Sets of black-lined prints drawing set signed, sealed, and dated on each drawing
sheet by the Engineer to be maintained on file with the City as the record set of
the construction plan approval documents and for use by the City right-of-way
inspector.
(2) Approval: The Director will review construction plans for compliance with these
Standards. If acceptable, a City approval stamp signed and dated by the Director will be
placed on each drawing sheet of the construction plans.
(3) Effective Period: Construction plan approval expires 1 year following the date of
approval, unless construction has been initiated. An applicant for construction approval
may resubmit the construction plan for reapproval, subject to review for compliance with
standards in effect at the time of resubmittal.
(4) Errors and Omissions: The Engineer shall be responsible for correcting any error or
Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-13
 omission in the construction plans or drawings. City approval of the construction plans in
no way relieves the Engineer of any responsibility for errors or omissions in the plans.

(G) As-Built Drawings

(1) Requirements: As-built drawings reflect the actual in-place construction of public
improvements.
(a) The applicant shall submit as-built drawings for final construction approval within
60 days from the date construction was completed and prior to City acceptance of
any public improvements.
(b) The applicant shall ensure that every sheet of the approved construction plans
reflects the as-built drawings conditions.
(2) Preparation: As-built drawings shall be prepared by the Engineer responsible for the
original construction plan approved by the City. Drawings shall be prepared as follows:
(a) In compliance with the requirements in Sections 1.03(D), “Construction Plans,”
and 1.03(E), “Plan and Profile Drawings.”
(b) In compliance with the requirements in Section 7.17(B), “Stormwater As-Built
Drawings.”
(c) Based on completed field inspections, accurate measurements, survey data, and
testing results, materials, and equipment records.
(d) To reflect any variations from the approved construction plans in the public
improvements actually constructed.
(3) Transfer of Responsibility: If the Engineer responsible for the original construction plan
is replaced prior to preparing as-built drawings, the replacement Engineer shall agree in
writing to accept the responsibility for the design certified by the original Engineer under
the approved construction plan prior to City acceptance of the constructed public
improvements.

(H) Submittal and Approval of As-Built Drawings

(1) Submittal: An applicant for construction approval shall submit at least two drawing sets
of any required as-built drawings to the Director of Public Works for review and approval.
As-built drawing sets shall contain a complete black-lined print drawing set of the as-built
drawing set reflecting the as-built conditions and signed, sealed, and dated on each
drawing sheet by the Engineer.
(2) Approval:
(a) The Director will review the as-built drawings for compliance with these
Standards. If acceptable, a City approval stamp, signed and dated by the Director,
will be placed on each drawing sheet of the as-built drawings.
(b) The Director will not approve any construction, place in service, release financial
guarantees, or issue utility connections for any public improvements for which
acceptable as-built drawings have not been submitted.
(3) Variations and Discrepancies: If any substantial variations or discrepancies, particularly
with respect to location, design slopes, grades, dimensions, capacities and clearances, are
1-14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 discovered between the approved construction plans and the public improvements actually
constructed, the Engineer shall propose and recommend a solution or alternative solutions
to the City for review and approval. If no proposed alternative will satisfy the
requirements of these Standards, the contractor shall reconstruct the deficient public
improvements to comply with the approved construction plans.
(4) Errors and Omissions: The Engineer shall be responsible for the correction of any error
or omission in the as-built drawings. City acceptance of the as-built drawings in no way
relieves the Engineer of any responsibility for errors or omissions in the drawings.

1.04 Alternative Materials and Methods of Construction

(A) Use
The provisions of these Standards are not intended to prevent the use of any materials or methods
of construction, design, or compliance not specifically prescribed in these Standards, provided that
the alternative materials or methods of construction, design, or compliance have been approved
and their use authorized by the Director.

(B) Approval
The Director may approve an alternate material or method of construction, design, or compliance,
provided the proposed design is satisfactory and complies with the provisions of these Standards
and that the material, method, or work offered is, for the purpose intended, at least the equivalent
of that prescribed in these Standards in suitability, strength, effectiveness, durability, safety, and
sanitation.

(C) Proof of Claims

The Director will require that sufficient evidence be submitted to substantiate any claims that may
be made regarding an alternate material or method of construction, design, or compliance. The
details of any action granting approval of an alternate material or method will be recorded and
entered in the files of the City.

1.05 Alterations, Modifications, and Waivers

(A) Practical Difficulties

When practical difficulties are involved in executing the provisions of these Standards, the
Director may alter, modify, or waive the strict application of these Standards, according to the
process described herein.

(B) Criteria
No alteration, modification, or waiver of the strict application of any provision of these Standards
shall be granted unless the applicant clearly demonstrates and the Director finds that the following
conditions exist:
(1) The strict application of the provisions of these Standards would deprive an individual of

Effective: June 20, 20 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 1-15

 the reasonable use of land or structure, and
(2) Special circumstances peculiar to such land or development justify the requested
alteration, modification, or waiver, and
(3) Any alteration, modification, or waiver would result in a solution consistent with the goals
of the underlying zoning district, a Boulder Valley Comprehensive Plan goal, a specific
neighborhood plan, or an adopted design guideline, and
(4) Any alteration, modification, or waiver represents the minimum variance from these
Standards that will accomplish the intended purpose, and
(5) Any alteration or modification will at least equal the suitability, strength, effectiveness,
fire resistance, durability, safety, and sanitation performance requirements prescribed in
these Standards, and
(6) Any alteration, modification, or waiver will not harm the adjacent land owners, the
neighborhood, or the welfare of the public at large, and
(7) Any alteration, modification, or waiver will not create an additional maintenance or
financial burden for the affected property owners or the City.

(C) Application Requirements

(1) An applicant for an alteration, modification, or waiver to these Standards shall submit a
written request to the Director. The request shall state in detail the specific sections and
subsections of these Standards requested to be altered, modified, or waived, and the
request shall describe in detail why the requested waiver, alteration, or modification meets
the criteria in Section 1.05(B), above.
(2) The Director may require additional documentation to support the request and shall
require that sufficient evidence be submitted to substantiate any claims that may be made
regarding alterations, modifications, or waivers to these Standards. Sufficient evidence
may include verification by a Colorado registered professional Engineer, possessing
relevant expertise in the area.

(D) Decision
(1) The Director will advise the applicant, in writing, of the decision on the requested
alteration, modification, or waiver. The Director’s decision is a final action that is
administrative and may be appealed through the judicial process. In granting any
alteration or modification to these Standards, the Director may impose specific conditions
necessary to ensure that the criteria described in Section 1.05(B), above, are, and will
remain, satisfied.
(2) The Director of Public Works will consult with the Planning Director when evaluating
issues that potentially impact urban design. The details of any decision granting approval
of an alteration, modification, or waiver to these Standards will be entered in the form of
written findings. A written log of all decisions granting alterations, modifications, or
waivers to these Standards will be kept current in the office of the Director of Public
Works and will be available for public inspection.

1-16 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 CITY OF BOULDER

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 2
TRANSPORTATION DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
2.01 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT .............................................................................................................................................................1
(B) TRANSPORTATION MASTER PLAN.....................................................................................................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS ..................................................................................................................................1
(D) FUNCTIONAL STREET CLASSIFICATION .............................................................................................................1
2.02 TRAFFIC STUDY .........................................................................................................................................1
(A) TRAFFIC ASSESSMENT ......................................................................................................................................1
(B) TRAFFIC STUDY REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................1
(C) RESPONSIBILITIES FOR TRAFFIC STUDIES ..........................................................................................................1
(D) PREPARATION ...................................................................................................................................................2
(E) COORDINATION WITH CITY ...............................................................................................................................2
(F) SUBMITTAL ......................................................................................................................................................2
2.03 TRAFFIC STUDY FORMAT ......................................................................................................................2
(A) STUDY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................................................2
(B) INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................2
(C) SITE LOCATION AND ZONING............................................................................................................................2
(D) STUDY AREA BOUNDARIES ..............................................................................................................................2
(E) EXISTING AREA STREET SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................2
(F) EXISTING AND PROJECTED ROADWAY AND INTERSECTION TRAFFIC VOLUMES ................................................3
(G) EXISTING AND PROPOSED SITE USES ................................................................................................................3
(H) EXISTING AND PROPOSED LAND USES IN VICINITY OF THE SITE .......................................................................3
(I) TRANSPORTATION DEMAND MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES .................................................................................3
(J) TRIP GENERATION ............................................................................................................................................3
(K) TRIP DISTRIBUTION/ASSIGNMENT AND MODAL SPLIT ......................................................................................4
(L) EXISTING AND PROJECTED TRAFFIC VOLUMES .................................................................................................5
(M) TRANSPORTATION SERVICE STANDARDS ..........................................................................................................6
(N) LEVEL OF SERVICE ANALYSIS ...........................................................................................................................7
(O) TRAFFIC COUNTS AND ANALYSES WORKSHEETS .............................................................................................7
(P) TRAFFIC CONTROL AND SIGNALS .....................................................................................................................7
(Q) TRAFFIC ACCIDENTS ........................................................................................................................................8
(R) NOISE ATTENUATION .......................................................................................................................................8
(S) RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................................................................................................................8
(T) CONCLUSION ....................................................................................................................................................9
(U) REVISIONS TO TRAFFIC STUDY .........................................................................................................................9

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-i

2.04 SITE ACCESS .............................................................................................................................................10
(A) ACCESS REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................................10
(B) ACCESS PERMIT REQUIRED ............................................................................................................................10
(C) LOCATION OF ACCESS ....................................................................................................................................10
(D) SIGHT DISTANCE ............................................................................................................................................11
(E) RESTRICTION OF TURNING MOVEMENTS ........................................................................................................11
(F) TRAFFIC CONTROL .........................................................................................................................................11
(G) ONE-WAY ACCESS LANES .............................................................................................................................11
(H) SPEED CHANGE LANES ...................................................................................................................................12
(I) ACCESS AND CURB CUT TYPE ........................................................................................................................12
(J) ACCESS AND CURB CUT WIDTH .....................................................................................................................13
(K) ACCESS AND CURB CUT RADII .......................................................................................................................13
(L) ACCESS AND CURB CUT GRADES ...................................................................................................................13
(M) DRIVEWAYS ...................................................................................................................................................13
2.05 RIGHT-OF-WAY REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................14

2.06 BASE STREET AND ALLEY STANDARDS...........................................................................................14

(A) BASE STREET STANDARD ...............................................................................................................................14
(B) BASE ALLEY STANDARD ................................................................................................................................15
2.07 STREET GEOMETRIC DESIGN .............................................................................................................15
(A) MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS..............................................................................................................................15
(B) RIGHT-OF-WAY ..............................................................................................................................................15
(C) LANE WIDTH ..................................................................................................................................................16
(D) HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ..............................................................................................................................16
(E) VERTICAL ALIGNMENT ...................................................................................................................................18
(F) SIGHT DISTANCE ............................................................................................................................................19
(G) MEDIANS ........................................................................................................................................................19
(H) VERTICAL CLEARANCE OF STRUCTURES .........................................................................................................20
2.08 SIDEWALKS ...............................................................................................................................................20
(A) REQUIRED ......................................................................................................................................................20
(B) CONFORMANCE WITH THE TRANSPORTATION MASTER PLAN .........................................................................20
(C) COMPLIANCE WITH AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA)....................................................................20
(D) MINIMUM WIDTHS .........................................................................................................................................20
(E) VERTICAL GRADES .........................................................................................................................................21
(F) VERTICAL CLEARANCE ...................................................................................................................................21
2.09 RESIDENTIAL STREETS .........................................................................................................................21
(A) PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................................................21
(B) SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................21
(C) DIRECTOR REVIEW .........................................................................................................................................22
(D) RESIDENTIAL STREET SECTIONS .....................................................................................................................23
2.10 EMERGENCY ACCESS LANES ..............................................................................................................28
(A) EMERGENCY ACCESS REQUIRED ....................................................................................................................28
(B) WHEN EMERGENCY ACCESS LANE IS REQUIRED ............................................................................................28
(C) SECONDARY EMERGENCY ACCESS .................................................................................................................29
(D) LOCAL EMERGENCY ACCESS LANE STANDARDS ............................................................................................29
(E) UNOBSTRUCTED ACCESS................................................................................................................................29
(F) ACCESS IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................................................29
2-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
2.11 BICYCLE FACILITIES AND MULTI-USE PATH DESIGN ................................................................30
(A) CONFORMANCE WITH BICYCLE SYSTEM PLAN................................................................................................30
(B) ON-STREET BIKE LANES - STREETS WITHOUT ON-STREET PARKING .............................................................30
(C) ON-STREET BIKE LANES - STREETS WITH ON-STREET PARKING ....................................................................30
(D) OFF-STREET BIKE PATHS OR TRAILS ..............................................................................................................30
(E) BICYCLE PARKING ..........................................................................................................................................30
2.12 STREET LIGHTING ..................................................................................................................................32
(A) SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................32
(B) GUIDELINES FOR STREET LIGHTING ................................................................................................................32
(C) EASEMENTS ....................................................................................................................................................33

LIST OF TABLES

Number Page

TABLE 2-1: ACCESS SPACING REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................10

TABLE 2-2: ACCESS DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................................................................12
TABLE 2-3: BASE STREET STANDARD COMPONENTS ....................................................................................................15
TABLE 2-4: BASE ALLEY STANDARD COMPONENTS .....................................................................................................15
TABLE 2-5: MINIMUM STREET LANE WIDTHS ...............................................................................................................16
TABLE 2-6: MINIMUM HORIZONTAL STREET CURVE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................................16
TABLE 2-7: MINIMUM STREET SPACING........................................................................................................................17
TABLE 2-8: MINIMUM INTERSECTION RADII .................................................................................................................17
TABLE 2-9: MAXIMUM STREET GRADES .......................................................................................................................19
TABLE 2-10: VERTICAL CURVE DESIGN CONTROL ........................................................................................................19
TABLE 2-11: MEDIAN WIDTH DESIGN STANDARDS ......................................................................................................19
TABLE 2-12: MINIMUM SIDEWALK WIDTHS ..................................................................................................................20
TABLE 2-13: RESIDENTIAL STREET DESIGN STANDARDS .............................................................................................25

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-iii

2.01 General

(A) Intent
The Transportation Design Standards are intended to provide for an integrated transportation
system for all transportation modes, including pedestrian, bicycle, transit, and motor vehicle.

(B) Transportation Master Plan

All improvements proposed to the City’s transportation system shall conform with the goals,
policies, and standards adopted in the Transportation Master Plan (TMP).

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, to protect the public health, safety, and
welfare, the Director of Public Works will specify the standards to be applied to the design and
construction of transportation improvements and may refer to one or more of the references listed
in the References Section of these Standards.

(D) Functional Street Classification

Public streets shall be designed and improved to conform to the applicable functional street
classification as defined on the “Street Function Class and Proposed Street Facilities” map of the
TMP.

2.02 Traffic Study

(A) Traffic Assessment

The Director will require an applicant to submit a Traffic Assessment in order to adequately assess
the impacts of any development proposal on the existing and planned transportation system. The
Assessment shall include a peak hour trip generation study projection (Refer to 2.03(J)) and may
require additional information as determined by the Director.

(B) Traffic Study Requirements

For any development proposal where trip generation from the development during the peak hour
of the adjacent street is expected to exceed 100 vehicles for nonresidential applications, or 20
vehicles for residential applications the Director will require an applicant to submit a Traffic Study
to evaluate the traffic impacts of any development proposal required to undergo a concept review
as set forth in Section 9-2-13, “Concept Plan Review and Comment,” B.R.C. 1981. The traffic
study may include the information required in Subsections (A) through (K), of Section 2.03,
“Traffic Study Format,” of these Standards at the discretion of the Director.

(C) Responsibilities for Traffic Studies

An applicant for construction approval shall be responsible for assessing all traffic impacts
associated with a proposed development, with the City serving in a review and approval capacity.

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-1

(D) Preparation
A Traffic Study shall be prepared by an Engineer with adequate experience and expertise in
transportation engineering. The Engineer shall be identified in the Traffic Study.

(E) Coordination with City

Transportation consultants and Engineers preparing Traffic Studies shall discuss proposed
development projects with the Director prior to initiating the study. Issues to be discussed include,
without limitation, the TMP, definition of the study area, relevant subarea plans, methods for
projecting build-out volumes, background traffic conditions, trip generation, directional
distribution of traffic, and trip assignment. These aspects of the Traffic Study shall be approved
by the Director prior to study preparation.

(F) Submittal
A Traffic Study shall be prepared in conformance with, and including, the information required in
Section 2.03, “Traffic Study Format,” of these Standards.

2.03 Traffic Study Format

(A) Study Requirements

The information provided in the Traffic Study shall include the following sections as outlined
below. The study shall be typed and bound, and clearly identify the data and information in the
appropriate sections. In addition, the study shall contain a table of contents, lists of figures, and
tables, and shall identify any map pockets and included drawings.

(B) Introduction
The Traffic Study shall provide an introduction with an overview and discussion of the project or
development proposal.

(C) Site Location and Zoning

Include a vicinity map detailing the property location, a conceptual site plan reflecting the
boundaries of the project or development, and information detailing the designated zoning district,
general terrain and physical features of the site and the surrounding area.

(D) Study Area Boundaries

Include the Study Area Boundaries as determined based on discussions with the Director and
include all roadways and transportation routes providing access to the site and the surrounding
transportation system.

(E) Existing Area Street System Description

Describe and include roadway orientations, functional classifications and geometries, intersection
geometries, and traffic controls, including without limitation signage and striping, speed limits,
parking restrictions, sight distance, transit routes, the presence of bicycle and pedestrian facilities,
and any other related traffic operations information and improvements approved or planned by
2-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 government agencies. For identified improvements scheduled by government agencies, include
the nature of the improvements, extent, implementation schedule, and the agency or funding
source responsible.

(F) Existing and Projected Roadway and Intersection Traffic Volumes

Include diagrams that map existing traffic volumes, and each variation of projected traffic
volumes, for all roadways and intersections within the study area. Also provide diagrams that map
the intersection and roadway geometries and traffic control within the study area.

(G) Existing and Proposed Site Uses

Include an identification of the existing land use and proposed land use or the highest potential
land use based on zoning and maximum trip generation where a specific use has not been
determined. If rezoning is proposed, the study shall provide a comparison between the highest trip
generation uses for the existing zoning and the highest trip generation uses for the proposed
zoning.

(H) Existing and Proposed Land Uses in Vicinity of the Site

Document any vacant land or potential redevelopment that may result in a change in traffic volume
conditions within the study area during each time period studied. Perform and provide trip
generation on these parcels and include the trips generated from these parcels in the trip volume
diagrams and level of service analyses for each appropriate time period studied.

(I) Transportation Demand Management Strategies

Include an outline of transportation demand management strategies to mitigate traffic impacts
created by proposed development and implementable measures for promoting alternate modes of
travel, including but not limited to the following:

(1) Site Design: Incorporate design features that facilitate walking, biking, and use of transit
services to access a proposed development, including features such as transit shelters and
benches, site amenities, site design layouts, orientations and connections to increase
convenience for alternate modes and reduce multiple trips to and from the site, and direct
connections to existing offsite pedestrian, bicycle, and transit systems.
(2) Programs and Education: Incorporate alternate modes programs, such as providing
transit passes to employees and residents, van pooling to the site by a major employer,
ride-sharing, parking pricing, and planned delivery services, and educational measures
such, as promoting telecommuting, distributing transit schedules and trails maps, signing
alternate travel routes, and providing an onsite transportation coordinator or plan to
educate and assist residents, employees, and customers in using alternate modes.

(J) Trip Generation

Traffic estimates for the proposed project and potential developed or redeveloped properties in the
study area shall be obtained by performing trip generation using the procedures outlined in the
most current edition of the Trip Generation Manual of the Institute of Transportation Engineers
(ITE). If adequate Trip Generation Manual data is not available for a specific land use, the
procedures used to estimate trip generation data shall be approved by the Director. Include the
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-3
 following specific trip generation information:
(1) Summary Table: List each land use that requires trip generation analysis, including the
project plus developed or redeveloped land uses within the study area. For each trip
generation summary include land use type, amount, intensity, average trip generation rates
for total daily traffic and peak hour traffic (a.m., noon and/or p.m. peak hour traffic
generation may be required), and the resultant total trips generated for each time period
and each land use.

(2) Calculations: Calculation of projected trip generation for any land use, used to determine
study area impacts, shall be based on the following:
(a) Trip generation formulas (or rates, if formulas are not available) published in the
most recent version of the Trip Generation Manual. Trip generation reports from
other industry publications may be considered but are subject to the approval of
the Director.
(b) A local trip generation study, following procedures outlined in the most recent
version of the Trip Generation Manual, if no published rates are available and
similar land uses can be studied.
(c) Additional data or studies from other similar jurisdictions. Trip generation
obtained in this fashion is subject to the review and approval of the Director.
(3) Trip Generation Reductions: Credit for any trip reductions is subject to review and
approval in advance by the Director. Anticipated trip reduction assumptions should be
discussed and approved by the Director prior to the preparation of the Traffic Study. Trip
reductions typically fall into one of two categories: those that reassign some portion of the
trip generation from the surrounding roadway network (passerby and diverted trip
reductions), and those that remove trips generated from the land use trip generation
(internal and modal split reductions).
(a) Use of passerby and diverted trip reductions may be evaluated and considered in
reducing the additional estimated total trip generation of a new land use.
However, passerby and diverted trip reduction factors are not to be applied
directly to reduce trip generation and turning movement volumes at driveways
serving the studied land use. These factors are subject to the approval of the
Director.
(b) Internal trip reductions and modal split assumptions may reduce the total trip
generation of a land use. These factors considered in the Traffic Study shall
supply analytical support and detailed documentation to demonstrate how the
estimates were derived and incorporated, and are subject to the approval of the
Director.

(K) Trip Distribution/Assignment and Modal Split

Trip distribution/assignment of any generated traffic estimates shall be clearly summarized and
illustrated for each access route entering and exiting the generating land use, using the study area
transportation system as a basis. Include the following specific trip distribution/assignment
information:

2-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 (1) Trip Distribution: The trip distribution for each site shall be identified and illustrated
with a graphical figure detailing the percentages making each movement, at each
intersection in the study area. The trip distribution shall be logically based upon factors
such as the site’s location within the City’s existing traffic volume data in the study area,
market analyses, applied census data, and/or professional engineering judgment. Trip
distribution assumptions are subject to the approval of the Director.
(2) Trip Assignment: Trip assignment shall be done by applying the trip generation totals for
each time period studied, to the trip distribution percentages developed. The trip
assignment shall develop anticipated traffic volumes for each of the movements identified
by the trip distribution and each of the time periods identified in the analyses. The
resulting traffic volumes shall be illustrated with graphical figures detailing the anticipated
volumes making each movement, at each intersection in the study area, during each time
period studied.

(L) Existing and Projected Traffic Volumes

(1) Traffic Volume Scenarios: Five traffic volume scenarios and three separate times of the
day may be required to be included in a Traffic Study analysis. The applicant shall meet
with the Director to determine the scenarios and time periods to be studied, prior to the
development of the Traffic Study. The number of scenarios and time periods to be studied
are subject to the approval of the Director. The potential scenarios and time periods
include the following:
(a) Scenario 1 - Existing Conditions: An analysis of existing traffic conditions will be
required in the Traffic Study. Existing Conditions analysis should attempt to
model traffic conditions at the time the traffic study is being prepared. Traffic
counts that are older than the year the study is being prepared shall be factored up
or adjusted to existing year volumes.
(b) Scenario 2 - Anticipated Project Completion Year Without Project Volumes:
Include an analysis of the anticipated traffic conditions during the year the project
is intended to be finished and traffic is generated. The analysis shall anticipate the
increase in background traffic volumes and the generation of other related projects
that are not present in the existing condition, but would likely be completed and
generating trips in this time period. The trip generation for the proposed project
shall not be included in this scenario. If the project is intended to be completed
the same year that the Traffic Study is being prepared, then this scenario is the
same as Scenario 1 - Existing Conditions.
(c) Scenario 3 - Anticipated Project Completion Year With Project Volumes: This
scenario is the same as Scenario 2, except that the project volumes are assigned to
the roadway network and included in the analyses.
(d) Scenario 4 - Future Buildout Conditions Without Project Volumes: An analysis of
the anticipated traffic conditions during buildout, using the projected buildout
year defined in the City’s TMP. The analysis shall anticipate the increase in
background traffic volumes and the generation of other related projects that are
not present in the existing condition, but would likely be completed and
generating trips in this time period. The trip generation for the proposed project
should not be included in this scenario.
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-5
 (e) Scenario 5 - Future Buildout Conditions With Project Volumes: This scenario is
the same as Scenario 4, except that the project volumes are assigned to the
roadway network and included in the analyses.
(2) Traffic Volume Projections: The traffic volume projections shall identify existing and
projected daily traffic counts and peak hour turning movement counts for each access
point, intersection and street identified in the traffic study area for each of the
aforementioned scenarios required in the study.
(3) Time Periods: Each scenario may be required to look at three different time periods (the
a.m., noon and p.m. peak hour conditions). The Director will determine which time
periods and scenarios are required for each Traffic Study depending upon the project’s
size, location, types of land uses and other pertinent factors.
(4) Raw Traffic Count Data: Include all raw traffic-count data for average daily and peak
hour conditions and traffic analysis worksheets in the appendices of the Traffic Study for
reference. Computer techniques and associated printouts may be used for this part of the
report.
NOTE: All total daily traffic counts must be actual machine counts, not based on factored
peak hour sampling. Latest available machine counts from the City, and other agencies,
may be acceptable if not more than 2 years older than the year the Traffic Study is being
prepared. Data older than the year the Traffic Study is being prepared shall be factored up
to current year numbers, using growth rates approved by the Director.

(M) Transportation Service Standards

Include a discussion and analysis assessing the impacts of the project or development proposal on
the existing and planned transportation system in the study area with respect to the following
traffic impact and mitigation objectives:

(1) Transportation Master Plan Objectives: TMP service standards’ objectives include the
following:
(a) No long-term growth in auto traffic over current levels described as a 0 percent
increase in vehicle miles traveled.
(b) Reduction in single-occupant vehicle travel to 25 percent of total trips.
(c) Continuous reduction in mobile source emission of air pollutants, and no more
than 20 percent of roadways congested at LOS F.
(2) Level of Service Design Guide: LOS standards objectives include:
(a) Minimum LOS D design guide for peak hour conditions for all movements.
Project impacts that maintain LOS D or better for all intersections and street
segments may not be required to provide LOS-related traffic mitigation
improvements.
(b) LOS E and lower peak hour conditions require the implementation of one or more
transportation management strategies consistent with the goals and objectives of
the TMP. A transportation management strategy plan required to address and
mitigate these conditions may include travel demand management, land use
2-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 intensity reduction, site design, layout and access modifications, parking reduction
measures, or transportation infrastructure improvements.

(N) Level of Service Analysis

(1) The Traffic Study shall provide LOS analyses for all study area intersections (signalized
and unsignalized) and mid-block roadway segments using methodologies outlined in the
current Highway Capacity Manual. The analyses should be performed for Scenarios 1
through 5, described in Section 2.0 3(L), “Existing and Projected Traffic Volumes,” and
for each time period (a.m., noon and/or p.m. peaks) that is required in the Traffic Study,
unless otherwise required by the Director.
(2) Level of service analyses shall consider the appropriate infrastructure, lane usage, traffic
control and any other pertinent factors for each scenario to be studied. Intersections with
planned improvements, discussed in City planning documents, may have those
improvements shown in the level of service analyses.
(3) Signalized intersection level of service analyses shall use the existing timing and phasing
of the intersections for all scenarios. If the analyses are to deviate from existing timings or
phasing, then a detailed signal progression analyses for the affected corridor shall also be
provided.
(4) The results of the level of service analyses for each scenario and each time period shall be
summarized into one or more tables that illustrate the differences in level of service for
each scenario. At a minimum, these tables shall list the level of service results for each
intersection to include the level of service for each approach and the total intersection
level of service, as well as the appropriate delay values for each approach and the total
intersection. These tables shall highlight any locations where the addition of project
traffic has caused any approach of any intersection to fall below the LOS D standard for
the City.

(O) Traffic Counts and Analyses Worksheets

Provide capacity analysis calculations based on the planning or operational analysis techniques
contained in the current Highway Capacity Manual or subsequent highway capacity techniques
established by the Federal Highway Administration, including the following:
(1) Raw Traffic Count Data: Include all raw traffic count data for average daily, hourly
Average daily trip (ADT), and peak hour conditions and traffic analysis worksheets in the
appendices of the traffic study for reference. Computer techniques and associated
printouts may be used for this part of the report.
(2) Level of Service Analyses: Include all level of service analyses performed for
intersections and roadway links. If signal timing or phasing changes are proposed for
traffic mitigation and the signal is currently part of a coordinated system, a progression
analysis will be required to ensure that adequate progression is maintained or provided.
All progress analysis and assumptions to be used shall be reviewed and approved by the
Director.

(P) Traffic Control and Signals

The Traffic Study shall discuss and analyze any traffic control measures that may be necessary to
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-7
 serve a proposed project or development. Any traffic control measures are to be evaluated based
on the requirements established in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and
by the City, and will be applied as necessary to ensure safe and efficient operation of the City’s
transportation system. The analysis shall demonstrate the need for traffic control measures
considering the objectives and policies of the TMP and alternative site designs in order to
minimize or mitigate traffic impacts from the proposed project or development. The following
traffic control measures are to be addressed:
(1) Regulatory Signage, Markings and Islands: These traffic control measures shall be
applied as necessary in conformance with the MUTCD and City standards and policies.
(2) Traffic Signals: The installation of new traffic signals is not encouraged by the City and
all possible alternatives to signalization shall be evaluated before the installation of a new
traffic signal will be considered. The need for new traffic signals will be based on
warrants contained in the MUTCD and on City policies. In determining the location of a
new signal, safety and community traffic circulation and progression will be the primary
considerations. If a traffic signal is suggested as part of a mitigation package, and the
intersection lies within a series of coordinated traffic signals, then a progression analysis
may be required to ensure that adequate progression may still be provided. Generally, a
spacing of one-half mile between all signalized intersections is to be maintained, to
achieve optimum capacity and signal progression. Pedestrian and bicycle movements
shall be considered in all cases and adequate pedestrian clearance is to be provided in the
signalization design.
(3) Intersection and Access Locations: To provide flexibility and safety for the existing
roadway system and to ensure optimum two-way signal progression, an approved traffic
engineering analysis shall be made to properly locate all proposed intersections that may
require signalization, and any accesses to the proposed development.

(Q) Traffic Accidents

The Traffic Study may need to include accident analyses at one or more locations in the study area.
The Director shall specify whether such accident analyses are needed for each Traffic Study.
Where required, estimates of increased or decreased accident potential shall be evaluated for the
proposed project or development and appropriate safety related mitigation measures are to be
included. Traffic accident data is available from the City of Boulder’s Police Department or from
the Director.

(R) Noise Attenuation

If residential development is planned adjacent to a roadway designated collector or greater, the
City may require noise attenuation measures. A discussion and analysis of noise attenuation
measured using the methods in the Fundamentals and Abatement of Highway Traffic Noise
Textbook is to be included in all traffic studies for residential developments adjacent to roadways
designated collector or greater.

(S) Recommendations
(1) The Traffic Study shall include a section in the report that provides any recommendations
of the Engineer. These recommendations shall include the Engineer’s recommended
location, nature and extent of proposed transportation improvements associated with the
2-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 project or development to ensure safe and efficient roadway operations and capacity, and
compatibility with the City's transportation system and the goals of the TMP.
(2) These recommendations are to be supported with appropriate documentation and
discussion of the technical analyses, assumptions and evaluations used to make the
determinations and findings applied in the Traffic Study. In the event that any Traffic
Study analyses or recommendations indicate unsatisfactory levels of service on any study
area roadways, a further description of proposed improvements or mitigation measures to
remedy deficiencies shall be included.
(3) These proposed improvements or mitigation measures may include projects by the City or
The Colorado Department of Transportation for which funds have been appropriated and
obligated. These proposals may also include improvements to be funded and constructed
by the applicant as part of project or development construction. Assumptions regarding
future roads, widths and lane usages in any analyses are subject to the approval of the
Director.
(4) In general, the recommendation section shall include:
(a) Proposed and Recommended Improvements: Provide a detailed description and
sketch of all proposed and recommended improvements. Include basic design
details showing the length, width and other pertinent geometric features of any
proposed improvements. Discuss whether these improvements are necessary
because of development traffic or whether they would be necessary due to
background traffic. Specify the approximate timing necessary for each
improvement.
(b) Level of Service Analysis at Critical Points: Provide another iteration of the LOS
analyses that demonstrate the anticipated results of making recommended
improvements, such as movement LOS, operational and safety conditions and
conformance with the City's transportation system goals and TMP. In association
with LOS analyses for recommended improvements, include a comparison of
these results with the background LOS analyses without the proposed project or
development. Where appropriate, this step is to be provided for both near term
(year of project completion) and buildout scenarios.

(T) Conclusion
Include a conclusion in the report that provides a clear and concise description of the study
findings and recommendations, and serves as an executive summary.

(U) Revisions to Traffic Study

(1) Following City review, the Director may require revisions to a traffic study based on the
following considerations:
(a) Completeness of the study,
(b) Thoroughness of the level of service and impact analyses and evaluations,
(c) Compatibility of the study with the proposed access design, project or
development plan and local transportation system,
(d) Compliance with local and state regulations and design standards, and
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-9
 (e) An analysis of study deficiencies, errors, or conflicts.
(2) Revisions may also be required as a result of public process with surrounding
neighborhoods and land uses or review by City Council or the Planning Board.
Additional details requiring traffic study revisions may include, but are not limited to, the
following:
(a) An enlarged study area
(b) Alternative trip generation scenarios
(c) Additional level of service analyses
(d) Site planning and design issues.

2.04 Site Access

(A) Access Requirements
All accesses and curb cuts shall be designed and constructed in compliance with these Standards
and the requirements set forth in Section 9-9-5, “Site Access Control,” B.R.C. 1981.

(B) Access Permit Required

All accesses and curb cuts proposed and constructed on City streets and alleys require a permit, as
set forth in Section 9-9-5, “Site Access Control,” B.R.C. 1981.

(C) Location of Access

(1) Spacing: Table 2-1, “Access Spacing Requirements,” shows the required spacing of
access points and curb cuts. Minimum spacing from corners shall be measured from point of
intersection of the street flowlines. Minimum spacing between accesses shall be measured at the
property line.

Table 2-1: Access Spacing Requirements

Minimum Spacing (measured Single Family Other Residential Commercial Industrial
from edge of access) Residential
Local Streets
- from property line 7.5' 10' 10' 10'
- from corner 20' 50' 50' 50'
- between accesses 15' 20' 20' 20'
Collector Streets Permitted only when no
other access is available.
- from property line 10' 10' 10'
- from corner 50' 50' 50'
- between accesses 20' 20' 20'
Arterial Streets Permitted only when no
other access is available.
- from property line 75' 75' 75'
- from corner 150' 150' 150'
- between accesses 250' 250' 250'

2-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 (2) Alignment: Accesses shall intersect City streets at a 90-degree angle. Accesses to
properties on opposite sides of a collector or arterial, where turning movements are not
controlled by a center median or access island, shall either be aligned, or offset by at least
150 feet on collectors, or at least 300 feet on arterials. Greater offsets may be required if
left-turn storage lanes are required.
(3) Relocation of Existing Access Points and Curb Cuts: Relocation, alteration, or
reconstruction of any existing access points and curb cuts shall meet the requirements of
these Standards.

(D) Sight Distance

All access points and curb cuts shall provide adequate sight distance as set forth under Section
9-9-7, “SightTriangles,” B.R.C. 1981.

(E) Restriction of Turning Movements

Along streets designated arterial or greater, or where necessary for the safe and efficient movement
of traffic, the City will require access points and curb cuts to provide for only limited turning
movements, as follows:

(1) Access With Barrier Island - Left-Turn Restrictions (“Pork Chop”): Where restricted
turning movements are required by the City, and where the abutting street does not have a
median, a barrier island will be required.
(a) Islands shall have a minimum area of 150 square feet, be bounded by vertical
curb, and have an appropriate concrete center surface treatment, approved by the
Director.
(b) Barrier island lanes shall be at least 12 feet wide, have a radius of at least 20 feet,
and be designed to accommodate the largest vehicle using the access on a daily
basis. The island shall provide congruent curb ramps or cut through for
sidewalks. The minimum width of the island along the abutting roadway frontage
shall be 30 feet for right-in, right-out only islands, and 15 feet for islands allowing
right-in, right-out and left-turning movements.

(2) Access With Median Divider Barriers – Left-Turn Restrictions: Median barriers may
be permitted where a median design can improve traffic circulation and safety, or overall
site access. Where permitted, medians shall be at least 4 feet wide, and shall extend at
least 25 feet beyond the right-of-way.

(F) Traffic Control

All accesses shall be designed and constructed with appropriate traffic control and signage
conforming to the MUTCD, B.R.C. 1981, and these Standards.

(G) One-Way Access Lanes

One-way access lanes may be permitted where restricted access is limited to one turning
movement, or where the one-way access improves traffic circulation and safety. One-way access
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-11
 lanes shall be at least 12 feet wide, have at least radius of 20 feet, and be designed to accommodate
the largest vehicle using the access on a daily basis.

(H) Speed Change Lanes

Speed change lanes shall be required on collectors or arterials when the design hour vehicles from
the access will meet or exceed the standards in Section 4.8 of the Colorado State Highway Access
Code. Design of speed change lanes shall conform with Subsection 2.07(D), "Horizontal
Alignment," of these Standards.

(I) Access and Curb Cut Type

(1) Driveway Ramp and Curb Cut: All new accesses and curb cuts shall be designed as
driveway ramps and curb cuts, using the standard ramp driveway details provided in
Chapter 11, except as allowed in Subsection (2), along streets where no curb and gutter
exists, or for single family lots where roll-over curbs have been provided.
(2) Radii Curb Returns: Radii curb return accesses may be required or permitted by the
Director under the following conditions:
(a) The access is located along an arterial or collector.
(b) Access volumes indicate a need for a radii curb return where the ADT exceeds
500 or where speed change lanes would be required.
(c) The access is designed to restrict turning movements, requiring the installation of
an access island or center median.
(d) The roadway has no curb and gutter.
(e) The access serves an industrial property, or provides for commercial deliveries,
where large truck movements are required.
(f) The Director determines that a radii access is necessary to ensure adequate traffic
safety and operation.
(g) The access is for a new public street

Table 2-2: Access Design Specifications

Single Family Other Commercial Industrial
Residential Residential
Width (in feet )
- Minimum 10 10 15 20
- Maximum 20 35 35 35
- One-Way Lane N/A 12-18 12-20 14-24
Radii (in feet)
- Minimum N/A 15 15 20
- Maximum N/A 30 30 40
Access Grades
Initial Grade (to a point 10
ft beyond ROW)
- Minimum (+) 3% (+) 1% (+) 1% (+) 1%
- Maximum (+) 8% (+) 6% (+) 6% (+) 6%
Final Grade (G2)

2-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

- Minimum (+/-) 3% (+/-) 1% (+/-) 1% (+/-) 1%
- Maximum (+/-) 14% (+/-) 8% (+/-) 8% (+/-) 8%
Max Grade Break (+/-) 10% (+/-) 6% (+/-) 6% (+/-) 6%

(J) Access and Curb Cut Width

Access and curb cut widths shall be consistent with Table 2-2, “Access Design Specifications,” of
these Standards. The width of each access shall be the minimum width that is necessary to serve
the property and use. No more than 50 percent of the street frontage shall be occupied by the
access driveway, except for access to a cul-de-sac or flag lot. All access widths are measured from
edge of pavement to edge of pavement (or curb to curb) at the throat of the driveway (or edge of
the right-of-way), and are not inclusive of drive cut transitions or curb return radii.

(K) Access and Curb Cut Radii

Access and curb cut radii shall meet the specifications shown in Table 2-2, “Access Design
Specifications,” of these Standards. All radii are measured from the flowline or from the edge of
the pavement where no flowline exists.

(L) Access and Curb Cut Grades

Access and curb cut grades shall be consistent with Table 2-2. The initial grade (G1) shall be a
positive grade, beginning at the back of the sidewalk, the back of the driveway ramp or pan
section, or the edge of the pavement (where no curb and gutter exists), and shall continue at least
10 feet beyond the right-of-way. The final grade (G2) may be positive or negative, depending on
the access conditions. The maximum grade break (or change in slope) shall apply at all grade
changes. Additional grade changes may occur at intervals of at least 20 feet.

(M) Driveways

(1) Vehicle Storage: Adequate driveway storage capacity for both inbound and outbound
vehicles to facilitate safe, unobstructed, and efficient traffic circulation and movements
from the adjacent roadway and within the development shall be provided, except for
single-family or duplex residential driveways on local streets. Adequate driveway length
will be subject to approval by the Director and shall extend at least 20 feet beyond the
right-of-way before accessing the first off-street parking space or parking lot aisle.
(2) Internal Circulation: Developments requiring off-street parking facilities shall provide
onsite vehicular circulation allowing access to all portions of the site without using the
adjacent street system, unless a joint access or parking easement with one or more of the
adjacent property owners has been dedicated.
(3) Backing Into the Right-of-Way Prohibited: Driveways shall be designed to contain all
vehicle backing movements onsite, except for single family or duplex residential uses on
local streets.
(4) Minimum Back-Up Distance for Detached Single-Family Residential Driveways
Accessing Public Alleys: Driveways shall provide for a minimum distance of 24-feet
from the rear of the parking stall or face of garage to the far edge of the adjacent alley
right-of-way or turn around area as required by Chapter 9-9-6, “Parking Standards,”
B.R.C. 1981.
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-13
 (5) Shared Driveways (Detached Single-Family Residential Only): Shared driveways to
access detached single-family residential lots may be permitted pursuant to an approved
site review or subdivision as set forth in Chapter 9-9-14, “Site Review,” B.R.C. 1981 or
Chapter 9-12, "Subdivision," B.R.C. 1981, if they meet the following criteria:
(a) A common parking court is provided at a ratio of 0.5 additional spaces per unit if
less than two onsite parking spaces, meeting City requirements, are provided on
each single-family lot served by the shared driveway.
(b) The shared driveway is no more than 100 feet long, except in districts zoned RL-1
(Residential-Low 1), RE (Residential-Estate), and RR1 ( Residential-Rural 1) and
RR 2 (Residential-Rural 2), where the shared driveway may extend up to 300 feet
long if each lot accessing the shared driveway exceeds 10,000 square feet.
(c) The number of units served shall be no more than three lots or houses that have
less than 30 feet of usable frontage on the accessing street.
(d) Adequate turnaround for vehicles is provided either on an individual lot or lots.
(e) The driveway is properly engineered and constructed to mitigate any adverse
drainage conditions and is appropriately surfaced for the type of development,
usage, and zoning district.
(f) The Driveway is at least 12 feet wide.
(g) For units not fronting on the accessing street, addressing shall be located near the
entrance to the shared driveway insuring visibility of the numbering from the
street.
(h) A public access easement, a minimum fifteen feet in width, for the benefit and use
of all properties and property owners accessing the shared driveway has been
dedicated and recorded to ensure legal access rights in perpetuity for each
property served.
(i) Driveway spacing conforms with the requirements in Table 2-1, “Access Spacing
Requirements,” of these Standards.

2.05 Right-of-Way Requirements

Dedication or reservation of public right-of-way required as part of any project or development
proposal shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 9-9-8, “Reservations, Dedication,
and Improvement of Rights-of-Way,” B.R.C. 1981.

2.06 Base Street and Alley Standards

(A) Base Street Standard

Except for residential streets approved pursuant to Chapter 9-12, “Subdivision,” B.R.C. 1981, and
Section 2.09, “Residential Streets,” all new streets shall provide at a minimum the base street
standard components listed in Table 2-3, “Base Street Standard Components.”

2-14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

(B) Base Alley Standard
Except for residential streets approved pursuant to Chapter 9-12, “Subdivision,” B.R.C. 1981, and
Section 2.09, “Residential Streets,” all new alleys shall provide at a minimum the base alley
standard components listed in Table 2-4, “Base Alley Standard Components.”

Table 2-3: Base Street Standard Components

Street Component Base Standard

Right-of-Way 60' Minimum Width
Paved Street Section 36' Minimum Width, Curb Face to Curb Face
Travel Lanes Two Travel Lanes, Two-Way Traffic
Curb and Gutter Required Both Sides
Parking Parking Allowed Both Sides
Sidewalks 5' Minimum Width, Detached, Required Both Sides
Streetscape Planting Strips* 8’ Preferred Width (6' Minimum), Required Both Sides
*NOTE: In commercial streetside retail zones where 12-foot wide attached sidewalks may be provided, streetscape
planting strips may be created using street trees in planting pits with tree grates (15-foot width between back of curb
and back of walk).
Table 2-4: Base Alley Standard Components
Alley Component Base Standard
Right-of-Way 20' Minimum Width
Paved Street Section 18' Minimum Width, Pavement Edge to Pavement Edge
Travel Lanes Two-Way Traffic Allowed
Parking Parking on Alley Not Permitted

2.07 Street Geometric Design

(A) Minimum Requirements

Except for State Highways and the geometric design variations allowed for residential streets
approved pursuant to Chapter 9-12, “Subdivision,” B.R.C. 1981, and Section 2.09, “Residential
Streets,” all city streets shall be designed in conformance with this section. The design standards
outlined in this section are minimum design standards, and all street design shall meet or exceed
these standards. On streets designated collector or arterial in the TMP, the Director may specify
standards to be applied to street design that may exceed the minimum standards in this section
based on functional need to ensure safe and efficient operation of the street.

(B) Right-of-Way
The right-of-way width required for new streets shall comply with the requirements of Section 9-9-
8, “Reservations, Dedication, and Improvement of Rights-of-Way,” B.R.C. 1981, and shall include
without limitation the following elements:
(1) The paved roadway section including without limitation travel lanes, turning and speed
change lanes, transit lanes, bicycle lanes, and parking lanes;
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-15
 (2) Curbs and gutters or drainage swales;
(3) Roadside and median landscaping areas;
(4) Sidewalks and multi-use paths; and
(5) Any necessary utility corridors.
(C) Lane Width
Street lanes shall meet the minimum width specifications shown in Table 2-5, “Minimum Street
Lane Widths,” of these Standards.

Table 2-5: Minimum Street Lane Widths

Travel Lanes* Auxiliary Lanes* On-Street Bicycle Lanes Parking Lanes
11' 10' 5', with parking lane 8' from curb face
6.5' from curb face w/out
parking lane
*NOTES: Travel and Auxiliary lane dimensions do not include gutter pan width. Auxiliary lanes include, without
limitation, turning and speed change lanes.

(D) Horizontal Alignment

(1) Conformance to Street Plan: Horizontal alignment shall conform to the pattern of streets
in the Boulder Valley Comprehensive Plan, TMP, and adopted right-of-way plans and
shall provide continuous alignment with existing, planned, or platted streets with which
they will connect.
(2) Extension to Property Line: All streets shall be extended to the property lines across the
property to be developed, unless the street to be constructed has been approved by the City
as a cul-de-sac or other no-outlet street.
(3) Minimum Horizontal Curve: Street curvatures shall meet the minimum specifications
shown in Table 2-6, “Minimum Horizontal Street Curve Specifications,” of these
Standards.
Table 2-6: Minimum Horizontal Street Curve Specifications
Design Criteria Local Street Collector Street Arterial Street
Minimum Design Speed 20 mph 35 mph 40 mph
Minimum Centerline Radius 100 feet 300 feet 500 feet
Minimum Reverse Curve Tangent 50 feet 100 feet 200 feet
Minimum Intersection Approach Tangent 100 feet 200 feet 300 feet

(4) Design Horizontal Curve: The design horizontal street curvature shall meet or exceed the
minimum horizontal curvature and be calculated using the following equation:

R = V2 / 15 * (e-f) Side Friction Factors

Where: E = rate of superelevation per Design Speed Side Friction

foot
2-16 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 F = side friction factor (mph) Factor (f)
V = vehicle speed in MPH 30 0.22
R = radius of curve in feet 35 0.20
40 0.18
45 0.16

(5) Intersections and Street Spacing

(a) Angles: All streets shall intersect at right angles (90°).
(b) Minimum Street Spacing: Spacing between streets, as measured from centerline
to centerline, shall equal or exceed the minimum distances shown in Table 2-7,
“Minimum Street Spacing,” of these Standards.

Table 2-7: Minimum Street Spacing

Street Type Minimum Street Spacing
Local 150 feet
Collector 300 feet
Arterial 500 feet

(c) Street Spacing for Signalized Intersections: Signalized intersections shall be

spaced at half-mile intervals, although other locations may be approved by the
Director if adequate signal progression can be maintained.
(d) Corner Radii: The minimum property line corner and flowline radii at
intersections shall meet or exceed the minimum radii specifications shown in
Table 2-8, “Minimum Intersection Radii,” of these Standards.

Table 2-8: Minimum Intersection Radii

Street Type Minimum Flowline Radius Minimum Property Radius
Local 25 feet 15 feet
Collector 30 feet 15 feet
Arterial 30 feet 10 feet

(6) Road Width Transition Tapers: Where two street sections or different widths are to be
connected, a transition taper is required between the outside traveled edge of the two
sections. The length of the transition taper shall be calculated using the following
equation:

L = WS
Where: S = Speed in MPH
L = Length in feet
W = Width of offset in feet
This transition is not to be used in the design of left turn storage lanes or speed change
lanes.
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-17
 (7) Left Turn Lanes
(a) Storage Length: Left turn lane storage length shall be determined based on
traffic volumes using the Leisch nomographs provided in the ITE Guidelines for
Major Urban Street Design. The left turn lane storage length shall not be less
than 50 feet. Where dual left turn lanes are provided, the lane storage length shall
be based on at least 60 percent of the single lane storage length.

\(b) Lane Change Taper: Left turn lane change tapers shall be calculated using the
equation for bay tapers in Subsection (8).
(8) Speed Change Lanes: Speed change lanes required for transitional access to turning
lanes shall be designed according to the design standards provided in the ITE “Guidelines
for Major Urban Street Design,” as follows:
(a) Bay Tapers: Bay tapers are required for the lane transition from the travel lane
into a turn lane. The bay taper length shall be calculated using the following
equation:

L = WS / 3
Where: S = Speed in MPH
L = Length in feet
W = Width of offset in feet
(b) Approach Tapers: Approach tapers are required to transition the position of
travel lanes to accommodate turn lanes. The approach taper length shall be
calculated using the following equation:

L = WS2 / 60
Where: S = Speed in MPH
L = Length in feet
W = Width of offset in feet
(9) Cul-de-sacs: Where allowed, cul-de-sacs shall have a minimum pavement diameter of 90
feet, curb face to curb face, and a minimum right-of-way diameter of 115 feet, except for
residential streets approved pursuant to Chapter 9-12, “Subdivision,” B.R.C. 1981, and
Section 2.09, “Residential Streets.” Cul-de-sacs are prohibited on arterial and collector
streets, and are strongly discouraged on local and residential streets. The Director may
permit cul-de-sacs where there is no other possible street or driveway access to a property
from a public right-of-way, or if a cul-de-sac would avoid direct property access to a
collector or arterial.

(E) Vertical Alignment

(1) Minimum Street Grade: All street grades shall equal or exceed the minimum street
grade of 0.5 percent.
(2) Maximum Street Grade: Street grades shall not exceed the maximum street grades
shown in Table 2-9, “Maximum Street Grades,” of these Standards.

2-18 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 Table 2-9: Maximum Street Grades
Street Type Maximum Street Grade
Local 8%
Collector 6%
Arterial 5%
Intersection Approach (Minimum 50') 4%
Signalized Intersection Approach (Min. 50') 2%

(3) Design Controls for Vertical Curves: Design control for sag and crest vertical curves,
(based on a design speed of 30 mph) shall meet the specifications shown in Table 2-10,
“Vertical Curve Design Control,” of these Standards. For design speeds in excess of 30
mph, design control shall be in accordance with the current edition of “A Policy on
Geometric Design of Highways and Streets,”, prepared by the American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials.
Table 2-10: Vertical Curve Design Control
Algebraic Difference in Sag Curve Crest Curve
Grades Minimum Vertical Curve Length Minimum Vertical Curve Length
0.5 - 1.0 % 50 feet 100 feet
1.0 - 3.0 % 100 feet 100 feet
3.0 - 5.0 % 200 feet 150 feet
5.0 - 7.0 % 300 feet 200 feet
7.0 - 8.0 % 300 feet 300 feet
Min. Vert. Sight Distance N/A 250 feet

(4) Vertical Sight Distance: Vertical curve sight distance shall equal or exceed 250 feet.
Greater vertical sight distance may be required by the Director to ensure safe travel and
street crossings for all transportation modes.
(F) Sight Distance
All streets and alleys shall provide adequate sight distance as set forth under Section9-9-7,
“SightTriangles,” B.R.C. 1981.
(G) Medians
The Director will require raised medians on new arterial streets. Raised medians may be permitted
on all streets subject to review and approval by the Director.

(1) Median Widths: Medians shall be at least 4 feet wide, curb face to curb face. If left turn
lanes are installed in the median, the median width adjacent to the left turn storage lanes
shall be 4 feet and the median width at the start of the left turn lane bay taper shall be at
least 14 feet wide, curb face to curb face. Median design widths shall conform to Table
2-11, “Median Width Design Standards,” of these Standards.

Table 2-11: Median Width Design Standards

Function Minimum Width Recommended Width
Separation of Opposing Traffic 4 feet* 10 feet*
Pedestrian Refuge or Traffic Control Device Location 6 feet* 14 feet
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-19
 Medians Separating Left Turn Lanes 14 feet 20 feet
* NOTE: Cannot accommodate left-turn lanes
(2) Landscaping in Medians: Landscaping in medians shall comply with the requirements of
Chapter 3, “Streetscaping,” of these Standards.

(H) Vertical Clearance of Structures

At least 17.5 feet of vertical clearance shall be provided for all overhead structures. Vertical
clearance is measured from the crown of the street to the lowest portion of the structure on all
streets and alleys.

2.08 Sidewalks

(A) Required
Sidewalks are required on both sides of all new streets, except for residential streets that were
approved without required sidewalks pursuant to Chapter 9-12, “Subdivision,” B.R.C. 1981, and
Section 2.09, “Residential Streets.”

(B) Conformance with the Transportation Master Plan

Off-street sidewalks may be required as part of any project or development proposal in
conformance with the TMP.

(C) Compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

All public sidewalks shall comply with the requirements of the ADA’s “Standards for Accessible
Design,” which includes without limitation sidewalk widths, grades, locations, markings, surface
treatments, and access ramps.

(D) Minimum Widths

Sidewalk widths shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 2-12, “Minimum Sidewalk
Widths,” of these Standards.
Table 2-12: Minimum Sidewalk Widths

Minimum Sidewalk Width

Adjacent Land Use

Street Type Commercial/Retail Commercial/Industrial Residential

Local 12 5 4

Collector 12 5 5

Arterial 12 8 8
Note: All off-street multi-use/bike paths designated in the Transportation Master Plan shall be 12 feet wide.
2-20 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
(E) Vertical Grades
The vertical grade of a sidewalk shall not exceed 8.33 percent, a ratio of 12 feet horizontal to 1
foot vertical (12:1).

At sidewalk locations adjacent to transit stops or transfer points, the Director may require wider
sidewalk sections to provide for adequate passenger storage areas.

(F) Vertical Clearance

A minimum 8 foot vertical clearance shall be provided between all sidewalk and multi-use path
surfaces and any overhead encroachments.

2.09 Residential Streets

(A) Purpose
(1) The residential street standards were developed to allow a variety of choices in the
creation of new transportation corridors within the urban environment under conditions
that will not compromise the safety and function of the city street system. Traditionally
streets have provided the following:
(a) Corridors for pedestrian, bicycle, transit, and motor vehicle movement;
(b) Parking for vehicles;
(c) Fire, police, and emergency access;
(d) Locations for public utilities networks including water supply, sewage, electricity,
telecommunications and gas services, and refuge disposal; and
(e) Postal and other delivery services.
(2) These standards recognize that streets, if appropriately designed, may provide additional
community amenities including landscape buffers, attractive public gathering spaces,
opportunities for neighborhood interaction, public art, view corridors, and potential
avenues for new technologies.

(B) Scope

(1) Location of Streets

(a) These standards are intended to be used for new streets in undeveloped areas of
the city.
(b) Where infill development in the existing developed portions of the city requires
the creation of new streets, these alternative standards may be used if the Director
finds, after completing the review process described in Section (C) below, that the
new streets will not impair the functions of the surrounding transportation system
nor negatively impact the character of the surrounding existing development.
(c) Further, the Director may determine that these standards are appropriate for
redesigning and reconfiguring existing streets. Because the public cost of
retrofitting, reconfiguring, or redesigning existing streets is often expensive,
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-21
 decisions about reconstruction of individual streets in accordance with these
standards shall be made pursuant to the city’s Capital Improvements Program
process.

(2) Methods of Review

(a) Permitted: The following street types may be developed without review:
(i) Residential collector street
(ii) Residential street
(iii) Residential alley
(b) By Director Review: Residential streets listed in paragraph (B)(2)(a) and the street
types listed below may be developed upon approval by the Director under the
criteria outlined in Section (C) below.
(i) Rural residential street
(ii) Access street
(iii) Access lane
(c) By Site Review: Those underlined criteria and specifications in the following
residential street standards may be appropriate for modification under certain
limited circumstances. Developments requesting such modifications shall meet all
of the requirements of Section 9-2-14, “Site Review,” B.R.C. 1981, in addition to
the criteria outlined in Subsection (C), “Director Review,” below.
(3) Cumulative Standards: These street standards are intended to be used in combination
with Section 2.07, “Street Geometric Design,” of these Standards. Where the standards in
this section are silent, the criteria or specifications contained in Section 2.07 shall control.
(C) Director Review
(1) Application: As part of a subdivision application, the applicant for residential street
construction approval shall include plans that depict the building envelopes of all
proposed structures, and the location of proposed trees, street furniture, fire hydrants,
meter pits, utility cabinets, or pedestrians in the right-of-way.
(2) Criteria: The Director will consider the following factors in determining whether an
alternative street design is appropriate in a particular location:
(a) Urban Design: The street should contribute to the creation of an attractive
community and to a clearly defined sense of place. Streets shall be designed with
due attention to building spacing and setbacks, green spaces, attractive materials,
plantings, and landscaping. Pavement and right-of-way widths that are less than
the Residential Street standard should provide a benefit to the community that
includes improved safety, improved site design, the creation of street canopies
through landscaping, and secondary lot access through the use of alleys. Rural
Residential streets shall be consistent with the existing character of the area, or
with an approved subcommunity or area plan.
(b) Street Function: The street should be designed according to its function. This may
2-22 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 require a diversity of street types, each serving a role in a hierarchical system.
The street pattern and any reduced pavement or right-of-way widths should
provide acceptable levels of accessibility, safety and convenience for all street
users, including emergency service providers. The pattern shall discourage
residential streets from operating as pass through traffic routes for externally
generated traffic, while minimizing the length of time local drivers need to spend
in a low-speed environment.
(c) Connectivity: The neighborhood street pattern should be simple, and logical, with
the following characteristics:
(i) “No outlet” streets will be highly discouraged and allowed only when
street connectivity is unachievable:
(ii) The street pattern provides for safe and convenient movements for
pedestrians, bicycles, and motor vehicles, including transit.
(d) Design Speed: The design of the streets will control vehicular speeds under
normal driving conditions to that specified in the residential street standards,
while maintaining reasonable access for emergency vehicles.
(e) Minimize Maintenance Costs: The street will not create additional city obligations
for maintenance and repair that exceed a standard street section.
(f) Adequate Parking: The site design provides for adequate on-street and off-street
parking to serve the area.
(g) Infill Streets: In the case of infill development, the residential street design will
not impair the functioning of, and will have a compatible transition to, the
surrounding street system and will not negatively impact the character of the
surrounding existing development. No additional density may result from
approval of the reduced rights-of-way provided for in the case of Access Streets,
Access Lanes, or Residential Alleys.
(D) Residential Street Sections
Five residential street sections and a residential alley may be applied to the design of residential
neighborhoods as part of subdivisions approved pursuant to Chapter 9-12, “Subdivision,” B.R.C.
1981. Residential streets shall be designed in compliance with the standards outlined in Table
2-13, “Residential Street Design Standards,” “Technical Drawings 2.63 - 2.68,” Chapter 11, of
these Standards, and the requirements of this Section.
(1) Residential Collector Street: The residential collector street collects and distributes
neighborhood traffic from residential streets to community collector and arterial
transportation systems, and provides access to individual properties. The residential
collector street is designed for residential streets where anticipated traffic volumes range
from 1,000 to 2,500 vehicle trips per day. In addition to the requirements outlined in Table
2-13, “Residential Street Design Standards,” and “Technical Drawing 2.63,” Chapter 11,
the residential collector street shall be designed to meet the following minimum standards:
(a) Parking: On-street parking is allowed on both sides.
(b) Bicycle Facilities: Additional street and right-of-way width shall be provided
where onstreet bicycle lanes are required by a City-adopted subcommunity or area

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-23

 plan, the TMP, or the BVCP.
(c) Provision of Alleys: Where alleys are provided or required to be provided under a
City-adopted subcommunity or area plan, onsite parking spaces shall be accessed
from the alley and not the street.
(d) Emergency Response: Residential collectors exceeding 500 feet in length from
any intersection shall provide a secondary emergency access at 500-foot intervals.
(2) Residential Street: The residential street is designed to provide access to individual
properties as well as access to the higher classification street network. The residential
street provides for neighborhood circulation and may carry neighborhood traffic and
through movements. The residential street is designed to carry traffic volumes in the range
of 500 to 1,000 vehicles per day. The residential street shall be designed to meet the
minimum standards shown in Table 2-13, “Residential Street Design Standards,” and
“Technical Drawing 2.64,” Chapter 11, of these Standards.

2-24 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 Table 2-13: Residential Street Design Standards
Design Residential Residential Rural-Type Access Access Residential
Standards Collector Street Residential Street Lane Alley
Street
Design Speed 25 mph 25 mph 20 mph 15 mph 10 mph 10 mph
Design Traffic Volumes 1,000 -2,500 500 - 1,000 500 - 1,000 400 250 N/A
(Vehicle Trips Per Day)
Minimum Right-of-Way 60' 60' 60' 40' 30' 16'
Minimum Pavement 32' 30' 22' plus 2' 26' 20' 12'
Section gravel
shoulders
Sidewalk 5' 4' 4' where 4' N/A N/A
required
Streetscape Planting 8' 8' N/A N/A N/A N/A
Strip
Minimum Centerline 300' 150' 150' 100' 100' 100'
Radius
Minimum Curb Radius 20' 20' 20' 10' 10' 10'
Maximum Length 500' 500' 500' 350' 350' N/A
Between Connecting
Streets
Maximum Street Length 500' 500' 500' 150' 150' 500'
- No Outlet
Maximum Street Length 500' 500' 500' 500' 500' 500'
- Loop or Circle Street
Minimum Turn-Around 35' Radius 35' Radius 30' Radius 30' Radius 25' Radius 25' Radius
Area or “Y” or or “Y” or or “Y” or or “Y” or
“T” Turn “T” Turn “T” Turn “T” Turn
Emergency Response N/A N/A N/A 150' 150' N/A
Set Up Area Intervals
Sidewalk Placement Detached Detached Adjacent to Attached N/A N/A
Required Required Property
Line Where
Required
Curb and Gutter Required Required N/A Required N/A N/A
On-Street Parking Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Not
Allowed
Minimum Lot Frontages N/A N/A 60’ no alley 60' no alley 60' N/A
40’ w/ alley 40' w/alley

Maximum Number of N/A N/A N/A 25 single 15 single N/A

Units to be Accessed family family
NOTE: Residential street standards that are underlined may be varied through Section 9-2-14, “Site Review,” B.R.C.
1981.

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-25

 (a) Parking: Parking is allowed both sides or, on residential streets where parking is
restricted or prohibited, off-street parking courts providing parking spaces at a
ratio of 0.5 spaces per dwelling unit shall be provided.
(b) Bicycle Facilities: Additional street and right-of-way width shall be provided
where on-street bicycle lanes are required by a City-adopted subcommunity or
area plan, the TMP, or the BVCP.
(c) Provision of Alleys: Where alleys are provided or required to be provided under a
City-adopted subcommunity or area plan, onsite parking spaces shall be accessed
from the alley and not the street.
(d) Emergency Response: Residential streets exceeding 500 feet from any intersection
shall provide a secondary emergency access at 500-foot intervals.
(3) Rural Residential Street: The rural residential street is designed to provide access to
individual properties as well as access to the higher classification street network. The
rural residential street provides for neighborhood traffic and through movements, and is
designed to carry traffic volumes in the range of 500 to 1,000 vehicles per day. The rural
residential street shall be provided where prescribed by a City-adopted subcommunity or
area plan to maintain the rural character of an area or neighborhood. The rural residential
street is a curbless paved street section, with gravel shoulders for parking and open
roadside ditches for drainage. In addition to the requirements outlined in Table 2-13,
“Residential Street Design Standards,” and “Technical Drawing 2.65,” Chapter 11, the
rural residential street shall be designed to meet the following standards:
(a) Parking: Allowed on both sides of the street.
(b) Turnaround Standard (No Outlet Streets): If a “Y” or “T” turnaround is proposed
in place of a standard cul-de-sac bulb turnaround, the “Y” or “T” turnaround shall
be designed 60 feet long and 20 feet wide. The turnaround area (including
sidewalks if required) shall be contained within the dedicated right-of-way.
(c) Provision for Future Sidewalks: If sidewalks are not required at the time of initial
street construction, adequate space in the right-of-way shall be reserved for a
future sidewalk and commitments from adjacent property owners to participate in
assessment districts shall be obtained, so that sidewalks can be added and funded
in the future when they are appropriate.
(d) Sidewalk Placement (Where Required): Sidewalks shall be required where
vehicular traffic volumes are anticipated to exceed 1,000 trips per day, on routes
to school, and as prescribed by a City-adopted subcommunity or area plan.
Sidewalks shall be placed outside of the paved roadway and drainage ditch, and
inside the right-of-way line.
(e) Roadside Drainage Ditches: Sideslopes along roadside drainage ditches shall be
4:1, and driveway culverts, at least 12 inches in diameter with flared end sections
or headwalls, shall be installed by owners at driveways.
(f) Land Use Requirements: Lot frontages shall be at least 60 feet wide, unless alley
access is provided. Lot frontages with alley access shall be at least 40 feet wide.
Two onsite parking spaces, meeting all City requirements, shall be provided on
each single-family lot.

2-26 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 (g) Provision of Alleys: Where alleys are provided or required to be provided under a
City-adopted subcommunity or area plan, onsite parking spaces shall be accessed
from the alley and not the street.
(h) Emergency Response: Rural residential streets exceeding 500 feet from any
intersection shall provide a secondary emergency access at 500-foot intervals.
(4) Access Street: The access street provides public access to no more than 25 single-family
dwelling units, where anticipated vehicular volumes would not exceed 400 trips per day.
The access street is narrow, to ensure slower speeds for vehicular travel, and provides
sidewalks along both sides of the street. In addition to the requirements outlined in Table
2-13, “Residential Street Design Standards,” and “Technical Drawing 2.66,” Chapter 11,
the access street shall comply with the following minimum standards:
(a) Parking: Parking is allowed on both sides of the street or, if parking is not
provided on-street, a parking court at a ratio of 0.5 spaces per dwelling unit is
required.
(b) “L” Intersections: “L” intersections may be permitted as part of subdivision, and
are subject to approval by the Director. Where permitted, “L” intersections shall
have at least a 150-foot-long tangent street section from the intersection to the
closest curvature and a minimum corner radius of 50 feet.
(c) Circle or Loop Street: If a circle or loop street is proposed as part of subdivision,
the street shall connect to a higher classification street, or connect to two separate
perpendicular or offset higher classification streets.
(d) Turnaround Standard (No outlet streets): If a “Y” or “T” turnaround is proposed
in place of a standard cul-de-sac bulb turnaround, the “Y” or “T” turnaround shall
be designed with a 60 foot length, 20 foot width. The turnaround area (including
sidewalks if required) shall be contained within dedicated right-of-way.
(e) Land Use Requirements: A residential access street shall connect to a higher
classification street. Lot frontages shall be at least 60 feet wide, unless alley
access is provided. Lot frontages with alley access shall be at least 40 feet wide.
Two onsite parking spaces, meeting all City requirements, shall be provided on
each single-family lot.
(f) Provision of Alleys: Where alleys are provided or required to be provided under a
City-adopted subcommunity or area plan, onsite parking spaces shall be accessed
from the alley and not the street.
(g) Emergency Response: Access streets exceeding 175 feet from any intersection
shall provide a fire apparatus setup area at 150 foot intervals. The setup area shall
provide at least 30 foot long, 25 foot wide clear zone, and is subject to approval
by the Fire Department.
(5) Access Lane: The access lane provides public access to no more than 15 single family
dwelling units, where anticipated vehicular traffic volumes would not exceed 250 trips per
day. The access lane is a narrow “shared street” for all modes of travel (vehicular, bicycle,
and pedestrian), without curb and gutter or sidewalks, and must connect with a higher
classification street. In addition to the requirements outlined in Table 2-13, “Residential
Street Design Standards,” and “Technical Drawing 2.67,” Chapter 11, the access lane

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-27

 shall comply with the following minimum standards:
(a) Parking: Parking is allowed.
(b) “L” Intersections: “L” intersections shall have a minimum 150-foot long tangent
street section from the intersection to the closest curvature and a minimum corner
radius of 50 feet.
(c) Circle or Loop Street: A circle or loop street shall connect to a higher
classification street, or connect to two separate perpendicular or offset higher
classification streets.
(d) Turnaround Standard (No outlet streets): A “Y” or “T” turnaround shall be
designed with a 60 foot length, 20 foot width. The turnaround area (including
sidewalks if required) shall be contained within dedicated right-of-way.
(e) Land Use Requirements: An access lane shall connect to a higher classification
street. Lot frontages shall be at least 60 feet wide. Two onsite parking spaces,
meeting all City requirements, shall be provided on each single-family lot. If the
minimum lot frontage requirement is not met, additional parking spaces shall be
provided at a ratio of 0.5 spaces per dwelling unit as a part of the subdivision.
These required spaces shall be located on private property.
(f) Right-of-Way Landscaping: Landscaping other than ground cover or low
shrubbery shall be placed outside of the right-of-way.
(g) Emergency Response: Access streets exceeding 175 feet from any intersection
shall provide a fire apparatus setup area at 150 foot intervals. The setup area shall
provide a minimum 30-foot long, 25 foot wide clear zone, and is subject to
approval by the Fire Department.
(6) Residential Alley: The residential alley is to provide secondary vehicular access to the
rear of lots in detached single-family dwelling subdivisions with narrow street frontages,
in order to limit curb cuts from the street and increase on-street parking. Alleys are most
beneficial when lot widths are narrower than 50 feet. In addition to the requirements
outlined in Table 2-13, “Residential Street Design Standards,” and “Technical Drawing
2.68,” Chapter 11, the residential alley shall be designed to meet the following minimum
land use requirements: Backup distance for parking and garage access from the alley shall
be 24 feet, including the 16-foot alley right-of-way width, and the remaining backup
distance shall be provided on the lot being served.

2.10 Emergency Access Lanes

(A) Emergency Access Required
All industrial, commercial, and residential developments shall provide adequate emergency vehicle
access. Adequate emergency access is a minimum 20 foot wide unobstructed fire apparatus access
road with an unobstructed vertical clearance of 15 feet, and meets all applicable standards as set
forth in Chapter 10-8, “Fire Prevention Code,” B.R.C. 1981.
(B) When Emergency Access Lane is Required
When adequate emergency access is not available from a public street, an applicant for
construction approval shall construct an emergency access lane. Emergency access lanes must
accommodate all emergency vehicles, including fire equipment.
2-28 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
(C) Secondary Emergency Access
Secondary emergency access lanes shall be provided to structures whenever the distance to the
nearest public street equals or exceeds 500 feet. Secondary access lanes shall conform to all
design requirements specified for emergency access lanes.

(D) Local Emergency Access Lane Standards

In addition to the emergency access standards set forth in Chapter 10-8, “Fire Prevention Code,”
B.R.C. 1981., an emergency access lane shall equal or exceed the following standards:
(1) Direct Route: Emergency access lanes shall provide the shortest practical direct access to
points of concern, and be entirely contained within a minimum, continuous 20 foot wide
emergency access easement or public right-of-way.
(2) Distance From Structure: Emergency access lanes shall be provided whenever a
structure is located more than 150 feet from fire apparatus access.
(3) Surface: An emergency access lane shall consist of either of the following:
(a) Two concrete strips at least 4 feet wide, with a 4-foot separation between them.
Vegetation other than grass shall not be permitted in the separation area.
(b) A minimum continuous paved surface width of 12 feet.
(4) Radius: An emergency access lane shall provide a minimum turning radius of 25 feet, or
the radius needed to accommodate an SU-30 vehicle.
(5) Turnarounds: If the length of the emergency access lane exceeds 150 feet (without an
outlet accessible to emergency vehicles), then a turnaround with a minimum radius of 45
feet shall be provided.
(6) Grade: The grade for an emergency access lane shall not exceed five percent.
Exceptions may be allowed with specific approval from the City of Boulder Fire Chief
where this standard cannot be met due to topographical conditions.
(7) Vertical Clearance: Vertical clearance from the surface of the emergency access lane
shall be at least 15 feet.

(E) Unobstructed Access

Emergency access lanes shall be kept free and clear of all obstructions. If the Director or Fire
Chief determines that barriers are needed to prevent automobile traffic from using an emergency
access lane, then the applicant for construction approval shall install traffic bollards. Traffic
bollard designs shall provide for immediate access of emergency vehicles, without requiring these
vehicles to stop and maneuver around, or unlock, any structures. The Director and Fire Chief shall
have final approval of all bollard designs.

(F) Access Identification

Signs and pavement markings will be required if necessary by the Director and Fire Chief to
delineate and identify emergency access lanes. All signage for emergency access lanes shall
conform with the specifications in the MUTCD.

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-29

2.11 Bicycle Facilities and Multi-Use Path Design

(A) Conformance with Bicycle System Plan

The arrangement, type, and location of all bicycle paths, trails, and routes shall conform with the
“Bicycle System Plan” section in the TMP. All new construction shall conform to the standards
for bicycle lane facilities outlined in this section, the “Guide for the Development of Bicycle
Facilities” prepared by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
and the “Regulatory Negotiation Committee on Outdoor Developed Areas” prepared by the United
States Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (Access Board).

(B) On-Street Bike Lanes - Streets Without On-Street Parking

Bicycle lanes on new streets without on-street parking shall be at least 5 feet wide, exclusive of the
curb pan, or 6.5 feet from the face of any curb. On existing streets where on-street bike lanes are
being added and available right-of-way or improvements space is restricted, the width of the
bicycle lane may be reduced to at least 5 feet wide, inclusive of the curb pan.

(C) On-Street Bike Lanes - Streets With On-Street Parking

Bicycle lanes on new streets with on-street parking shall be at least 5 feet wide, exclusive of the
parking lane, or 13 feet from the face of any curb. On existing streets where on-street bike lanes
are being added and available right-of-way or improvements space is restricted, the width of the
bicycle lane may be reduced to at least 5 feet wide, exclusive of the parking lane, or 12 feet from
the face of any curb.

(D) Off-Street Bike Paths or Trails

Design for off-street bike trails or paths shall conform to the design guidelines detailed in the
City’s “Greenways Design Guidelines”adopted as part of the Tributary Green ways Master Plan.
Off-street bike trails or paths shall be at least 10 feet wide with an inside edge radius of at least 15
feet and shall conform to “Technical Drawing2.02D,” Chapter 11, of these Standards.

(E) Bicycle Parking

Bicycle parking should be located in a visible and prominent location that is lit at night and
physically separated from automobile parking to prevent vehicles from intruding into the bike
parking area. All bicycle parking constructed in the City of Boulder shall conform to the
provisions in the Section 9-9-6(g), “Bicycle Parking,” B.R.C. 1981 or as adopted in any
subcommunity or area improvement plan.
(1) Bicycle Parking in Public Right-of-Way: Bicycle parking racks located in the public
right-of-way shall be designed using either the inverted “U” rack standard or the inverted
“U” racks on rails standard. A minimum aisle of 5 feet shall be provided for bikes to
maneuver in when accessing the rack. All racks shall be attached to a concrete base using
a high security tamper proof anchor such as a mushroom head carbon steel expansion
anchor “spike” #5550 as manufactured by Rawl or an equivalent theft-proof device.
(a) Inverted “U” Rack: The inverted U rack is designed to park two bicycles, facing
opposite directions, parallel to the rack. For the rack to meet its design
2-30 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 specification of parking two bikes, it must be installed according to the
specifications below, otherwise it will be considered to provide parking for one
bike. The inverted U standard may be installed with the following conditions:
(i) Where the U rack is installed oriented parallel to a wall or curb, at least
3.0 feet shall be provided between the parallel wall or curb and the center
of the rack. Where a bike rack is located near a curb with “head-in”
automobile parking, a minimum distance of 5 feet from the curb to the
center of the rack is required to avoid damage to bicycles or racks by
automobiles extending across the curb over the sidewalk.
(ii) Where the U rack is installed oriented perpendicular to a wall or curb, a
minimum distance of 4 feet from the wall or curb to the center of the rack
will be provided to allow two bikes to access and use the rack.

(iii) Where placed side-by-side, bike racks shall be placed at least 3.5 feet
apart to accommodate ease of access to the racks.

(iv) Where placed in a series of 2 or more and parallel to a wall, inverted U

racks will be separated by a minimum distance of 10 feet between the
centers of the racks to allow access to both sides of the rack.
(v) The location of a bike rack shall maintain a minimum unobstructed
sidewalk width of 6 feet from any bicycle parked properly in the bike
rack.

(vi) The location of a bike rack shall maintain a minimum unobstructed

distance of 3 feet from any pedestrian curb ramp to any bicycle parked
properly in the bike rack.

(b) Inverted “U” Racks on Rails: The inverted U racks on rails are designed to park
four to ten bicycles, with two bikes facing opposite directions parked on either
side and parallel to each inverted U rack. These racks allow locking of frame and
wheel with a U-lock and support bikes with two points of contact. For the rack to
meet its design specifications of parking bikes from both sides, it must be installed
according to the conditions of the inverted U rack listed above; otherwise it will
be considered to provide no more than half of its designed parking capacity.

(2) Onsite Bicycle Parking: Bicycle parking should generally be provided within 50 feet of
the main building entrance. Racks must be installed according to the guidelines in (1)
above to reach their designed parking capacity. Otherwise, they shall be credited with no
more than half their design capacity. Bicycle parking racks or lockers located on
development or project sites or in parking lots outside of public right-of-way shall
generally be selected from the following standards:
(a) Inverted “U” Rack: The inverted “U” rack is recommended for most bike rack
installations, and is one of the standards for bicycle parking in public
rights-of-way as required in Subsection (1) above. Each rack provides space for

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-31

 two bicycles, and allows flexibility in parking by providing two supports for
attaching locks. The “U” rack may be used individually where space is limited,
or, in circumstances requiring a larger amount of bike parking, inverted “U” racks
on rails may be used to park four to ten bikes. Inverted “U” racks and inverted
“U” racks on rails shall meet the specifications for the dimensions and installation
shown in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards.
(b) Other Bike Rack Styles: Another rack style may be approved by the Director of
Public Works if it meets the following criteria:
(i) Provides at least two contact points between the rack and the bike to
securely support the bike;

(ii) Provides at least a 2 foot by 6 foot parking space for each bike without the
need to lift the handlebars of one bike over those of another to park;

(iii) Allows the frame and one wheel to be locked to the rack with a standard
high security, U-shaped shackle lock.

(iv) The rack is uncomplicated and intuitively simple for the bicyclist
to use.
(c) Lockers: Bicycle lockers provide secure weatherproof storage for bike parking.
Lockers are recommended for employee and longer-term parking and require
adequate space, since they require more area than bicycle racks.

2.12 Street Lighting

(A) Scope
The provisions of this section shall apply to public streets, and are subject to the restrictions
outlined in the Section 9-9-16, “Lighting, Outdoor,” B.R.C. 1981.

(B) Guidelines for Street Lighting

(1) Street Light Requests

(a) Public Service Company (PSC) of Colorado is responsible for providing street
lighting as requested by the City.
(b) Before considering new or additional local street light requests, the City will
require unanimous consent of all affected owners of property within 100 feet of
proposed street light locations and the support of at least 51 percent of the total
number of owners of properties within 500 feet of proposed locations.
(2) Costs: The installation costs of street light fixtures, excluding those that provide a
demonstrated safety need, shall be paid by the applicant requesting the installation. The
City will assume continued maintenance and energy costs associated with new
installations.
(3) Priorities for Installation: Streetlights may be provided on the basis of identified traffic
need with priorities established as follows:

2-32 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 (a) Reduction of an identified night time traffic accident problem correctable through
street light installation.
(b) Major traffic corridors with significant turning movement conflicts and night time
pedestrian activity.
(c) Major traffic corridors with significant night-time turning movement conflicts.
(d) Arterial and collector intersections and/or horizontal or vertical alignment
changes.
(e) Residential street lighting.
(f) Commercial alleys with significant night-time pedestrian activity.
(4) Design: Street lights installed in public rights-of-way shall be an energy efficient lighting
source (high pressure sodium or metal halide) with a minimum of ambient or reflected
light (full cut-off fixtures). The City has adopted the Illuminating Engineering Society's
(IES) American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting as the design standard
for all city streets, with the following modifications:
(a) Expressway and Arterial: Street lighting shall be based on IES standards.
(b) Other Streets: Street lighting may be provided at intersections and identified
pedestrian crossings only. Lighting may be considered at locations with
demonstrated needs based on changes in horizontal or vertical alignments.
Fixtures shall be 70-watt power unless street width or other conditions justify
higher wattage.
(c) Alleys: Except for alleys in commercial areas with significant night time
pedestrian activity, the city will not provide alley lighting.
(d) Private Driveways: Street lighting installed at the intersection of private driveways
and city streets shall be installed using City standards, be located outside of the
public right-of-way, and all costs for installation, maintenance, and continued
energy expenditures shall be the responsibility of the applicant requesting the
lighting installation.

(C) Easements
Adequate rights-of-way or utility easements shall be dedicated to the City to allow PSC of
Colorado to install street lights. Facilities with detached bike paths or sidewalks may use a
combined signage, utility, and pedestrian easement for placement of the street lights between the
curb and bikeway provided that the requirement for 2 feet of horizontal clearance from the
sidewalk or bike path is met. Where a bike path or sidewalk is attached to the street curb and
gutter, street lights shall be placed behind the sidewalk or path within a minimum 3-foot wide
utility easement. Utility easements for street lights are not exclusive, and may be landscaped or
used for parking subject to City approval. If there is an exclusive gas easement behind an attached
walk or path, the street lights shall be located beyond that easement in an additional three-foot
wide easement or the gas easement shall be relocated.

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 2-33

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 3
STREETSCAPE DESIGN AND TREE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page

3.01 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................1

(A) INTENT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1

(B) SCOPE.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS ................................................................................................................................................... 1
(D) CITY A PPROVAL REQUIRED............................................................................................................................................... 1

3.02 LANDSCAPING PLAN .........................................................................................................................................................1

(A) LANDSCAPING PLAN REQUIRED ......................................................................................................................................... 1

(B) TREE PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
(C) LANDSCAPING PLAN REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................................................ 2

3.03 S TREET TREES AND PLANTS...........................................................................................................................................2

(A) TREE SELECTION ................................................................................................................................................................ 2

(B) TREE PLACEMENT IN NON-PAVED M EDIANS AND LANDSCAPE PLANTING STRIPS........................................................ 5
(C) TREE PLACEMENT IN PAVED A REAS USING TREE GRATES AND PLANTING PITS ......................................................... 6
(D) PLANT SELECTION AND PLACEMENT FOR LANDSCAPING IN M EDIANS .......................................................................... 8

3.04 TREE REMOVAL AND RELOCATION ...............................................................................................................................9

(A) PERMIT REQUIRED FOR TREE REMOVAL OR RELOCATION .............................................................................................. 9

(B) UNDESIRABLE TREES FOR PUBLIC RIGHTS-OF -W AY .................................................................................................... 10
(C) TREE REMOVAL ................................................................................................................................................................ 10
(D) TREE RELOCATION (TRANSPLANTING)........................................................................................................................... 10

3.05 TREE PROTECTION FOR CONSTRUCTION S ITES........................................................................................................11

(A) TREE PROTECTION REQUIRED ......................................................................................................................................... 11

(B) TREE PROTECTION PROCEDURES .................................................................................................................................... 11

3.06 GENERAL LANDSCAPING AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................................14

(A) PROTECTING EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 14

(B) M AINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPING ................................................................................................................................... 14

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-i

 LIST OF TABLES

Number Page

Table 3-1: Approved Street Tree List for Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting Strips ....................................... 4
Table 3-2: Limitations on Individual Tree Species ..................................................................................................................... 5
Table 3-3: Tree Grates and Planting Pits Standards................................................................................................................... 6
Table 3-4: Approved Street Tree List for Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits……………………..….7
Table 3-5: Approved Median Shrub List..................................................................................................................................... 9
Table 3-6: Tree Characteristics………………………………………………………………………………….……15

3-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

3.01 General

(A) Intent
The Streetscape Design and Tree Standards are intended to improve public safety by preventing sight distance
and facility obstructions and sidewalk and street damage, to promote suitable landscape species selection for
streetscapes, to minimize tree and landscape maintenance costs, and to create an aesthetic community image
through continuity.

(B) Scope
These Standards apply to streetscapes and private construction sites where specified, and include the planting,
maintenance, pruning and spraying, and removal of trees and landscaping materials located, standing, or
growing within or upon any City of Boulder public right-of-way. The requirements of this chapter are in
addition to and compliment those set forth in Chapter 10, “Streetscaping Standards,” and applicable
streetscape drawings in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards and the B.R.C. 1981.

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, in order to protect the public health, safety, and
welfare, the Director of Public Works in consultation with the Director of Parks and Recreation will specify
the standards to be applied to the design and construction of streetscapes and the planting of trees, and may
refer to one or more of the references listed in the References Section of these Standards.

(D) City Approval Required

All work associated with the planting, maintenance, and removal of trees and landscaping materials located,
standing, or growing within or upon any City of Boulder public right-of-way is subject to City of Boulder
approval or permit issuance as set forth in Chapter 8-5, “Work in the Public Right-of-Way and Public
Easements,” and Chapter 6-6, “Protection of Tree and Plants,” B.R.C. 1981.

3.02 Landscaping Plan

(A) Landscaping Plan Required

An applicant for construction approval involving a project or development where streetscaping improvements
are to be provided or potentially impacted by the installation or construction of public improvements, or where
prescribed by a City-adopted subcommunity, area, or special improvement plan, shall submit a Landscaping
Plan in compliance with these Standards and those set forth in Chapter 6-6, “Protection of Trees and Plants,”
Chapter 9-3.3, “Site Development Standards,” and Chapter 9-5, “Subdivisions,” B.R.C. 1981.

(B) Tree Protection

The Landscaping Plan shall include design details and notes, construction activity controls and measures, and
any necessary provisions or restrictions to ensure the protection of existing trees as required in Chapter 6-6,
“Protection of Trees and Plants,” B.R.C. 1981, and Section 3.05, “Tree Protection for Construction Sites,” of
these Standards.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-1

(C) Landscaping Plan Requirements
The Landscaping Plan shall be prepared in compliance with the requirements in Section 1.03, “Submittal
Requirements for Construction Approval,” and shall include the following elements:
(1) Location, type, and size of all existing trees and landscaping materials, and identification of
any required tree protection measures as outlined in Section 3.02(B), “Tree Protection.”
(2) Design location, type, and size of all trees and landscaping materials proposed to be planted,
removed, or relocated.
(3) Location of existing and proposed public utilities and transportation improvements and public
rights-of-way boundaries.
(4) Specifications and construction notes for proposed tree and landscaping materials, including
without limitation, plant variety types, number and size of plants to be installed, location,
sizing, and design details for irrigation systems, planting and maintenance requirements for
specific species, tree protection systems and measures and tree grate type and installation
details.

3.03 Street Trees and Plants

(A) Tree Selection

(1) Trees proposed to be planted in non-paved public rights-of-way shall be selected from Table
3-1, “Approved Street Tree List for Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting Strips,”
unless an alternative tree selection has been approved by a City-adopted subcommunity, area
or special improvement plan. Other species and varieties of trees may be used, subject to
City approval. Alternative species and varieties should be thornless, cottonless, minimally
fruiting, minimally seeding, and tree-form varieties.
(2) Tree species that are not to be placed in public rights-of-way include: Box Elder,
Cottonwood, Chinese and Siberian Elm, Poplar, Russian Olive, Silver Maple, Tree of Heaven,
Willow, evergreens that create sight obstructions, and clump forms or multi-stem trees.
(3) Trees to be planted in non-paved medians or landscape planting strips shall be selected using
the minimum planting strip width requirements for the tree species listed in Table 3-1 for the
available planting strip width.
(4) Trees selected for narrow (4’-5’) planting strips must be upright forms of tree species under
the small tree category. Upright varieties of crabapple (‘Centurion’ and ‘Red Barron’) and
pear (‘Chanticleer’) are recommended for a 4’-5’ planting strip along arterial streets where a
high volume of traffic is a concern. Other crabapple varieties can be planted in a 4’-5’
planting strip along non-arterial streets or in a 6’-7’ planting strip.
(5) Trees shall not be planted in planting strips that are less than 4 feet wide or where the
planting strip is narrower than the required minimum planting strip width for specific tree
species.
(6) Evergreen trees shall not be selected for placement in public rights-of-way medians or
landscaping strips, due to the potential for overcrowding and sight obstructions, unless these
concerns can be mitigated and adequate planting strips at least 20 feet wide are provided.
(7) Whenever possible, trees should be selected from species noted as “drought tolerant” in
Table 3-1.

3-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 (8) A variety of trees, as required in Table 3-2, “Limitations on Individual Tree Species,” shall be
selected for planting within any given site or street corridor, including street medians and
curbside landscape strips, to prevent uniform disease susceptibility associated with planting a
single species.
(9) Trees proposed for the public rights-of-way in the Downtown Area shall follow the
guidelines outlined in the Downtown Urban Design Guidelines, 1999.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-3

 Table 3-1: Approved Street Tree List for Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting Strips
Trees on the following list will do well in our local environment provided the appropriate species is selected for a particular site.
(see Table 3-6, “Tree Characteristics”) The trees on this list offer a wide range of varieties and cultivars which fit into local
landscapes. Tree names are followed by examples of acceptable tree varieties that may be used in streetscapes. Other available
varieties of each tree type may be used, subject to City approval, if they are thornless, cottonless, minimally fruiting, minimally
seeding, and tree-form varieties. Trees are listed in alphabetical order and are not prioritized according to their suggested use.

Small Maturing Trees Medium Maturing Trees Large Maturing Trees

(Under 25' Mature Height) (30'-45' Mature Height) (Over 45' Mature Height)

Required Planting Strip Width Required Planting Strip Width Required Planting Strip Width
4'-5' Minimum 6'-7' Minimum 8' Minimum

Spacing Between Trees Spacing Between Trees Spacing Between Trees

15' Minimum, 20' Recommended 25' Minimum, 30' Recommended 30' Minimum, 40' Recommended

Crabapple- Malus spp. (Fireblight resistant varieties, Cherry - Prunus sargentii (Sargent) Ash, Green1,2 - Fraxinus pennsylvanica
inc. ‘Centurion,’ ‘Red Barron’) (‘Marshall’s Seedless,’ ‘Newport,’ ‘Patmore,’)

Goldenraintree1 - Koelreuteria paniculata Crabapple- Malus spp. (Fireblight resistant Ash, White2 - Fraxinus americana (‘Autumn
varieties, inc. ‘Indian Magic’, ‘Indian Summer’, Applause,’ ‘Autumn Purple,’ ‘Rosehill’)
‘Radiant’, ‘Spring Snow’)

Hawthorn - Crataegus spp. (thornless cockspur, Hackberry, Common1 - Celtis occidentalis (‘Prairie
‘Ohio Pioneer’) Tree Form Pride’) Baldcypress - Taxodium distichum

Lilac, Japanese tree- Syringa reticulata Tree Form Honeylocust1 - Gleditsia triacanthos var. inermis Catalpa, Western1 - Catalpa speciosa
(‘Imperial,’ ‘Sunburst’)

Maple, Amur1 - Acer ginnala Tree Hop Hornbeam - Ostrya virginiana Coffeetree, Kentucky1 - Gymnocladus dioicus
Form

Maple, Norway - Acer platanoides (‘Crimson Hornbeam, European - Carpinus betulus Elm, American - Ulmus americana (‘Brandon,’
Sentry’) ‘Valley Forge’)

Maple, Tatarian - Acer tataricum Tree Linden, Littleleaf - Tilia cordata (‘Corinthian’) Hackberry, Common1 - Celtis occidentalis
Form

Oak, Gambel - Quercus gambelii Tree Maple, Norway - Acer platanoides (‘Cavalier,’ Honeylocust1 - Gleditsia triacanthos var. inermis
Form ‘Drummondi’) (‘Shademaster,’ ‘Majestic’)

Pear - Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’ Maple, Hedge - Acer campestre Horsechestnut, Common - Aesculus
hippocastanum

Prunus - Prunus spp. (Cherries, Plums, Almonds, Maple, Wasatch1 - Acer grandidentatum Tree Linden, American - Tilia americana (‘Legend’,
Apricot1) Tree Form Form ‘Redmond’)

Redbud - Cercis canadensis Tree Ohio Buckeye1 - Aesculus glabra Linden, Littleleaf - Tilia cordata (‘Chancellor,’
Form ‘Greenspire’)

Serviceberry - Amelanchier spp. Tree Pear - Pyrus spp. (Ussurian, Callery - avoid Maple, Norway - Acer platanoides (‘Deborah,’
Form ‘Bradford’ variety) ‘Emerald Queen’)

Turkish Filbert - Corylus colurna Maple, Red - Acer rubrum (‘Northwood’, ‘Red
Sunset’)

Maple, Sugar - Acer saccharum (‘Green

Mountain’, ‘Legacy’)

Oak - Quercus spp. (Bur1, English, Red, Shumard,

Swamp White1)
1 Indicates drought-tolerant species.
2 Green/White ash should be used sparingly and not in large rows or groupings because of major problems with brownheaded ash sawfly and lilac/ash borer.

3-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 Table 3-2: Limitations on Individual Tree Species

(The following table applies to trees in both Table 3-1 and Table 3-4.)

Number of Trees in the Site or Corridor Maximum Percentage of Any One Species
10-19 50%

20-39 33%

40 and Over 25%

(B) Tree Placement in Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting Strips

(1) Tree placement of deciduous and evergreen trees shall be designed and based on the
expected mature height and canopy spread for the selected species, to prevent unnecessary
competition or overcrowding of trees.
(2) Trees shall not be placed where the expected mature height and canopy spread could
obstruct sight distance of any public sign, driveway, alley, or intersection, as set forth in
Section 9-3.3-5, “Sight Distance,” B.R.C. 1981, or where the physical obstruction of any
sidewalk, trail, alley, or street lane could occur.
(3) New or transplanted trees shall not be placed within 10 feet of existing underground utility
lines. New underground utilities should not be placed within 10 feet of existing trees without
the prior review and approval of the Director.
(4) Trees shall not be placed within 20 feet of any utility pole or pedestal. When tree placement
is allowed under overhead power lines, only those tree species listed as “Small Maturing
Trees” on Table 3-1, “Approved Street Tree List,” shall be planted.
(5) Trees should be located at least 10 feet away from buildings and offset from building
entrances. When available space is limited, only species with column-shaped or
pyramid-shaped forms shall be planted.
(6) Trees may be planted in right-of-way landscape planting strips adjacent to existing trees on
private property only when all trees have enough space to grow to their expected mature
size. Trees with narrow forms should be used in the right-of-way when there is the potential
for overcrowding with existing trees.
(7) Trees shall be planted in the center of right-of-way planting strips, or appropriately placed
for mature height and spread, to prevent root damage to sidewalks and street facilities and to
avoid a sight distance obstruction.
(8) Trees shall not be placed in medians or landscape planting strips less than 4 feet wide or
where the planting strip is narrower than the required minimum planting strip width for
specific tree species as listed in Table 3-1, “Approved Street Tree List for Non-paved
Medians and Landscape Planting Strips.”
NOTE: For detached sidewalk landscaped planting strips, the planting strip width is measured
from the back edge of curb to the front edge of the sidewalk.
(9) Evergreen trees shall be placed at least 10 feet behind the edge of pavement, curbs or
sidewalks, or far enough to permit clearance of the tree’s mature canopy spread.
(10) Evergreens shall not be placed on the south sides of east-west running streets.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-5

 (11) Deciduous trees shall not be placed in the right-of-way where the planting strip behind an
attached sidewalk, edge of pavement, or curb along roadways without sidewalks extends
less than 4 feet from the back edge of the sidewalk, pavement, or curb to the property line.
(12) Tree spacing for trees placed in landscaped planting strips shall comply with the “Spacing
Between Trees” requirements listed in the species headings in Table 3-1, “Approved Street
Tree List for Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting Strips.” Tree placement should
meet the recommended tree spacing and shall not be less than the minimum tree spacing
requirements.

(C) Tree Placement in Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits
(1) Trees using tree grates and planting pits shall be placed in compliance with the design
standards for tree spacing, tree grate areas, and planting pit sizes as listed in Table 3-3, “Tree
Grates and Planting Pits Standards” and Table 3-4, “Approved Street Tree List for Paved
Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits.”

Table 3-3: Tree Grates and Planting Pits Standards

Tree Species Size Tree Spacing Minimum Tree Grate Minimum Tree Pit
Area Volume
(Width x Length) (Width x Length x Depth)

Small Tree 10 Ft. minimum, 20 Sq. Ft. minimum, 60 Cu. Ft. minimum,
15 Ft. recommended 4 Ft. min. width 3 Ft. min. depth
(Ex. 4 ft. x 5 ft.) (Ex. 4 ft. x 5 ft. x 3 ft.)

Medium Tree 15 Ft. minimum, 32 Sq. Ft. minimum, 96 Cu. Ft. minimum,
20 Ft. recommended 4 Ft. min. width 3 Ft. min. depth
(Ex. 4 ft. x 8 ft.) (Ex. 4 ft. x 8 ft. x 3 ft.)

Large Tree 20 Ft. minimum, 40 Sq. Ft. minimum, 120 Cu. Ft. minimum,
25 Ft. recommended 4 Ft. min. width 3 Ft. min. depth
(Ex. 4 ft. x 10 ft.) (Ex. 4 ft. x 10 ft. x 3 ft.)

3-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

Table 3-4: Approved Street Tree List for Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits

S MALL MATURING TREES MEDIUM MATURING TREES LARGE MATURING TREES

(Under 25' Mature Height) (30'-45' Mature Height) (Over 45' Mature Height)

Crabapple – Malus spp. (Fireblight resistant Crabapple – Malus spp. Fireblight resistant Ash, Green, 1,2 – Fraxinus pennsylvanica
varieties inc. ‘Centurion, ‘Red Barron’) varieties inc. ‘Indian Summer, Indian Magic’, (‘Marshall’s seedless,’ ‘Newport,’ Patmore,’)
‘Radiant’, ‘Spring Snow’)

Goldenrain1 - Koelreuteria paniculata Hackberry1 - Celtis occidentalis (‘Prairie Coffeetree, Kentucky1 - Gymnocladus dioicus
Pride’)

Hawthorn - Crataegus spp. (thornless Honeylocust1 - Gleditsia triacanthos var. Hackberry, Common1 - Celtis occidentalis
cockspur, ‘Cruzam,’ ‘Ohio Pioneer’) inermis (‘Imperial’ ‘Sunburst’)
Tree Form

Lilac - Syringa reticulata (Japanese tree) Hop Hornbeam - Ostrya virginiana Honeylocust1 -Gleditsia triacanthos var.
Tree Form inermis (‘Shademaster,’ ‘Majestic’)

Maple, Amur1 - Acer ginnala Hornbeam, European - Carpinus betulus Linden, American - Tilia americana
Tree Form (‘Legend’, ‘Redmond’)

Maple, Tatarian - Acer tataricum Linden, Littleleaf - Tilia cordata Linden, Littleleaf - Tilia cordata
Tree Form (‘Corinthian’) (‘Chancellor,’ ‘Greenspire’)

Oak, Gambel - Quercus gambelii Ohio Buckeye1- Aesculus glabra Maple, Red - Acer rubrum (‘Northwood’,
Tree Form ‘Red Sunset’)

Pear - Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’ Pear - Pyrus spp. (Ussurian, Callery - avoid Oak - Quercus spp. (Bur1, English, Red,
‘Bradford’ variety) Shumard, Swamp White1)

Prunus - Prunus spp. (Cherries, Plums, Turkish Filbert - Corylus colurna

Almonds, Apricot1)
Tree Form

Serviceberry - Amelanchier spp.

Tree Form

1 Indicates drought-tolerant species.

2 Green ash should be used sparingly and not in large rows or groupings because of major problems with
brownheaded ash sawfly and lilac/ash borer.

(2) Tree grates and planting pits shall be provided in locations where a hard surface or paved
area is required to adequately accommodate pedestrians, including without limitation
downtown or commercial sidewalks, malls, and plazas. The tree grate allows air and
moisture to reach tree roots and limits compaction of the soil around the tree to maintain
healthy growth.
(3) Trees using tree grates shall not be placed where the expected mature height and canopy
spread could obstruct sight distance of any public sign, driveway, alley, or intersection, as
set forth in Section 9-3.3-5, “Sight Distance,” B.R.C. 1981, or where the physical
obstruction of any sidewalk, trail, alley, or street lane could occur.
(4) Trees using tree grates shall not be placed within 10 feet of any existing underground utility
line or within 20 feet of any utility poles or pedestal. When tree placement is allowed under
overhead power lines, only those tree species listed as “Small Maturing Trees” on Table 3-4,
“Approved Street Tree List for Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and Planting Pits,” shall be
planted.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-7

 (5) Trees using tree grates should be located at least 10 feet away from buildings and offset
from building entrances. When available space is limited, only species with column-shaped
or pyramid-shaped forms shall be planted.
(6) Adequate growing space between the tree trunk and first ring of the tree grate shall be
provided to allow the tree to grow properly without girdling. The opening in the center of
the tree grate through which the tree grows shall provide 4-6 inches of clearance from the
tree trunk and be at least 12 inches in diameter. The tree shall be centered within the tree
grate opening.
(7) If large-area tree grates are not available or cannot be used, the required permeable surface
area may be provided by using multiple tree grates that are at least 4 feet wide, or by
providing a single tree grate around the tree trunk that is at least 4 feet wide in conjunction
with natural permeable materials, such as landscaping pavers, over the remainder of the
planting pit surface. Any non-standard tree grate frame installation shall have adequate
structural support and be approved by the Director.
(8) The soil surface within a planting pit and beneath a tree grate shall be level with the bottom
of the sidewalk slab. This is to avoid problems with root flares lifting grates as the tree
grows and allows the roots to find air and water. Trees are then to be planted so that the top
of the root ball is 2” above the finished grade of the soil.
(9) Planting pits shall be 3 feet deep and have the same surface area as the required tree grate
area, and may not be deepened unless warranted by the depth of the root ball of the tree to
be planted. A planting pit shall not be deepened to increase pit volume as an alternative to
providing the minimum tree grate surface area.
(10) The growth of trees using tree grates shall be monitored to ensure that inner grate rings or
the entire tree grate is removed as necessary to prevent girdling the tree.
(11) Tree grates shall be flush with the final surface grades.
(12) All tree grates shall be installed per the manufacturer’s specifications. Grates shall be
supported by a frame which has anchors embedded in the surrounding concrete. Final
frame dimensions shall be 1/16 to 1/8-inch larger than the grate dimension on all sides to
allow the grate to drop into the frame seat. Frame sections are to be bolted together and cast
into the surrounding concrete. Frames must be level and the seat for the grate must be in a
true, flat, plane to prevent rocking of the grate. The seat for the grate shall be cleaned prior
to setting the grate. To ensure proper fit, the grate or a template should be placed in the
frame before concrete is poured so that the final installation will be square and level.
(13) Tree grates are to be of the pedestrian safe style with slot openings 3/8-inch in width or less.

(D) Plant Selection and Placement for Landscaping in Medians

(1) Plants proposed to be planted in medians in the public right-of-way shall be selected from
Table 3-1, “Approved Street Tree List for Non-paved Medians and Landscape Planting
Strips, or Table 3-4, “Approved Street Tree List for Paved Areas Using Tree Grates and
Planting Pits,” or Table 3-5, “Approved Median Shrub List,” unless an alternative plant
selection has been approved by a City-adopted subcommunity, area or special improvement
plan.
(2) Median plants selection and placement shall be designed and based on the expected mature
height and spread of the selected species, to prevent unnecessary competition or
overcrowding of plants and to ensure that the selected mature plants remain within the

3-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 median width without requiring excessive or frequent pruning.
(3) Median plants shall not be placed where the expected mature height and spread could
obstruct sight distance of any public sign, intersection, or crosswalk as set forth in Section
9-3.3-5, “Sight Distance,” B.R.C. 1981.
(4) Plant species that are not well-suited for median environments and should not be placed in
medians in the public right-of-way include: Junipers (select species including `Blue Pfitzer’,
`Blue Rug’, `Calgary Carpet’, `Pfitzers’, `Sea Green’, and `Tam’) Bridal Wreath Spirea,
Flowering Crabs, Forsythia, Ginnala Maple, Honeysuckle, Pyracantha, and Redtwig
Dogwood.

Table 3-5: Approved Median Shrub List

Amorpha, var. (‘Leadplant,’ ‘Indigo Bush,’ etc.)* Mountain Mohagany*

Apache Plume - Fallugia paradoxa* Potentilla – Potentilla fruticosa

Artemisia (‘Powis Castle’)* Prunus besseyi, tenella*

Barberry Rabbitbrush* - Chrysothamnus nauseosus

Cliffrose, Mexican - Cowania mexicana* Sage, Russian – Perovskia atriplicifolia*

Cotoneaster (various) Sagebrush* - Artemisia sp. (‘Big,’ ‘Sand’)

Cranberrybush - Virburnum opulus (‘Compactum’) Serviceberry – Amelanchier alnifolia*

Fernbush - Chamaebatiaria millefolium Shrub Rose (various)

Juniper (‘Arcadia,’ ‘Blue Chip,’ ‘Broadmoor,’ ‘Buffalo,’ Snakeweed – Gutierrezia sarothrae*

‘Hughes,’ ‘Scandia’)
Spirea (‘Bluemist*,’ bulmalda, ‘Mongolian’)

Lilac* - (‘Dwarf,’ ‘Littleleaf’) Sumac* - Rhus aromatica (‘Grolow’)

* Indicates drought-tolerant species.

3.04 Tree Removal and Relocation

(A) Permit Required for Tree Removal or Relocation

(1) An applicant for construction approval shall not remove or relocate any tree existing within
any public right-of-way without first having a landscaping plan approved and obtaining a
right-of-way permit.
(2) An applicant for construction approval may not request City approval nor propose as part of
a landscaping plan for a project or development the removal or relocation of a tree in the
public right-of-way unless:
(a) The site cannot feasibly be developed, through design or construction alternatives,
without removing or relocating the tree, and the applicant mitigates the loss of the
tree,
(b) The tree is determined by the City to be undesirable as outlined in Section 3.04(B),
“Undesirable Trees for Public Rights-of-Way,’ below, or
(c) The City is requiring the removal of a tree as part of construction approval.
(3) Where tree mitigation is required for tree removal, trees required to be planted as part of

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-9

 standard project or development approval will not be counted towards the required
mitigation.

(B) Undesirable Trees for Public Rights-of-Way

The City may determine that certain trees located within the public right-of-way are undesirable and may
recommend or require removal of these trees if:
(1) The trees are less than 1 inch in caliper, usually representing volunteer trees or suckers that
seldom conform to selection and placement standards, and are smaller than would be
required for new plantings.
(2) The trees are smaller than 12 inches in diameter and are listed as trees not to be placed in the
public right-of-way in Section 3.03(A)(2).
(3) Trees that have been severely damaged or are in poor general health, as determined by the
City under generally accepted forestry standards. This determination will not apply if the
damage or poor general health is the result of actions of the adjacent property owner or the
applicant for construction approval..
(4) Trees that, due to their species, location, or density would not conform to the existing
streetscape standards for tree placement or spacing as outlined in these Standards.

(C) Tree Removal

(1) Trees shall only be removed in compliance with a landscaping plan, approved by the City as
set forth in these Standards.
(2) All trees to be removed shall be marked with an “X” in blue permanent marking and
approved by the City prior to removal.
(3) All tree removal shall include stump grinding to a minimum depth of 12 inches.

(D) Tree Relocation (Transplanting)

(1) Trees with a “transplanting ease” rating of 1 or a 2, as defined in the Tree and Shrub
Transplanting Manual, are considered eligible for transplanting, subject to City approval. All
transplanting shall be in a location approved by the City.
(2) Trees eligible for transplanting shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Be 8 inches or less in caliper, unless approved by the City, and
(b) Have a root ball size of 1 foot per 1 inch of trunk caliper, evenly distributed on all
sides from the center line of the trunk. For example, a tree with a 4-inch caliper
shall have a root ball with a 4-foot diameter, evenly distributed with 2 feet on all
sides from the centerline of the trunk.
(3) Transplanting shall be done only by an experienced tree professional and according to a
landscaping plan approved by the City.
(4) The applicant for construction approval shall ensure that the transplanted tree survives
without significant loss of tree value in compliance with the tree protection standards set
forth in Chapter 6-6, “Protection of Trees and Plants,” B.R.C. 1981.
(5) Transplanting periods:
(a) Transplanting shall be done between February 15 and April 30 for all trees, except

3-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 for trees identified in the Tree and Shrub Transplanting Manual as unsuitable for
early spring transplanting.
(b) Trees identified as unsuitable for early spring transplanting shall be transplanted only
between September 15 and October 30.

3.05 Tree Protection For Construction Sites

(A) Tree Protection Required

(1) An applicant for construction approval shall protect trees and plants in the public
right-of-way and on any project or construction site where public improvements are
proposed.
(2) An applicant for construction approval shall submit a landscaping plan incorporating
proposed tree protection measures for any existing trees located in the public right-of-way
and on site at any project or construction site where public improvements are proposed in
compliance with these Standards.
(3) The landscaping plan shall identify any potential detrimental effects to existing trees that
might result from proposed construction activities within 20 feet of the dripline of any
existing trees located on site or in the adjacent public right-of-way. The plan shall include
the species, size, and location of all existing trees that are 1-inch or larger caliper size. If no
existing trees are present that require protection, this shall be noted on the plan. Existing
trees approved to be removed or relocated shall be clearly identified on the landscaping plan.
(4) The applicant for construction approval shall notify the City within 24-hours of any
suspected damage to trees resulting from construction activities. If damage occurs during
construction, the applicant shall have the damaged tree restored immediately by a qualified
arborist.

(B) Tree Protection Procedures

(1) Protective Maintenance: An applicant for construction approval shall provide maintenance
and care for existing trees required to be protected on site and in the public right-of-way
adjacent to any project or construction site during construction activities and the public
improvement warranty period to ensure that existing trees survive and are not damaged.
(2) Soil Compaction Prevention
(a) To prevent soil compaction, designated routes for equipment and foot traffic by
work crews shall be determined prior to commencing construction activities and
indicated in the landscaping tree protection plan.
(b) These planned routes shall be marked at the site before construction commences
with durable fencing material that is at least 4 feet high. Flagging tape or any other
material that may be torn down, moved, or evaded is not acceptable.
(c) The contractor shall inform all construction crew members on the site of access
routes and will ensure that only these routes are used.
(d) To prevent tree root smothering, no soil stockpiles, supplies, equipment, or any
other material shall be placed or stored within a tree dripline or within 15 feet of the
tree trunk for column-shaped trees, whichever distance is greater.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-11

 (e) Soil around a tree dripline may be required to be aerated during and after
construction activities. This is necessary even when compaction results from heavy
foot traffic. A professional arborist shall do the vertical aeration or soil fracturing.
Oil fracturing techniques comparable to using a “growgun” with Isolite material are
acceptable. Conventional turf aeration is not acceptable.
(f) When foot traffic or equipment use is unavoidable within the dripline, the area within
the dripline shall be mulched with wood chips to a depth of 6 inches before
construction activity begins. A 6-inch mulch depth shall be maintained for the
duration of the project, then removed when construction activities are completed.
(3) Root Protection
(a) Tree roots shall not be cut unless cutting is unavoidable.
(b) When root cutting is unavoidable, a clean, sharp cut shall be made to avoid
shredding or smashing. Root cuts should be made back to a lateral root.
(c) Whenever possible, tree roots should be cut between late fall and bud opening, when
root energy supplies are high and conditions are least favorable for disease causing
agents.
(d) The City shall be notified of any cutting of the following roots:
(i) Two roots having a diameter of more than 3 inches, or
(ii) Four roots having diameters between 2 and 3 inches.
(e) Trenches shall be hand-dug within the dripline in areas where roots 2 inches and
larger in diameter are present, and when low branches which may be damaged by
equipment are present.
(f) Whenever possible, roots 2 inches or larger in diameter shall be tunneled or bored
under and shall be covered to prevent dehydration. Exposed roots shall be covered
immediately with soil or burlap and kept moist.
(g) Power tools shall not be used to prune roots, with the exception of arboriculturally
approved root-cutting equipment used under the supervision of the City. Only the
following approved tools shall be acceptable: scissors-type hand pruners and
loppers, except anvil-types, and arborist-type pruning saws.
(h) When more than one root 2 inches or larger in diameter on any public tree is cut,
supplemental watering shall be provided if the tree lacks an operational sprinkler
system. The applicant or abutting landowner shall provide the watering.
(i) Sidewalk and paving surfaces shall be sufficiently contoured to avoid cutting surface
tree roots. Whenever possible, tree roots should be bridged or floated over with
walks.
(j) To allow maximum aeration and water penetration to roots, walk materials other
than concrete may be selected (e.g., brick, flagstone, honeycomb block, chips,
gravel) subject to City approval. Under no circumstances shall impervious material
make contact with or completely encircle a tree trunk.
(k) Auger tunneling, not trenching, shall be used where possible for utility placement
within the dripline of a tree.
(l) If roots are cut between March and August, trees may need supplemental deep root
watering once per week for at least 2 months after the roots are cut. When roots

3-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 are cut between September 1 and October 15, trees may need supplemental watering
once per week until at least October 31.
(m) Tree roots shall not be fertilized for a period of 1 year following the cessation of
construction activities. Thereafter, for the next 2 years, a light annual fertilization
using a slow release nitrogen source is acceptable.
(4) Tree Fencing
(a) Fencing material shall encircle any tree whose outer dripline edge is within 20 feet of
any construction activities.
(b) Fencing material shall be a bright, contrasting color, durable, and at least 4 feet high.
Fence posts shall be comparable to metal T-posts or heavier posts and placed at
least 2 feet below ground.
(c) Fencing material shall be placed at the dripline or at least 15 feet from any tree trunk,
whichever distance is greater, and maintained in an upright position throughout the
duration of construction activities.
(d) The applicant for construction approval shall indicate fencing locations on the
landscaping tree protection plan.
(e) Heavy objects, such as wood pallets or metal railings, shall not lean against or come
into contact with any tree trunk.
(5) Grade Changes: Grade changes, such as removing topsoil or adding fill material, shall not
occur within the dripline of any existing tree. If necessary as part of project or site
development, retaining walls and tree wells to maintain the existing grade within the dripline
of any tree may be acceptable when constructed prior to site grading changes near the tree.
A landscaping plan containing an illustrated design scheme of the tree protection
improvement shall be approved by the City prior to initiating any grade changes near existing
trees.
(6) Transplanting: Any proposed or required transplanting shall conform with the requirements
in Section 3.04(D), “Tree Relocation (Transplanting).”
(7) Chemical/Foreign Material Disposal
(a) Disposing of chemicals or foreign material anywhere on site or in the public
right-of-way is prohibited. This shall include, but is not limited to: paint, stain,
solvents, concrete or any construction material onsite, and rinse water from any
cans or tools containing chemicals.
(b) Soil samples may be taken to determine the presence of chemicals or foreign
materials for any planter containing proposed or existing plant material.
(8) Pruning: Pruning shall not occur during construction activities or the public improvement
warranty period, except to remove dead or damaged branches or to prevent branch damage
that could occur during construction, without the prior approval of the City. Pruning of
healthy branches shall be delayed for a period of 2 years after construction activities are
completed.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-13

3.06 General Landscaping and Maintenance Requirements

(A) Protecting Existing Improvements

An applicant for construction approval shall preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and
public improvements from damage due to construction activities.
(1) Utilities: The applicant shall ask the appropriate utility company to stake exact locations and
depths of all water, sewer, electric, gas, or telephone lines prior to excavation, and shall take
the necessary precautions to protect underground lines from damage. If damage occurs, the
applicant shall pay all repair costs.
(2) Existing Trees: Protection shall comply with Section 3.05, “Tree Protection for
Construction Sites.”
(3) Responsibility for Damages: The applicant shall be responsible for any damage to trees,
plants, fences, buildings, roadways, sidewalks, and public and private property resulting
from the applicant’s activities. The City may require an applicant to provide, at no cost to
the City, devices to prevent damage to fragile plant materials or structures.
(4) Omissions and Discrepancies: Omissions from any approved landscaping plan or
specifications that affect the intent of the plans or specifications, or that are customarily
performed, shall be performed as if fully and clearly set forth and described in the plans and
specifications.

(B) Maintenance of Landscaping

(1) Landscaping maintenance shall begin immediately after each area is planted and shall continue
following City acceptance through the applicable warranty period as set forth in Section
9-3.3-4, “Landscape Replacement,” Section 9-4-13, “Required Improvements and Financial
Guarantees,” or Section 9-5-11, “Public Improvement Warranty,” B.R.C. 1981.
(2) Landscaping maintenance shall include, without limitation, watering, weeding, cultivating,
mulching, tightening and repairing of guys, removing dead branches, resetting plants to
proper grade or upright position, replacing dead plants and protecting the site from damage
or vandalism.
(3) If required by the City, the applicant for construction approval shall furnish written
maintenance instructions to the City for the care and maintenance of all newly planted areas
for the applicable warranty period. These instructions shall include, but are not limited to:
staking, pruning, insect and disease control, and fertilizing.

3-14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 Table 3-6: Tree Characteristics
The following table describes the typical characteristics of trees on the Approved Street Tree List when planted in non-paved
landscape planting strips. Trees growing in tree grates or planting pits will have an overall mature height of approximately 1/3 less
than that of trees in non-paved areas.

Small Maturing Trees

(Under 25’ Mature Height)

COMMON & SCIENTIFIC NAME SIZE AND FORM CHARACTERISTICS

15-25' ht., 7-15' spread, broad Adaptable water requirements once

Crabapple (Malus ‘Red Barron’ or
upright established, adapts well, attractive blossoms
Malus ‘Centurion’
in early spring, very little to no fruit, resistant
to fireblight, requires full sun

20-25' ht., 15-20' spread, broadly Drought tolerant once established, tolerates
Goldenraintree (Koelreuteria
globe-shaped wide range of soil types, attractive yellow
paniculata)
flowers in mid-summer, yellow fall color,
grows in full sun or partial shade

15-25' ht., 15-25' spread, broadly Adaptable water requirements once

Hawthorn (Crataegus spp. - thornless
globe-shaped, plant tree form established, tolerates salt and alkaline soils,
cockspur or ‘Ohio Pioneer’)
only attractive blossoms in spring, thornless,
resistant to fireblight but susceptible to rust,
requires full sun

15-25' ht., 15-20' spread, Adaptable water requirements, attractive

Lilac, Japanese tree (Syringa
moderately globe-shaped, plant white blossoms in late spring, golden fall
reticulata)
tree form only color, grows in full sun or partial shade

15-20' ht., 15-20' spread, broadly Drought tolerant once established, can
Maple, Amur (Acer ginnala)
globe-shaped to irregular, plant become chlorotic in alkaline soils, brilliant red
tree form only to orange or yellow fall color, requires full
sun

25' ht., 15' spread, dense and Adaptable water requirements once
Maple, Norway (Acer platanoides
columnar established, dark purple foliage in spring and
‘Crimson Sentry’)
summer, susceptible to sunscald, requires full
sun

20-25' ht., 15-20' spread, Adaptable water requirements once

Maple, Tatarian (Acer tataricum)
moderately globe-shaped, plant established, seeds are a rosy red color,
tree form only yellow to orange red fall color, grows in full
sun or partial shade

10-25' ht., 10-15' spread, broadly Tolerant of dry and alkaline soils, Colorado
Oak, Gambel (Quercus gambelii)
globe-shaped, plant tree form native, yellow to red fall color, requires full
only sun

20-30' ht., 15-20' spread, narrow Adaptable water requirements once

Pear (Pyrus calleryana ‘Chanticleer’)
pyramidal shape established, tolerates salt and alkaline soils,
attractive white blossoms in spring, maroon
fall color, resistant to fireblight, requires full
sun

20-25' ht., 20-30' spread, Adaptable water requirements, most have

Prunus (Prunus spp.) Ex. Cherries,
moderately globe-shaped, plant attractive spring blossoms, bears fruit, grows
Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-15
 plums, almonds, apricot tree form only in full sun or partial shade

20-25' ht., 20-30' spread, Moist to adaptable water requirements, needs

Redbud (Cercis canadensis)
moderately globe-shaped, plant protected location, pink to lavender blossoms
tree form only in early spring, yellow fall color, prefers
filtered shade to shade

25' ht., 10-20' spread, moderately Adaptable water requirements once

Serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.)
ovate-shaped, plant tree form established, prefers acidic soils, attractive
only flowers in early spring, yellow to orange red
fall color, plant varieties resistant to
fireblight, grows in sun or shade
Medium Maturing Trees
(30-45’ Mature Height)

COMMON & SCIENTIFIC NAME SIZE AND FORM CHARACTERISTICS

Adaptable water requirements, attractive
30-45' ht., 20-30' spread,
Cherry, Sargent (Prunus sargentii) blossoms in spring, bears fruit, grows in
moderately globe-shaped
full sun or partial shade
Adaptable water requirements once
15-30' ht., 15-30' spread, broad
Crabapple (Malus ‘Indian Magic’, ‘Indian established, adapts well, attractive
globe-shaped to rounded
Summer’, ‘Radiant’, ‘Spring Snow’) blossoms in early spring, very little to no
fruit, resistant to fireblight, requires full
sun
Drought tolerant once established,
45' ht., 30-40' spread, moderately
Hackberry (Celtis occidentalis ‘Prairie Pride’) tolerates a wide range of soil conditions,
pyramidal-shaped
yellow fall color, does not develop witches
broom, grows in full sun to partial shade
Adaptable water requirements once
15-25' ht., 15-20' spread, broadly
Hawthorn (Crataegus spp. - thornless cockspur or established, tolerates salt and alkaline
globe-shaped
‘Ohio Pioneer’) soils, attractive blossoms in spring,
thornless, resistant to fireblight but
susceptible to rust, requires full sun
Drought tolerant once established, tolerant
30-45' ht., 30-35' spread,
Honeylocust (Gleditsia triacanthos var. inermis of salt and alkaline soils, transplants
moderately globe-shaped
‘Imperial’ or ‘Sunburst’) easily, fruitless, thornless, yellow fall color,
susceptible to many insect and disease
problems, requires full sun
Requires moist to moderately dry soils
30-45' ht., 20-35' spread,
Hop Hornbeam (Ostrya virginiana) once established, prefers acidic soils, salt
moderately ovate-shaped
sensitive, grows in full sun or partial shade
Adaptable water requirements once
30-45' ht., 15-30' spread, dense,
Hornbeam, European (Carpinus betulus) established, grows well in clay and alkaline
narrow pyramidal to oval-
soils, salt sensitive, yellow fall color,
shaped
grows in full sun or partial shade
Tolerates alkaline soil, withstands
40-45' ht., 25-35' spread, broadly
Linden, Littleleaf (Tilia cordata ‘Greenspire’ or compaction, salt sensitive, yellow fall
to moderately pyramidal-shaped
‘Glenleven’) color, young trees susceptible to sunscald,
grows in full sun or partial shade
Adaptable water requirements, deep
35-45' ht., 30-40' spread, broadly
Maple, Norway (Acer platanoides ‘Cavalier’ or maroon leaf color, susceptible to sunscald,
globe-shaped
‘Drummondi’) requires full sun
Adaptable water requirements once
25-45' ht., 25-35' spread, dense,
Maple, Hedge (Acer campestre) established, tolerates compaction and
3-16 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000
 moderately globe-shaped alkaline soils, easily transplanted, yellow
fall color, grows in full sun or partial shade
Drought tolerant once established, tolerant
20-30' ht., 20-25' spread, broadly
Maple, Wasatch (Acer grandidentatum) of alkaline soils, very slow to establish,
globe-shaped
Colorado native, yellow to red orange fall
color, grows in full sun or partial shade
Drought tolerant once established, large
30-45' ht., 25-35' spread, broadly
Ohio Buckeye (Aesculus glabra ) fruit, purple to red fall color, requires full
ovate to globe-shaped
sun
Adaptable water requirements once
30-40' ht., 25-35' spread,
Pear (Pyrus spp. - Ussurian or Callery - avoid established, tolerates salt and alkaline
moderately columnar-shaped
‘Bradford’ variety) soils, attractive white blossoms in spring,
maroon fall color, resistant to fireblight,
requires full sun
Adaptable water requirements once
45' ht., 25-30' spread, moderately
Turkish Filbert (Corylus colurna) established, tolerates alkaline soil, difficult
pyramidal-shaped
to transplant, free from insect and disease
problems, requires full sun

Large Maturing Trees

(Over 45’ Mature Height)

COMMON & SCIENTIFIC NAME SIZE AND FORM CHARACTERISTICS

50-60' ht., 35-45' spread, Drought tolerant once established,

Ash, Green (Fraxinus
moderately to broadly ovate- tolerates salt and alkaline soils,
pennsylvanica ‘Patmore’ or
shaped transplants easily, yellow fall color,
‘Marshall’s Seedless’ or
susceptible to both brownheaded ash
‘Newport’)
sawfly and lilac/ash borer, requires full
sun

40-60' ht., 40-50' spread, Adaptable water requirements, purple to

Ash, White (Fraxinus americana
moderately globe-shaped red fall color, susceptible to both
‘Autumn Applause’ or ‘Autumn
brownheaded ash sawfly and lilac/ash
Purple’ or ‘Rosehill’)
borer, requires full sun

50-60' ht., 20-40' spread, Tolerates wet soils and moderate

Baldcypress (Taxodium
moderately pyramidal-shaped drought once established, deciduous
distichum)
conifer, golden yellow fall color, free
from insect and disease problems,
requires full sun

40-60' ht., 30-50' spread, Drought tolerant once established, large

Catalpa, Western (Catalpa
moderately ovate-shaped attractive white blossoms in summer,
speciosa )
produces pod fruit, requires full sun

50-70' ht., 40-50' spread, Drought tolerant once established,

Coffeetree, Kentucky
moderately globe-shaped tolerant of alkaline soils, free from insect
(Gymnocladus dioicus)
and disease problems, requires full sun

45-55' ht., 40-50' spread, Adaptable water requirements once

Elm, American (Ulmus
broadly vase-shaped established, tolerant of salt and alkaline
americana ‘Brandon’ or ‘Valley
soils, fast growth rate, easily
Forge’)
transplanted, yellow fall color, requires

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-17

 full sun

50-60' ht., 40-50' spread, Drought tolerant once established,

Hackberry, Common (Celtis
moderately globe-shaped tolerant of salt and a wide range of soil
occidentalis)
conditions, requires full sun

50-60' ht., 30-40' spread, Drought tolerant once established,

Honeylocust (Gleditsia
moderately globe-shaped tolerant of salt and alkaline soils,
triacanthos var. inermis
transplants easily, fruitless, thornless,
‘Shademaster’ or ‘Majestic’)
yellow fall color, susceptible to many
insect and disease problems, requires
full sun

50-60' ht., 50-60' spread, Adaptable water requirements, has

Horsechestnut, Common
broadly globe-shaped attractive large white blossoms in early
(Aesculus hippocastanum)
summer, large fruit, requires full sun

50-60' ht., 30-40' spread, Adaptable water requirements once

Linden, American (Tilia
moderately pyramidal-shaped established, tolerant of alkaline soils,
americana ‘Legend’ or
easily transplanted, young trees
‘Redmond’)
susceptible to sunscald, grows in full
sun or partial shade

45-60' ht., 40-50' spread, Adaptable water requirements, tolerant

Linden, Littleleaf (Tilia cordata
broadly pyramidal-shaped of alkaline soils and pollution, easily
‘Greenspire’ or ‘Chancellor’)
transplanted, yellow fall color, young
trees susceptible to sunscald, requires
full sun

45-60' ht., 40-50' spread, Adaptable water requirements, deep

Maple, Norway (Acer platanoides
broadly globe-shaped maroon leaf color for ‘Deborah’, yellow
‘Deborah’ or ‘Emerald Queen’)
fall color for ‘Emerald Queen’,
susceptible to sunscald, requires full
sun

45-55' ht., 25-40' spread, Adaptable water requirements once

Maple, Red (Acer rubrum
moderately globe-shaped to established, can become chlorotic in
‘Northwood’ or ‘Red Sunset’)
upright alkaline soils, salt sensitive, orange red
to brilliant red fall color, requires full sun

50-60' ht., 30-40' spread, Adaptable water requirements once

Maple, Sugar (Acer saccharum
moderately ovate-shaped established, prefers acidic soils, salt
‘Green Mountain’ or ‘Legacy’)
sensitive, red to orange fall color, can
grow in full sun or shade

50-80' ht., 50-80' spread, Drought and wind tolerant once

Oak, Bur (Quercus macrocarpa)
broadly ovate to broadly established, tolerant of a wide range of
globe-shaped soil types, yellow to brown fall color,
requires full sun

50-80' ht., 50-80' spread, Tolerant of a wide range of soil types,

Oak, English (Quercus robur)
broadly ovate to broadly yellow to yellow-brown fall color,
globe-shaped requires full sun

50-80' ht., 50-80' spread, Adaptable water requirements once

Oak, Shumard (Quercus
broadly ovate to broadly established, tolerates compaction and
shumardii)
globe-shaped salt, does better in alkaline soils than red
oak, russet red to red fall color, requires
full sun

50-80' ht., 50-80' spread, Prefers acidic soils, can become

3-18 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000
 Oak, Red (Quercus rubra ) broadly ovate to broadly chlorotic in alkaline soils, russet red to
globe-shaped bright red fall color, requires full sun

50-80' ht., 50-80' spread, Drought tolerant once established but

Oak, Swamp White (Quercus
broadly ovate to broadly can also withstand wet conditions, can
bicolor)
globe-shaped become chlorotic in alkaline soils, yellow
fall color, requires full sun

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 3-19

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 4
GENERAL UTILITIES DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page
4.01 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT ...........................................................................................................................................................1
(B) UTILITIES MASTER PLANS ...............................................................................................................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS.................................................................................................................................1
4.02 UTILITY CONNECTION PLAN .................................................................................................................1
(A) REQUIRED .......................................................................................................................................................1
(B) PLAN REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................................1
4.03 UTILITY PLAN ..............................................................................................................................................2
(A) REQUIRED .......................................................................................................................................................2
(B) PLAN REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................................2
(C) UTILITY PLAN APPROVALS .............................................................................................................................3
4.04 UTILITIES EASEMENTS..............................................................................................................................4
(A) GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................4
(B) EASEMENTS CROSSING SINGLE-FAMILY RESIDENTIAL LOTS ...........................................................................4
4.05 PIPE STRENGTH ...........................................................................................................................................5

4.06 SEPARATION OF UTILITIES......................................................................................................................5

(A) PARALLEL (HORIZONTAL) SEPARATION ..........................................................................................................5
(B) PIPE CROSSINGS (VERTICAL) SEPARATION ......................................................................................................5
(C) DRAINAGEWAY AND IRRIGATION DITCH CROSSINGS.......................................................................................6
(D) SEPARATION OF UTILITIES FROM TREES ..........................................................................................................6
(E) SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR THE SEPARATION OF UTILITIES...............................................................................7
4.07 UNDERGROUNDING OF UTILITIES ........................................................................................................8

4.08 ABANDONMENT, REPAIR AND UPGRADE OF SERVICE LINES AND TAPS .................................8
(A) GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................8
(B) ABANDONMENT ..............................................................................................................................................8
(C) WITNESSING ...................................................................................................................................................8
(D) TAP UPGRADE ................................................................................................................................................8
(E) WATER SERVICES ...........................................................................................................................................8
(F) SEWER SERVICES ............................................................................................................................................9

LIST OF TABLES
Table Number Page

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 4-i

Table 4-1: Utility Separation Requirements……………………………………………………………………………5
Table 4-2: Local Drainageways and Irrigation Ditches ................................................................................................. 6

4-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 201

4.01 General

(A) Intent
The General Utilities Design Standards are intended to provide for an integrated public utilities
system for all public utilities, including water, wastewater, storm drainage, gas, electric and
telecommunications systems.

(B) Utilities Master Plans

All improvements proposed to the City’s public utilities system shall conform with the goals,
policies, and standards adopted in the Water Utility Master Plan, Wastewater Utility Master Plan,
and Comprehensive Flood and Stormwater Master Plan.

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, to protect the public health, safety, and
welfare, the Director of Public Works will specify the standards to be applied to the design and
construction of public utilities improvements and may refer to one or more of the references listed
in the References Section of these Standards.

4.02 Utility Connection Plan

(A) Required
The Director of Public Works may require the preparation of a Utility Connection Plan in order to
assess the feasibility of providing utility service to any project or development and identify impacts
of any development application on the existing and planned public utility systems. A Utility
Connection Plan may be prepared in lieu of a Utility Plan for projects or developments that meet
all of the standards below:
(1) City utilities required to serve the site are located directly adjacent to the subject property.
(2) No extension, enlargement, or improvement of public mains is required to serve the site.
(3) No change in use is proposed which may alter the utility needs of the site.

(B) Plan Requirements

The Utility Connection Plan shall include the following project or development information:
(1) Title Block: Include the label “Utility Connection Plan” and name of project or
development application, and the original preparation date and dates of any revisions.
(2) Site Location Data: Include vicinity map and north arrow,
(3) Drawing Scale: The drawing scale shall be between 1 inch equals 20 feet and 1 inch
equals 100 feet, placed on the minimum number of plan sheets possible.
(4) Property and Street Information: Include the location of existing and proposed lot
lines, block and lot numbers, and street names.
(5) Construction Note: Include the statement that “Utilities shall comply with the City of
Boulder Design and Construction Standards.”
(6) Existing and Proposed Utilities: Include the location, type and size of all existing and
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 4-1
 proposed utilities mains and service lines. Utilities to be identified include without
limitation: water, wastewater, storm drainage, flood control, gas, electric,
telecommunications, drainageways, and irrigation ditches within and adjacent to the
project or development site. Include and assign identification numbers to all existing and
proposed manholes, inlets, fire hydrants, meter settings and pits, and provide “direction of
flow” arrows on gravity pipelines.
(7) Easements and Rights-of-Way: Include the location, dimensions, and dedication type of
all existing and proposed easements and rights-of-way for all utilities improvements. If
available, reference existing easements to appropriate recorded film and reception
numbers.
(8) Structures and Trees: Include the location and dimensions of all existing and proposed
structures, including without limitation buildings and fences, trees 1½ inch caliper or
greater, and major landscape features.
(9) Floodplain: Delineate any 100-year floodplain boundaries that impact the project or
development site and identify the floodplain designation, base flood elevations and
floodplain mapping source used to determine the floodplain.
(10) Storm Water Plan Combination: The Director may approve a combined “Utility
Connection and Storm Water Plan,” reflecting storm water design information, prepared in
compliance with the requirements outlined in Chapter 7, “Storm Water Design,” of these
Standards.
(11) Applications for Annexation or Out-of-City Utility Service for a single family residential
dwelling may provide the required information on a scaled Improvement Location
Certificate or Improvement Survey Plat.

4.03 Utility Plan

(A) Required
The Director may require an applicant to submit a Utility Plan as a condition of any development
application in order to adequately assess the availability of utility service and impacts of any
development application on the existing and planned public utility systems. The Utility Plan shall
provide an overview of the proposed project or development application and identify whether the
proposal is:
(1) Eligible for utility service and has access to available public utility systems.
(2) Consistent with current Utilities Master Plans, meets the minimum design standards for
system layout, and is compatible with and allows for the perpetuation of the existing utility
systems.
(3) Located within any mapped 100-year floodplain.

(B) Plan Requirements

The Utility Plan shall include the following project or development information:
(1) Title Block: Include the label “Utility Plan” and name of project or development
application, and the original preparation date and dates of any revisions.
(2) Site Location Data: Include vicinity map, north arrow, relationship of the property to
range, township, and section lines.

4-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (3) Survey Information: Include the elevation and location of City-recognized benchmarks
with reference to local, USGS and NGVD data.
(4) Drawing Scale: The drawing scale shall be between 1 inch equals 20 feet and 1 inch
equals 100 feet, placed on the minimum number of plan sheets possible.
(5) Property and Street Information: Include the location of existing and proposed lot
lines, block and lot numbers, and street names.
(6) Construction Note: Include the statement that “Utilities shall comply with the City of
Boulder Design and Construction Standards.”
(7) Existing and Proposed Utilities: Include the location, type and size of all existing and
proposed utilities mains and service lines. Utilities to be identified include without
limitation: water, wastewater, storm drainage, flood control, gas, electric,
telecommunications, drainageways, and irrigation ditches within and adjacent to the
project or development site. The locations of existing underground utility mains and
service lines and the invert and surface grade elevations of all manholes, inlets and
culverts shall be field verified to the Director’s satisfaction (by “pothole” excavations, if
necessary) and accurately delineated and dimensioned. Include and assign identification
numbers to all existing and proposed manholes, inlets, fire hydrants, valves, pipe lengths,
meter settings and pits, and provide “direction of flow” arrows on gravity pipelines.
Proposed invert and surface grade elevations shall be provided for all proposed manholes,
inlets and culverts.
(8) Site Topography: Include existing and proposed contour lines showing at least 2-foot
contour intervals, and reflecting spot elevations at various locations, “cut and fill” areas,
and surface drainage systems.
(9) Easements and Rights-of-Way: Include the location, dimensions, and dedication type of
all existing and proposed easements and rights-of-way for all utilities improvements. If
available, reference existing easements to appropriate recorded film and reception
numbers.
(10) Structures and Trees: Include the location and dimensions of all existing and proposed
structures, including without limitation buildings and fences, trees 1½ inch caliper or
greater, and major landscape features.
(11) Maintenance Access: Include the location and dimensions for existing and proposed
“all-weather” maintenance access drives for 14-ton maintenance equipment to reach
manholes and inlets not located in existing or proposed streets.
(12) Floodplain: Delineate any 100-year floodplain boundaries that impact the project or
development site and identify the floodplain designation, base flood elevations and
floodplain mapping source used to determine the floodplain.
(13) Storm Water Plan Combination: The Director may approve a combined “Utility and
Storm Water Plan,” reflecting storm water design information, prepared in compliance
with the requirements outlined in Chapter 7, “Storm Water Design,” of these Standards.

(C) Utility Plan Approvals

(1) The Utility Plan shall reflect proposed utility infrastructure and utility service to
development applications and may serve as the basis for approving site review and
preliminary subdivision proposals.
(2) A final version of the Utility Plan shall be included in all Construction Plans proposing the

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 4-3

 construction of utility infrastructure to reflect overall system layout and design
configurations.
(3) The Utility Plan may serve as the Construction Plan under the following conditions:
(a) The proposed utility improvements include only private service line (water,
wastewater, or storm sewer) or fire line connections to individual properties.
(b) The proposed utility improvements include only water main extensions or fire
hydrant runs on individual properties.
(c) Standard construction notes are included on the Utility Plan, and no other
Construction Plans for other public improvements are required.
(4) The Director may waive the requirement that the Utility Plan be prepared by an Engineer
for development applications that include only private utility (water, wastewater and storm
drainage) service lines or fire lines to individual properties.

4.04 Utilities Easements

(A) General
(1) All City-operated public utilities, including without limitation, water, wastewater and
storm drainage systems, shall be located within public rights-of-way or public utility
easements.
(2) Public utility easements shall be at least 25 feet wide. Wider easements may be required
where the depth of a utility, or number of utilities occupying the easement, requires
additional width to satisfy standards for utility separations, trenching excavations, or
adequate maintenance access.
(3) Public utility easements shall provide a minimum parallel separation of 6 feet between the
edge of any utility line and the easement boundary.
(4) Public utility easements are to be placed longitudinally along one side of any property line
in a manner that no portion of any easement falls on both sides of a parallel property line.
(5) Structures and landscaping proposed in public utility easements shall comply with the
standards as set forth in Chapter 8-5, “Work in the Public Right-of-Way and Public
Easements,” and Chapter 8-6, “Public Right-of-Way and Easement Encroachments,
Revocable Permits, Leases, and Vacations,” B.R.C. 1981.
(6) The Director may allow water service taps from water mains in easements only if free and
unobstructed vehicle access is permanently guaranteed for all-weather water meter
reading, valve access, and maintenance. Where the Director allowed a service tap from a
water main in an easement, the property owners shall ensure all city owned and
maintained utilities are accessible and surface features such as valve covers, manholes,
and meter pits are visible and not covered by landscape materials, concrete or asphalt.
Proposals will be reviewed on a case-by-case basis and are subject to prior approval by the
Director.

(B) Easements Crossing Single-Family Residential Lots

Public utility easements crossing single-family residential lots may be allowed only for the
following:
(1) Completing required water system looping in cul-de-sac type applications where water

4-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 mains would otherwise dead-end.
(2) Installation of fire hydrants.
(3) Continuing a wastewater main that would otherwise dead-end in cul-de-sac type
applications.
(4) Conveying storm water drainage and overflows from back-draining cul-de-sac or street
sump type applications.

4.05 Pipe Strength

All utility pipe shall be of adequate strength to support the trench and AASHTO HS-20 highway
loadings.

4.06 Separation of Utilities

(A) Parallel (Horizontal) Separation

Parallel separations between utility mains and services to provide for adequate trench excavations
and maintenance operations shall be as follows. All distances are measured from outside of pipe
to outside of pipe:
Table 4-1: Utility Separation Requirements
Electric, Telecommunications,
Water Sewer Storm
and/or Gas
Water 10-ft 5-ft 5-ft
Sewer 10-ft 10-ft 10-ft
Storm 5-ft 10-ft 5-ft
Electric, 5-ft 10-ft 5-ft
Telecommunications,
and/or Gas

(B) Pipe Crossings (Vertical) Separation

(1) The minimum vertical separation between water and wastewater line crossings, as
measured outside of pipe to outside of pipe, shall be 18 inches. The water line shall be
constructed above the wastewater line.
(2) The minimum vertical separation between water and storm drainage line crossings shall be
18 inches, measured from outside of pipe to outside of pipe.
(3) The minimum vertical separation between wastewater and storm drainage line crossings,
as measured outside of pipe to outside of pipe, shall be 6 inches. In addition, the following
applies:
(a) If the storm drainage line is constructed below the wastewater line, pressure-class
pipe will be required for both utility lines to prevent possible wastewater
contamination of storm drainage.
(b) If the vertical separation between the wastewater and storm drainage line is less
than 18 inches, structural support will be required, subject to the Director’s
approval.
(4) The minimum vertical separation between City public utility pipelines or conduits and all
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 4-5
 gas, electric, and telecommunications utilities shall be 12 inches.

(C) Drainageway and Irrigation Ditch Crossings

Utility crossings of natural and improved drainageways and irrigation ditches listed in Table 4-2,
“Local Drainageways and Irrigation Ditches,” shall meet the following conditions:
(1) Water Main Crossings: The water main shall be placed at least 4.5 feet below the invert
of the drainageway or irrigation ditch and shall be placed in a steel sleeve in conformance
with the applicable standard drawings in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings” of these
Standards.
(2) Wastewater and Storm Drainage Main Crossings
(a) The wastewater or storm drainage main shall be placed at least 3 feet below the
invert of an open drainageway or irrigation ditch or at least 18 inches below the
invert of a drainageway or irrigation ditch culvert, and the main shall be placed in
a steel sleeve in conformance with the applicable standard drawings in Chapter
11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards.
(b) In open drainageway or irrigation ditch crossings, the Director may allow the
wastewater or storm drainage main to be encased in concrete instead of placement
in a steel sleeve, and the concrete encasement shall conform with the applicable
standard drawings in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards.
(c) When a drop manhole is used to obtain the required vertical separation for a
drainageway or irrigation ditch crossing, the drop manhole shall be located at least
20 feet from the end of a steel sleeve.
(3) Other Utility Line Crossings
(a) Other utility lines, including without limitation, gas, electric, and
telecommunications lines, shall be placed at least 30 inches below the invert of a
drainageway or irrigation ditch.
(b) Other utility lines shall be placed in a Schedule-40 steel casing, extending
horizontally at least 10 feet beyond each side of the drainageway or irrigation
ditch, measured from top of bank to top of bank.
Table 4-2: Local Drainageways and Irrigation Ditches
Anderson Ditch Elmer’s Two Mile Creek Skunk Canyon Creek
Bear Canyon Creek Farmer’s Ditch South Boulder Creek
Bluebell Creek Fourmile Canyon Creek Sunshine Creek
Boulder Creek Goose Creek Two Mile Canyon Creek
Boulder and Whiterock Ditch Gregory Creek Viele Channel
Boulder and Left Hand Ditch Howard Ditch Wellman Canal
Dry Creek King’s Gulch Wonderland Creek
Dry Creek #2 New Anderson Ditch
Dry Creek #2 Ditch North Boulder Farmer’s Ditch

(D) Separation of Utilities from Trees

Trees proposed to be planted in public utility easements and rights-of-way shall be located at least

4-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 10 feet away from existing and proposed utilities and shall not block vehicle access along the
easement. All utility construction near existing trees shall abide by the tree protection requirements
specified in Chapter 3, “Streetscape Design,” of these Standards.

(E) Special Conditions for the Separation of Utilities

If the required horizontal or vertical separation of utilities cannot be obtained as required in this
section, the Director may apply special conditions to the design of utilities separations, to ensure
the safety, protection and integrity of the utility system, as follows:
(1) Parallel Separation
(a) If 10 feet of parallel separation between water and wastewater lines cannot be
obtained, the wastewater line may be laid closer to the water line, provided the
following conditions exist:
(i) The wastewater line is constructed of pressure-class pipe, in conformance
with these Standards, until the required horizontal separation is obtained,
and
(ii) The water line is located at least 18 inches above the wastewater line, as
measured from the top of the wastewater pipe to bottom of the water pipe.
(b) If 5 feet of parallel separation between water and storm drainage lines cannot be
obtained, the storm drainage line may be laid closer to the water line, provided the
storm drainage line is constructed of pressure-class pipe, in conformance with
these Standards, until the required horizontal separation is obtained. The storm
drainage line does not need to be pressure tested.
(2) Crossings Separation
(a) If 18 inches of vertical separation between either water and wastewater line
crossings, or water and storm drainage line crossings, cannot be obtained, the
wastewater or storm drainage line shall be constructed of pressure-class pipe, in
conformance with these Standards, for at least 10 feet beyond each side of the
water line crossing. This distance shall be measured along the wastewater or storm
drainage line from the center of the water line. The storm drainage line does not
need to be pressure tested.
(b) If the water line cannot be constructed above the wastewater line at water and
wastewater line crossings, the wastewater line shall be constructed of pressure-
class pipe, in conformance with these Standards, for at least 10 feet beyond each
side of the water line crossing. This distance shall be measured along the
wastewater line from the center of the water line.
(c) If either 18 inches of vertical separation between water and wastewater line
crossings, and water and storm drainage line crossings, or 6 inches of vertical
separation between wastewater and storm drainage line crossings cannot be
obtained, special structural support shall be required to prevent settlement and
potential pipe damage at the crossing. Structural support design shall be subject to
the Director’s approval.
(3) Pressure-Class Pipe for Crossings: When pressure-class pipe is required to satisfy the
requirements prescribed in this section, the following will apply:
(a) Pipe materials and quality shall be suitable for water main construction in
accordance with specifications prescribed in these Standards.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 4-7

 (b) Individual pipe sections shall be at least 18 feet long and placed at the crossing so
that the ends are located 9 feet beyond each side of the water line crossing.
(c) The inside diameter of the pressure-class crossing pipe shall be of equal size or
nearest diameter larger than the non-pressure-class wastewater or storm drainage
pipe inside diameter for the length until the required separation between utilities is
obtained. Pressure-class pipe installations shall include watertight transition
couplings.
(d) Both the water and wastewater lines shall be pressure tested.

4.07 Undergrounding of Utilities

New, replacement, or relocated electrical utilities and telecommunication and cable television
systems shall be installed underground as set forth in Section 9-12-12, “Standards for Lots and
Public Improvements,” B.R.C. 1981.

4.08 Abandonment, Repair and Upgrade of Service Lines and Taps

(A) General
Inactivity, damage, age of materials, redevelopment, or changes in service requirements for the
premises may require repair, removal or abandonment of a utilities service line or stub-in. Repair,
removal and abandonment of a utilities service line or stub-in shall comply with the standards of
this section.

(B) Abandonment
An abandoned service line shall be disconnected at the corporation with the main.

(C) Witnessing
Service line abandonments and repairs shall be witnessed by City inspection staff.

(D) Tap Upgrade

When an existing service line must be upgraded, the existing main tap shall be upsized and re-used
wherever possible.

(E) Water Services

When a water service line is abandoned or repaired, the following will apply:
(1) Services 2 Inches and Smaller: For a water service line that is a 2-inch line or smaller,
the water service connection shall be excavated where the corporation stop is inserted into
the water main. The corporation stop shall be closed, the service tubing or piping shall be
removed from the corporation stop, and a section of the water service line at least 12
inches long shall be cut off. A plug or cap shall be placed on the corporation stop to
prevent leakage. If the service line has a meter, the meter shall be returned to the City for
final testing and reading. The meter pit/vault, if present, shall be removed in its entirety,
or, if left in place, shall be cut off at least 18 inches below finished grade and filled with
sand or other fill material. If the corporation stop is leaky or corroded, the corporation stop
shall be removed and a “Ford” FS1 repair sleeve or an equivalent sleeve, approved by the
Director, shall be installed while the main is shut off.
4-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (2) Services Larger than 2 Inches: For a water service line that is larger than 2 inches, the
water service connection shall be excavated over the service tee on the water main. The
tapping valve shall be closed, a length of service pipe at least 12 inches long shall be
removed, and the tapping valve shall be plugged or capped. The valve box shall be
removed in its entirety or, if left in place, shall be cut off at least 18 inches below finished
grade and filled with granular pipe bedding material (squeegee) as specified in Chapter 9,
“Utilities Standards,” of these Standards. If the service line has a meter, the meter shall be
returned to the City for final testing and reading. The meter vault, if present, may be
removed in its entirety, or abandoned in place by filling it with sand or granular pipe
bedding material (squeegee) as specified in Chapter 9, “Utilities Standards,” of these
Standards. If practicable, the manhole shall be cut off at least 18 inches below grade. In
the event a wet tapped valve is leaky or corroded, the valve shall be removed and a “Ford”
FS1 repair sleeve or an equivalent sleeve, approved by the Director, shall be installed
while the main is shut off. Valves on tees that are leaky or corroded shall be removed and
replaced with a blind flange.
(3) Copper Lines: Water service line repairs and connections on copper lines may use flare to
flare or grip-tite compression fittings as specified in Chapter 9, “Utilities Standards,” of
these Standards.

(F) Sewer Services

When a sewer service line is abandoned or repaired, the following will apply:
(1) Abandonment: A sewer service line shall be abandoned by excavation of the connection
with the main, removal of the section of main with the connection tap, and replacement of
that section of the main with PVC non-pressure pipe and couplings as specified in Chapter
9, “Utilities Standards,” of these Standards. Manhole taps may be plugged at the manhole
with the service line left intact.
(2) Repair: Sewer service line repairs that require the coupling of two pipe sections to create
a joint shall use couplings for non-pressure pipe as specified in Chapter 9, “Utilities
Standards,” of these Standards.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 4-9

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 5
WATER DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
5.01 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT ........................................................................................................................................................1
(B) WATER UTILITY MASTER PLAN ..................................................................................................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................1
5.02 UTILITY REPORT.......................................................................................................................................1
(A) REQUIREMENT ............................................................................................................................................1
(B) REPORT .......................................................................................................................................................1
(C) PRELIMINARY PLAN ....................................................................................................................................2
(D) CONNECTION AND ISOLATION PLAN ............................................................................................................2
5.03 WATER MAIN EXTENSIONS ...................................................................................................................3
(A) WATER UTILITY MASTER PLAN ..................................................................................................................3
(B) MAIN EXTENSION AGREEMENTS .................................................................................................................3
5.04 DESIGN FLOW ............................................................................................................................................3
(A) WATER DISTRIBUTION MAINS .....................................................................................................................3
(B) WATER SERVICES .......................................................................................................................................4
5.05 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................4

5.06 CORROSION PROTECTION .....................................................................................................................5

5.07 TRANSMISSION MAINS ............................................................................................................................5

(A) SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................................................................5
(B) TAPS ...........................................................................................................................................................5
(C) VALVES ......................................................................................................................................................5
(D) RELIEF VALVES ...........................................................................................................................................6
(E) GROUND WATER BARRIERS ........................................................................................................................6
5.08 DISTRIBUTION MAINS .............................................................................................................................6
(A) SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................................................................................................6
(B) TAPS ...........................................................................................................................................................6
(C) VALVES ......................................................................................................................................................7
(D) LOOPING AND TERMINAL MAINS.................................................................................................................7
(E) EXTENSIONS ...............................................................................................................................................7
(F) FUTURE CONNECTIONS ...............................................................................................................................8
(G) GROUND WATER BARRIERS ........................................................................................................................8
5.09 WATER SERVICES .....................................................................................................................................8
(A) GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................8
(B) DOMESTIC SERVICES ...................................................................................................................................9
(C) IRRIGATION SERVICES ...............................................................................................................................10

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-i

5.10 FIRE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................................10
(A) FIRE HYDRANTS........................................................................................................................................10
(B) FIRE SPRINKLER LINES ..............................................................................................................................11
5.11 CROSS-CONNECTION REGULATIONS ...............................................................................................12
(A) PURPOSE ...................................................................................................................................................12
(B) ADDITIONAL REGULATIONS ......................................................................................................................12
(C) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................................................12
(D) INSTALLATION REQUIRED .........................................................................................................................13
(E) DUTY TO INSPECT, TEST AND REPAIR .......................................................................................................13
(F) SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................13
(G) RECORDS AND REPORTS ...........................................................................................................................15
(H) BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES ......................................................................................................15
(I) CERTIFIED TESTER CRITERIA ....................................................................................................................15

LIST OF TABLES
Table Number Page
Table 5-1: Peak Day Water Demands ............................................................................................ 4
Table 5-2: Peak Hour Factors ......................................................................................................... 4

5-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

5.01 General

(A) Intent
The Water Design Standards establish minimum design standards for providing and maintaining
the public water utility distribution system.

(B) Water Utility Master Plan

All improvements proposed to the City’s public water utility system shall conform with the goals,
policies, and standards adopted in the Water Utility Master Plan.

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, to protect the public health, safety, and
welfare, the Director of Public Works will specify the standards to be applied to the design and
construction of public water utility improvements and may refer to one or more of the references
listed in the References Section of these Standards.

5.02 Utility Report

(A) Requirement
The Director of Public Works may require the preparation of a utility report in order to assess the
impacts and service demands of any project or development proposal connecting to the public
water distribution system. The utility report shall be prepared by the Engineer and include a
technical report, preliminary plan, and connection and isolation plan as outlined in the following
subsections.

(B) Report
The utility report shall provide an overview of the proposed project or development, proposed
water utility improvements, water service demands, system impact and feasibility, and basic design
requirements, and include the following information:
(1) Water Demands: Include estimated water demands based on occupancy and building
type for the following conditions:
(a) Peak Hour (gallons-per-minute),
(b) Peak Day (gallons-per-minute),
(c) Insurance Service Office (ISO) Fire Flows (gallons-per-minute), and
(d) Irrigation (gallons-per-minute).
(2) Conformance with Water Utility Master Plan: Describe how the proposed water utility
improvements conform with the adopted Water Utility Master Plan.
(3) System Layout: Describe the proposed distribution system layout, including locations for
connections with the existing water utility system.
(4) Network Analysis: Include a distribution network analysis as required by the Director,
performed through an EPANet or MWH InfoWater computer simulation, identifying any

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-1

 systems impacts based on proposed demands and providing design solutions to ensure
perpetuation of future water utility system growth and maintain system pressures and flow
rates.
NOTE: Computer simulations of hydraulic analyses are to be performed using electronic
input data for the existing water system provided by the City on EPANet software.
Computer analyses are to be submitted in both hard copy and electronic format.
(5) Main Sizing: Indicate the required sizing of proposed distribution mains based on water
demands.
(6) Design Alternatives: Discuss alternative system layouts and methods of providing water
service, including an evaluation of each alternative and reasons for selecting the
recommended design.
(7) Special Conditions: Identify any special conditions, such as the presence of erosive soils,
conflicts with other utilities, unusual installation depths or oversizing requirements, that
require special provisions for improvements construction.

(C) Preliminary Plan

A preliminary plan shall be included in the utility report to provide a plan view and reference for
the proposed improvements, and identify issues addressed in the report. The preliminary plan is to
include the following:
(1) Preliminary Design: Illustrate proposed methods and alternatives for providing site
water distribution and service.
(2) Property Boundaries: Reflect legal boundaries of the proposed project or development
site, including existing and proposed property and lot lines, existing and proposed rights-
of-way and utility easements, and boundaries of abutting properties.
(3) Topography: Include site topography at 2-foot interval contours, and the elevation and
location of City-recognized benchmarks with reference to local, USGS and NGVD data.
(4) System Area: Define and delineate the system area included in the network analysis.
(5) Existing Utilities: Illustrate existing water utilities, including fire hydrants and valves,
within 400 feet of the proposed development.
(6) Unusual Features: Identify unusual features, such as creeks, drainage facilities,
railroads, and irrigation ditches, that might influence the location of underground utilities.
(7) Proposed System Layout: Illustrate the general layout of the proposed water distribution
mains, valves, and fire hydrant locations, including construction phasing.

(D) Connection and Isolation Plan

A connection and isolation plan shall be provided in the utility report to identify proposed
connection points with the existing water systems and design conditions for providing required
system isolation for maintenance and flushing. The connection and isolation plan is to include the
following:
(1) Valve Locations: Identify all valves necessary to isolate a point of connection for the
proposed water system onto the existing system. Existing system valves should be
inspected for location and accessibility.

5-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (2) Thrust Restraint: Determine and include design and construction requirements for
sufficient thrust restraint for existing water mains and valves at proposed connection
points (“stub outs” and terminal extensions) to allow construction while the existing water
system remains in service.
(3) System Isolation: Identify water main sections that can be isolated within the proposed
and existing water systems that provide for emergency maintenance and identify discharge
points for system flushing.

5.03 Water Main Extensions

(A) Water Utility Master Plan

Where major water distribution mains, 12 inches or larger in diameter, are proposed to be
constructed in the Water Utility Master Plan, an applicant for construction approval shall provide
for the construction of the main as part of any development proposal, when the major distribution
main is:
(1) Located within a proposed development.
(2) Located within 1,000 feet of a proposed development and it is feasible to include
construction of this main in the proposed development.
(3) Required to provide adequate distribution service for the proposed development.

(B) Main Extension Agreements

(1) When construction of a major distribution main is required, and the diameter of the major
distribution main is larger 12 inches and the minimum diameter required for local
distribution mains to serve the proposed development, an applicant for construction
approval may enter into a "main extension agreement" with the City for reimbursement of
public improvements costs associated with the over-size construction of the major
distribution main, as prescribed under Sections 11-1-42, “Agreement to Extend Water
Mains,” and 11-1-43, “Reimbursement of Costs for Water Main Extension,” B.R.C. 1981.
(2) When construction of an offsite major or local water distribution main is required to
extend water service to a proposed development, an applicant for construction approval
may enter into a "main extension agreement" with the City for reimbursement of offsite
public improvements, as prescribed under Sections 11-1-42, “Agreement to Extend Water
Mains,” and 11-1-43, “Reimbursement of Costs for Water Main Extension,” B.R.C. 1981.

5.04 Design Flow

(A) Water Distribution Mains

(1) The water distribution system (mains and looping) shall be designed to provide a
minimum residual pressure of 20 pounds per square inch (psi), at ground surface, under
peak day demand flow, plus the required ISO fire flow.
(2) The water distribution system shall be designed to provide a minimum of 40 psi under
peak hour demand flow, without fire flow.
(3) The water distribution system shall be designed so that water main flow velocities do not
exceed 4 feet per second under peak hour demand without fire flow and 8 feet per second

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-3

 under peak day demand with fire flow.
(4) Pressure and flow capacity data for both existing and future conditions for the City’s
major water distribution system is to be obtained from the Utilities Division for use in the
design and analysis of proposed improvements.
(5) Table 5-1 indicates water demand forecasting for peak day conditions.
Table 5-1: Peak Day Water Demands

Development Type Peak Day Demand

Residential
Low Density 180 gpcd
Medium Density 150 gpcd
High Density 75 gpcd

Commercial 10,000 gpad

Industrial 12,000 gpad

(6) Table 5-2 indicates water demand peaking factors for forecasting demands.
Table 5-2: Peak Hour Factors

Development Type Maximum Hour Maximum/Day

Residential
Low Density 5.1 5.1
Medium Density 5.0 2.5
High-Density 5.0 2.0
Commercial 2.5 2.5
Industrial 1.5 1.5

(7) Water design flows that reduce the water system pressures below the acceptable levels or
increase water system flow velocities above the acceptable levels specified in this section or
elsewhere in these Standards are considered detrimental to the overall system. In these
situations, the Director will deny project approval, or require the developer to provide
additional water system improvements, both onsite and offsite, to ensure no reduction in
levels of service.

(B) Water Services

Design flows for water services shall be determined in conformance with the most current
International Plumbing Code as adopted by the City.

5.05 Materials and Installation

Construction of water-related public improvements shall be in compliance with these Standards.
All pipe shall be of adequate strength to support the trench and AASHTO HS-20 highway
loadings. The type of pipe to be installed shall comply with these Standards, and shall be based
upon applicable design flows, pressures, site conditions, corrosion protection, and maintenance
requirements.

5-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

5.06 Corrosion Protection
Corrosion protection will be required for all water system improvements where corrosive soil
conditions are encountered. The Engineer shall perform a soils resistivity survey to evaluate the
corrosion potential of soils in proposed projects or developments, and recommend any necessary
corrosion protection measures, such as alternative pipe type or cathodic protection. The Director
will review the soils resistivity survey and Engineer's recommendations and the service history for
water system corrosion in the area and determine the pipe type or protection to be used prior to
construction plan approval.

5.07 Transmission Mains

(A) Specifications
(1) Size: All water mains 16 inches or larger in diameter shall be classified as “transmission
mains.”
(2) Location: All transmission mains shall be installed in public rights-of-way or easements,
as prescribed in Section 4.04, “Utilities Easements,” of these Standards.
(3) Depth: All transmission mains shall have no less than 4.5 feet and no more than 10 feet
of cover, measured from the top of pipe to the final surface grade.
(4) Separations and Crossings: All transmission main separations and crossings of other
City utilities shall be designed in compliance with Section 4.06, “Separation of Utilities,”
of these Standards.

(B) Taps
(1) Minimum Tap Size: No main extension or fire hydrant taps smaller than 6 inches in
diameter shall be installed in any transmission main.
(2) Service Line Taps Prohibited: Service line taps shall not be installed in any
transmission main.
(3) Pressure Taps: Unless approved by the Director, all taps installed onto a transmission
main shall be made under “wet tap” conditions, using a tapping tee and valve, to allow the
transmission main to remain in service.

(C) Valves
(1) Separation: Valve separation along transmission mains shall be no greater than 1,200
feet, measured along the alignment of the transmission main.
(2) Valve Locations: Valves shall be installed at the following locations:
(a) At all connections with transmission mains. Where a distribution main connects
with a transmission main, a valve shall be installed on the distribution main at the
transmission main.
(b) Where necessary to ensure that no more than three valves must be closed to isolate
any section of a transmission main. Two valves shall be installed at all tee-type
connections, and three valves shall be installed at all cross-type connections.
(c) Where possible, valves shall be aligned with extensions of property lines or right-

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-5

 of-way lines. Valves shall not be placed in locations that may be subject to
routine parking or storage and shall not be placed within public sidewalks, multi-
use paths, or on-street bike lanes.

(D) Relief Valves

(1) Air and Vacuum Release Valves: Air and vacuum release valves shall be installed in
transmission mains at all high points where an elevation differential of 20 feet exists along
the main.
(2) Pressure Blow-Off Assemblies: Pressure blow-off assemblies shall be installed in
transmission mains at all low points where an elevation differential of 20 feet exists along
the main.

(E) Ground Water Barriers

(1) Required: Where there exists a possibility that ground water may be diverted by the
construction of new transmission mains, ground water barriers shall be constructed within
the trench to prevent ground water migration or diversion along the water main.
(2) Placement: The Engineer shall determine the location and number of ground water
barriers that will be necessary to mitigate any ground water impacts, subject to review and
approval by the Director. Any necessary support material required to address ground
water concerns, such as soils investigations, engineering calculations, and design details,
shall be provided by the Engineer.

5.08 Distribution Mains

(A) Specifications
(1) Size: Distribution mains shall be at least 8 inches in diameter.
(2) Locations
(a) All water mains shall be installed in public rights-of-way or easements, as
prescribed under Section 4.04, “Utilities Easements,” of these Standards.
(b) All platted lots, whether existing or proposed as part of a subdivision, shall front
on a distribution main.
(3) Depth: All distribution mains shall have no less than 4.5 feet and no more than 10 feet of
cover, measured from the top of pipe to the final surface grade. Where final grades have
not been established, mains shall be installed deep enough to ensure acceptable cover
below the future grade based on the best available information. Under no condition shall a
main be installed with less than 4.5 feet of cover.
(4) Separations and Crossings: All distribution main separations and crossings of other City
utilities shall be designed in compliance with Section 4.06, “Separation of Utilities,” of
these Standards.

(B) Taps
(1) Pressure Taps: All taps approved onto a distribution main shall be installed under “wet
tap” conditions, using a tapping tee and valve, which allows the distribution main to

5-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 remain in service at all times.
(2) Tap Installation: All taps approved onto an existing distribution main will be made by
the City of Boulder Utilities Division and shall be paid for by the applicant.

(C) Valves
(1) Where Required: Valves shall be installed as necessary on distribution mains to ensure
that:
(a) No more than 600 feet of water main will be located between isolation valve
zones (i.e., sections of main that may be taken out of service for maintenance
activities).
(b) No more than two fire hydrants will be located between isolation valve zones.
(c) No more than three valves will require closure to isolate any section of a
distribution main. Two valves shall be installed at all tee-type connections, and
three valves shall be installed at all cross-type connections.
(d) Valves are to be aligned with extensions of property lines or right-of-way lines
where possible. Valves shall not be placed within public sidewalks, multi-use
paths, or on-street bike lanes.
(2) Emergency Access: Valves shall be located to provide maximum accessibility for
emergency access. Valves shall not be placed in locations that may be subject to routine
parking or storage operations.

(D) Looping and Terminal Mains

(1) Looping Required: All distribution mains shall be looped into the existing and proposed
water distribution system to ensure at least two feed sources and to maintain system
strength, except as allowed under Section 5.08(E) below.
(2) Maximum Terminal Length: Where allowed, terminal (dead-end) distribution mains
shall not be more than 600 feet long, measured along the entire centerline length of the
terminal main from the connection main to the terminus.
(3) Fire Hydrant on Terminal Mains: All terminal mains shall have a fire hydrant at the
terminus and no more than two fire hydrants in total. Fire hydrant installations shall be
offset from the terminus to ensure that the hydrant can be removed for maintenance while
the terminal main remains in service.
(4) Service Taps: Service taps along terminal mains shall not be located closer than 3 feet to
the terminus nor located between the fire hydrant connection and the terminus.

(E) Extensions
(1) Standards: Water distribution main extensions are subject to the requirements in Section
11-1-41, “Extensions of Water Mains,” B.R.C. 1981, and these Standards.
(2) System Perpetuation: Water mains shall extend to the far edge of the property being
served or to the edge of the platted subdivision, whichever is greater, to ensure
perpetuation of the water distribution system. The location, size, and configuration of the
proposed development or subdivision, with respect to the existing water distribution
system, may dictate that water mains be extended to the far edge of more than one

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-7

 property or subdivision boundary to accommodate system perpetuation.
(3) Exceptions: Exceptions to this subsection may be granted only if development of the
adjacent property is not contemplated within 5 years or is classified as Area III under the
Boulder Valley Comprehensive Plan. In these cases, an easement for extending the system
shall be granted by the property owner.

(F) Future Connections

(1) Isolation Valve Required: When future main extensions are provided for by “stub out”
or terminal connections, the stub out or terminal main extension shall be valved so that
only one valve must be closed when the future main is extended. The valve shall be
restrained to the existing distribution main to allow closure of the stub out or terminal
main section without creating a pressure separation of the valve from the in-service
distribution main.
(2) Valve Restraint: Valve restraint may be ensured by the use of a direct swivel connector
or adapter, or by providing a pipeline extension that can restrain the valve through
frictional resistance. All future connections designed at perpendicular angles to the
existing distribution main shall include a valve on the extension that is directly attached to
the existing main. Where valve restraint through frictional resistance of extended pipe line
sections is proposed, the Engineer shall determine the necessary pipe length required to
provide adequate frictional resistance, subject to review and approval by the Director.
(3) Testing: When future connections are made, the entire main beyond the stub out or
terminal main extension shall be flushed, chlorinated, and pressure tested.
(4) Service Taps Prohibited: No service taps shall be allowed on a stub out or on a terminal
main beyond the isolation valve.

(G) Ground Water Barriers

(1) Required: Where there exists a possibility that ground water may be diverted by the
construction of new distribution mains, ground water barriers shall be constructed within
the trench to prevent ground water migration or diversion along the water main.
(2) Placement: The Engineer shall determine the location and number of ground water
barriers that will be necessary to mitigate any ground water impacts, subject to review and
approval by the Director. Any necessary support material required to address ground
water concerns, such as soils investigations, engineering calculations and design details,
shall be provided by the Engineer.

5.09 Water Services

(A) General
(1) Standards: Water services are water system extensions that are tapped onto the
distribution system to provide water to consumers. Water services are subject to the
requirements of these Standards and Section 11-1-20, “Taps or Connections to Water
Mains,” and Section 11-1-21, “Water Service Lines,” B.R.C., 1981.
(2) Water Meters: Water services shall include the installation of a meter and shall be
subject to the requirements of these Standards and the conditions of Sections 11-1-34,

5-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 “Meter and Appurtenances to be Purchased by User,” Section 11-1-35, “Meter Size
Requirements,” and Section 11-1-36, “Location and Installation of Meters; Maintenance
of Access to Meters,” B.R.C. 1981.
(3) Separate Services to Lots: All platted lots, whether existing or proposed as part of a
subdivision, shall front on and have a separate water service connection to a distribution
main without crossing adjacent lots.
(4) Service Alignment: When the water service is located in the public right-of-way or
easement, the service shall be installed perpendicular to the distribution main, up to and
including the meter and pit. Where this is not possible, the water service alignment shall
be subject to the determination of the Director.
(5) Pressure Boosters Prohibited: No pressure booster of any kind is allowed on any water
service.

(B) Domestic Services

(1) Separate Services to Structures: Each principal structure shall be served by a separate
water service line and meter connected to the distribution main. Where more than one
principal structure is proposed on a single lot, an additional water service line and meter
will be required for each additional principal structure.
(2) Accessory Buildings or Structures: An accessory building or structure, as defined under
Subsection 9-16-1(c), “General Definitions,” B.R.C. 1981, may draw limited service from
a principal building or structure without a separate water service, subject to the following:
(a) If the accessory structure contains no toilet and no bathtub or shower fixtures, the
accessory structure is limited to the following plumbing fixtures:
(i) Sink (one fixture),
(ii) Clothes washer connection (one set),
(iii) Hose bib or sill cock (one fixture),
(iv) Floor drain (one fixture), and
(v) Interceptor (one fixture).
(b) If the accessory structure is proposed to have a sink and toilet, the accessory
structure shall not contain any additional sinks or toilets nor a bathtub or shower
fixture, shall not be used as a separate dwelling unit, may not be located on a
property that can be subdivided into separate lots, and shall be limited to the
following additional plumbing fixtures:
(i) Sink (one fixture),
(ii) Toilet (one fixture),
(iii) Floor drain (one fixture), and
(iv) Interceptor (one fixture).
(c) An approved detached accessory dwelling unit, as defined under Subsection 9-16-
1(c), “General Definitions,” B.R.C. 1981, is not subject to this section’s plumbing
fixture limitations.
(d) The Director of Public Works may permit water hookups and meters separate

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-9

 from a principal detached dwelling unit only upon finding that topography or
other physical circumstances make utility connections to the principal structure
impractical.
(3) Services Crossing Lots: Domestic water services crossing one lot to provide service to
an adjacent lot may be approved if all of the following conditions are met:
(a) The service crossing is part of a proposed subdivision creating only two lots.
(b) A utility easement at least 10 feet wide is provided across, and situated entirely
within, the boundaries of the proposed subdivision. The easement is to be granted
to the City for the benefit of the property owner being served and is to be
occupied by the water service line only, or by the water and wastewater service
lines only if the water and wastewater service lines are installed in compliance the
IPC, as adopted by the City.
(c) The Director determines that a water main extension is not necessary to perpetuate
the system, or that future development of abutting properties cannot benefit from a
main extension.
(d) The water service line is to be centered in the easement and be at least 5 feet from
other utilities, except for a combined water/wastewater service installation as
allowed under the IPC, as adopted by the City.

(C) Irrigation Services

(1) Separate Service: With the exception of single-family residential properties, all irrigation
services shall have a separate service line and meter.
(2) Property to be Served: Irrigation service lines shall serve no more than one individual
property, unless approved by the Director under the provisions of a homeowners
association. Where irrigation services serve more than one individual property, the plant
investment fee (PIF) and associated credit shall apply to the individual property where the
water meter is located and the service originates.
(3) Building Connection Prohibited: Irrigation service shall not connect with any building
or structure or with any other consumptive-use water service.
(4) Reduced Pressure Assembly Required: All irrigation systems with a separate, metered
service line shall have a reduced pressure principle assembly installed in compliance with
all applicable City regulations and standards.

5.10 Fire Protection

(A) Fire Hydrants

(1) Standards: All fire hydrants shall be installed in compliance with these Standards.
(2) Easements: All fire hydrants shall be installed within public rights-of-way or easements
as prescribed in Section 4.04, “Utilities Easements.” Easements shall be a minimum of 25
feet in width and extend at least 10 feet beyond the hydrant assembly.
(3) Placement: The placement of fire hydrants shall comply with the International Fire Code,
as adopted with local amendments under Chapter 10-8, “Fire Code,” B.R.C. 1981, and the
following requirements:

5-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (a) Fire hydrants shall be placed at the entrance or intersection for each street, with a
hydrant place on each side of any divided roadway.
(b) In a single-family residential area, there shall be no more than 500 feet of fire
access distance between hydrants. No dwelling unit shall be over 250 feet of fire
access distance from the nearest hydrant.
(c) In all other areas, there shall be no more that 350 feet of fire access distance
between hydrants. No exterior portion of any building shall be over 175 feet of
fire access distance from the nearest hydrant.
NOTE: Fire access distance means the distance between two hydrants, or the
distance from a hydrant to any external portion of any building, measured along
public or private (but accessible to fire equipment) roadways or fire lanes, as
would be traveled by motorized firefighting equipment.
(4) Alignment with Property Lines: Hydrants shall be aligned with an extension of the
property line when located midblock.
(5) Horizontal Clearances: Hydrants shall be placed no farther than 5 feet behind the curb,
outside of any fenced area, and have a 10-foot radius of clearance to adjacent obstacles
(fences, walls, shrubs, trees, etc.).
(6) Vertical Clearances: Hydrants shall have the lowest water outlet not less than 18 inches
or more than 30 inches above the final ground elevation.
(7) Colors: The hydrants’ color shall be Rustoleum No. 831 "restful green" or “KWAL”
hydrant green except for bonnet, weather caps, and nozzle caps, which must be Rustoleum
No. 2766 "reflectorized white" unless otherwise specified by the Director of Public
Works.

(B) Fire Sprinkler Lines

(1) Dedicated Line: A fire sprinkler line for any structure or building, other than a single-
family or duplex residential structure, which is either required to be installed by the
Boulder Fire Department or installed voluntarily by the applicant, shall be a separate
dedicated fire sprinkler line tapped at the water distribution main. The minimum tap and
valve diameter size for a dedicated fire sprinkler line shall be 4 inches. The property
owner may choose to reduce the line diameter, as needed, beyond the City-maintained
valve in the property owner-maintained portion of the fire sprinkler line. The City shall not
be responsible for maintenance beyond the first valve on the line.
(2) Maintenance Responsibility: The property owner shall be responsible for maintaining
all dedicated fire sprinkler lines beyond the valve at the main distribution line. It is the
property owners’ responsibility to ensure all City owned and maintained valves are visible
and not covered by landscape materials, concrete or asphalt.
(3) Service Taps Prohibited: No taps will be approved onto a fire sprinkler line for any
purpose other than the fire sprinkler system. Combination fire sprinkler/service lines for
domestic or irrigation services will not be approved, except as allowed in Subsection
(B)(4), below.
(4) Combination Line: A single-family or duplex residential structure may have a
combination fire sprinkler/domestic service line from the City's water distribution main to
the water meter, if the following conditions are met:

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-11

 (a) The combination line shall be sized to convey maximum domestic service and fire
sprinkler protection service flows. The combination line size shall be 1 inch in
diameter; otherwise, the combination line shall be separated into a dedicated fire
sprinkler line and separate domestic service line, each tapped at the distribution
main.
(b) The combination line shall separate at the water meter pit into a domestic service
line (with meter) and a dedicated fire sprinkler line (without meter, but with
oriseal shutoff).
(c) Beyond the water meter pit, both the domestic and fire sprinkler water service
lines may be placed in the same trench. However, they may not be tied back
together in any manner, and they may not have any type of cross-connection either
inside or outside the structure.
(d) The property owner is responsible for maintaining the domestic service and the
fire sprinkler lines beyond the water meter pit.
NOTE: Section 5.11, “Cross-Connection Regulations,” of these Standards,
identifies the requirements for cross-connection control and backflow prevention
as they apply to fire sprinkler systems.

5.11 Cross-Connection Regulations

(A) Purpose
The purpose of these standards is to protect the City water system from contamination or pollution by
backflow due to cross connections from owner water systems, and to a continuing program of cross
connection control to prevent the contamination or pollution of the City water system. For the purpose
of this section, "Contamination" means any impairment of the quality of the potable water by pollution
from sewage, industrial fluids or waste liquids, compounds or other materials to a degree which may
create a hazard to the public health through poisoning or through the spread of disease.

(B) Additional Regulations

(1) Sections 11-1-3, “Rules and Regulations,” and 11-1-25, “Duty to Maintain Backflow
Prevention Assembly and Prevent Cross-Connection,” B.R.C. 1981.
(2) The Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual

(C) General Requirements

(1) If a backflow prevention assembly is required by the City, the Director of Public Works may
give notice in writing to the owner to install an approved backflow prevention assembly at
each service connection to the premises. The owner shall install an approved assembly at
each service connection to the premises at the owner's own expense.
(2) No provision of this section exempts the owner from the cross-connection control provisions
for internal water distribution systems as contained in the International Plumbing Codes and
other plumbing standards adopted by the B.R.C. 1981, or state or federal regulations
regarding cross-connections.
(3) No person shall operate an industrial fluids system, auxiliary water supply, or an owner water
system that allows for the occurrence of a cross connection to the water utility.

5-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (4) There shall be no unprotected branches from the service line ahead of any meter or backflow
prevention assembly located at the point of delivery to the owner's water system.
(5) No person owning, managing, installing or repairing any water system shall fail to comply
with any of these rules.

(D) Installation Required

(1) A backflow prevention assembly approved by the Director of Public Works shall be installed
immediately inside the structure being served, after the meter on private property, and before
the first branch line leading off the service line wherever any of the following conditions
exist:
(a) If a property has an auxiliary water supply which is not or may not be of safe
bacteriological or chemical quality and which is not acceptable as an additional
source by the Director of Public Works, the water utility shall be protected against
backflow from the premises by installing a backflow prevention assembly in the
service line appropriate to the degree of hazard.
(b) If a non-residential property that contains any liquid processes or fluids system or any
other unapproved water system, the water utility shall be protected against backflow
from the premises by installing a backflow prevention assembly in the service line
appropriate to the degree of hazard.
(c) In all premises that contain internal cross connections that cannot be permanently
corrected and controlled, or that contain intricate plumbing and piping arrangements,
or where entry to all portions of the premises is not readily accessible for inspection
purposes making it impracticable or impossible to ascertain whether or not dangerous
cross connections exist, the water utility shall be protected against backflow from the
premises by installing a backflow prevention assembly in the service line.
(2) Installation shall be as approved by FCC and URC, USC list including vertical and horizontal
assembly orientation.
(3) Backflow prevention assemblies shall be installed in an accessible location to facilitate
inspection, testing and maintenance without removal of the device. An adequate drainage
area for the assembly must be provided for in the event that water is released. Installation
clearance requirements shall meet requirements of the Colorado Cross-Connection Control
Manual and allow removal of all parts from the assembly. Pit and vault installations are
prohibited.

(E) Duty to Inspect, Test and Repair

The owner shall have certified inspections and operational tests made on the backflow prevention
assembly upon installation and at least once per year thereafter. The Director of Public Works may
require certified inspections at more frequent intervals. These inspections and tests shall be made at
the expense of the owner. A backflow prevention assembly shall be repaired or replaced at the
expense of the owner whenever an assembly is found to be defective.

(F) Specifications
(1) After written notification by the Director of Public Works, any property with a backflow
incident shall be responsible for installation, inspection and testing, or repair of a backflow
prevention assembly within 10-days. Backflow prevention devices shall be air-gap (“AG”) or

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-13

 reduced pressure principle assembly (“RP”) except for Solar heating systems with make-up
water which shall be “RP” devices.
(2) After written notification by the Director of Public Works, the owners and operators of the
following types of existing facilities shall be responsible for installation, inspection and
testing, or repair of a backflow prevention assembly within 30-days of such written notice.
Backflow prevention devices shall be air-gap ("AG"), or reduced pressure principle assembly
("RP") unless otherwise noted.

• Automotive service • Laboratory - clinical and • Sewage treatment plant

station or repair shop chemical • School with laboratory
• Auxiliary water supply • Laundry or dry cleaning • Shell business
• Commercial service line service development space
greater than four-inch • Manufacturing and • Solar heating system with
diameter industrial facility (to be make-up water (“RP
• Carwash determined on an Only”)
• Food processing and individual basis) • Swimming pool
Packing plant • Medical office • Veterinary office or
• Greenhouse • Morgue and mortuary clinic
• Hospital, inpatient and • Multi-storied buildings (4 • Water treatment plant
outpatient care stories or more)
• Hotel or lodging facility • Photographic studio and
• Kennel - boarding only laboratory

(3) Prior to final inspection of any new structure or alteration requiring a building permit, the
owners and operators of the following types of facilities shall be responsible for
installation, inspection, testing, or repair of a backflow prevention assembly. Backflow
prevention devices shall be air-gap (“AG”), or reduced pressure principle assembly (“RP”)
unless otherwise noted. Double Check Valve Assembly (“DC”) devices shall only be
permitted where specifically approved below.

• Any establishment with a • Hospital, outpatient (4 stories or more)

backflow incident care and long-term • Photographic studio and
• Automotive Service station facility lab
or repair shop • Hotel and lodging • Sewage treatment plant
• Auxiliary water supply • Kennel - boarding only • School with laboratory
• Commercial service line • Laboratory -- clinical • Shell business
greater than 4-inch and chemical development space
diameter • Laundry and cleaning • Solar heating system with
• Carwash service make-up water system
• Fire line -- no chemicals • Manufacturing and (“RP” Only)
added (AG, RP, or DC) industrial facility (to be • Swimming pool
• Fire line -- chemicals added determined on an • Veterinary office
• Food processing and individual basis) • Water treatment plant
packing plant • Medical office
• Greenhouse • Morgue and mortuary
• Multi-storied building

(4) Any building or facility not listed in the foregoing table may be required by the Director of

5-14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 Public Works to install a backflow prevention assembly. The compliance period and
assembly required shall be determined by the Director of Public Works based on the degree of
hazard.
(5) The compliance periods listed above may be modified by the Director of Public Works for
good cause shown, and after submittal and approval by the Director of Public Works of a
compliance plan.
(6) Compliance plans shall be enforceable against subsequent owners of non-residential property.
If no approved compliance plan exists, then the property must be in compliance with this rule
prior to any sale of the property.

(G) Records and Reports

A certified tester shall record the results of all inspections, tests and maintenance on a form prescribed
by the Director. This report shall be submitted to the Director and the owner within ten days following
the completion of the inspection, test, or maintenance of the assembly. The certified tester shall also
attach a card to the backflow prevention assembly following each inspection, test, or maintenance
activity to document and date the activities performed. Records of all inspections, test, or maintenance
activities, including materials and parts changed, shall be kept by the certified inspector and the owner.

(H) Backflow Prevention Assemblies

(1) The term "approved backflow prevention assembly" or “approved assembly” means any of the
following:
(a) an assembly that is in conformance with the laboratory and field performance
specifications of the Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic
Research (FCC and HR) of the University of Southern California; or
(b) an assembly which has been approved, inspected and installed to the satisfaction of
the Director of Public Works.
(2) All backflow prevention assemblies shall have a unique serial number attached to the
assembly by the manufacturer.
(3) Backflow prevention assemblies currently installed which are not approved shall be replaced
with an approved assembly within 30 days of written notice by the City. If the assembly fails
an annual operational test or inspection, it shall be repaired or replaced with an approved
assembly within 30 days of written notice by the City.

(I) Certified Tester Criteria

(1) Testing of backflow prevention assemblies on fire sprinkler systems shall require the certified
Cross Connection Control and Backflow Prevention Device Tester to also be a certified Fire
Sprinkler System Installer, or be supervised by a certified Fire Sprinkler System Installer
registered with the City of Boulder Fire Department.

(2) Certified Cross Connection Control and Backflow Prevention Device Testers shall also be
required to provide the following information in order to be listed on the Backflow Prevention
Program’s list of certified testers in the area. Such information shall be sent or faxed directly
from the laboratory to the Backflow Prevention Program office at 5605 N. 63rd St., Boulder,
Colorado 80301; FAX: 303-530-1137.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 5-15

 (a) Copy of a current Cross Connection Control and Backflow Device Tester certificate.
(b) Test kit calibration certificate from an authorized manufacturers calibration/ repair
laboratory or an ISO 9002 certified calibration/repair laboratory for instrument
repairs or measurements. Documented calibration must be National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable and meet the current ASME/ANSI
B40.01 standards. The certified calibration report shall include the following:
(i) Indicate minimally the descending reading at 10, 7, 5, 2, 1 and 0 PSID with
a minimum required tolerance range of ± 0.1 PSID,
(ii) Data as found (data prior to any adjustment of the test kit), and
(iii) After calibration data or returned information documented (data after
adjustment, if required).
(c) Provide a certificate signed by a qualified agent of an insurance company that meets
minimum limits required by Section 4-1-8(a) and (b), B.R.C. 1981.

5-16 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 6
WASTEWATER DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page
6.01 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT ...........................................................................................................................................................1
(B) WASTEWATER UTILITY MASTER PLANS..........................................................................................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS.................................................................................................................................1
6.02 UTILITY REPORT .........................................................................................................................................1
(A) REQUIREMENT ................................................................................................................................................1
(B) REPORT...........................................................................................................................................................1
(C) PRELIMINARY PLAN ........................................................................................................................................2
6.03 WASTEWATER MAIN EXTENSIONS .......................................................................................................3
(A) WASTEWATER UTILITY MASTER PLAN ...........................................................................................................3
(B) MAIN EXTENSION AGREEMENTS .....................................................................................................................3
6.04 DESIGN FLOW ...............................................................................................................................................4
(A) WASTEWATER COLLECTION MAINS ................................................................................................................4
(B) WASTEWATER SERVICES ................................................................................................................................5
6.05 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................5

6.06 COLLECTION MAINS ..................................................................................................................................5

(A) SYSTEM DESIGN .............................................................................................................................................5
(B) SIZE ................................................................................................................................................................5
(C) LOCATIONS .....................................................................................................................................................5
(D) DEPTH ............................................................................................................................................................5
(E) SLOPE .............................................................................................................................................................6
(F) ALIGNMENT ....................................................................................................................................................6
(G) SEPARATIONS AND CROSSINGS .......................................................................................................................6
(H) TAPS ...............................................................................................................................................................7
(I) GROUND WATER BARRIERS ............................................................................................................................7
(J) EXTENSIONS ...................................................................................................................................................7
6.07 MANHOLES ....................................................................................................................................................7
(A) LOCATION .......................................................................................................................................................7
(B) FLOW CHANNELS ............................................................................................................................................8
(C) DROP MANHOLES ...........................................................................................................................................8
(D) MAINTENANCE ACCESS ..................................................................................................................................8
(E) COVERS ..........................................................................................................................................................8
6.08 WASTEWATER SERVICES .........................................................................................................................9

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-i

 (A) GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................9
(B) CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................................................................10
(C) SERVICE LINES..............................................................................................................................................10

LIST OF TABLES

Table Number Page

Table 6-1: Average Day Load by Development Type ..................................................................................................4
Table 6-2: Factors for Forecasting Wastewater Discharges...........................................................................................4
Table 6-3: Minimum and Maximum Allowable Collection Main Slopes ......................................................................6

6-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

6.01 General

(A) Intent
The Wastewater Design Standards establish minimum design standards for providing and
maintaining the public wastewater utility collection system.

(B) Wastewater Utility Master Plans

All improvements proposed to the City’s public wastewater utility system shall conform with the
goals, policies, and standards adopted in the Wastewater Utility Master Plan.

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, to protect the public health, safety, and
welfare, the Director of Public Works will specify the standards to be applied to the design and
construction of public wastewater utility improvements and may refer to one or more of the
references listed in the References Section of these Standards.

6.02 Utility Report

(A) Requirement
The Director of Public Works may require the preparation of a utility report in order to assess the
impacts and service demands of any project or development proposal connecting to the public
wastewater collection system. The utility report shall be prepared by the Engineer and include a
technical report and preliminary plan as outlined in the following subsections.

(B) Report
The utility report shall provide an overview of the proposed project or development, proposed
wastewater utility improvements, wastewater service demands, system impact and feasibility, and
basic design requirements, and include the following information:
(1) Wastewater Demands: Include estimated wastewater demands based on projected land
use, occupancy and building type for the following conditions:
(a) Average-Day (gallons-per-minute),
(b) Peak Flow or Maximum-Day (gallons-per-minute),
(c) Minimum-Day (gallons-per-minute), and
(d) Infiltration/Inflow (gallons-per-minute).
(2) Compatibility with Wastewater Utility Master Plan: Describe how the proposed
wastewater utility improvements conform with the adopted Wastewater Utility Master
Plan.
(3) Service Area: Describe the initial and ultimate area, measured in acres, that could be
served by the new wastewater facilities.
(4) Population Density: Define the initial and ultimate population densities that could be
served by the new wastewater facilities.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-1

 (5) Industrial Wastes: Define the estimated quantities and quality of any industrial wastes
that could be discharged to the wastewater system.
(6) System Layout: Describe the proposed collection system layout, including locations for
connections with the existing wastewater utility system.
(7) Collection System Analysis: Include a collection system analysis as required by the
Director, identifying any system impacts based on proposed demands and providing
design solutions to ensure perpetuation of future wastewater utility system growth and
maintain system capacity and flow rates.
(8) Main Sizing: Indicate the required sizing of proposed collection mains based on
wastewater demands.
(9) Design Alternatives: Discuss alternative system layouts and methods of providing
wastewater service, including an evaluation of each alternative and reasons for selecting
the recommended design.
(10) Special Conditions: Identify any special conditions, such as conflicts with other utilities,
unusual installation depths or oversizing requirements, that require special provisions for
improvements construction.
(11) Wastewater Classification Survey: Include all information requested in the City’s
“Wastewater Classification Survey.”
(12) Wastewater Effluent Characteristics: Include information concerning the characteristics
of proposed wastewater effluent, as described in 40 C.F.R., Part 122, Appendix D, Tables
2-5, at each connection to the City’s wastewater collection system as required by the
Director, including the following:
(a) Acidity-alkalinity,
(b) Phosphorus,
(c) pH,
(d) Sulfates and sulfides,
(e) Synthetic and organic compounds,
(f) Hazardous constituents,
(g) BOD5 (total and soluble fraction, carbonaceous and nitrogenous demand),
(h) COD (total and soluble),
(i) TSS,
(j) Nitrogen (TNK, NO3, NO4, NH4, organic), and
(k) Inorganics (salts, metals).

(C) Preliminary Plan

A preliminary plan shall be included in the utility report to provide a plan view and reference for
the proposed improvements, and identify issues addressed in the report. The preliminary plan is to
include the following:
(1) Preliminary Design: Illustrate proposed methods and alternatives for providing site
wastewater collection and service.
(2) Property Boundaries: Reflect legal boundaries of the proposed project or development

6-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 site, including existing and proposed property and lot lines, existing and proposed rights-
of-way and utility easements, and boundaries of abutting properties.
(3) Topography: Include site topography at 2-foot interval contours, and the elevation and
location of City-recognized benchmarks with reference to local, USGS and NGVD data.
(4) System Area: Define and delineate the system area included in the network analysis.
(5) Existing Utilities: Illustrate existing utilities, including manholes, within 400 feet of the
proposed development.
(6) Unusual Features: Identify unusual features, such as creeks, drainage facilities, railroads,
and irrigation ditches, that might influence the location of underground utilities.
(7) Proposed System Layout: Illustrate the general layout of the proposed wastewater
collection mains and manhole locations, including construction phasing.
(8) Emergency Maintenance Access: Identify methods and routes for providing emergency
and maintenance access to all proposed manholes.

6.03 Wastewater Main Extensions

(A) Wastewater Utility Master Plan

Where major wastewater collection mains, 12 inches or larger in diameter, are proposed to be
constructed in the Wastewater Utility Master Plan, an applicant for construction approval shall
provide for the construction of the main as part of any development proposal, when the major
collection main is:
(1) Located within a proposed development.
(2) Located within 1,000 feet of a proposed development and it is feasible to include
construction of this main in the proposed development.
(3) Required to provide adequate collection service for the proposed development.

(B) Main Extension Agreements

(1) When construction of a major collection main is required, and the diameter of the major
collection main is larger 12 inches and the minimum diameter required for local
distribution mains to serve the proposed development, an applicant for construction
approval may enter into a "main extension agreement" with the City for reimbursement of
public improvements costs associated with the over-size construction of the major
distribution main, as prescribed under Sections 11-2-26, “Agreement to Extend Sanitary
Sewer Mains,” and 11-2-27, “Reimbursement of Costs for Sanitary Sewer Main
Extension,” B.R.C. 1981.
(2) When construction of an offsite major or local wastewater collection main is required to
extend collection service to a proposed development, an applicant for construction
approval may enter into a "main extension agreement" with the City for reimbursement of
offsite public improvements, as prescribed under Sections 11-2-26, “Agreement to Extend
Sanitary Sewer Mains,” and 11-2-27, “Reimbursement of Costs for Sanitary Sewer Main
Extension,” B.R.C. 1981.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-3

6.04 Design Flow

(A) Wastewater Collection Mains

(1) Wastewater collection mains shall be designed to convey the peak flow.
(2) Wastewater collection mains shall be designed to ensure transport of suspended materials
and preclude material deposits considering minimum-day flows.
(3) The peak flow shall be determined using average-day forecasts adjusted by a peaking
factor and including the allowed and any existing system infiltration or inflow.
(4) Flow capacity and loading data of existing and future conditions for the City’s major
wastewater collection system shall be obtained from the Utilities Division for use in
designing and analyzing proposed improvements.
(5) The minimum-day flow shall be determined using average day-forecasts adjusted by a
minimum flow factor and including the allowed and any existing infiltration or inflow.
(6) Average-day flow forecasts shall include the ultimate area, population density, existing
wastewater flow, anticipated industrial discharge, and any allowed infiltration/inflow, that
produces the greatest wastewater flow rates.
(7) Surface water, ground water, or cooling water shall not be discharged into the wastewater
collection system. Prohibited connections include roof drains, storm inlets, foundation
perimeter drains, area drains for open patios or driveway entrances to parking structures,
and ground water sump systems.
(8) Floor drains internal to covered parking structures, that collect drainage from rain and ice
drippings from parked cars or water used to wash-down internal floors, shall be connected
to the sanitary sewer using appropriate grease and sediment traps.
(9) Table 6-1 indicates wastewater discharge forecasting for average-day conditions:
Table 6-1: Average Day Load by Development Type

Development Type Average Day Load

Residential 100 gpcd
Average Persons per Single-Family Unit 3.2
Average Persons per Multi-Family Unit 2.0
Non-Residential
Commercial 5000 gpad
Industrial 4500 gpad
Infiltration 200 gidm**
NOTES: * The Industrial Average-Day Load Indicates Non-Water Intensive Industrial Development
** Gallons Per Inch-Diameter-Mile
(10) The average day forecast loads indicated in Table 6-1 represent minimum forecast loads in
determining design flows. Where proposed development is known (based on specific
applications or use), and the anticipated wastewater loads exceed the minimum forecast
demands, the greater load shall be used to determine design flows.
(11) Table 6-2 indicates the wastewater peak flow and minimum flow factors for forecasting
discharges. These flow factors are used with the preceding average day load estimates as
defined in Section 6.04 A(10) of these Standards to determine minimum required
wastewater main capacity:

Table 6-2: Factors for Forecasting Wastewater Discharges

6-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 Collection Main Diameter Minimum Flow Factor Peak Flow Factor
10 inches and smaller 0.25 4.0
12 to 15 inches 0.30 3.5
18 to 27 inches 0.33 3.0
30 inches and larger 0.40 2.5

(12) Final design flow determinations shall include any documentation and calculation of
population densities, building areas, pumped discharge flow rates, existing wastewater
flow rates, existing or anticipated industrial discharges, peak flow, minimum flow, and
infiltration/inflow flow rates.

(B) Wastewater Services

Design flows for wastewater services shall be determined in conformance with the most current
International Plumbing Code (IPC), adopted by the City.

6.05 Materials and Installation

Construction of wastewater-related public improvements shall be in compliance with these Standards. All
pipe shall be of adequate strength to support trench and AASHTO HS-20 highway loadings. The type of
pipe to be installed shall comply with these Standards, and shall be based upon applicable design flows,
pressures, site conditions, corrosion protection, and maintenance requirements

6.06 Collection Mains

(A) System Design

(1) Gravity Flow: The wastewater collection system shall be designed for gravity (open) flow
conditions, using a manning’s roughness coefficient of 0.013 to account for various pipe
materials and joints, service connections, and future interior pipe conditions.
(2) Peak Flow Depth: Collection mains shall normally be designed to carry the peak flow
with a flow depth of no more than one-half of the full pipe.
(3) Pressurized Flow Prohibited: Pressurized, surcharged, or depressed (inverted siphon)
wastewater mains are prohibited in the City's wastewater collection system.

(B) Size
(1) Minimum Diameter: Collection mains shall be a minimum eight (8) inches in diameter.
(2) Size Changes: All changes in pipe size shall require a manhole at the size change.

(C) Locations
(1) Easements: All wastewater mains shall be installed in public rights-of-way or easements,
as prescribed under Section 4.04 of these Standards.
(2) Lot Frontage: All platted lots, whether existing or proposed as part of a subdivision, shall
front on a collection main.

(D) Depth
(1) Minimum and Maximum Cover: All collection mains shall have a minimum depth of

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-5

 cover of three (3) feet, and a maximum depth of cover of eighteen (18) feet, measured
from the top of pipe to the final surface grade.
(2) Shallow Cover Protection: Where collection main depths are less than four (4) feet, and
the main is located under a right-of-way, street, driveway, parking lot, or other areas where
live loading is a concern, special pipe materials (such as ductile iron pipe) or other
structural measures (such as concrete encasement) shall be provided.
(3) Provision for Basements: Proposed collection mains shall be designed with adequate
depth to provide wastewater service to basements, where possible and appropriate.

(E) Slope
(1) Minimum and Maximum Slopes: Table 6-3 indicates minimum and maximum
allowable collection main slopes:
Table 6-3: Minimum and Maximum Allowable Collection Main Slopes

PIPE DIAMETER MINIMUM SLOPE MAXIMUM SLOPE

(Inches) (%, ft/100 ft) (%, ft/100ft)
8" 0.400 7.5
10" 0.332 5.5
12" 0.247 4.5
15" 0.193 3.5
18" 0.144 2.5
21" 0.113 2.0
24" 0.092 1.8

(2) Velocities: Collection mains shall be designed with an adequate slope to provide flow
velocities of two (2) feet per second during peak flow conditions. Minimum allowable
slope shall provide half-full pipe flow velocities of two (2) feet per second. Maximum
allowable slope shall provide half-full pipe flow velocities of 10 feet per second. The
design slope will usually be greater than the minimum allowable slope, where less than
half-full or full pipe peak flow conditions occur.
(3) Slope Between Manholes: All collection mains shall be laid at a constant slope between
manholes.
(4) Slope Changes: All changes in slope shall require a manhole at the slope change
connection.

(F) Alignment
(1) Straight Alignment Required: All collection mains shall be laid in a straight alignment
between manholes.
(2) Alignment Changes: All changes in alignment require a manhole at the alignment change
connection.
(3) Curvilinear Mains Prohibited: Curvilinear collection mains will not be allowed.

(G) Separations and Crossings

All collection main separations and crossings of other City utilities shall be designed in
compliance with Section 4.06, “Separation of Utilities,” of these Standards.

6-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(H) Taps
All taps approved onto an existing collection main will be made by the City of Boulder Utilities
Division and shall be paid for by the applicant.

(I) Ground Water Barriers

(1) Required: Where there exists a possibility that ground water may be diverted by the
construction of new wastewater collection mains, ground water barriers shall be
constructed within the collection main trench to prevent ground water migration or
diversion along the wastewater main.
(2) Placement: The Engineer shall determine the location and number of ground water
barriers that will be necessary to mitigate any ground water impacts, subject to review and
approval by the Director. Any necessary support material required to address ground
water concerns, such as soils investigations, engineering calculations and design details,
shall be provided by the Engineer.

(J) Extensions
(1) Standards: Wastewater collection mains are subject to the requirements of Section 11-2-
25, “Extensions for Sanitary Sewer Mains,” B.R.C. 1981, and these Standards.
(2) System Perpetuation: Wastewater mains shall extend to the far edge of the property
being served or to the edge of the platted subdivision, whichever is greater, to ensure
perpetuation of the wastewater collection system. The location, size, and configuration of
the proposed development or subdivision, with respect to the existing wastewater
collection system, may dictate that wastewater mains be extended to the far edge of more
than one property or subdivision boundary to accommodate system perpetuation.
(3) Exceptions: Exceptions to this subsection may be granted only if development of the
adjacent property is not contemplated within 5 years or is classified as Area III under the
Boulder Valley Comprehensive Plan. In these cases, an easement for extending the system
shall be granted by the property owner.

6.07 Manholes

(A) Location
(1) Where Required: Manholes shall be required at the upper end of each collection main
line, and at all changes in grade, slope and alignment. Where feasible, manholes are to be
installed at street intersections, or aligned with an extension of property lines in midblock
and easement locations and should be located outside of bike lanes, sidewalks, multi-use
paths and wheel lines of streets.
(2) Maximum Separation: Manholes shall be required along collection mains at distances
not greater than 400 feet.
(3) Service Connections: Manholes shall be required at all service connections for
wastewater service lines six (6) inches in diameter and larger.
(4) Monitoring Facilities: Manholes for monitoring facilities shall be required on service
lines for industrial users or non-residential users, as prescribed under Section 11-3-16,
“Monitoring Facilities,” B.R.C. 1981. Where monitoring facilities are required, service
lines shall be a minimum of 6 inches in diameter to facilitate sampling.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-7

 (5) Avoidance of Submerged Conditions: Manholes shall not be placed in detention basins,
drainage ditches, or areas subject to localized ponding. Placement of manholes in
floodplains should be avoided if possible.

(B) Flow Channels

(1) Required: Flow channels shall be required in all manholes, connecting the inverts of the
upstream and downstream pipe sections. The flow channel shall be U-shaped, and shall
meet the following minimum heights:
(a) One-half of the diameter (or to pipe centerline) on collector pipes less than 15
inches in diameter.
(b) Three-fourths of the diameter on collector pipes 15 inches and larger in diameter.
(2) Slope: The slope of the flow channel shall be:
(a) The design slope through the manhole, for continuous slope, straight alignment
pipe lines.
(b) The slope (approximately five (5) percent) resulting from a two-tenths (0.2) feet
drop through the manhole (to account for energy losses inside the manhole), for
manholes at changes in alignment and grade.
(c) The slope resulting in the manhole by matching the eight-tenths (0.8) depth point
of the upstream and downstream pipe sections, for manholes at changes in pipe
size.

(C) Drop Manholes

(1) Avoidance: Drop manholes shall be avoided whenever possible.
(2) Where Provided: Where there are no available alternatives, drop manholes shall be
required where the invert of the upstream pipe section entering the manhole is greater than
two (2) feet above the invert of the downstream pipe section exiting the manhole.

(D) Maintenance Access

Direct access by maintenance vehicles shall be provided to each manhole. The access drive shall
be an all-weather surface, such as asphalt or concrete paving, adequate gravel base or turf block,
and shall be capable of supporting maintenance vehicles weighing up to 14 tons. The access drive
shall be free of obstructions and landscaping.

(E) Covers
(1) Where Required: Manholes that are not located within a public street, alley or driveway
section shall be installed with a bolting-type cover to ensure safety and prevent vandalism.
(2) Submerged Conditions: Where manholes must be located within the 100-year floodplain
or in a location where runoff may accumulate and pond, they shall be installed with a
hinged, gasketed, and locking frame and cover assembly. The assembly shall be an “East
Jordan Iron Works” ERGO or ERGO XL assembly. The manhole ring shall be bolted to
the manhole cone to prevent possible damage due to surcharge.

6-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

6.08 Wastewater Services

(A) General
(1) Standards: Wastewater services are private wastewater system extensions that are
connected or tapped onto the wastewater collection main to provide wastewater service to
the consumer, and are subject to the requirements of Section 11-2-13, “Taps or
Connections to Sanitary Sewer Mains,” and 11-2-14, “Sanitary Sewer Service Lines,”
B.R.C. 1981, and these Standards.
(2) Industrial and Prohibited Discharges: Wastewater services and discharges are subject
to the requirements of Chapter 11-3, “Industrial and Prohibited Wastewater Discharges,”
B.R.C. 1981.
(3) Separate Services to Lots: All platted lots, whether existing or proposed as part of a
subdivision, shall front on and have a separate wastewater service connection to a
collection main without crossing adjacent lots.
(4) Service Alignment: Wastewater services shall be installed perpendicular to the collection
main, for that portion of the service line that is located in the public right-of-way or
easement. Where this is not possible, the wastewater service alignment shall be subject to
the determination of the Director.
(5) Separation from Water Service: Wastewater services shall maintain a minimum
separation of ten (10) feet from water services, for that portion of the service line that is
located in the public right-of-way or easement.
(6) Prohibited Connections: No storm water, surface water, or ground water may be
discharged into the wastewater service. Prohibited connections include roof drains, storm
inlets, foundation perimeter drains, area drains for open patios or driveway entrances to
parking structures, and ground water sump systems.
(7) Floor Drains in Parking Garages: Floor drains internal to covered parking structures,
that collect drainage from rain and ice drippings from parked cars or water used to wash-
down internal floors, shall be connected to the wastewater service using appropriate grease
and sediment traps.
(8) Maintenance Access: Wastewater services shall be provided with a two-way cleanout
outside and adjacent to the building being served and where there is a change in alignment
of the service. Cleanouts shall be constructed as follows:
(a) No cleanouts shall be installed within the public right-of-way.
(b) Cleanouts shall be constructed of the same diameter pipe as the wastewater
service.
(c) Cleanouts shall not be located in detention ponds, ditches, swales, or other areas
of stormwater runoff or ponding.
(d) Cleanouts shall be fitted with a threaded watertight cap that prevents the inflow of
stormwater or irrigation water.
(e) The cleanout shall allow maintenance access for cleaning and inspection in both
the upstream and downstream direction.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-9

(B) Connections
(1) Tap: Wastewater service connections to newly constructed collection mains shall require
the installation of a tee or wye, in conformance with these Standards. A directional fitting
shall be used at all tap connections.
(2) Installation: All connection taps approved onto an existing wastewater collection main
shall be made by the City of Boulder Utilities Division and shall be paid for by the
applicant.
(3) Standard Connections: Wastewater service connections shall be tied into the collection
main between manholes and shall be spaced a minimum of eighteen inches apart and a
minimum two feet away from any manhole.
(4) Manhole Connections: Service connections to manholes shall be avoided, except where
any of the following conditions exist:
(a) The service size is six inches in diameter or larger (which requires the installation
of a manhole).
(b) The service connection is tied to a terminal manhole, located at the end of a cul-
de-sac or easement, and there is no possibility of extending the collection main in
the future.
(c) The service connection elevation cannot be tapped above the springline of the
sanitary sewer main.
NOTE: Under these conditions, a flow channel shall be provided in the manhole from
the service connection to the manhole flow channel, and the service shall enter the
manhole at no greater than 6 inches above the manhole base.

(C) Service Lines

(1) Separate Services to Structures: Each principal structure shall be served by a separate
wastewater service line connected to the collection main. Where more than one principal
structure is proposed on a single lot, an additional wastewater service line will be required
for each additional principal structure.
(2) Accessory Buildings: An accessory building or structure, as defined under Section 9-1-3,
“Definitions,” B.R.C. 1981, may receive limited service from a principal building or
structure without a separate wastewater service, subject to the following:
(a) If the accessory structure contains no toilet and no bathtub or shower fixtures, the
accessory structure is limited to the following plumbing fixtures:
(i) Sink (one fixture),
(ii) Clothes washer connection (one set),
(iii) Hose bib or sill cock (one fixture),
(iv) Floor drain (one fixture), and
(v) Interceptor (one fixture).
(b) If the accessory structure is proposed to have a sink and toilet, the accessory
structure shall not contain any additional sinks or toilets nor a bathtub or shower
fixture, shall not be used as a separate dwelling unit, may not be located on a
property that can be subdivided into separate lots, and shall be limited to the
following additional plumbing fixtures:
6-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (i) Sink (one fixture),
(ii) Toilet (one fixture),
(iii) Floor drain (one fixture), and
(iv) Interceptor (one fixture).
(c) An approved detached accessory dwelling unit, as defined under Subsection 9-16-
1(c), “General Definitions,” B.R.C. 1981, is not subject to this section’s plumbing
fixture limitations.
(d) The Director of Public Works may permit wastewater hookups separate from a
principal detached dwelling unit upon finding that topography or other physical
circumstances make utility connections to the principal structure impractical.
(3) Services Crossing Lots: Wastewater service lines crossing one lot to provide service to
an adjacent lot may be approved if all of the following conditions are met:
(a) The service crossing is part of a proposed subdivision creating only two lots.
(b) A utility easement at least 10 feet wide is provided across, and situated entirely
within, the boundaries of the proposed subdivision. The easement is to be granted
to the City for the benefit of the property owner being served and is to be
occupied by the wastewater service line only, or by the water and wastewater
service lines only if the water and wastewater service lines are installed in
compliance with the IPC.
(c) The Director determines that a wastewater main extension is not necessary to
perpetuate the system, or that future development of abutting properties cannot
benefit from a main extension.
(d) The wastewater service line is to be centered in the easement and be at least 5 feet
from other utilities, except for a combined water/wastewater service installation as
allowed under the IPC.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 6-11

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 7
STORMWATER DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page

7.01 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1

(A) INTENT ........................................................................................................................................................1
(B) COMPREHENSIVE FLOOD AND STORMWATER AND GREENWAYS MASTER PLANS ........................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS .............................................................................................................................1
(D) FLOODPLAINS..............................................................................................................................................1
(E) STORMWATER QUALITY AND EROSION CONTROL .......................................................................................1
(F) WETLANDS PROTECTION.............................................................................................................................2
(G) STREETS......................................................................................................................................................2
(H) IRRIGATION DITCHES AND LATERALS..........................................................................................................2
(I) MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS OF MAJOR DRAINAGEWAYS.....................................................................................2
(J) DEFINITIONS ...............................................................................................................................................2
7.02 CONCEPTUAL DRAINAGE REPORT AND STORMWATER PLAN .................................................4
(A) GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................4
(B) CONCEPTUAL DRAINAGE REPORT ...............................................................................................................5
(C) CONCEPTUAL STORMWATER PLAN..............................................................................................................5
7.03 PRELIMINARY DRAINAGE REPORT AND STORMWATER PLAN ................................................5
(A) GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................5
(B) PRELIMINARY DRAINAGE REPORT...............................................................................................................5
(C) PRELIMINARY STORMWATER PLAN .............................................................................................................8
7.04 FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT AND STORMWATER PLAN.................................................................9
(A) GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................9
(B) FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT ...........................................................................................................................9
(C) FINAL STORMWATER PLAN .......................................................................................................................11
(D) STORMWATER CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND DRAWINGS ............................................................................11
7.05 HYDROLOGY ............................................................................................................................................13
(A) GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................13
(B) STORM FREQUENCY ..................................................................................................................................13
(C) RAINFALL..................................................................................................................................................13
(D) RUNOFF ....................................................................................................................................................13
7.06 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................13

7.07 OPEN DRAINAGEWAYS .........................................................................................................................14

(A) GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................14
(B) DRAINAGEWAY TYPES ..............................................................................................................................14
(C) DRAINAGEWAY FLOW COMPUTATION .......................................................................................................16

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-i

 (D) DRAINAGEWAY DESIGN STANDARDS ........................................................................................................16
(E) HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES .........................................................................................................................19
7.08 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................................................19
(A) SYSTEM DESIGN........................................................................................................................................19
(B) LOCATION .................................................................................................................................................19
(C) DEPTH.......................................................................................................................................................20
(D) SIZE ..........................................................................................................................................................20
(E) SLOPE .......................................................................................................................................................20
(F) ALIGNMENT ..............................................................................................................................................20
(G) SEPARATIONS AND CROSSINGS .................................................................................................................20
(H) TAPS .........................................................................................................................................................20
(I) GROUND WATER BARRIERS ......................................................................................................................20
(J) EXTENSIONS .............................................................................................................................................20
(K) MANHOLES ...............................................................................................................................................21
(L) HYDRAULIC DESIGN..................................................................................................................................21
7.09 INLETS ........................................................................................................................................................21
(A) SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................21
7.10 STREET DRAINAGE .................................................................................................................................23
(A) FUNCTION OF STREETS IN THE DRAINAGE SYSTEM ...................................................................................23
(B) STREET CLASSIFICATION AND ALLOWABLE RUNOFF ENCROACHMENT......................................................23
(C) HYDRAULIC STREET CAPACITY .................................................................................................................23
(D) CROSS STREET FLOW ................................................................................................................................24
7.11 CULVERTS .................................................................................................................................................24
(A) SYSTEM DESIGN........................................................................................................................................24
(B) HYDRAULIC DESIGN..................................................................................................................................24
(C) STRUCTURAL DESIGN................................................................................................................................24
(D) SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................24
7.12 DETENTION ...............................................................................................................................................26
(A) SYSTEM DESIGN........................................................................................................................................26
(B) DESIGN FREQUENCY, HYDRAULIC DESIGN, AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS ..............................................26
(C) DETENTION POND DESIGN ........................................................................................................................27
7.13 CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER MANAGEMENT .........................................................................27
(A) INTENT ......................................................................................................................................................27
(B) STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................28
(C) INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................31
7.14 LAND DEVELOPMENT PLANNING USING LID TECHNIQUES .....................................................32
(A) INTENT ......................................................................................................................................................32
(B) REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL DEVELOPMENTS ................................................................................................32
(C) LID TECHNIQUES ......................................................................................................................................32
7.15 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER QUALITY REQUIREMENTS .......................................32
(A) INTENT ......................................................................................................................................................32
(B) APPLICABLE DEVELOPMENT SITES ............................................................................................................33
(C) REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................................................................................35
7.16 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER QUALITY TREATMENT APPROACH .......................36
(A) SELECTION AND DESIGN OF SCMS ............................................................................................................36
(B) PRELIMINARY INFILTRATION FEASIBILITY SCREENING ..............................................................................37

7-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (C) TREATMENT APPROACH SELECTION .........................................................................................................39
(D) TREATMENT APPROACH DESIGN CRITERIA ...............................................................................................41
(E) SOIL AND INFILTRATION TEST REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................43
7.17 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................45
(A) GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................45
(B) STORMWATER AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................46
(C) POST-CONSTRUCTION ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION REQUIRED.....................................................................46
(D) VEGETATION WARRANTY REQUIRED ........................................................................................................47
7.18 POST-CONSTRUCTION STORMWATER QUALITY INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................................................47
(A) APPLICABILITY ..........................................................................................................................................47
(B) INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SCMS ...................................................................47
(C) INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE....................................................................................................48
LIST OF TABLES

Number Page

Table 7-1: Design Storm Frequencies.........................................................................................................................13

Table 7-2: Manning’s “n” for Storm Sewers ..............................................................................................................19
Table 7-3: Required Manhole Sizes............................................................................................................................21
Table 7-4: Standard Inlets...........................................................................................................................................22
Table 7-5: Allowable Street Drainage Encroachment..................................................................................................23
Table 7-6: Allowable Cross Street Flow ......................................................................................................................24
Table 7-7: Treatment Approach Selection Criteria ......................................................................................................40
Table 7-8: Required Inspection Frequency by SCM Type ..........................................................................................48

LIST OF FIGURES
Number Page

Figure 7-1: Water Quality Treatment Approach Hierarchy ........................................................................................40

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-iii

7.01 General

(A) Intent
The Stormwater Design Standards are intended to provide for a comprehensive and integrated
stormwater utility system to convey and manage stormwaters in order to mitigate safety hazards
and minimize property losses and disruption due to heavy storm runoff and flooding, maintain
travel on public streets during storm events, enhance water quality of storm runoff by mitigating
erosion, sediment and pollutant transport, control and manage increased runoff due to local
development, establish effective long-term management of natural drainageways, and provide for
ongoing and emergency maintenance of public stormwater systems. These standards are intended
to prevent pollution and degradation of state waters.
The City is an operator of a Phase II Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) and is
required by the State of Colorado to hold a permit to discharge stormwater from its municipal
separate storm sewer system to the waters of the State. The Stormwater Design Standards
establish standards implementing the requirements of the MS4 Permit and Chapter 11-5,
“Stormwater and Flood Management Utility,” B.R.C. 1981.

(B) Comprehensive Flood and Stormwater and Greenways Master Plans

All improvements proposed to the City’s stormwater system shall conform with the goals, policies,
and standards outlined in adopted Comprehensive Flood and Stormwater and Greenways Master
Plans.

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, to protect the public health, safety, and
welfare, the Director will specify the standards to be applied to the design and construction of
stormwater improvements and may refer to one or more of the references listed in the References
Section of these Standards.

(D) Floodplains
Where improvements are proposed within a designated 100-year floodplain, as defined on the
current FEMA Flood Insurance Rate Map (FIRM) or floodplain mapping adopted by the City, an
applicant for construction approval shall satisfy and comply with all applicable regulations and
requirements as set forth in Chapter 9-3, “Overlay Districts,” B.R.C. 1981.

(E) Stormwater Quality and Erosion Control

The USDCM, Volume 3, “Best Management Practices,” “Colorado Department of Transportation
M-Standards, and/or City of Boulder, “Wetlands Protection Program Best Management Practices”
manual shall be applied to address stormwater quality management and erosion control for all
proposed projects and developments. An applicant for construction or development approval shall
also satisfy and comply with all applicable regulations and requirements as set forth in Chapter 11-
5, “Stormwater and Flood Management Utility,” B.R.C. 1981. All stormwater reports and plans
shall include necessary analyses, mitigation measures, and improvements needed to meet these
stormwater quality and erosion control standards.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-1

(F) Wetlands Protection
Where improvements are proposed within a delineated wetland or wetland buffer area, as defined
under the City’s wetland protection ordinance, an applicant for construction approval shall satisfy
and comply with all applicable regulations and requirements as set forth in Section 9-3-9, “Stream,
Wetlands, and Water Body Protection,” B.R.C. 1981, including any necessary identification,
analyses, avoidance and mitigation measures, and improvements needed to address wetlands
protection requirements.

(G) Streets
The primary function of streets is for safe traffic movement; therefore, streets shall be designed
and constructed to accommodate runoff and convey it to downstream drainage facilities in order to
minimize its interference with traffic. When the stormwater runoff accumulation in the street
exceeds allowable limits, storm sewers or other drainage facilities are required to collect and
convey the excess runoff.

(H) Irrigation Ditches and Laterals

Where a project or development is proposed adjacent to or impacts an existing irrigation ditch, an
applicant for construction approval shall meet the following standards:
(1) No storm runoff shall be conveyed into an irrigation ditch or lateral without written
approval and permission from the affected irrigation ditch company or lateral owner.
(2) An adequate right-of-way or drainage easement for maintaining the affected irrigation
ditch shall be dedicated to the City.
(3) The irrigation ditch or lateral shall not be relocated, modified, or altered without written
approval and permission from the affected irrigation ditch company or lateral owner.
(4) The irrigation ditch or lateral shall not be used for the following purposes:
(a) Basin boundaries to eliminate the contribution of the upper basin area in the
evaluation of runoff conditions. Irrigation ditches shall not be assumed to
intercept stormwater runoff.
(b) Outfall points for new development where runoff into irrigation ditches and
laterals has increased in flow rate or volume, or where historic runoff conditions
have been changed, without written approval and permission from the affected
irrigation ditch company or lateral owner.

(I) Multiple Functions of Major Drainageways

Boulder Creek’s numerous tributaries are part of a comprehensive natural open drainageway
system. These drainageways provide open corridors and serve multiple functions, including
without limitation, stormwater drainage and flood conveyance, wetlands and water quality
enhancement, environmental protection and preservation, open space and wildlife areas, and
recreational activities and trail corridors. Stormwater improvements impacting these drainageways
shall be designed and constructed to respect, restore and enhance these functions in order to
maintain the creek corridor ecology, environment and aesthetic value of such drainageways.

(J) Definitions
The words defined in this subsection and used in this Chapter have the meanings established in

7-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 this section unless the context clearly indicates otherwise:
Applicable development site means (1) any new development or redevelopment site resulting in land
disturbance of greater than or equal to one acre, including a site that is less than one acre that is part of a larger
common plan of development or sale that would disturb or has disturbed one acre or more, or (2) any
development site for which a stormwater detention pond is required under these Standards.
Common plan of development or sale means a plan or sale where multiple separate and distinct
construction activities may be taking place at different times on different schedules in a contiguous area, within
1/4 mile, but remain related through such plan or sale.

Construction activity means an activity that disturbs the ground surface and associated activities that
include, without limitation clearing, grading, excavation, demolition, installation of new or improved haul
roads and access roads, staging areas, stockpiling of fill materials, and borrow areas. Activities from initial
ground breaking through final stabilization are construction activities regardless of ownership. Construction
activities do not include routine maintenance to maintain the original line and grade, hydraulic capacity, or
original purpose of a facility. Activities to conduct repairs that are not part of routine maintenance, activities
for replacement, and activities for repaving where underlying or surrounding soil is exposed, cleared, graded,
or excavated are all construction activities for the purposes of this chapter.
Control measure means an activity, practice, or structural control used to prevent or reduce the
discharge of pollutants to waters of the State. The two categories of control measures are:
Control measure for post-construction stormwater quality, also referred to as a
stormwater control measure (SCM), means a permanent device, practice, or method for
removing, reducing, retarding, or preventing targeted stormwater runoff constituents,
pollutants, and contaminants from reaching receiving waters.
Control measures for erosion and sediment control means a device, practice, or
method implemented on a construction site to remove, reduce, retard, or prevent pollutants
or pollutant-laden water from discharging off the site. These control measures may be
structural (e.g., wattles/sediment control logs, silt fences, earthen dikes, drainage swales,
sediment traps, subsurface drains, pipe slope drains, inlet protection, outlet protection,
gabions, sediment basins, temporary vegetation, permanent vegetation, mulching,
geotextiles, sod stabilization, slope roughening, maintaining existing vegetation,
protection of trees, and preservation of mature vegetation) or non-structural (e.g.,
schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, pollution prevention and educational
practices, and maintenance procedures).
Detention pond means a structural control intended to store increased runoff from developed
property and release this runoff at the historic rate that existed prior to development or redevelopment.
LID technique means low impact development technique.
Low Impact Development (LID) technique means a non-structural land development planning and
site layout strategy intended to reduce stormwater volume, peak discharge, and pollutant load.
MS4 Permit means the Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System Phase II discharge permit issued
by the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment pursuant to Regulation 61, Colorado
Permit Discharge System, 5 CCR 1002-61, and the Colorado Water Quality Control Act, C.R.S.§ 25-8-
101, et seq., as that permit may be amended in the future.
New development means a vegetative or non-vegetative change in the existing land surface, including
without limitation construction activities, compaction associated with stabilization of structures, road

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-3

construction, construction or installation of a building or other structure, and creation of impervious surfaces,
and land subdivision for a site that does not meet the definition of redevelopment.

Receiving Pervious Area (RPA) means a vegetated pervious area that receives stormwater from an
impervious area, thus un-connecting the impervious area from directly discharging stormwater to a local
stream, lake, or to the public stormwater utility system.
Redevelopment means the creation or addition of impervious area or paved surface on a site that is
already substantially developed with 35% or more existing imperviousness, including without limitation
expansion of a building footprint, addition or replacement of a structure, structural development, and
construction or replacement of paved surface area.
Stormwater utility system means the municipal storm sewer system that includes without limitation
the conveyance or system of conveyances (including roads with drainage systems, municipal streets, catch
basins, curbs, gutters, ditches, human-made channels, or storm drains) that discharge to state waters and is
owned or operated by the City and designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater, and is not a
combined sewer or part of a publicly owned treatment works.
Stormwater Quality Design Standard means a performance metric from the MS4 Permit that must
be demonstrated to be achieved to document compliance with City of Boulder stormwater requirements for
applicable development sites. Stormwater Quality Design Standards are volume reduction, Water Quality
Capture Volume (WQCV), pollutant removal, and constrained redevelopment site standards, as defined in
Subsection 7.16(D).
Treatment area means a single drainage basin or group of drainage basins for which a proposed
design completely satisfies a single Stormwater Quality Design Standard.
Unconnected Impervious Area (UIA) means an impervious area that discharges to a RPA and,
therefore, does not discharge directly to a local stream, lake, or the stormwater utility system.
Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV) means the volume equivalent to the runoff from an 80th
percentile storm, meaning that 80 percent of the most frequently occurring storms are fully captured and
treated and larger events are partially treated.

7.02 Conceptual Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan

(A) General
(1) If a project is determined to be of sufficient size or complexity, the Director may require
the preparation of a Conceptual Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan by the Engineer to
assess feasibility of stormwater utility system improvements. The purpose of the
Conceptual Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan shall be to demonstrate that required
stormwater utility system facilities can be accommodated on the development site and to
identify and plan for impacts to neighboring properties and stormwater utility systems.
(2) The Director reviews Conceptual Drainage Reports and Stormwater Plans for local-level
purposes, including conformance with these Standards pertaining to stormwater utility
systems.
(3) Measured or calculated parameters provided in all submitted Conceptual Drainage Reports
and Stormwater Plans shall be reported using the English System of Measurement unless
Metric System units are the standard expression for the parameter.
(a) Land or surface area shall be reported in square feet (ft2, sf, or sq.ft.) for projects

7-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 having a land disturbance area less than one acre and shall be reported to the
nearest tenth of an acre (acre or ac.) for projects having a land disturbance of one
acre or greater.
(b) Water volume shall be provided in cubic feet (ft3 or cu.ft.).
(c) Soil volume shall be provided in cubic yards (yd3 or cu.yd.).
(d) Water discharge (also stated as flow rate or flow) shall be provided in cubic feet
per second (ft3/s or cfs).
(e) Infiltration rate shall be reported in inches per hour (in/hr).

(B) Conceptual Drainage Report

The Conceptual Drainage Report shall provide a response for each of the elements listed in the
Preliminary Drainage Report narrative requirements, as set forth in Subsection 7.03(B) of these
Standards, or if more data is necessary identify the data collection efforts necessary to complete the
Preliminary Drainage Report.

(C) Conceptual Stormwater Plan

The Conceptual Stormwater Plan shall address each of the elements listed in the Preliminary
Stormwater Plan requirements, sufficient to provide an overall drainage plan, as set forth in
Subsection 7.03(C) of these Standards, or if more data is necessary identify the data collection
efforts necessary to complete the Preliminary Stormwater Plan.

7.03 Preliminary Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan

(A) General
(1) The Director may require the preparation of a Preliminary Drainage Report and
Stormwater Plan by the Engineer. The Preliminary Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan
will be used to assess the impacts and public improvement needs of any proposed project
or development site. Approval of the Preliminary Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan
shall not be construed as approval of specific design details.
(2) The Director reviews Preliminary Drainage Reports and Stormwater Plans for local-level
purposes, including conformance with these Standards pertaining to stormwater utility
systems.
(3) Measured or calculated parameters provided with the Preliminary Drainage Report and
Stormwater Plan shall be consistent with Subsection 7.02(A)(3) of these Standards.

(B) Preliminary Drainage Report

The Preliminary Drainage Report shall define the proposed development site, describe existing
conditions, and propose needed stormwater facilities to meet the requirements of these Standards.
The Preliminary Drainage Report shall include, at a minimum, narratives addressing the items
listed in this subsection except for those items not applicable to the proposed development site.
The Preliminary Drainage Report shall include visual representations and/or refer to the
Preliminary Stormwater Plan sheet with the corresponding content (see Subsection 7.03(C) of
these Standards for Preliminary Stormwater Plan requirements). The Preliminary Drainage Report

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-5

 narrative shall include the following information:
(1) Cover Page: Provide a cover page that includes the site name, site address, submittal and
revision dates as applicable, site owner, and preparing Engineer.
(2) Site Description
(a) Site Location Description
(i) County, city, township, range, section, and ¼ section.
(ii) Site vicinity and legal boundaries map.
(iii) Adjacent developments and associated land use.
(iv) Roadways located within or adjacent to the site.
(b) Property Description
(i) Site area and proposed area of disturbance in acres.
(ii) Existing and proposed site use.
(iii) Land surface (vegetation type, topography, slope, buildings, etc.)
(iv) Easements within or adjacent to the site.
(c) Drainage Description
(i) Major and minor drainageways.
(ii) Natural drainage features (e.g., streams, lakes, ponds, wetlands, and
buffer areas).
(iii) Irrigation ditches.
(iv) Regulatory floodplain extents.
(v) Known drainage issues.
(vi) Hydrologic soil group map and description.
(vii) Geotechnical and groundwater site investigation results.
(viii) Preliminary Infiltration Feasibility Screening results and map (see
Subsection 7.16(A) of these Standards).
(3) Drainage Basin Description
(a) Major Drainage Basin
(i) General description of major drainage basin characteristics and flow
patterns.
(ii) Flow conveyance from site to receiving major drainageway.
(iii) Reference to all applicable planning studies for the major drainageway
and, if applicable, describe requirements of these plans for the
development site.
(iv) Impact of site development on upstream and downstream properties.
(v) Impact of site development on downstream natural and constructed
open channels and piped stormwater utility systems and the measures
proposed to reduce or eliminate those impacts.

7-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (b) Site Drainage Basin(s)
(i) Existing and proposed basin and sub-basin characteristics for the site,
including land cover, area, flow patterns, and discharge points for each
basin/sub-basin.
(ii) Acceptance and conveyance of off-site stormwater into and through the
proposed development site.
(iii) Overview of all existing and proposed conveyance, detention, and water
quality facilities, including rationale, for each basin/sub-basin.
(4) Drainage Design Criteria
(a) Regulation Applicability
(i) Detention requirements (see Section 7.12 of these Standards).
(ii) Construction stormwater management requirements (see Section 7.13
of these Standards).
(iii) Post-construction stormwater quality requirements (see Section 7.15 of
these Standards).
(iv) Stream, Wetland, and Waterbody Protection Requirements as set forth
in Chapter 9-3, “Overlay Districts,” B.R.C. 1981.
(v) Other applicable criteria and permits.
(b) Site Planning and Constraints
(i) Description of previous drainage studies or master plans for the site and
adjacent areas and influence on proposed stormwater utility system
design.
(ii) Description of site constraints caused by structures, utilities, etc. and
influence on proposed stormwater utility system design.
(iii) Description of Low Impact Development (LID) techniques utilized for
stormwater management with reference to completed form(s) as
provided by the Director and included as an appendix (see Section 7.14
of these Standards).
(c) Hydrologic and Hydraulic Criteria
(i) Design storm(s).
(ii) Runoff calculation methods.
(iii) Detention storage and discharge calculation method.
(iv) Velocity and capacity calculation method(s) for inlets and conveyances.
(v) Water surface profile and hydraulic grade line (HGL) calculation
methods.
(d) Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Criteria
(i) Selected treatment approach and design standards (see Section 7.16 of
these Standards).
(5) Stream, Wetland, and Waterbody Impacts

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-7

 (a) Description of floodplain impacts.
(b) Required modification studies.
(6) Stormwater Conveyance Design
(a) Description of proposed conveyance system.
(b) Conveyance path to major drainageway and capacity evaluation.
(7) Detention and Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Design
(a) Description of each proposed facility (identifier, type, drainage area, size,
treatment volumes, components, and function).
(b) Description of design compliance with detention and post-construction
stormwater quality requirements with reference to completed form(s) as
provided by the Director and included as an appendix (see Section 7.15 of these
Standards).
(8) Conclusions
(a) Drainage plan effectiveness.
(b) Compliance with requirements.
(c) Exclusions and variances.
(9) References: Reference all standards, criteria, guidance documents, master plans, and
technical reports used.
(10) Appendices
(a) Completed form(s) documenting post-construction water quality compliance
(Section 7.15 of these Standards).
(b) Completed form(s) documenting low impact development approaches (Section
7.14 of these Standards).

(C) Preliminary Stormwater Plan

The purpose of the Preliminary Stormwater Plan is to provide visual representations of existing
and proposed site conditions to support the Preliminary Drainage Report narrative. The
Preliminary Stormwater Plan shall be included with the Preliminary Drainage Report, submitted as
a single PDF document. All Preliminary Stormwater Plan sheets shall be prepared on 24-inch by
36-inch paper with appropriate scale ranges. The Preliminary Stormwater Plan shall include plan
sheets addressing, at a minimum, the following items, except for those items not applicable to the
proposed development site:

(1) Overall Drainage Plan

(a) Title block, legend, north arrow, and scale.
(b) Existing topographic contours.
(c) Property boundary.
(d) Major drainage basin boundaries with area, design point, and existing flow rate
labels.
(e) Drainage flow arrows depicting flow patterns to, from, and within the site.

7-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (f) Existing stormwater detention and water quality facility boundaries.
(g) Easement boundaries.
(h) Existing waterways (streams, lakes/ponds, wetlands, and irrigation facilities).
(i) Land cover (vegetation and impervious surfaces).
(j) Key map depicting extents of detailed drainage plan sheets.
(2) Detailed Drainage Plan/s
(a) Title block, legend, north arrow, and scale (scale range of 1 inch = 20 feet to 1
inch = 100 feet).
(b) Existing (screened) and proposed (solid) topographic contours (2 feet max
interval).
(c) Location and elevation of all waterways, regulated buffer areas, and 100-year
floodplain.
(d) Property, right-of-way, and easement boundaries.
(e) Drainage basin/sub-basin boundaries with area, design point, and flow/release rate
labels.
(f) Proposed outfall points and conveyance facilities to major drainageway with
design point and flow/release rate labels.
(g) Existing and proposed structure boundaries.
(h) Existing and proposed stormwater conveyance facilities with size, slope, and
material designation (storm sewers, culverts, open channels, inlets, and discharge
points).
(i) Existing and proposed stormwater detention and water quality facilities with
drainage area, surface area, side slope/wall, and component labels.

7.04 Final Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan

(A) General
(1) The Director may require the preparation of a Final Drainage Report and Stormwater Plan
by the Engineer. The report and plan will be used to assess the impacts and public
improvements needs of any proposed project or development site.
(2) The Director reviews Final Drainage Reports and Stormwater Plans for local-level
purposes, including conformance with these Standards pertaining to stormwater utility
systems.
(3) Measured or calculated parameters provided with the Final Drainage Report and
Stormwater Plan shall be consistent with Subsection 7.02(A)(3) of these Standards.

(B) Final Drainage Report

The Final Drainage Report shall describe the to-be-constructed drainage conditions for the site.
The Final Drainage Report shall include, at a minimum, all required narratives of the Preliminary
Drainage Report, as set forth in Subsection 7.03(B) of these Standards, and the items listed in this

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-9

 subsection, except for those items not applicable to the proposed development site. The Final
Drainage Report shall include visual representations and/or refer to the Final Stormwater Plan
(Subsection 7.04(C) of these Standards) or construction drawings (Subsection 7.04(D) of these
Standards) with the corresponding content.
The Final Drainage Report shall include a cover page, following the format set forth in Subsection
7.03(B) of these Standards and a certification page with the following statement prepared by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado:
I hereby certify that this Final Drainage Report and Final Stormwater Plan for [Site Name] was
prepared by me, or under my direct supervision, in accordance with sound engineering practice
and all applicable state, federal and local regulations, including the provisions of the City of
Boulder Design and Construction Standards.
Registered Professional Engineer (Affix Seal)
State of Colorado No. ________________________
The Final Drainage Report shall include the following information:
(1) Site Description: Updated narratives for all items listed in Subsection 7.03(B)(2) of these
Standards.
(2) Drainage Basin Description: Updated narratives for all items listed in Subsection
7.03(B)(3) of these Standards.
(3) Drainage Design Criteria: Updated narratives for all items listed in Subsection
7.03(B)(4) of these Standards.
(4) Stream, Wetland, and Waterbody Impacts
(a) Description of floodplain impacts.
(b) Required modification studies.
(c) Applicable permits obtained.
(5) Stormwater Conveyance Design
(a) Description of proposed conveyance system.
(b) Conveyance path to major drainageway and capacity evaluation.
(c) Storm sewer, culvert, and inlet design (location, size, tributary area, and peak
flows).
(d) Open channel design (location, size, tributary area, and peak flows).
(e) Outfall design (location, peak flows, and energy dissipation).
(f) Street drainage (see Section 7.10 of these Standards).
(g) Easement requirements.
(h) Maintenance requirements.
(6) Detention and Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Design
(a) Description of each proposed facility (identifier, type, drainage area, size,
treatment volumes, components, and function).
(b) Description of design compliance with detention and post-construction stormwater

7-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 quality requirements with reference to completed form(s) as provided by the
Director and included as an appendix (see Section 7.15).
(c) Inlet design (description of pretreatment measures and energy dissipation).
(d) Basin and outlet design (storage volumes and release rates, including overflow
spillway).
(e) Description of vegetation coverage and planting plan.
(f) Description of filter media selection and underdrain configuration.
(g) Easement requirements.
(h) Description of maintenance requirements with reference to Inspection and
Maintenance Guide included as an appendix (see Section 7.18 of these
Standards).
(7) Conclusions: Updated narratives for all items listed in Subsection 7.03(B)(8) of these
Standards.
(8) References: Updated references for all items listed in Subsection 7.03(B)(9) of these
Standards.
(9) Appendices
(a) Completed form(s) documenting post-construction water quality compliance
(Section 7.15 of these Standards).
(b) Completed form(s) documenting low impact development approaches (Section
7.14 of these Standards).
(c) Inspection and Maintenance Guide (Section 7.18 of these Standards).
(d) Hydrologic calculations.
(e) Hydraulic calculations.
(f) Stormwater conveyance calculations.
(g) Detention and permanent water quality calculations.
(h) Critical reference information copied to create standalone document.

(C) Final Stormwater Plan

The Final Stormwater Plan shall detail the to-be-constructed drainage conditions for the site and
follow the submittal requirements of the Preliminary Stormwater Plan, as set forth in Subsection
7.03(C) of these Standards.
(1) Overall Drainage Plan: Updated plan depicting all items listed in Subsection
7.03(C)(1) of these Standards.
(2) Detailed Drainage Plan(s): Updated plan(s) depicting all items listed in Subsection
7.03(C)(2) of these Standards.

(D) Stormwater Construction Plans and Drawings

Construction Plans and Drawings shall be submitted for review in conjunction with the Final
Drainage Report. Preparation of Construction Plans and Drawings shall be consistent with Section

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-11

 1.03 of these Standards. The following elements pertaining to site stormwater design shall, at a
minimum, be included in the Construction Plans and Drawings.
(1) Stormwater Conveyance Construction Drawings
(a) Plan drawing(s) depicting all proposed storm sewer and open channel
conveyances following the requirements of Subsection 1.03(E)(2) of these
Standards.
(b) Profile drawing(s) depicting all proposed storm sewer and open channel
conveyances following the requirements of Subsection 1.03(E)(3) of these
Standards.
(2) Detention and Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Construction Drawings
(a) Plan drawing(s) depicting each proposed detention and post-construction
stormwater quality facility following the requirements of Subsection 1.3(E)(2)
of these Standards and, at a minimum, the following components, if proposed:
(i) Inlet and outlet structure locations and energy dissipation measures,
including emergency spillways,
(ii) Proposed contours for treatment surface area and side slopes/walls,
(iii) Facility components (e.g. pretreatment, micropool, underdrain, etc.),
and,
(iv) Vegetative cover.
(b) Profile and/or cross-sectional drawing(s) depicting each proposed detention and
post-construction stormwater quality facility following the requirements of
Subsection 1.3(E)(3) of these Standards and, at a minimum, the following
components, if proposed:
(i) Inlet and outlet structure inverts,
(ii) Treatment area and side slope/wall surface elevations,
(iii) Filter media components and depths, and
(iv) Facility component elevations (e.g. pretreatment, micropool,
underdrain, etc.).
(c) Detail drawing/s depicting each unique detention and post-construction
stormwater quality facility component following the requirements of Subsection
1.3(E)(4) of these Standards and, at a minimum for the following components,
if proposed:
(i) Pretreatment,
(ii) Outlet structure,
(iii) Underdrain, and
(iv) Other unique components.

7-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 7.05 Hydrology

(A) General
The methodologies and design standards for determining rainfall and runoff conditions for any
development project are based on the standards prescribed in the USDCM, with local revisions as
prescribed in these Standards.

(B) Storm Frequency

Table 7-1, “Design Storm Frequencies,” indicates initial and major design storm frequencies to be
used in the stormwater design or any project or development: Table 7-1: Design Storm Frequencies

Land Use Initial Storm Major Storm

Single Family Residential 2 Year 100 Year
All Other Uses 5 Year 100 Year
Detention Ponding Design 10 Year 100 Year

(C) Rainfall
The rainfall intensities to be used in computing runoff shall be determined using the USDCM,
Volume 1 and the Boulder station of the NOAA Atlas 14 Point Precipitation Frequency Estimates.

(D) Runoff
(1) CUHP Method: For basins larger than 160 acres, the Colorado Urban Hydrograph
Procedure (CUHP) method shall be applied in conformance with the USDCM using local
rainfall conditions.
(2) Rational Method: For all basins smaller than 160 acres, the rational method, as described
in the USDCM, shall be used to calculate runoff for both the initial and major storms.
(3) Runoff Coefficient: The runoff coefficient to be used with the rational method may be
determined based on either zoning/land use classifications or types of surface
classifications prescribed in the USDCM. A composite runoff coefficient may be
calculated using land areas impacted by specific classifications.
(4) Intensity: The rainfall intensity used in the rational method shall be calculated per the
USDCM using the NOAA Atlas 14 rainfall depth-duration-frequency data.

7.06 Materials and Installation

Construction of stormwater-related public improvements shall be in compliance with these Standards.
All pipe and structures shall be of adequate strength to support trench and AASHTO HS-20 highway
loadings. The type of pipe and structures to be installed shall comply with these Standards, and shall
be based upon applicable design flows, site conditions, and maintenance requirements.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-13

7.07 Open Drainageways

(A) General
(1) Designated Major Drainageways: The following list identifies designated major
drainageways in the City for primary stormwater conveyance:

Designated Major Drainageways

Bear Canyon Creek Four Mile Canyon Creek South Boulder Creek
Bluebell Canyon Creek Goose Creek Sunshine Canyon Creek
Boulder Creek Gregory Canyon Creek Two Mile Canyon Creek
Boulder Slough King’s Gulch Viele Channel
Elmer’s Two Mile Creek Skunk Canyon Creek Wonderland Creek
Dry Creek Ditch No. 2

(2) Design Approach: Design of public improvements for local drainageways shall ensure
opportunities to provide for open conveyance corridors that may serve multiple functions,
including without limitation, stormwater drainage and flood conveyance, wetlands and water
quality enhancement, environmental protection and preservation, open space and wildlife
areas, and recreational activities and trail corridors. Stormwater improvements impacting
local drainageways shall be designed and constructed to respect, restore and enhance these
functions in order to maintain a natural ecology, environment and aesthetic value of such
drainageways.

(B) Drainageway Types

(1) Definition: Drainageways in the City are defined as natural or artificial channels as follows:
(a) Natural channels include naturally developed creeks, streams and thalwegs, which
have been geologically created through the erosion process over time. Boulder Creek
is considered a natural channel.
(b) Artificial channels include those that are designed, constructed, or developed by
human effort. Artificial channels may be unlined or lined (where non-erosive
conditions for unlined design cannot be met). Artificial channels also include
irrigation ditches, roadside ditches, and drainage swales.
(2) Natural Drainageways
(a) The hydraulic properties of natural drainageways vary along each stream reach and
are to be maintained in a naturally occurring and environmental form. Natural
drainageways typically have mild slopes, are reasonably stable, and are not in a state
of serious degradation or aggradation.
(b) Where unstable conditions are created through the introduction of urbanized
stormwater runoff, which alters the nature of flow peaks and volumes and may cause
erosion, mitigation measures may be proposed in the natural drainageway to maintain
a stabilized and naturally occurring condition. A detailed analysis will be required
for all development proposals affecting natural drainageways in order to identify the
impacts of changes in flow characteristics, erosion and sedimentation, wetland losses
and water quality conditions.
7-14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (c) Analyses of natural drainageways shall be provided for each project or development
application affecting the drainageway. When performed, the Engineer is to prepare
cross sections of the drainageway, define water surface profile for the existing and
proposed minor and major storm events, investigate the bed and bank material to
determine erosion and sediment transport tendencies, identify impacts on the
naturally occurring conditions and ecology and study the bank slope and stream bed
stability. An analysis shall include engineering calculations to ensure that
supercritical flow conditions do not result from proposed project or development
activities. Natural channel improvements that would cause supercritical flow
conditions shall not be permitted.
(3) Unlined Artificial Drainageways
(a) Unlined artificial drainageways provide improved channel bottoms that are covered
with wetlands, grass, or other vegetation, and may be used where naturally occurring
drainageways are not present or as proposed under an adopted stormwater master
plan. Designs for unlined drainageways shall comply with these Standards and the
USDCM.
(b) Unlined artificial drainageways are to provide conditions for slower flow velocities,
reduced flow energy, increased flow retardance, and increased channel storage. The
wetlands, grass, or other vegetation along stream beds and banks are intended to
stabilize the channel, consolidate the soil mass of the bed, mitigate erosion, and
control soil particles transport along the drainageway. Design of these improvements
shall also consider opportunities for accommodating multiple functions along the
drainageway, providing for a natural ecology, environment and aesthetic value.
(c) Structural measures such as rock linings used for revetments, drop structures, scour
aprons, or trickle channels may be approved as a means of controlling erosion for
unlined artificial drainageways.
(4) Lined Artificial Channels
(a) Where conditions for natural or unlined artificial drainageways are not available,
including situations where limited right- of-way, supercritical velocities, or extremely
erosive conditions exist, lined artificial channels may be constructed, subject to
conformance with adopted stormwater master plans and the review, discretion, and
approval of the City. Designs for lined artificial channels shall comply with these
Standards and the USDCM. Lined artificial channels typically include rock-lined,
grouted rip-rap, and concrete-lined stream beds and banks.
(b) Rock-lined (rip-rapped) or grouted rip-rap channels are generally discouraged but are
much preferred to concrete lined channels. A rock-lined or grouted rip-rap channel
may typically be steeper and narrower, due to the higher friction factors of rock, and
may include steeper banks or side slopes. The lining shall be capable of withstanding
all hydraulic and hydrodynamic forces which tend to overtop the bank, deteriorate the
lining, erode the soil beneath the lining, and erode unlined areas, especially for the
supercritical flow conditions. If project constraints suggest the use of a rock-lined or
grouted rip-rap channels, the Engineer shall present the justification and design
concept to the City for consideration.
(c) Concrete-lined channels are least desirable and may only be approved under severely
restrictive circumstances. The concrete lining shall withstand all hydraulic and
hydrodynamic forces which tend to overtop the bank, deteriorate the lining, erode the
soil beneath the lining, and erode unlined areas, especially for the supercritical flow
conditions. If project constraints suggest the use of a concrete lined channel, the
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-15
 Engineer shall present the justification and design concept, including a discussion of
non-concrete-lined alternatives and why they are not feasible, to the City for
consideration.
(5) Roadside Ditches and Drainage Swales: Roadside ditches and drainage swales are open
drainage systems that are not part of the major drainageway system and are used to convey
minor and major stormwater runoff in projects and developments and along rural-type streets.
The design of these drainage swales is similar to the design of unlined artificial drainageways
on a reduced scale.

(C) Drainageway Flow Computation

Uniform flow and critical flow computations for drainageways shall be performed in accordance with
the USDCM.

(D) Drainageway Design Standards

The design standards for drainageways involve a wide range of options intended to create safe,
environmental, multipurpose, and aesthetic improvements. The following planning, evaluation, and
design standards shall be applied:
(1) Natural Drainageways
(a) The drainageway and overbank areas necessary to pass 100-year storm runoff are to
be reserved for stormwater purposes.
(b) Water surface profiles shall be defined to identify floodplain conditions.
(c) Flood fringe filling along naturally defined drainageways, which reduces
drainageway flood storage capacity and increases downstream runoff peaks, is to be
avoided unless approved as part of an adopted City stormwater master plan.
(d) Roughness factors (n), which are representative of unmaintained channel conditions,
shall be used for the analysis of water surface profiles and to determine velocity
limitations
(e) The Director may allow the placement of erosion control structures, such as drop
structures, check dams, revetments, and scour aprons, where they may be necessary
to maintain stabilized drainageway conditions, subject to the design requirement that
the drainageway conditions remain as near natural as possible.
(f) Design parameters applicable to artificial drainageways, including without limitation,
freeboard height, bed and bank slopes, and curvature, may not necessarily apply to
natural drainageways. Significant site planning advantages may be realized by
maintaining the natural drainageway, without structured improvements, by allowing
drainageway overtopping onto reserved flooding areas designated as open space and
wetlands and maintaining irregular waterway features that naturally control flow
conditions, improve water quality, preserve stream ecology and enhance community
and aesthetic values.
(2) Unlined Artificial Drainageways: Where not specified in these Standards, the design of
unlined artificial drainageways shall conform with the USDCM.
(a) Longitudinal Channel Slopes: Channel slopes are dictated by velocity and Froude
number requirements. Where natural slopes exceed design slopes, drop structures
shall be provided to maintain design velocities and Froude numbers. Normally, grass
lined channels will have slopes of 0.2 percent to 0.6 percent.

7-16 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (b) Side Slopes: Maximum side slopes shall be no steeper than 4:1, unless specific
drainageway conditions warrant steeper side slopes as determined by the Director.
(c) Depth: Maximum depth of flow, outside of any low flow or trickle channel, shall be
5 feet. Critical depth shall be determined for both the major and initial storms in
order to ensure that supercritical flows do not occur.
(d) Bottom Width: Bottom width shall be consistent with the maximum depth and
velocity standards, and shall accommodate low flows and the development of wetland
and water quality enhancement systems.
(e) Horizontal Curvature: The center line curvature shall have a design radius twice the
top width for design flow conditions, but not less than 50 feet.
(f) Roughness Coefficient: Meaning’s “n,” as adjusted by channel bottom conditions
outlined in the USDCM, shall be applied.
(g) Cross Sections: Drainageway cross-sections may be almost any type suitable to the
location and to the environmental conditions, subject to conformance with these
Standards. Cross sections simulating naturally occurring drainageway corridors are
strongly recommended.
(h) Channel Bottom: The channel bottom is to be designed to convey low flows and
enhance water quality in conformance with environmental concerns and regulations.
Acceptable channel bottoms, subject to City approval for specific site applications,
may include without limitation wetlands or natural vegetation and low flow channels
conveying a minimum 3 percent of the design storm flow.
(i) Easement/Right-of-Way: The minimum drainageway easement/right of way width
shall include the bank to bank dimension of the drainageway section, including the
normal flow depth and freeboard areas, and adequate maintenance access.
(j) Maintenance Access: Maintenance access shall be provided along the entire length of
all major drainageways and shall connect with a public street to allow access by
medium and large scale construction and maintenance equipment. An access road
shall be at least 12 feet wide and designed to adequately support the loads of
expected maintenance equipment. The maintenance road may be shared as a
greenway trail, subject to approval by the City.
(k) Water Surface Profiles: Water surface profiles shall be determined for all
drainageway designs using standard backwater methods, taking into consideration
losses due to velocity changes produced by changing channel sections, drops,
waterway openings, or obstructions. The water surface and energy gradient profiles
shall be shown on the construction plans.
(3) Lined Artificial Channels: Where allowed by the City, lined artificial channels shall be
designed in accordance with these Standards and the USDCM, including the following:
(a) Easement/Right-of-Way: The minimum drainageway easement/right of way width
shall include the bank to bank dimension of the drainageway section, including the
normal flow depth and freeboard areas, and adequate maintenance access.
(b) Maintenance Access: Maintenance access shall be provided along the entire length of
all major drainageways and shall connect with a public street to allow access by
medium and large scale construction and maintenance equipment. An access road
shall be at least 12 feet wide and designed to adequately support the loads of
expected maintenance equipment. The maintenance road may be shared as a
greenway trail, subject to approval by the City.
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-17
 (c) Water Surface Profiles: Water surface profiles shall be determined for all
drainageway designs using standard backwater methods, taking into consideration
losses due to velocity changes produced by changing channel sections, drops,
waterway openings, or obstructions. The water surface and energy gradient profiles
shall be shown on the construction plans.
(4) Roadside Ditches and Drainage Swales: The design of roadside ditches and drainage
swales is similar to the standards for unlined channels with modifications for application to
minor storm drainage. The standards are as follows:
(a) Capacity: Roadside ditches and drainage swales shall have a minimum capacity for
the 10-year design storm.
(b) Flow Velocity: The maximum velocity for the design storm runoff peak is not to
exceed 5 feet per second. The Froude number shall be less than 0.8.
(c) Longitudinal Slope: The slope shall be limited by flow velocity of the design storm.
Swale widening or check drops may be required to control velocities.
(d) Freeboard: Freeboard above the design flow depth shall be at least 6 inches.
(e) Curvature: The minimum radius of curvature shall be 25 feet.
(f) Roughness Coefficient: Manning’s “n,” as adjusted by channel bottom conditions
outlined in the USDCM, shall be applied.
(g) Depth: A drainage swale shall be at least 1 foot deep. A maximum depth for
drainage swales shall not exceed 5 feet and shall be dictated by the design flow and
cross-sectional standards.
(h) Side Slopes: Side slopes shall be no greater than 3:1; however, 4:1 side slopes or
flatter are recommended for landscaped areas and to enhance water quality.
(i) Driveway Culverts: Along roadside ditches, driveway culverts shall be sized to pass
the design storm flow without overtopping the driveway, having a minimum culvert
diameter size of 18 inches in height with at least 6 inches of cover. Flared end
sections or headwalls with appropriate erosion protection shall be provided. Given
the depth constraints along roadside ditches, more than one culvert may be required
to pass the design flow. Maintenance of all driveway culverts shall be the
responsibility of the property owner served by the driveway.
(j) Discharge Points: Roadside ditches and open drainage swales shall discharge directly
to the receiving water and shall not discharge to a piped storm sewer system for
conveyance to the receiving water body. If discharge to a piped storm sewer system
is necessary, a sediment sump and debris grate shall be provided immediately
upstream of the discharge point to the storm sewer system. The grate shall be hinged
to allow for maintenance access.
(k) Major Drainage Capacity
(i) The major drainage (100-year storm) capacity of roadside ditches is restricted
by the maximum flow depth allowed at the street crown or by the ground
surface at the edge of the street right-of-way.
(ii) The major drainage capacity of drainage swales is restricted to the maximum
flow that can be passed without inundation to and damage of downstream
properties.

7-18 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(E) Hydraulic Structures
(1) Where Required: Hydraulic structures are used in open stormwater systems to control the
flow of the runoff. The energy associated with flowing water has the potential to create
damage to the drainage system, especially in the form of erosion. Hydraulic structures are
intended to control the energy of stormwater flow and minimize the damage potential of
stormwater runoff. Typical hydraulic structures may include without limitation the following:
(a) Channel drop and check structures,
(b) Rip rap and rock linings,
(c) Energy dissipaters and stilling basins,
(d) Channel rundowns,
(e) Bridges and culverts, and
(f) Irrigation ditch crossings.
(2) Design Standards: The standards to be used in the design of hydraulic structures shall be in
accordance with these Standards and the USDCM.

7.08 Storm Sewers

(A) System Design

(1) Where Required: Storm sewers shall be required when the other parts of the minor
stormwater system, primarily streets, curbs, gutters, and roadside ditches, no longer have the
capacity for additional runoff in the initial storm event.
(2) Gravity Flow Conditions: Storm sewers shall be designed for gravity (open) flow
conditions, using a “Manning’s” roughness coefficient from Table 7-2, “Manning’s “n” for
Storm Sewers.”

Table 7-2: Manning’s “n” for Storm Sewers

Sewer Type Manning’s “n”

Concrete 0.015
Plastic 0.013
Corrugated Metal 0.013

(3) Flow Depth: Storm sewers are to be designed to carry peak flows at full pipe depth.
(4) Pressure Flow Prohibited: Pressurized surcharged or depressed (inverted siphon)
stormwater mains are prohibited in the City’s stormwater system.
(5) Continuous Drainage System: All stormwater drainage facilities shall be a component of a
connected and continuous drainage system that does not end in a sump condition and does not
discharge to irrigation ditches.

(B) Location
All storm sewer mains shall be installed in public rights-of-way or easements, in conformance with
Section 4.04, “Utilities Easements,” of these Standards.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-19

(C) Depth
The cover for all storm sewer mains shall be at least 18 inches deep, measured from the top of pipe to
the final surface grade, and shall be capable of withstanding AASHTO HS-20 highway traffic
loadings.

(D) Size
Storm sewer mains shall be at least 18 inches in diameter, and storm sewer laterals shall be at least 15
inches in diameter.

(E) Slope
(1) Minimum and Maximum: Minimum allowable slope shall provide flow velocities of at
least 2-feet per second and maximum allowable slope shall provide flow velocities no greater
than 10feet per second during peak flow conditions.
(2) Constant Slope: All storm sewer mains shall be laid at a constant slope between manholes.

(F) Alignment
(1) Straight Alignment: All storm sewer mains shall be laid in a straight alignment between
manholes.
(2) Curvilinear Mains Prohibited: Curvilinear storm sewer mains shall not be allowed.

(G) Separations and Crossings

All collection main separations and crossings of other City utilities shall be designed in compliance
with Section 4.06, “Separation of Utilities,” of these Standards.

(H) Taps
All taps approved onto an existing storm sewer main shall be made by the City of Boulder Utilities
Division and shall be paid for by the applicant. A manhole shall be provided at all taps 6 inches in
diameter or larger. Where taps are made to inlet boxes a manhole is not required.

(I) Ground Water Barriers

(1) Required: Where the possibility exists that ground water may be diverted by the
construction of new storm sewer mains, ground water barriers shall be constructed within the
storm sewer main trench to prevent ground water migration or diversion along the main.
(2) Placement: The Engineer shall determine the location and number of ground water barriers
that will be necessary to mitigate any ground water impacts, subject to review and approval
by the Director. Any necessary support material required to address ground water concerns,
such as soils investigations, engineering calculations and design details, shall be provided by
the Engineer.

(J) Extensions
Where required as part of any adopted City master plan or to satisfy stormwater design requirements
as part of any proposed project or development, storm sewer mains shall be extended downstream to
the major drainageway, and upstream to the far edge of the property being served, to ensure
perpetuation of the stormwater collection system.

7-20 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(K) Manholes
(1) Location: Manholes shall be provided at each storm sewer main connection with another
storm sewer main or lateral line, at all changes in grade, slope, alignment and pipe size, at all
tap connections 6 inches in diameter or larger, or every 400 feet at a minimum.
(2) Size
(a) Table 7-3, “Required Manhole Sizes,” indicates required manhole sizes.

Table 7-3: Required Manhole Sizes

Sewer Main Diameter Manhole Diameter

12 - 18 Inches 4 Feet
21 - 42 Inches 5 Feet
48 - 54 Inches 6 Feet
60 Inches and Larger Special Detail

(b) Special Provisions: Larger manhole diameters or a junction structure may be required
when sewer alignments are not straight through or more than one sewer line passes
through a manhole.
(3) Maintenance Access: Direct access by maintenance vehicles shall be provided to each
manhole. The access drive shall be an all-weather surface, such as asphalt or concrete paving,
adequate gravel base or turf block, minimum 12 feet in width, and shall be capable of
supporting maintenance vehicles weighing up to 14 tons.
(4) Covers
(a) Manholes that are not located within a public street, alley or driveway section shall be
installed with a hinged, gasketed, and locking frame and cover assembly. The
assembly shall be an “East Jordan Iron Works” ERGO or ERGO XL assembly.
(b) Manholes located within the 100-year floodplain, or in a location where runoff may
accumulate and pond, shall be installed with a hinged, gasketed, and locking frame
and cover assembly. The assembly shall be an “East Jordan Iron Works” ERGO or
ERGO XL assembly.

(L) Hydraulic Design

(1) Rational Method: The rational method, as described in the USDCM, shall be used for the
sizing of storm sewer systems.
(2) Hydraulic and Energy Grade Line, and Design Losses: Storm sewers shall be designed to
convey the initial storm flow peaks without surcharging the sewer, and the final energy grade
line shall be at or below the proposed ground surface. To ensure that this objective is
achieved, the hydraulic and energy grade line shall be calculated by accounting for pipe
friction losses and pipe form losses as provided in the USDCM.

7.09 Inlets

(A) Specifications
(1) Design: Except as modified in these Standards, storm sewer inlet design shall conform with
the standards in the USDCM.
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-21
 (2) Required: Storm inlets shall be provided at:
(a) Areas where street capacity (e.g., allowable design flow spread) would be exceeded
without them,
(b) At sumps or areas prone to ponding,
(c) At median breaks (e.g., where traffic turns across the median),
(d) Upstream of speed mitigation and pedestrian structures that would otherwise cause a
damming of stormwater runoff,
(e) Where nuisance flows would otherwise cross a driving lane, and
(f) Where curb and gutter ends.
(3) Inlet Classification: Inlets are classified as a sump or continuous grade condition. Sump
inlets are inlets located in a low spot or submerged condition. Continuous grade inlets are
inlets located along a continuous grade curb and gutter section where bypass flows may
occur, and not in a low point.
(4) Standard Inlets: Table 7-4, “Standard Inlets,” indicates the standard inlets permitted for use
in the City.

Table 7-4: Standard Inlets

Inlet Type Drainage Permitted Use Percentage of Theoretical

Condition Capacity Allowed
Curb Opening Inlet - Type “R” Continuous All Curb and Gutter 80% (5 Foot Length)
Grade or Sump Street Types 85% (10 Foot Length)
90% (15 Foot Length)
Combination (Curb Continuous All Curb and Gutter 66%
Opening/Grated) Inlet Grade or Sump Street Types
Grated Area Inlet Sump Parking Lots, Alleys 60%

(5) Reduction Factors: In order to account for inlet capacity reductions caused by debris
plugging, pavement overlaying, parked vehicles, and other blockage factors, inlet design shall
be based on the “percentage of theoretical capacity allowed” as outlined in Table 7-4,
“Standard Inlets,” in these Standards.
(6) Inlet Spacing
(a) Spacing of storm inlets is dependent upon traffic requirements, contributing land use,
street slope and distance to the nearest outfall system. The recommended sizing and
spacing of the inlets is based upon the interception rate of 70 percent to 80 percent,
which has been found to be more efficient than spacing using 100 percent
interception rate.
(b) Using recommended inlet spacing, only the most downstream inlet is designed to
intercept 100 percent of the flow. In addition to recommended interception rates,
considerable improvements in overall inlet system efficiency can be achieved if the
inlets are located in the sumps created by street intersections.
(7) Inlet Grates: All inlet grates located in a street, alley, parking lot travel lane, bike path, or
sidewalk shall utilize a vaned grate on the inlet such as the Denver Type 16 inlet.

7-22 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

7.10 Street Drainage

(A) Function of Streets in the Drainage System

(1) Primary Function of Streets: The primary function of streets is for safe traffic movement;
therefore, streets shall be designed and constructed to accommodate runoff and convey it to
downstream drainage facilities in order to minimize its interference with traffic. Streets
therefore provide an integral part of the stormwater system and are intended to transport local
storm runoff within reasonable limits. When the stormwater runoff accumulation in the street
exceeds allowable limits, storm sewers or other drainage facilities are required to collect and
convey the excess runoff.
(2) Continuous Drainage System: All stormwater drainage facilities for streets shall be a
component of a connected and continuous drainage system that does not end in a sump
condition and does not discharge to irrigation ditches.

(B) Street Classification and Allowable Runoff Encroachment

(1) Street Classification: City streets are classified according to the average daily traffic carried
and travel routes they provide. Higher category streets, such as arterials and collectors, are
required to provide a greater level of access and through travel for emergency purposes
during major storm events than lower category streets.
(2) Allowable Runoff Encroachment: A stormwater drainage system (storm sewer or open
drainageway) shall be provided where the gutter runoff encroachment reaches the limits
outlined in Table 7-5, “Allowable Street Drainage Encroachment.”

Table 7-5: Allowable Street Drainage Encroachment

Street Classification Minor Storm Maximum Encroachment Major Storm Maximum

Encroachment
Residential and Local Streets No curb overtopping. Flow may spread to Depth at flowline shall not
street crown. exceed 18 inches.
Collector Streets No curb overtopping. A minimum one Depth at flowline shall not
travel lane width shall remain free of exceed 18 inches.
drainage encroachment.
Arterial Streets No curb overtopping. A minimum two Depth at crown shall not exceed
travel lanes width shall remain free of 6 inches. Depth at flowline shall
drainage encroachment. not exceed 18 inches.
Freeways No flow encroachment is allowed. Refer to CDOT Roadway
Design Manual
NOTE: Flow encroachment shall not extend beyond property lines.

(C) Hydraulic Street Capacity

(1) Allowable Capacity - Minor Storm: The allowable minor storm capacity of each street
section is to be calculated using the modified Manning's formula as described in the USDCM.
(2) Allowable Capacity - Major Storm: The allowable street capacity for the major storm shall
be calculated using Manning's formula, dividing the street cross section into the pavement
area and sidewalk/grass area, and computing individual flow contributions. An “n” value of
0.016 for pavement and 0.035 for the sidewalk/grass area shall be used.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-23

(D) Cross Street Flow
The standards outlined in Table 7-6, “Allowable Cross Street Flow,” of these Standards shall be used
for allowable cross-street flow, where flow passes from one side of the street to the other. The
allowable cross-street flow shall be determined using the methods prescribed in the USDCM.

Table 7-6: Allowable Cross Street Flow

Street Classification Minor Storm Runoff Major Storm Runoff

Residential and Local Street Maximum Depth of 6 Inches in Maximum Depth of 18 Inches Above
Cross Pan Flowline
Collector Street Where Allowed, Maximum Depth Maximum Depth of 18 Inches Above
of 6 Inches in Cross Pan Flowline
Arterial Not Allowed Maximum Depth of 6 Inches Over
Street Crown

7.11 Culverts

(A) System Design

(1) Required: Culverts shall be provided for the conveyance of stormwater runoff under a
roadway, railroad, driveway, or other crossings of an open drainage system (such as a
drainageway or roadside swale). The size, shape, and type of culvert crossings shall be based
on the projected runoff volumes, as well as existing topographic conditions. All culvert
designs are subject to approval by the Director.
(2) Culvert Types: Typical culvert types include circular, elliptical, or arch pipe sections, and
reinforced concrete box culverts.

(B) Hydraulic Design

All culverts shall be designed in accordance with the USDCM. All culvert designs are to include an
analysis to determine whether inlet or outlet control conditions govern for both major and minor storm
runoff conditions.

(C) Structural Design

The structural design of culverts shall conform to accepted structural engineering practices, the
Colorado Department of Transportation design standards and standard specifications, any methods
and criteria recommended by the manufacturer for a specific culvert type, and for conditions found at
the construction site. As a minimum, all culverts shall be designed to withstand an AASHTO HS-20
traffic loading.

(D) Specifications
(1) Size
(a) Culvert design size shall be based upon the following:
(i) Runoff volumes for the appropriate design storm.
(ii) Required capacity based on roadway classification and allowable street
overtopping, as prescribed in Section 7.10, “Street Drainage,” of these
Standards
7-24 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (b) Culverts shall be at least 18 inches in diameter or height.
(2) Inlet and Outlet Sections
(a) All culverts shall be designed with headwalls and wingwalls, or flared end sections at
the inlet and outlet. Flared end sections are allowed only on pipe culverts with
diameters of 42 inches (or equivalent) or less.
(b) Erosion protection such as rip-rap, boulder energy dissipators, or adequate vegetation,
shall be provided at the inlet or outlet where required to mitigate potential scouring or
erosive flow conditions. The Engineer shall propose the erosion protection to be
used, subject to approval by the Director.
(3) Slope and Velocity
(a) Culvert slopes shall be designed so that neither silting nor excessive velocities
resulting in scour can occur. The minimum design velocity for minor storm
conditions shall be 2 feet per second, to provide for self-cleansing of the culvert.
(b) The maximum culvert velocity is dictated by the channel conditions at the outlet, and
the amount of erosion protection or energy dissipation that can be provided to prevent
scour or damage.
(4) Allowable Headwater
(a) The maximum headwater / diameter (HW/D) ratio for the 100-year design flows shall
be 1.5, and 1.0 for the 10-year design flow. These HW/D ratios are to be applied to
culverts at street crossings and should not be applied to outlets from detention ponds
or private driveways.
(b) Ponding above the top of a culvert is not permitted if such ponding could potentially
cause property or roadway damage, culvert clogging, saturation of critical
embankments, detrimental debris deposition, erosion, or inundation of existing or
future utilities, structures, or buildings.
(5) Trash Racks
(a) The installation of a trash rack over a culvert entrance shall be provided as required
by the Director where there exists the potential for debris clogging of the culvert or
where there is a safety hazard concern for the possibility of people (especially
children) being carried into the culvert.
(b) Trash racks shall be designed to maintain adequate culvert hydraulics, considering
the potential for debris buildup and blockage which may render the culvert
ineffective. Careful design considerations are to be applied, including without
limitation application of the following standards:
(i) Materials: All trash racks shall be constructed with smooth steep pipe,
having an outside diameter of at least 1 ¼ inches. Trash rack ends and
bracing shall be constructed with steel angle sections. All trash rack
components shall have a corrosion protective finish.
(ii) Design: Trash racks shall be designed without cross-braces, to minimize
debris clogging, and be able to withstand the full hydraulic load of a
completely plugged trichroic based on the highest anticipated depth of
ponding. The trash rack shall be hinged and removable for maintenance
purposes.
(iii) Bar Spacing: Bar spacing shall provide a maximum clear opening of 6

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-25

 inches. The longitudinal slope of the trash rack shall be no steeper than 3:1,
horizontal to vertical. The entire trash rack shall have a clear opening at least
three times the culvert opening area.
(c) Hydraulics: Use the following equation to compute hydraulic losses through trash
racks:
HT=0.11 * (TV/D)2 * (sin A)
Where: HT = Head Loss through the Trichroic (feet)
T = Thickness of Trichroic Bar (inches)
V = Velocity normal to Trichroic (fps)
D = Center-to-Center Spacing of Bars (inches)
A = Angle of Inclination of Trichroic with Horizontal
The velocity normal to the trichroic shall be computed considering the rack to be 50
percent plugged.

7.12 Detention

(A) System Design

(1) Intent: Detention ponding facilities are intended to store increased runoff from developed
property and release this runoff at the historic rate that existed prior to development or
redevelopment. By providing detention ponding, increased runoff impacts on downstream
facilities may be controlled and minimized to reduce potential damages and the need for
greatly expanded stormwater conveyance facilities.
(2) Requirements: Detention ponding for stormwater shall be provided for all new development
or redevelopment where the runoff coefficient for the site increased unless one of the
following conditions are met:
(a) The project site is a single-family lot or a single-family lot split into two single-family
lots that is not part of a larger development.
(b) Runoff for the project site for the initial and major storm events from the entire
tributary basin can be conveyed directly to the major drainage system without adverse
impact on upstream, surrounding, or downstream properties and facilities and
stormwater detention to meet water quality mitigation measures is not required.
(3) Maintenance: The property owner shall be responsible for maintaining stormwater detention
facilities.
(4) Easement: All stormwater detention facilities shall be located in a public easement. The
easement shall grant to the City at a no charge a permanent right to inspect, maintain, and
reconstruct the stormwater detention facilities. The easement shall be granted on a form
provided by the Director. No owner of land or other applicant shall obtain a Final Drainage
Plan, unless the owner first grants to the City the easement for all stormwater detention
facilities. The City shall have no obligation to the property owner to inspect, maintain, or
reconstruct the stormwater facilities.

(B) Design Frequency, Hydraulic Design, and Storage Requirements

(1) Design Storms: Detention ponds shall be designed in accordance with USDCM, Volume 2,
Chapter 12.
7-26 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (2) Storage Volume: The storage volume of runoff to be detained on-site shall be sized to
contain 110 percent of the difference between the historic runoff and the initial and major
storm runoff, as defined in Table 7-1, projected for the ultimate developed conditions of the
entire parcel and tributary basin to be developed or redeveloped.
(3) Undetained Site Releases: On project sites where runoff from portions of the site cannot be
detained due to topography or site conditions, free release of runoff may be approved with
compensating detention storage design subject to the following conditions:
(a) Total maximum runoff from the entire parcel and tributary basin to be developed or
redeveloped shall not exceed the historic runoff,
(b) Release rates from the detention ponds shall be reduced by the developed runoff rate
from the undetained drainage area,
(c) The undetained drainage area may not exceed five percent of the entire parcel and
tributary basin to be developed or redeveloped, and
(d) The release rate from the undetained area may not exceed 25 percent of the historic
release rate from the entire parcel and tributary basin to be developed or redeveloped.

(C) Detention Pond Design

Except where inconsistent with the requirements in this Subsection 7.12(C), detention pond design
shall follow all applicable criteria established in the USDCM, Volume 2 and Volume 3.
(1) Surface Ponding Required: All detention ponds shall be provided as open, surface grade
improvements. Underground, enclosed, or roof top detention ponds shall not be permitted
unless unusual site conditions and adequate detention performance and maintenance
conditions are approved by the Director.
(2) Location: Detention ponds shall be located in open, pervious landscaped areas to enhance
site drainage and soil percolation, and to improve water quality.
(3) Side Slopes: Side slopes for detention ponds shall be designed to provide for ease of
maintenance and access. Landscaped side slopes are not to exceed 4:1, and vertical or steep
walls used as side slopes are to be constructed of durable natural materials, such as rock or
timber, with heights no greater than 30 inches to reduce safety hazards.
(4) Pond Bottoms: Pond bottoms are to be pervious and sloped to prevent the collection of
standing water, unless a permanent pond or wetland bottom is provided for water quality
enhancements. The use of combined water quality and detention facilities shall follow
criteria specification provided in the USDCM, Volume 3, Chapter 12 and applicable water
quality treatment approach criteria as specified in Section 7.17 of these Standards. Hard-lined
trickle channels are not to be constructed in detention ponds unless approved by the Director
to address specific drainage problems or safety and environmental hazards.
(5) Overflow Release Feature: All detention ponds shall include an overflow release feature to
spill during storm events larger than the major design storm or when release outlets fail. This
feature shall be designed to release overflows in a direction and manner that will not
adversely affect properties downstream of the detention pond.

7.13 Construction Stormwater Management

(A) Intent
This section implements requirements of Section 11-5-6, “Stormwater Quality Management for Land
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-27
 Development,” B.R.C. 1981, for construction activities and sets standards for stormwater
management plans (SWMP) and erosion control plans, their implementation, and the inspection and
maintenance of control measures for erosion and sediment control.

(B) Stormwater Management Plan Requirements

A SWMP shall include a narrative and erosion control plans that identify the construction activities
and their associated potential pollutant sources and address the selection, installation,
implementation, and maintenance of control measures for erosion and sediment control that reduce
the potential for the pollutant sources to enter the stormwater utility system or waters of the State.
Control measures for erosion and sediment control shall prevent pollution and degradation of waters
of the State. The SWMP shall include and be prepared, updated, and implemented consistent with
the following requirements:
(1) General Standards: Control measures for erosion and sediment control shall be
constructed and maintained in accordance with the SWMP, the General Permit for
Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity issued by the CDPHE, and
the USDCM, Volume 3.
(2) Preparation Standards: The SWMP shall be prepared in accordance with the
requirements of the General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with
Construction Activity issued by the CDPHE and USDCM, Volume 3. The SWMP shall be
prepared in accordance with methods, procedures, and practices that are based on scientific
facts, reflect best industry practices and standards, are appropriate for the conditions and
pollutant source, and provide appropriate solutions to meet the SWMP requirements of this
section, including practice based and numeric effluent limits. The SWMP shall include the
following elements:
(a) Protection for adjacent properties (including public right-of-way) from erosion
and/or sediment deposition.
(b) Protection for public streets from the deposit of sediment from runoff or vehicles
tracking mud.
(c) Stabilization for all disturbed areas as defined in the USDCM and CDPS
requirements.
(d) Protection for all storm sewer inlets from the entry of sediment-laden water.
(e) Protection from encroachment by construction equipment, vehicles, and foot traffic
into stormwater infiltration measures to eliminate the possibility of soil compaction
and vegetation damage.
(f) Long-term stability of cut and fill slopes and the successful establishment of
permanent vegetative cover on exposed soil.
(g) Selection, installation, implementation, and maintenance of control measures for
erosion and sediment control.
(3) Control Measures for Erosion and Sediment Control and Potential Pollutant Sources:
All control measures for erosion and sediment control shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) Control measures for erosion and sediment control shall be installed and made
operational prior to the start of construction activity. The control measures for
erosion and sediment control shall prevent potential pollutants from leaving the

7-28 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 construction site during each phase of construction and shall be continued through
final stabilization. Structural control measures for erosion and sediment control
shall be maintained in operational condition through final stabilization.
(b) Control measures for erosion and sediment control shall be selected, designed,
installed, implemented, and maintained to prevent potential pollutants such as, but
not limited to, sediment, construction site waste, trash, discarded building
materials, concrete truck washout, chemicals, sanitary waste, and contaminated
soils in discharges to the stormwater utility system from leaving the construction
site.
(c) The SWMP shall address pollutant sources associated with the following activities
(if part of the construction activity), and control measures for erosion and sediment
control shall be implemented if the source is determined to be present on the site:
(i) Land disturbance and soil storage,
(ii) Vehicle tracking,
(iii) Loading and unloading operations,
(iv) Outdoor storage of construction site materials, building materials, fertilizers,
and chemicals,
(v) Bulk material storage,
(vi) Vehicle and equipment maintenance and fueling,
(vii) Significant dust or particulate-generating processes,
(viii) Routine maintenance activities involving fertilizers, pesticides, detergents,
fuels, solvents, and/or oils,
(ix) Concrete truck/equipment washing, including the concrete truck chute and
associated fixtures and equipment,
(x) Dedicated asphalt and concrete batch plants,
(xi) Other areas or operations where spills can occur, and
(xii) Other non-stormwater discharges including construction dewatering not
covered under the CDPS General Permit for Construction Dewatering
Discharges and wash water that may contribute pollutants to the stormwater
utility system.
(d) The SWMP shall include control measures for erosion and sediment control detail
drawings for both installation and maintenance. Controls measures should be
consistent with USDCM, Volume 3 or Colorado Department of Transportation M
& S (Miscellaneous and Signage) Standard Plans.
(4) Protection of Control Measures for Post-Construction Water Quality: Requirements
for the design and construction of control measures for post-construction water quality are
provided in Sections 7.14 through 7.18 of these Standards. The SWMP shall provide
provisions to protect the water quality functions of these control measures for post-
construction water quality (SCMs) during construction as listed below:
(a) Any area consisting of native, un-compacted soil where a SCM will be installed
shall be protected from vegetation removal and encroachment by heavy equipment,
vehicles, and foot traffic prior to grading and construction. If the area, prior to
grading and construction, consists of previously compacted or fill soil, protection

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-29

 from encroachment shall be provided after the soil has been amended or otherwise
rehabilitated into an un-compacted condition to promote infiltration of stormwater.
Methods and controls for protection of these areas shall be indicated in the SWMP.
(b) The use of the SCM area for construction or maintenance materials stockpiles or
for storage of construction equipment, wastes, or pollutants is prohibited after
construction of the SCM has commenced.
(5) Erosion Control Plan: The SWMP shall include an Erosion Control Plan. Erosion
Control Plan drawings shall locate and identify all structural and non-structural control
measures for erosion and sediment control for the proposed construction activities. The
Erosion Control Plan shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of the General
Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity issued by the
CDPHE and include the elements listed in form(s) provided by the Director. Erosion
Control Plans shall include, at a minimum, three site maps illustrating the initial, interim,
and final phases of construction and their associated control measures for erosion and
sediment control.
The following Standard Notes shall also be included on Erosion Control Plan(s):
(a) Temporary Erosion Controls: All temporary erosion control measures for erosion
and sediment control shall be installed before any construction activities take place.
(b) Sediment Controls: Control measures for erosion and sediment control shall be
implemented to prevent the release of sediment from construction sites. Vehicle
tracking of sediment shall not be allowed to enter the stormwater utility system or
waters of the State. Sediment shall not be tracked onto public streets and, if so,
shall be immediately removed.
(c) Water Quality Impacts: Stormwater discharges from construction activities shall
not cause or threaten to cause pollution, contamination, or degradation of waters of
the State.
(d) Waste Controls. Solid waste, industrial waste, yard waste, and any other pollutants
or waste on any construction site shall be controlled using control measures. Waste
and/or recycling containers shall be provided and maintained by the owner or
contractor on construction sites where there is the potential for release of waste.
Uncontained waste that may blow, wash, or otherwise be released from the site is
prohibited. Sanitary waste facilities shall be provided and maintained by the owner
or contractor.
(e) Concrete Waste: Ready-mixed concrete, or any materials resulting from the
cleaning of vehicles or equipment containing or used in transporting or applying it,
shall be contained with appropriate control measures and ultimately removed for
proper disposal. Release of these materials is prohibited.
(f) Chemical Storage: Bulk storage structures for petroleum products and other
chemicals shall have adequate protection so as to contain all spills and prevent any
spilled material from entering the stormwater utility system or waters of the State.
(g) Surface Cover Timing: Cover shall be applied within 14 days to inactive soil
stockpiles and shall be maintained for stockpiles that are proposed to remain in
place longer than 30 calendar days.
(h) Project Phasing: All earth disturbances shall be designed, constructed, and
completed to limit the exposed area of any disturbed land to the shortest possible
period of time.
7-30 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 (i) Dust Controls: Techniques shall be used to prevent dust, sediment, or debris from
blowing off the site.
(j) Maintenance: Any damage or required maintenance to temporary and permanent
controls measures shall be repaired or replaced as soon as possible, immediately in
most cases.
(k) Removal: All control measures for erosion and sediment control shall be removed
and disposed within 30 days after final site stabilization is achieved or after the
temporary measures are no longer needed, whichever occurs first.
(l) Responsibility: The erosion control permittee shall be responsible for continued
compliance with the requirements of Section 7.13 of the City’s Design and
Construction Standards during construction activity on the site.

(C) Inspection and Maintenance Requirements

The erosion control permittee shall be responsible for implementation of the SWMP or, if no SWMP
is required, the Erosion Control Plan during construction, including inspection and maintenance of the
control measures for erosion and sediment control in the approved SWMP and/or Erosion Control
Plan. Prior to commencement of work, the erosion control permittee shall ensure that all general
contractors, subcontractors, and utility agencies obtain a copy of and comply with the SWMP
and/or Erosion Control Plan. The erosion control permittee shall amend the SWMP and/or Erosion
Control Plan when site conditions change. The erosion control permittee shall keep the SWMP
and/or Erosion Control Plan on site and shall implement and update the SWMP and/or Erosion
Control Plan throughout construction and final stabilization of the site in accordance with the
following requirements:
(1) If no SWMP is required, the erosion control permittee shall update the Erosion Control
Plan to show currently implemented control measures for erosion and sediment control and
installation dates.
(2) If a SWMP is required:
(a) An initial site inspection by the Director is required prior to commencing
construction.
(b) The erosion control permittee shall amend the SWMP whenever there is a change
in design, construction, operation, or maintenance that affects the potential for
discharge of pollutants to the stormwater utility system or receiving waters, or if the
SWMP proves to be ineffective in controlling pollutants in stormwater discharges
associated with construction activities.
(c) The erosion control permittee shall inspect all control measures for erosion and
sediment control per the frequency outlined in the General Permit for Stormwater
Discharges Associated with Construction Activity issued by the CDPHE for the
site. Inspections of control measures for erosion and sediment control shall be
conducted by an individual who has successfully completed formal training in
erosion and sediment control by an organization acceptable to the Director. The
erosion control permittee shall provide a certification of successful completion of
such training to the Director upon request.
(d) The erosion control permittee shall maintain records of inspection on site with the
SWMP. Inspection records shall be available at the site at all times. The erosion
control permittee shall make the inspection records immediately available to the
Director upon request.
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-31
7.14 Land Development Planning Using LID Techniques

(A) Intent
All new development and redevelopment shall reduce pollutant impacts of the development site on
receiving waters and reduce or control stormwater volumes by mimicking natural hydraulic conditions
using LID techniques. LID techniques seek to minimize impervious areas and protect and create well-
draining vegetated areas that promote infiltration and natural hydrologic processes thereby reducing
stormwater runoff and pollutant quantities.

(B) Requirements for All Developments

(1) LID techniques shall be implemented for all new development and redevelopment
consistent with the standards in this section.
(2) Compliance with the requirement to implement LID techniques, including the investigation
and analysis of LID techniques and an explanation of the implementation choices made,
shall be documented in the Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports when such reports are
required. Otherwise, compliance shall be demonstrated in building permit construction
documents, on form(s) as provided by the Director, submitted as part of the building permit
application.

(C) LID Techniques

LID techniques shall be chosen and applied following the principles summarized in this subsection.
Additional guidance on employing LID techniques is provided in USDCM, Volume 3, Chapter 1.
The following LID techniques shall be investigated and implemented to the maximum extent
practicable:
(1) Conserve Existing Amenities: Planning efforts shall account for and, where practicable,
preserve or restore existing site features that naturally retain stormwater on site, including
vegetated areas, high infiltrating soils, and natural surface drainage patterns, such as
meadows and trees.
(2) Minimize Impacts: Planning efforts shall account for and minimize, where practicable,
land disturbance, impervious surface addition, and soil compaction. This may include
removing unnecessary impervious areas, minimizing driveway and sidewalk widths, and
sequencing construction to minimize compacted areas.
(3) Minimize Directly Connected Impervious Areas (MDCIA): Planning efforts shall
account for and minimize impervious areas, such as rooftops and pavement, that directly
drain to the stormwater utility system or a local stream without prior stormwater control.
This may include using or integrating receiving pervious areas into the site landscape, such
as vegetated swales and buffers. Where practicable, site drainage patterns shall be designed
to promote sheet flow to vegetated area and roof downspouts shall be disconnected from
direct discharge to the storm sewer. Receiving pervious areas shall be designed to slow run-
off and promote infiltration.

7.15 Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Requirements

(A) Intent
All new development and redevelopment shall reduce the pollutant impacts of the development site

7-32 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 on receiving waters. All applicable development sites shall implement post-construction stormwater
quality management practices.

(B) Applicable Development Sites

(1) Applicable Development Site: Applicable development sites are required to implement
control measures for post-construction stormwater quality in accordance with the
requirements of Chapter 11-5, “Stormwater and Flood Management Utility,” B.R.C. 1981,
and this section, unless the Director has waived the applicable development site
requirements pursuant to Subsection 7.15(B)(2) of these Standards.
(2) Waiver: The Director may waive the requirements for applicable development sites in this
section if the applicant demonstrates that the requirement of paragraph (a) of this
Subsection 7.15(B)(2) is met and that none of the circumstances described in Subsection
7.15(B)(2)(b)(i) through (vi) exist:
(a) One or more of the following criteria is met:
(i) Pavement Management Sites: The project proposes the rehabilitation,
maintenance, and reconstruction of roadway pavement, which includes
roadway resurfacing, mill and overlay, white topping, black topping, curb
and gutter replacement, concrete panel replacement, and pothole repair.
The purpose of the project must be to provide additional years of service
life and optimize service and safety. The project must be limited to the
repair and replacement of pavement in a manner that does not result in an
increased impervious area, and the infrastructure must not substantially
change. The types of projects that meet these criteria include day-to-day
maintenance activities, rehabilitation, and reconstruction of pavement.
“Roadways” include roads and bridges that are improved, designed, or
ordinarily used for vehicular travel and contiguous areas improved,
designed, or ordinarily used for pedestrian or bicycle traffic, drainage for
the roadway, and/or parking along the roadway. Areas primarily used for
parking or access to parking are not roadways, and do not meet these
criteria;
(ii) Roadway Redevelopment: The project is the redevelopment of existing
roadway and the project (1) adds less than one acre of paved area per mile
of roadway to an existing roadway or (2) does not add more than 8.25 feet
of paved width at any location to the existing roadway;
(iii) Existing Roadway Areas: The project is the redevelopment of existing
roadway where the project does not increase the width of the original
roadway to two times or more on average. Under this criterion, the
applicable development site requirements may not be waived for the entire
roadway project but only for the area of the existing roadway. The area of
the added new roadway shall be considered an applicable development
site;
(iv) Aboveground and Underground Utilities: The project is the installation or
maintenance of underground utilities or infrastructure that does not
permanently alter the terrain, ground cover, or drainage patterns from those
present prior to the construction activity. The types of projects that meet
these criteria include, but are not limited to, activities to install, replace, or
maintain utilities under roadways or other paved areas that return the
surface to the same condition;
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-33
 (v) Large Lot Single Family Residential Projects: The project involves single-
family residential lots greater than or equal to 2.5 acres in size per
dwelling, with a total lot impervious area of less than 10 percent, and that
are not part of a common plan of development,
(vi) Land Disturbance Only Projects: The project involves land disturbance to
undeveloped land (land with no structures, such as buildings, and no
pavement), and the land will remain undeveloped during and after the
disturbance;
(vii) Stream Stabilization Projects: The project is a stream stabilization project;
or
(viii) Sidewalk, Bicycle and Multi-Use Paths: The project adds, modifies, or
maintains public sidewalk, bicycle path or multi-use path. Bike lanes that
are a part of a roadway do not meet this criterion.
(b) The Director may not waive the requirements for applicable development sites of
this section if any of the following circumstances are present:
(i) Brownfield: The proposed project is located on a site that is considered a
brownfield or is otherwise known or believed to have pollutants in the soil
or on the ground that, if discharged from the property in stormwater or
groundwater, may cause harm to the general public or the environment;
(ii) TMDL: The proposed site will, after development, discharge stormwater to
a waterbody that is included on the most recent State of Colorado
Department of Public Health and Environment §303(d) List of Water-
Quality-Limited Segments Requiring TMDLs or for which a Total
Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) is in place;
(iii) Wetlands: The proposed site will, after development, discharge stormwater
to a delineated wetland or wetland buffer area as defined in Chapter 9-3,
“Overlay Districts,” B.R.C. 1981;
(iv) History: A history of flooding or drainage problems is known to exist in, or
downstream of, the drainage basin where the site is located, whether
documented or undocumented;
(v) Master Plan: A City-approved stormwater master plan indicates a need for
more stringent regulation of stormwater in the watershed where the
proposed project is located in order to avoid, or alleviate, any flood,
drainage, or pollution problems; or
(vi) Exacerbate Problems: There is reason to believe that construction of the
proposed project may further exacerbate existing flood or drainage
problems.
(c) Evidence supporting the waiver pursuant to the criteria of this section shall be
provided on forms provided by the Director. The Director may require additional
documentation to support the waiver request.
(d) In granting a waiver, the Director may impose specific conditions on the approval of
the waiver necessary to ensure that the criteria in this section are, and will remain,
satisfied.

7-34 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(C) Requirements
Applicable development sites are subject to the following requirements:
(1) Stormwater Quality Design Standard Compliance: Each drainage basin or collection of
drainage basins (treatment area) associated with an applicable development site shall meet
one of the following Stormwater Quality Design Standards:
(a) Runoff Reduction Standard: Control measures for post-construction stormwater
quality (SCMs) are selected, designed, and constructed to infiltrate into the ground
where site geology permits, evaporate, or evapotranspire a quantity of water equal
to 60% of what the calculated Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV) would be
if all impervious area for the applicable development site discharged without
infiltration.
None of the treatment area may be excluded when using the Runoff Reduction
Standard.
(b) Water Quality Capture Volume Standard: SCMs are selected, designed, and
constructed to provide treatment and/or infiltration of the runoff from the entire
treatment area for the 80th percentile, 0.6-inch storm event. Evaluation of minimum
drain time shall be based on the pollutant removal mechanism and functionality of
the SCM(s) implemented. Consideration of drain time shall include maintaining
vegetation necessary for operation of the SCM (e.g., wetland vegetation).
Up to 20 percent, not to exceed one acre, of the treatment area may be excluded
when using the WQCV Standard if the Engineer demonstrates that it is not
practicable to capture runoff or implement a separate SCM before runoff drains to
an offsite discharge point.
(c) Pollutant Removal Standard: SCMs are selected, designed, and constructed to
reduce the event mean concentration of total suspended solids (TSS) to a median
value of 30 milligrams per liter (mg/L) or less from the entire treatment area for the
80th percentile, 0.6-inch storm event.
Up to 20 percent, not to exceed one acre, of the treatment area may be excluded
when using the Pollutant Removal Standard if it is demonstrated that it is not
practicable to capture runoff or implement a separate SCM before runoff drains to
an offsite discharge point.
(d) Constrained Redevelopment Site Standard: Applicable development sites having
an existing impervious area greater than 35 percent and a proposed impervious area
greater than 75 percent that can demonstrate the above design standards cannot be
practicably met shall meet one of the following standards:
(i) Constrained Runoff Reduction Standard: SCMs are selected, designed, and
constructed to infiltrate into the ground where site geology permits,
evaporate, or evapotranspire a quantity of water equal to 30 percent of
what the calculated WQCV would be if all impervious area for the
applicable development site discharged without infiltration.
(ii) Constrained WQCV Standard: SCMs are selected, designed, and
constructed to provide treatment and/or infiltration of the runoff from at
least 50 percent of the treatment area, including at least 50 percent of the
impervious area, for the 80th percentile, 0.6-inch storm event. Evaluation of
minimum drain time shall be based on the pollutant removal mechanism

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-35

 and functionality of the SCM(s) implemented. Consideration of drain time
shall include maintaining vegetation necessary for operation of the SCM
(e.g., wetland vegetation).
(iii) Constrained Pollutant Removal Standard: SCMs are selected, designed,
and constructed to reduce the event mean concentration of total suspended
solids (TSS) to a median value of 30 mg/L or less for at least 50 percent of
the treatment area, including at least 50 percent of the impervious area, for
the 80th percentile, 0.6-inch storm event.
(2) Required Treatment Approach: The selection of a required treatment approach shall be
determined considering site constraints and infiltration feasibility following the procedure
established in Section 7.16 of these Standards.
(3) Compliance Documentation Required: The selected treatment approach and the rationale
for such approach selection shall be documented on form(s) as provided by the Director.
The form(s) and any supporting data, maps, charts, or calculations shall be provided as part
of the Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports.
(4) Pretreatment Required: Pretreatment devices shall be provided for all SCMs to reduce
the inflow of trash, debris, and coarse sediment into the SCM. Allowed forms of
pretreatment are grass buffers, grass swales, forebays, and inlet sumps. The Director may
approve other pretreatment controls if the Director finds the proposed design adequately
reduces the inflow of trash, debris and coarse sediment into the SCM.
(5) Irrigation Plan Required: Provisions shall be made to provide water to vegetated SCMs
after vegetation installation and in accordance with the Final Drainage Report and as
needed to maintain the health of the vegetation. The owner of the SCMs shall be
responsible to replace vegetation that is damaged, dead, or otherwise shows signs of poor
health to ensure the proper operation of the control measure. The use of native plants in
SCMs and other vegetated areas is strongly encouraged as such plants are best suited for
local seasonal and climatic conditions.
(6) Easement: All SCMs shall be located in a public easement. The easement shall grant to
the City at a no charge a permanent right to inspect, maintain, and reconstruct the SCMs.
The easement shall be granted on a form provided by the Director. No owner of land or
other applicant shall obtain a Final Drainage Plan, unless the owner first grants to the City
the easement for all SCMs.

7.16 Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Treatment Approach

(A) Selection and Design of SCMs

The Engineer for an applicable development site shall apply the SCMs that best address pollutants
of concerns and can be implemented on the development site. Infiltration of rainfall and stormwater
using volume reduction/green infrastructure SCMs is the preferred treatment approach because it
most closely mimics the natural hydrology of undeveloped land and reduces the volume of
stormwater that is discharged into the stormwater utility system and to local streams. Therefore,
non-structural LID techniques, Receiving Pervious Areas (RPAs), and infiltration-based SCMs
shall be used to the degree practicable whenever it is determined that infiltration is feasible. In
contrast, the removal of pollutants using underground SCMs is the least desirable treatment
approach due to concerns about the practicality and effectiveness of long-term SCM maintenance
and the ability of these designs to address pollutants of concern. As a result, the pollutant removal
design standard is only allowed when all other treatment approaches have been demonstrated to not
7-36 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
 be feasible.
This subsection summarizes the required procedure and supporting criteria for the selection and
design of SCMs on applicable development sites, which are established in the following subsections
of this section:
(1) Preliminary Infiltration Feasibility Screening: Site conditions shall be documented prior
to SCM design to support selection of an appropriate water quality treatment approach.
(2) Treatment Approach Selection: Selection of an appropriate SCM shall be based on the
feasibility of onsite infiltration. The required treatment approach is selected based on the
hierarchy provided in Figure 7-1. The purpose of this hierarchy is to promote the use of
infiltration using green infrastructure as the preferred approach to permanent stormwater
quality management.

1. Full Infiltration – Volume Reduction Approach

Example SCMs: Bioretention without underdrain, Grass buffer RPA

2. Partial Infiltration – WQCV Approach

Example SCM: Bioretention with underdrain

3. No Infiltration – WQCV Approach

Example SCM: Bioretention with underdrain and liner

4. Alternative Design Approach

Example SCM: Cartridge Filter System

Figure 7-1: Water Quality Treatment Approach Hierarchy

(3) Treatment Approach Design Criteria: Upon selection of a treatment approach, the
required design standard and criteria described in Subsection 7.16(D) of these Standards
shall be followed to design and document SCM performance.
(4) Soil and Infiltration Test Requirements: The necessity of soil and infiltration testing is
dependent on the treatment approach and SCM type. Subsection 7.16.(E) of these
Standards explains soil and infiltration testing required to satisfy the Treatment Approach
Design Criteria.

(B) Preliminary Infiltration Feasibility Screening

The Engineer shall investigate the site conditions to determine the treatment approach and the
Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-37
 Stormwater Quality Design Standards that will be applied to each treatment area. The preliminary
infiltration feasibility screening shall be conducted as soon as possible in the design process. The
preliminary infiltration feasibility screening does not require field infiltration testing, soil borings,
and other detailed tests; however, if the full infiltration treatment approach is indicated to be
feasible through this screening process, additional field testing may be required as described in
Subsection 7.16(E) of these Standards. The preliminary infiltration feasibility screening shall meet
the following requirements:
(1) Preliminary infiltration feasibility screening shall be conducted for each treatment area
associated with the applicable development site prior to development of the Preliminary
Drainage Report.
(2) The Engineer shall create hydrologic soil group (HSG) maps for each treatment area. Soil
gradation assessments or field infiltration testing may be used to confirm HSG mapping or
determine infiltration parameters for fill materials.
(3) The Engineer shall assess the following limitations to infiltration for each treatment area. If
one of the following factors is determined to limit infiltration feasibility, documentation
shall be provided with Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports:
(a) Insufficient hydrologic storage capacity of the underlying soil attributable to
shallow bedrock, hardpan layer, seasonal high-water table, or similar subsurface
conditions. Underlying soil conditions are not a limitation for consideration of
Unconnected Impervious Areas (UIA) to RPA.
(b) The potential for groundwater contamination resulting from known or suspected
soil contamination or from a proposed land use that is incompatible with the use of
infiltration practices (e.g., a concrete batch plant or materials storage and loading
site) or similar conditions.
(c) Close proximity of SCM locations to drinking water wells or groundwater
protection areas.
(d) Limited or no suitable area for infiltration attributable to regulatory requirements
for the proposed applicable development site, including building set-back or build-
to requirements; location or area requirements for rights-of-way, parking, and
driveways; floodplain regulations; or other state or local regulatory conditions.
(e) Limited suitable area for infiltration attributable to the location of existing
structures, pavement, utilities, or similar features that will remain; contractive or
expansive soils in close proximity to buildings; or the location or extent of steep
slopes, springs, seeps, wetlands, trees, or other natural features that will not or
cannot be altered as a result of land development.
(f) Close proximity to historical or archeological sites that could be damaged or
otherwise negatively impacted by infiltration.
(g) Flooding conditions that can be exacerbated by, or limit the function of, an
infiltration-based SCM, including a history of frequent flooding at proposed SCM
locations or a history of wet or flooded foundations, crawl spaces, or basements on
or in close proximity to the applicable development site or its proposed SCM
locations, and where these conditions will not be corrected by the proposed project.
(4) Infiltration feasibility screening results shall be documented in the Preliminary and Final
Drainage Reports.

7-38 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(C) Treatment Approach Selection
The treatment approach is the methodology that will be used to design a SCM, or collection of
SCMs, to meet the required Stormwater Quality Design Standard. Four treatment approaches are
described in Table 7-7, “Treatment Approach Selection Criteria,” and correspond with criteria
requirements presented in Subsection 7.16(D) of these Standards. A single SCM design approach
shall be initially selected for each treatment area of the applicable development site using the results
of the preliminary infiltration feasibility screening and the guidelines presented in Table 7-7,
“Treatment Approach Selection Criteria.” The selection of the treatment approach shall begin at the
top of the table (with full infiltration) and proceed to the next level down if either the infiltration
capacity or infiltration constraints criteria cannot be met. This process continues until both sets of
criteria are met for the treatment area. One treatment approach shall be selected for each applicable
treatment area.
The Full Infiltration – Volume Reduction approach has two categories depending on the type of
SCM being evaluated in the drainage basin:
(1) UIA to RPA: This category is grass swales and grass buffers designed to infiltrate
stormwater runoff via disconnection of impervious areas. Infiltration capacity for this
category is dependent on identifying UIA:RPA pairs and confirming topsoil suitability.
(2) Infiltration SCM: This category is bioretention, sand filter, permeable pavement or other
volume-based SCMs designed to retain runoff from the treatment area. Infiltration capacity
for this category is dependent on confirming the infiltration rate of the underlying in-situ
soil.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-39

 Table 7-7: Treatment Approach Selection Criteria

Design Preliminary Infiltration Feasibility Screening

Standard
Treatment Approach Subsection 7.16(B)
Subsection
7.15(E)(1) Infiltration Capacity Infiltration Constraints

A. UIA to RPA
UIA:RPA pairs have been identified and meet run- Underlying soil, groundwater, and geological
1. Full Infiltration
- Volume Reduction on ratio guidelines of USDCM, Volume 3, T-0 conditions have sufficient hydrologic capacity to
Runoff Volume Reduction. infiltrate 60% of the WQCV.
A. UIA to RPA Reduction
B. Infiltration SCM AND
B. Infiltration SCM
HSG A or B No other limitations to full infiltration are present
Subsection 7.16(D)(1) in the treatment area.
OR
Field tests indicates infiltration rate is greater than
one inch per hour.

HSG C or D Underlying soil, groundwater, and geological

conditions have sufficient hydrologic capacity to
2. Partial OR support infiltration of a portion of the WQCV.
Infiltration - WQCV WQCV Field tests indicates infiltration rate is less than one AND
Subsection 7.16(D)(2) inch per hour.
No other limitations to partial infiltration are
present in the treatment area.

3. No Infiltration -
Underlying soil, groundwater, and geological
WQCV
WQCV N/A conditions prevent infiltration and require a lined
Subsection 7.16(D)(3) system.

Pollutant
Physical site constraints or risk factors prevent the
Removal
4. Alternative use of Treatment Approaches 1, 2, and 3
Design OR
N/A AND
Subsection 7.16(D)(4) Constrained
Alternative approach must be approved by the
Redevelopment
Director.
Site

7-40 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(D) Treatment Approach Design Criteria
The Engineer shall design the SCMs of the selected treatment approach consistent with the
requirements of this subsection. Specific types of SCMs are not prescribed for the individual
approaches. Any applicable SCM may be used, provided it meets the treatment approach
requirements stated herein. In addition to these requirements, SCM designs shall follow the
guidance provided in USDCM, Volume 3.
For any of the treatment approaches, a treatment train using a series of SCMs may be used to
meet the Stormwater Quality Design Standard for a given treatment area. The series of SCMs
must adhere to the requirements of the treatment approach selected for the treatment area and
must ultimately, as a group of SCMs, meet the Stormwater Quality Design Standard associated
with the treatment approach.
(1) Full Infiltration – Volume Reduction Approach: Full Infiltration is the preferred
treatment approach and is required where feasible. Full infiltration designs retain
stormwater onsite through the use of RPAs or infiltration SCMs that do not have
underdrains. Plugged or capped underdrains may be specified. The following criteria are
applicable to full infiltration SCM designs:
(a) Runoff Reduction Design Standard: Treatment areas using the Full Infiltration –
Volume Reduction Approach shall meet, at a minimum, the requirements of the
Runoff Reduction Design Standard of Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(a) of these
Standards.
(b) Required Sizing Criteria: Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports must
document sizing criteria and achieved volume reduction for each SCM
following methods specified in USDCM, Volume 3. SCMs must be sized for
the full tributary area.
(i) UIA to RPAs must comply with run-on ratio, topsoil suitability, and other
related criteria as specified in USDCM, Volume 3, T-0 Volume
Reduction.
(ii) Full infiltration SCMs with a storage component must comply with surface
(filter) area, geometry, and drain time requirements as specified in the
USDCM, Volume 3 for the appropriate SCM type.
(c) Field Infiltration Tests: Field infiltration tests are mandatory for full infiltration
SCM designs following the standards in Subsection 7.16(E) of these Standards.
Field infiltration test results must be documented in the Preliminary and Final
Drainage Reports.
(d) Minimum Field Infiltration Rate: Full infiltration SCMs require a field
infiltration rate measurement equal to one inch per hour or greater. If field
infiltration rates are measured to be less than one inch per hour, a partial
infiltration/WQCV approach shall be used consistent with the standards in
Subsection 7.16(D)(2) of these Standards.
(e) Required Design Factor of Safety: Full infiltration SCMs shall utilize a
minimum factor of safety of 2 when using the field-measured infiltration rate in
drawdown time calculations.
(2) Partial Infiltration – WQCV Approach: This category of SCMs retains stormwater

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-41

 on site to the extent practical by using underdrains or rate-controlled outlet structures.
RPAs may be used as part of a treatment train to partial infiltration SCMs. The
following criteria are applicable to partial infiltration designs:
(a) WQCV Design Standard: Treatment areas using the Partial Infiltration –
WQCV Approach shall meet, at a minimum, the requirements of the WQCV
Design Standard in Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(b) of these Standards.
(b) Required Sizing Criteria; Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports must
document sizing criteria and achieved runoff volume capture for each SCM
following the methods specified in the USDCM, Volume 3. SCMs must be
sized for the full tributary area.
(i) UIA to RPAs must comply with run-on ratio, topsoil suitability, and other
related criteria as specified in USDCM, Volume 3, T-0 Volume
Reduction.
(ii) Partial infiltration SCMs must comply with surface (filter) area, geometry,
and drain time requirements as specified in USDCM, Volume 3 for the
appropriate SCM type. The use of underdrains or rate-controlled outlet
structures are required components of partial infiltration designs.
(c) Field Infiltration Tests: The following field infiltration test requirements are
applicable to Partial Infiltration – WQCV designs:
(i) For UIA-to-RPAs, topsoil suitability must be shown with a soil
graduation test as specified in Subsection 7.16(E) of these Standards.
(ii) For partial infiltration SCMs with underdrain or rate-controlled outlet, a
field infiltration test is not required except when expressly requested by
the Director due to a unique design configuration.
(3) No Infiltration – WQCV Approach: No infiltration SCMs are lined systems required by
the necessity to prevent infiltration due to underlying soil conditions, high groundwater
table, or an otherwise immitigable risk as identified during the preliminary Infiltration
feasibility screening. The following criteria apply to no infiltration designs:
(a) WQCV Design Standard: Treatment areas using the No Infiltration – WQCV
Approach shall meet, at a minimum, the requirements of the WQCV Design
Standard in Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(b) of these Standards.
(b) Required Sizing Criteria: Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports must
document sizing criteria and achieved runoff volume capture for each SCM
following methods specified in USDCM, Volume 3. SCMs must be sized for
the full tributary area. No infiltration SCMs must adhere to and document
compliance with surface (filter) area, geometry, and drain time requirements as
specified in USDCM, Volume 3 for the appropriate SCM type.
(c) Field Infiltration Tests: Field infiltration tests are not required for no infiltration
SCMs. Proof of a watertight liner may be requested at the time of installation by
the Director based on necessity for risk mitigation.
(4) Alternative Design Approach: The Director may approve an alternative design
approach only if the Engineer demonstrates in the Preliminary Drainage Report or a
letter to the Director that none of the above three treatment approaches are feasible. The
Preliminary Drainage Report or letter shall explain the alternative design approach. The

7-42 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 following criteria are applicable to alternative designs:
(a) Pollutant Removal or Constrained Redevelopment Site Standard. Alternative
designs shall meet one of the following:
(i) Pollutant Removal Standard in Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(c) of these
Standards,
(ii) Constrained Runoff Reduction Standard in Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(d)(i) of
these Standards,
(iii) Constrained WQCV Standard in Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(d)(ii) of these
Standards, or
(iv) Constrained Pollutant Removal Standard in Subsection 7.15(C)(1)(d)(iii)
of these Standards.
(b) Required Sizing Criteria: Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports must
document sizing criteria and applicable performance metrics for each SCM
following methods specified in USDCM, Volume 3.
(i) For pollutant Removal or Constrained Pollutant Removal Standard
designs, the Engineer shall submit TSS reduction metrics applicable to the
proposed design. The use and reference of third-party testing data is
required when proposing the use of a proprietary device.
(ii) Constrained Runoff Reduction Standard designs shall adhere to sizing
criteria specified in Subsection 7.16(D)(1) of these Standards.
(iii) Constrained WQCV Standard designs shall adhere to sizing criteria
specified in Subsection 7.16(D)(2) of these Standards.
(c) Field Infiltration Tests: The following field infiltration test requirements apply
to alternative design approaches:
(i) Field infiltration tests are not required when using the pollutant removal or
constrained site pollutant removal standard.
(ii) Constrained Runoff Reduction Standard designs shall adhere to field
infiltration requirements specified in Subsection 7.16(D)(1) of these
Standards.
(iii) Constrained WQCV Standard designs shall adhere to field infiltration
requirements specified in Subsection 7.16(D)(2) of these Standards.

(E) Soil and Infiltration Test Requirements

Requirements for field infiltration testing depend on treatment approach and SCM type as
detailed in Subsection 7.16(D) of these Standards. Field infiltration tests are required for all full
infiltration SCMs with a storage component. For all UIA to RPA areas, the Engineer must show
topsoil suitability with a soil gradation test. When preliminary infiltration feasibility screenings
indicate C or D soils, field infiltration testing is optional to explore feasibility of a full
infiltration design. Documentation of field infiltration test results must be submitted in
Preliminary and Final Drainage Reports.
(1) UIA to RPA Soil Test Requirement: For all UIA to RPA areas, regardless of HSG,
onsite topsoil sampling and testing must be conducted to confirm infiltration capacity.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-43

 Determination of HSG classification based on soil texture analysis shall follow
specifications provided in USDCM, Volume 3, T-0 Volume Reduction. At least one soil
gradation test shall be conducted for each proposed RPA. Proposed topsoil and soil
amendment additions shall follow criteria specified in Chapter 10 of these Standards.
(a) Post-Construction Soil Tests: Depending on site conditions, the Director may
require soil tests to confirm infiltration capacity and adequacy of soil chemistry
to support vegetation growth for RPAs after construction is complete. When
required, soil test results shall be provided with the submission of as-built
drawings.
(2) Full Infiltration SCM Field Test Requirements: The following criteria apply to all
full infiltration SCMs with a storage component using the Full Infiltration – Volume
Reduction Approach of Subsection 7.16(D)(1) of these Standards:
(a) Soil Borings: Soil borings aid in interpretation of infiltration test results by
providing information on groundwater conditions and soil stratification.
Therefore, each infiltration test shall be accompanied by a soil boring test to a
depth of 10 feet below the lowest planned infiltration elevation (the bottom of
the infiltrating SCM). Soil borings performed for a civil site geotechnical
analysis that are located within close proximity (less than 50 feet) to the
footprint of the SCM may be used. An interpretation of soil boring test results
with respect to infiltration shall be provided for each test. This description shall
include an assessment of the anticipated seasonal high-water table based on date
of soil boring with respect to rainfall patterns, and the presence of hydric soils,
redoximorphic features, or other indicator of water table variation.
(b) Allowed Test Methods: Field infiltration tests shall utilize a double-ring
infiltrometer or modified Philip Dunne infiltrometer following the specifications
of ASTM D3385 or ASTM 8152, respectively. Alternative infiltration test
methods may only be used with approval by the Director. The use of correlation
methods based on soil texture applies only to RPA designs using the T-0
factsheet of USDCM, Volume 3. The use of regional soil maps is prohibited for
infiltration design or verification purposes.
(c) Number of Tests Required: At least three infiltration tests shall be conducted for
every SCM using the test spacing criteria established below. The Director may
require additional tests for large SCMs, greater than 10,000 square feet, or when
unique soil or geological conditions are known or suspected at the site.
(i) Generally, one infiltration test shall be conducted for every 3,000 to
10,000 square feet of area, depending upon the size of the SCM. Tests
shall be spaced appropriately to provide sufficient infiltration rate
information across the length and width of the SCM.
(ii) For small SCMs, at least one test shall be located within the SCM’s
footprint. The additional tests can be performed outside the footprint but
must be located within 20 feet of the perimeter of the SCM and in soil
formations that are representative of the conditions within the footprint of
the SCM.
(iii) For SCMs that have an area greater than 10,000 square feet, one
infiltration test shall be conducted for every additional 10,000 square feet

7-44 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 of surface area up to a maximum of five infiltration tests.
(d) Test Elevation: The elevation of infiltration tests shall be at or below the bottom
(lowest planned infiltration elevation) of the SCM. SCMs that are designed for
full infiltration shall not be placed on fill material without prior infiltration tests
to confirm full infiltration design feasibility.
(e) Post-Construction Field Infiltration Tests: The Director may require field
infiltration tests to confirm infiltration rates after construction is complete if soil
compaction or clogging is known or suspected during construction. When
required field infiltration test information shall be provided with the submission
of as-built drawings.
(f) Drainage Report Requirements: The Preliminary and Final Drainage Report
shall include the following information for each infiltration test performed.
(i) Test location and elevation;
(ii) Test method used;
(iii) Location of soil boring(s) used to aid test interpretation; and
(iv) Soil boring results and how they were used.

7.17 Post-Construction Stormwater Approval Requirements

(A) General
(1) Applicable development sites shall receive post-construction approval of the stormwater
utility system by the Director prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy
pursuant to a building permit or a Certificate of Completion for a use established
pursuant to a development agreement under Chapter 9-2, “Review Processes,” B.R.C.
1981. The Director will base approval on the system’s conformance with the approved
Final Drainage Report, the requirements of this section, and its readiness for post-
construction operation.
(2) Post-construction approval of the stormwater utility system shall be granted if the
following criteria are met:
(a) The stormwater as-built drawing provided for the applicable development site
demonstrates conformance of the constructed stormwater utility system with the
approved Final Drainage Report and readiness for full post-construction
operation, and
(b) The site’s stormwater utility system and all associated SCMs are determined,
based on visual inspection by the Director, to be clean; free of sediment, debris,
and other obstructions; undamaged; and ready for full post-construction
operation.
If these criteria are not met, the Director may require the preparation, submittal,
and approval of a revised Final Drainage Report and/or corrective actions at the
applicable development site before granting post-construction approval.
Corrective actions may include cleaning or repair of the stormwater utility
system, SCMs, or detention ponds, including, but not limited to, the removal of
sediment, debris, or other obstructions; the removal of construction-related

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-45

 wastes or stockpiles; the installation of permanent slope stabilization or energy
dissipation measures; the removal, replacement, or installation of vegetation;
and soil amendment or soil media replacement in infiltration-based SCMs.
(3) Post-construction approval of the stormwater utility system by the Director indicates that
the system was constructed in conformance with City requirements, is currently
operating as expected, and stormwater as-built drawings have been approved. Approval
also means that the system must comply with the requirements for post-construction
inspection and maintenance established in Section 7.18 of these Standards and Chapter
11-5, “Stormwater and Flood Management Utility,” B.R.C. 1981.
(4) In no way does post-construction approval imply City ownership, maintenance,
operation, or any other liability for any accepted, privately-owned, stormwater utility
system, SCM, or detention pond.

(B) Stormwater As-Built Drawings

The preparation of stormwater as-built drawings is required for all applicable development sites
to document the as-constructed condition of SCMs. The as-built drawings shall indicate where
the as-constructed condition differs from the final approved technical drawings following the
provisions of Subsection 1.3(G) of these Standards. An engineering certification of elevations
shall be included as an attachment to the stormwater as-built drawings.
The figures and drawings depicting the items listed below shall be included with the as-built
requirements in Chapter 1 of these Standards to provide a reference for the information provided
in the Final Drainage Report. Specific as-built drawings pertaining exclusively to the conditions
of the SCM are required and shall depict both plan and profile views as described below:
(1) Plan Drawing/s: Illustrate and label in plan view the components of the SCM,
including inlet and outlet locations, embankments, treatment surface area, utility
easements, vegetated cover, and other critical drainage elements. Indicate where the as-
constructed conditions differ from the final approved technical drawings.
(2) Profile Drawing/s: Illustrate and label in profile view the elevations of SCM
components, including filter media depth, bottom elevation, embankment slopes,
inlet/outlet inverts, and other critical drainage components. Indicate where the
as-constructed conditions differ from the final approved technical drawings.

(C) Post-Construction Acceptance Inspection Required

(1) Each SCM must pass a post-construction inspection by the Director to confirm SCMs,
including RPAs, are clean, have established vegetation, and are fully operational in
keeping with their approved design. After these conditions are met, the SCM is
considered fully functional and subject to Section 7.18 of these Standards.
(2) The post-construction acceptance inspection shall occur after submittal of the complete
as-built drawings to the Director. No application for inspection is required, as submittal
of the stormwater as-built drawings will signify the project’s readiness for inspection.
An inspection will not be performed in the event of submittal of incomplete drawings.
Confirmation of information on the stormwater as-built drawings will also be included
in the inspection.

7-46 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(D) Vegetation Warranty Required
The Director may require a financial guarantee for vegetation installed within SCMs consistent
with the requirements of Subsection 11-5-6, “Stormwater Quality Management for Land
Development,” B.R.C. 1981. The financial guarantee may be held for up to three years and will
be released after an inspection confirms the vegetation within each SCM is in good health.

7.18 Post-Construction Stormwater Quality Inspection and

Maintenance Requirements

(A) Applicability
The owner of SCMs of an applicable development site shall protect, inspect, maintain, repair,
and reconstruct SCMs and associated drainage infrastructure on the property to ensure full,
functional operation in accordance with the requirements in this section and pursuant to Chapter
11-5, “Stormwater and Flood Management Utility,” B.R.C. 1981.

(B) Inspection and Maintenance Requirements for SCMs

(1) Inspection and Maintenance Required: The owner of SCMs shall inspect and
maintain the SCMs as is necessary to ensure their full, functional operation at all times.
(2) Inspection Frequency: The owner of SCMs shall be responsible to inspect the SCMs
as often as necessary to assess the need for maintenance. The optimum inspection
frequency for SCMs varies depending on a number of factors including, but not limited
to, the type of SCM, whether the SCM is vegetated, and activities that have occurred in
the area draining to the SCM. SCMs shall be visually inspected:
(a) After storms and snow melt to assess whether stormwater in the SCM is
draining as expected, and
(b) During property landscape maintenance activities to look for build-up or
blockages of trash, debris, or sediment; check for damage; and determine
current maintenance needs.
Documentation of these inspections is not required. However, the owner of
SCMs shall document a detailed visual inspection of their SCM(s) in
accordance with the frequencies defined in Table 7-8, “Required Inspection
Frequency by SCM Type.” The documented inspection shall be performed
between May and August, when vegetation is not dormant and snow does not
cover the SCM.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-47

 Table 7-8: Required Inspection Frequency by SCM Type

Documented Inspection
SCM Type
Frequency
Bioretention (Rain Garden)

Constructed Wetland Channel

Constructed Wetland Pond

Extended Detention Pond

Grass Buffer

Grass Swale Annually

Permeable Pavement

Receiving Pervious Area (RPA)

Retention Pond

Sand Filter

Other SCM Designs

Underground SCMs Every 3 months

(3) Inspection Documentation: Inspections shall be documented using form(s) provided

by the Director and located in the Inspection and Maintenance Guide for the SCMs in
an appendix to the Final Drainage Report. Inspection documentation shall be kept by the
owner of SCMs or their delegated representative for five years and shall be made
available by the owner of SCMs or their delegated representative to the Director
immediately upon request.
(4) Performed Maintenance: Routine maintenance shall be performed to ensure that
SCMs are functioning as designed. Corrective action shall be performed immediately
when an inspection indicates the need for maintenance. Routine maintenance varies by
SCM type but generally requires the regular removal of trash and debris (e.g., dead
leaves, sticks, tree limbs) from inflow, outflow, and water storage areas; removal of
sediment at inflows; repair of eroded areas; and general vegetation maintenance (if
vegetation is part of the SCM).
(5) Transitional Regulations: For any permanent stormwater quality facilities approved
under the City of Boulder Design and Construction Standards in effect prior to the
effective date of Ordinance 8324, the property owner shall be responsible for
maintaining the stormwater quality facilities. The stormwater quality facilities shall be
maintained as recommended in the USDCM and such that the design of the properties
of the facility are preserved.

(C) Inspection and Maintenance Guide

An Inspection and Maintenance Guide shall be submitted as an appendix to the Preliminary and

7-48 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 Final Drainage Report. This guide shall be provided by the Engineer to the owner of SCMs upon
completion of construction and signifies transfer of maintenance responsibilities from the
erosion control permittee to the owner of the SCMs. The Inspection and Maintenance Guide
shall provide inspection and maintenance guidelines specific to the SCM type and shall follow
the format provided by the Director.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 7-49

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 8
TRANSPORTATION STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page

8.01 ADOPTION OF THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CDOT)

SPECIFICATIONS WITH MODIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................1
(A) SECTION 401, PLANT MIX PAVEMENTS - GENERAL ..........................................................................................1
(B) SECTION 403, HOT BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT ...................................................................................................2
(C) SECTION 608, SIDEWALKS AND MULTI-USE PATHS ..........................................................................................3
(D) SECTION 610, MEDIAN COVER MATERIAL ........................................................................................................4
(E) SECTION 703, AGGREGATES .............................................................................................................................4
(F) SECTION 612, DELINEATORS AND REFLECTORS ................................................................................................5
(G) SECTION 614, TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES.......................................................................................................5
(H) SECTION 627, PAVEMENT MARKING.................................................................................................................6
(I) SECTION 713, TRAFFIC CONTROL MATERIALS ..................................................................................................7
8.02 TRAFFIC SIGNALS .....................................................................................................................................8

8.03 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND MARKINGS .........................................................................................................8

(A) REQUIRED ........................................................................................................................................................8
(B) SIGNING AND STRIPING PLAN ...........................................................................................................................8
(C) CONFORMANCE WITH MUTCD ........................................................................................................................8
(D) MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................................................8
(E) PRIVATE STREET SIGNS ....................................................................................................................................8
8.04 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ...........................................................................................9
(A) REQUIRED ........................................................................................................................................................9
(B) INTENT .............................................................................................................................................................9
(C) TRANSPORTATION MASTER PLAN ....................................................................................................................9
(D) OBJECTIVES ......................................................................................................................................................9
(E) CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................9
(F) CONFORMANCE WITH MUTCD ........................................................................................................................9
(G) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................................................................10
(H) NON STANDARD CLOSURES............................................................................................................................10
8.05 FIRE LANE SIGN SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................11
(A) SIZE ................................................................................................................................................................11
(B) MATERIAL ......................................................................................................................................................11
(C) COLORS ..........................................................................................................................................................11
(D) WORDING .......................................................................................................................................................11
8.06 SIGNING FOR ACCESSIBLE PARKING...............................................................................................12

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-i

 (A) MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................................................12
(B) REQUIRED SIGNS ............................................................................................................................................12
(C) SIGN PLACEMENT ...........................................................................................................................................12
8.07 SIGNING FOR PARKING RESTRICTIONS ................................................................................................12
(A) SIZE ................................................................................................................................................................12
(B) MATERIAL ......................................................................................................................................................12

LIST OF TABLES
Table Number Page
Table 8-1: Marshall Method by Street Classification ................................................................................... 2
Table 8-2: Hot Bituminous Pavement Design Mix ....................................................................................... 3
Table 8-3: Minimum Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA) ..................................................................... 3

8-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

8.01 Adoption of the Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT)
Specifications with Modifications
The current edition of the “Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction” is hereby adopted by reference in these Standards as the City of
Boulder transportation construction standards, except as specifically amended by the provisions of
this chapter.

(A) Section 401, Plant Mix Pavements - General

(1) Subsection 401.02, “Composition of Mixtures,” is amended to incorporate the
following additions:
(a) A job-mix formula shall be submitted to the Director of Public Works for
approval prior to placing any hot bituminous pavement. The formula shall
indicate the aggregate gradation, asphalt cement content, hydrated lime content,
and optimum density. If requested by the Director, a sample of the aggregate and
asphalt cement shall be submitted for approval (for test purposes) prior to placing
any hot bituminous pavement.
(b) The job-mix formula for each mixture shall establish a single percentage of
aggregate passing each required sieve size, a single percentage of bituminous
material to be added to the aggregate, and a single temperature for the mixture at
the discharge point of the plant.
(c) When submitting the job-mix formula, the contractor shall supply certified test
results on all asphalt cements, aggregates, and mixes used for hot bituminous
pavement, and certify that all materials meet or exceed all required specifications
and tests.
(d) The Director reserves the right to sample materials and mixtures throughout
project construction to determine whether specifications and requirements have
been met and to confirm the certified test results. The contractor is responsible for
providing a bituminous mixture that meets the job formula and specifications.
(e) The contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate field testing of
materials used on the project and providing copies of the test results to the City to
assure compliance with these specifications.
(f) The top layer of hot bituminous pavement shall not contain any reclaimed asphalt
material, unless approved by the Director.
(2) Subsection 401.11, “Tack Coat,” is amended to incorporate the following additions:
(a) A tack coat shall be evenly applied to all existing asphalt or concrete surfaces that
will be in contact with asphalt prior to hot bituminous pavement placement. A
slow-setting, diluted emulsion shall be used, diluted with one part water to one
part asphalt emulsion. The rate of application shall be 0.1 gallons per square yard
of diluted asphalt emulsion. Before dilution, the emulsified asphalt shall comply
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-1
 with AASHTO M140 or M208.
(b) Only the amount of tack coat necessary for the day's operation is to be placed on
the surface. All traffic not essential to the work shall be kept off the tack coat.
(3) Subsection 401.12, “Surface Conditioning,” is amended to incorporate the following
addition: All vegetation shall be removed from any existing surface to be overlaid.
(4) Subsection 401.16, “Spreading and Finishing,” is amended to incorporate the following
additions:
(a) The bituminous mixture shall be placed with an asphalt paver if possible. The
contractor shall receive permission from the Director to use placement methods
other than a paver. The lift thickness shall be at least twice the maximum particle
size for the hot bituminous pavement mix. The maximum lift thickness for the
final lift shall be 2 inches, unless otherwise approved by the Director.
(b) Areas to be patched shall be excavated and squared to a neat line, leaving the
sides of the excavation vertical. Prior to placement of the patch, the exposed sides
of the existing pavement shall be thoroughly coated with slow-setting Emulsified
Asphalt. Hot bituminous pavement shall then be placed and compacted in
succeeding layers; no layer shall be more than 3 inches deep.

(B) Section 403, Hot Bituminous Pavement

(1) Subsection 403.02, “Materials,” is amended to incorporate the following additions:
(a) Design mixes shall be established using the Marshall Method of compaction. The
method will be applied based on street classification according to Table 8-1,
“Marshall Method by Street Classification.”

Table 8-1: Marshall Method by Street Classification

Design Method Laboratory Compaction Street Classification

Marshall Method, ASTM D 1559 50 blows per side Local, Collector, and Minor
Asphalt Institute MS-2 Arterial (ESAL < 1 million)
Marshall Method, ASTM D 1559 75 blows per side Major Arterial (ESAL < 1 million)
Asphalt Institute MS-2

(b) The design mix for hot bituminous pavement shall conform to Table 8-2, “Hot
Bituminous Pavement Design Mix,” and Table 8-3, “Minimum Voids in the
Mineral Aggregate (VMA).”
(c) The addition of any recycled material is subject to approval by the Director prior
to use in any asphalt mix. All mixes including recycled material shall meet all
standard specifications and contain no more than 10% recycled material.
(d) Hot bituminous pavement for patching shall be Grading C with AC-10 asphalt
cement.
(e) A minimum of one percent hydrated lime by weight of the combined aggregate
shall be added to all aggregate for hot bituminous pavement.

8-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 Table 8-2: Hot Bituminous Pavement Design Mix

Property Test Method Value

Voids, Percent MS-2; AASHTO T269 3-5
Stability, Minimum MS-2; AASHTO T245 1800
Flow (0.01") MS-2: AASHTO T245 8-16
Aggregate retained on the No. 4 Sieve with at CP-45 70
least two Fractured Faces % Min.
Accelerated Moisture Susceptibility Tensile AASHTO T283 80
Strength Ratio (Lottman) Min.
Minimum Dry Split Tensile Strength, PSI AASHTO T283 30
Voids in Mineral Aggregate, VMA, % Min. MS-2 See Table 8.01-3
Grade of Asphalt Cement AC-10

Table 8-3: Minimum Voids in the Mineral Aggregate (VMA)

Design Air Voids **

Nominal Maximum Size*, Inches (mm)** 3.0% 4.0% 5.0%

1 ½ (37.5) 11 12 13
1 (25.0) 12 13 14
¾ (19.0) 13 14 15
½ (12.5) 14 15 16
3/8 (9.5) 15 16 17
* The Nominal Maximum Size is defined as one sieve larger than the first sieve to retain more than 10%.
** Interpolate specified VMA values for design air voids between those listed.

(C) Section 608, Sidewalks and Multi-Use Paths

(1) Subsection 608.03(e), “Joints,” is amended to incorporate the following additions:

All jointing of bikepath, bikeway, and bike trail concrete pavement shall be saw cut at the
nearest contraction joint and shall be removed and replaced full width. No partial removal
and replacement will be allowed. No longitudinal joints will be allowed in either sidewalk
Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-3
 or bikepath concrete pavements.

(D) Section 610, Median Cover Material

(1) Subsection 610.02, “Materials,” is amended to incorporate the following additions:
Patterned concrete shall be colored concrete and meet the requirements of Section 601
with the following exceptions:
Field Compressive Strength (28 days), psi 4500
(Not a specification requirement)
Cement Content, lbs./cu. Yd., minimum 610
Max. Water/cement ratio lbs. Water/lbs. Cement 0.44
Entrained and Entrapped Air, percent 4-8
Slump, AASHTO T 119, inches 2–5
Coarse Aggregate, AASHTO M43 Size No. 8
Fine Aggregate, AASHTO M6, percent of total aggregate 50 - 78
(a) An approved water reducing admixture shall be used in the mix.
(b) The coloring agent shall be integral to the concrete mixture.
(c) The color and pattern shall be as defined in the plans as approved by the City.
(d) Colored wax curing membrane shall be as recommended by the supplier of the
coloring agent.
(2) Subsection 610.03, “Construction Requirements,” is amended to incorporate the
following additions: Patterned concrete may be used for median cover material.
Construction shall conform to the requirements of CDOT Subsection 608.03 with the
following exceptions:
(a) While the concrete is still plastic, a special pattern forming tool shall be applied to
the concrete surface to form the specified pattern. All tears and voids resulting
from the pattern forming shall be repaired.
(b) Curing shall include application of two coats of colored wax curing membrane.
The first coat shall be applied within 2 hours of finishing. The second coat shall
be applied between 10 and 20 days following the first application.

(E) Section 703, Aggregates

Subsection 703.04, “Aggregate for Hot Plant Mix Bituminous Pavement,” paragraph 3 is
deleted and replaced with the following revision:
(1) The aggregate from individual sources shall have a percentage of wear of not more than
40 when tested in accordance with AASHTO T96 after 500 revolutions. The aggregate
from individual sources shall contain no more than a 1 percent deleterious material
including clay lumps, vegetable matter, friable particles, and other deleterious substances
tested in accordance with AASHTO T112.
(2) For quarries or sources which contain minerals which are not of similar composition, the
abrasion and friable particle requirements shall be applied to each mineral composition.
(3) All aggregate shall meet the sodium or magnesium sulfate test in accordance with

8-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 AASHTO M29.

(F) Section 612, Delineators and Reflectors

Subsection 612.02, “Materials,” is amended to incorporate the following additions: All
delineators shall be “safe hit” reflective delineators, and shall be anchored according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.

(G) Section 614, Traffic Control Devices

(1) Subsection 614.02, “Sign Posts and Sign Structures,” is amended to incorporate the
following additions:
(a) All signs must be mounted on “TELESPAR” posts or approved equal. These
installations shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations and be constructed in
two sections including the base and the post.
(b) The post size shall conform to manufacturers recommendations according to the
total sign area square footage and wind loading, but in no instance shall post size
be less than 2” square, 12 gauge material, affixed to base by means of two (each)
drive rivets with washers on the back side of post and right or left side of post, at a
length to accommodate the proper mounting height of sign to be affixed per the
MUTCD.

(c) The “TELESPAR” sign base shall be 2 ¼ x 36 inches in length and shall be
driven into the ground 33 to 34 inches with 2 to 3 inches exposed above final
grade.

(d) Sign Bolts: Sign shall be affixed to post with a minimum of two (each) 5/16 x 2-
¾ inch bolts with locking nut and vandal proof (Gator Lock or approved equal)
hardware on each side (front/back) with nylon washer or equivalent behind the
Gator lock on the sheeting side.

(e) Banded Sign Mount: All banding material shall be ¾ inch wide stainless Steel
banding. Hardware for installation of signs less than 30” attached to a signal/light
pole shall consist of a buckle bracket. For 30”or greater signs, Sign Fix is
required to be mounted on the sign and a slider bracket to affix sign to the
banding.

(f) Other Sign Mounts: Utility wood poles can be used when the location is
appropriate for signs with prior approval from the Director. The mounting
hardware shall be lag bolts with washers, with nylon washer or equivalent against
the sheeting side.

(g) Cantilever Mount: Cantilever mounts shall be approved by the Director prior to
being used.

(h) CDOT Breakaway Post System: Signs placed in rights-of-way under the

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-5

 jurisdiction of CDOT shall provide a breakaway system in accordance with
CDOT standards (M & S Standards section S-614-5).
(2) Subsection 614.04, “Sign Panels,” is amended to incorporate the following
additions:
(a) All reflective sheeting shall be ASTM D 4956-04 Type XI Diamond Grade Cubed
(DG3) or equivalent approved by the Director.

(b) All sign blanks shall be constructed using 0.100 gauge aluminum material.

(c) All public street name signs shall be constructed using extruded aluminum alloy
6063-T6, or approved equal, with 0.091 inch thick web, 0.250 inch thick edges,
and square corners. All non-extruded signs shall be mounted on 0.100 gage
aluminum with rounded radius corners. All public street name signs shall be
constructed using reflective sheeting stated above and have a blue background
with white lettering.

(H) Section 627, Pavement Marking

Subsection 627.03, “General,” is amended to incorporate the following additions:
(1) White and yellow skip markings shall be 4 inches wide and 10 feet long with a 30 foot gap
between.
(2) All crosswalk lines shall be applied longitudinally, and shall be 24 inches wide by 10 feet
long.
(3) On concrete surfaces all curing compound shall be removed prior to the installation of any
pavement marking.

(4) Maintenance Striping

(a) All lane, center, and channelizing lines shall be striped with epoxy pavement
markings at 15 mm thickness with glass beads.

(b) All crosswalk lines installed on asphalt surfaces shall be provided using pre-
formed plastic pavement markings 3M A270 E/S series tape. On concrete
surfaces, an equivalent pre-form thermoplastic marking can be used if approved
by the Director.

(b) All lane use arrows on concrete surfaces shall be Premark Brand Elongated Series
Contrast Arrows.

(c) All lane use arrows on Asphalt Surfaces shall be pre-formed plastic pavement
markings, 3M Elongated L270 ES Series.

(d) Adherence to manufacturer’s installation recommendations (method) is required.

(5) New Striping

(a) Approval of final lay-out is required prior to placement of pavement markings

8-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 (b) On concrete surfaces all curing compound shall be removed prior to the
installation of any pavement markings.

(c) Adherence to manufacturer’s installation recommendations is required.

(d) All lane use arrows on concrete surfaces shall be Premark Brand Elongated Series
Contrast Arrows.

(e) All lane use arrows on Asphalt Surfaces shall be pre-formed plastic pavement
markings, 3M Elongated L270 ES Series.

(I) Section 713, Traffic Control Materials

(1) Subsection 713.04, “Sign Panel Backgrounds,” is amended to incorporate the
following addition: Aluminum sign panels may also have a Class II (A-1) anodic coating
clear finish as defined in the “Aluminum Association Standards for Anodically Coated
Aluminum Alloys for Architectural Applications.”
(2) Subsection 713.06, “Messages,” is amended to incorporate the following additions:
(a) All street name signs on non-signalized intersections shall be 9 inches wide with 6
inch, upper-case, series D capital letters, together with 4 ¾ inch, lower-case, series
D letters for the name of the street, and a 3 inch, upper-case, series D capital letter
together with 2 ¼ inch, lower- case, series D letters for “Avenue,” “Street,” 3 inch
block numbers below the abbreviation of “Ave.,” “St.,” etc. The “Ave” etc. and
block numbers shall be centered on the sign with a 1 inch separation between
them. When block numbers are not used, “Ave”, “St”, “Rd”, etc. shall be 6 inch
upper case with 4 /4 inch lower case letters series D. On numbered streets, a 6
inch, series D number shall be used with 4 ¾ inch, lower-case, series D letters for
“th”, “st” and “nd” to be held in line with the number that it follows.
(b) All reflective sheeting for street name sign faces shall be Type XI 3M - Diamond
Grade Cubed sheeting or approved equal.
(3) Subsection 713.08, “Glass Beads for Traffic Markings,” is amended to incorporate the
following addition: Glass beads shall be applied on Epoxy Pavement Markings Lane
Lines at a rate of 15 to 18 pounds per gallon.
(4) Subsection 713.13, “Preformed Plastic Materials,” is amended to incorporate the
following additions:

(a) Preformed Plastic: material shall be 3M Stamark Series A270 ES for all
transverse & longitudinal lines. All lane use symbols shall be 3M Stamark Series
L270 ES.

(b) Preformed Plastic: (New Concrete Application) “white only” material shall be 3M
Stamark Series A380I-5 ES (contrast) for all longitudinal skip lines or
channelizing lines.

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-7

 (5) Subsection 713.14, “Preformed Thermoplastic Material,” is amended to incorporate the
following additions:

(a) Preformed Thermoplastic; Materials shall be alkyd based materials for transverse
& longitudinal lines, or approved equivalent.

(b) All materials shall be 90 mm thick with beads. Only preformed thermoplastic
marking material listed on CDOT’s approved products list may be used.

(6) Subsection 713.19, Methyl Methacrylate Pavement Marking,”

Methyl Methacrylate material shall be approved by the Director prior to being used on
transportation facilities in the public right-of-way.

8.02 Traffic Signals

All traffic signal design and construction shall be performed in accordance with the Section 2-2-11,
“Traffic Engineering,” B.R.C. 1981 and these Standards.

8.03 Traffic Signs and Markings

(A) Required
The applicant shall be responsible for the installation of all traffic control devices, street name
signs, and pavement markings prior to opening or reopening any public transportation facility.

(B) Signing and Striping Plan

A complete signing and striping plan shall be submitted as part of project or development
construction plans, to be approved by the Director prior to installation. The plan shall specify the
locations, types, and combinations of approved signs, pavement markings, and barricades required
for each project or development.

(C) Conformance with MUTCD

All signs, sign materials, and barricade warning lights shall conform to the standards set forth in
the current edition of the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)”, and these
Standards.

(D) Materials
The quality of material used in traffic signs, type and quality of all vandal-proof sign hardware,
and quality of all metal square sign posts shall be in conformance with these Standards, subject to
approval by the Director.

(E) Private Street Signs

Private streets shall be signed as such and shall include the message “NO CITY
MAINTENANCE”, and be installed on the same support as the street name sign. Any private
street name signs should be fabricated and installed according to the specifications for a public
right-of-way street name sign except that the sign shall have white lettering on a green
background.
8-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
8.04 Temporary Traffic Control Plan

(A) Required
The Director of Public Works may require a Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) Plan for any work
that impacts a public right-of-way or easement.

(B) Intent
The purpose of this section is to establish standards and methods for handling traffic to be applied
when work or work activity in the public right-of-way or public easements impedes or obstructs
any mode of transportation, including but not limited to pedestrian, bicycle, transit, or vehicular
traffic. These standards are intended to ensure safe and effective work areas, and warn, control,
protect, and accommodate all modes of transportation.

(C) Transportation Master Plan

All temporary traffic control plans shall comply with the goals, policies, and standards adopted in
the Transportation Master Plan (TMP).

(D) Objectives
Primary objectives of a TTC plan are as follows:
(1) Prevent accidents and injury for both the public and for workers, by providing a safe work
area;
(2) Prevent damage to public and private property, including damage to vehicles and
construction equipment;
(3) Ensure well defined and safe traffic movements through work areas and temporary traffic
control zones;
(4) Efficiently and equitably accommodate pedestrian, bicycle, transit, and vehicular traffic;
(5) Support mode prioritization goals established in the TMP;
(6) Provide effective communication with the public; and
(7) Ensure conformity with these standards for work zone temporary traffic control.

(E) Certification Requirements

(1) Traffic Control Plans shall be prepared by or under the direct supervision of a person
certified as a Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) by the American Traffic Safety Services
Association (ATSSA) or with equivalent certification as approved by the Director.
(2) Traffic Control Plans shall be implemented under the direct supervision of a TCS,
certified Traffic Control Technician (TCT), or person with equivalent certification as
approved by the Director.

(F) Conformance with MUTCD

All traffic control plans, signs, sign materials, barricade warning lights, and other temporary traffic
control measures shall conform to the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices” (current
edition), except as specifically amended or supplemented by the provisions of these Standards.

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-9

(G) General Requirements
All proposed Traffic Control Plans shall include the following:
(1) The location of work
(2) A description of work to be performed
(3) A construction schedule identifying duration and extent of impacts
(4) A delineation of the proposed work area including any staging, storage, and delivery areas.
(5) Proposed measures to address impacts to vehicles, bicycles, pedestrians, multi-use path
facilities, transit facilities, and persons with disabilities.

(H) Non Standard Closures

Traffic control plans which due to their location, duration, extent, hours of operation, or impact
will result in more significant impacts to the traveling public require additional information to
demonstrate that impacts have been avoided, minimized, and mitigated. The Director may
approve the following Non Standard closures upon finding that the applicable criteria have been
met:

(1) Work Hours: Plans which propose to close a vehicular travel lane on any weekday prior
to 9 a.m. or later than 4 p.m., or on any weekend shall demonstrate that such impacts
cannot be reasonably avoided or that the proposed schedule reduces impacts to the public
compared to closure during normal work hours.

(2) Multiple Vehicle Lanes: Plans which propose to close all or multiple vehicle lanes in a
single direction of travel shall demonstrate that such impacts cannot be reasonably avoided
through alternative scheduling or phasing of work.

(3) Vehicular Detours: Plans which propose to detour traffic to another roadway shall
demonstrate that such impacts cannot be reasonably avoided and that impacts to the detour
route have been mitigated to the extent practicable. Impacts to the detour route shall be
evaluated including, without limitation, intersection level of service, traffic speed and
volume in residential neighborhoods and school zones, and impacts to all modes of
transportation.

(4) Flagging: Plans which propose use of flaggers shall demonstrate that the duration or
scope of work is such that more permanent control measures are not practical.

(5) Transit Facilities: Plans which propose impacts to a transit facility or transit stop must
demonstrate that such impacts cannot be avoided and provide for appropriate detours and
alternative stop locations.

(6) Sidewalks: The following special considerations shall be given to proposed closures of
sidewalks:
a) Adjacent to streets not classified as “Local” in the Transportation Master Plan;
b) Located in the CAGID or UHGID boundary areas;
c) Impacted for more than seven days;
d) Where no other sidewalk exists adjacent to the roadway;
e) Serving a school zone or transit stop, or
f) Requiring pedestrians to detour to a facility on a separate parallel roadway. Such
proposed closures must demonstrate that impacts cannot be avoided through
8-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009
 alternative construction methods, that the duration and extent of impacts has been
minimized, and that an adequate detour has been provided.

(7) Bicycle Lanes: Special consideration shall be given to proposed closures of on street
bike lanes along roadways with a posted speed limit of 40 mph or greater; or bike lanes
that involve contra-flow lanes. Such proposed closures shall demonstrate that impacts
cannot be avoided through alternative construction methods, that the facility cannot be
reasonably relocated through reassignment of vehicle lanes or other existing facilities, that
the duration and extent of impacts has been minimized, and that an adequate detour has
been provided.

(8) Multi-Use Paths: Special consideration shall be given to proposed closures of sidewalk
facilities which have been designated as multi-use paths. Such proposals shall
demonstrate that impacts cannot be avoided through alternative construction methods, that
the facility cannot be reasonably relocated through reassignment of vehicle lanes or other
existing facilities, that the duration and extent of impacts has been minimized, and that an
adequate detour has been provided. Detours routes must be of similar width and surface
type to the permanent facility.

(9) Signage: Where detours or closures impact pedestrian, bicycle, or multi-use path
facilities, additional signage as required by Director shall be utilized to supplement the
requirements of the MUTCD.

8.05 Fire Lane Sign Specifications

(A) Size
Fire lane signs shall be 12 inches by 18 inches.

(B) Material
Fire lane sign material shall be 0.100-inch thick aluminum alloy 6061-T6 with 3M Diamond
Grade Cubed (DG3) sheeting Type XI.

(C) Colors
Fire lane sign colors shall be red letters on a white background. The letter on the symbol shall be
black.

(D) Wording
Fire lane signs shall including the wording “FIRE LANE” with an appropriate arrow and a no
parking symbol (“P” with a slash).

Effective: November 6, 2009 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 8-11

8.06 Signing for Accessible Parking
Accessible parking signs required for accessible parking spaces shall meet the following standards:

(A) Materials
Sign materials shall conform to the standards set forth in the MUTCD and these Standards.

(B) Required Signs

Three signs shall be required for accessible parking spaces as follows:
(1) Sign #1: Sign #1 (R7-8) shall be 12 inches by 18 inches with green lettering on a white
background. This sign shall read, “RESERVED PARKING”, followed by a blue
accessible symbol and a green arrow indicating the stalls restricted to accessible parking.
(2) Sign #2: Sign #2 shall be 24 inches by 18 inches with white lettering on a blue
background. This sign shall read, “VEHICLES NOT DISPLAYING THE STATE
AUTHORIZATION MAY BE TOWED AT OWNER'S EXPENSE. FOR PERMIT
INFORMATION CONTACT THE LOCAL MOTOR VEHICLE OFFICE,” and shall
display a symbol of accessibility.
(3) Sign #3: Sign #3 shall be 12 inches by 6 inches with white numerical numbering on a
blue background. This sign shall read in numerical value, “$112.00,” centered with a
white border.

(C) Sign Placement

The accessible parking signs shall be placed as shown on Technical Drawing 2.86, “Accessible
Parking Sign Details,” in Chapter 11 of these Standards, and are to be set directly facing or no
more than 45 degrees from the line of travel of a vehicle entering the stall. These signs may be
mounted on a post or may be mounted permanently on an adjacent wall using anchor bolts. Such
signs shall be placed at the center of the end stalls of each accessible parking area and at every
second stall in-between.

8.07 Signing for Parking Restrictions

(A) Size
Parking restriction signs shall be 12” x 18”.

(B) Material
Sign material shall be 0.100-inch thick aluminum alloy 6061-T6 with 3M DG3 (Diamond Grade
Cubed) sheeting Type XI.

8-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 6, 2009

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 9
UTILITIES STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
9.01 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT .........................................................................................................................................................1
(B) SCOPE ...........................................................................................................................................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS ..............................................................................................................................1
(D) CITY APPROVAL REQUIRED ..........................................................................................................................1
9.02 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING...........................................................................................................1
(A) GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................1
(B) MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................................................2
(C) EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................................4
9.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP) ..................................................................................................................... 10
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 10
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 10
(C) THRUST RESTRAINT ................................................................................................................................... 11
(D) CONNECTIONS TO THE EXISTING SYSTEM................................................................................................... 12
(E) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 12
9.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE ............................................................................. 14
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 14
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 14
(C) THRUST RESTRAINT ................................................................................................................................... 15
(D) CONNECTIONS TO THE EXISTING SYSTEM................................................................................................... 17
(E) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 17
9.05 WATER SERVICES ................................................................................................................................... 19
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 19
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 19
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 23
9.06 GATE VALVES .......................................................................................................................................... 24
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 24
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 24
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 25
9.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES ............................................................................................................................. 26
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 26
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 26
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 27
9.08 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES ....................................................................................................... 27
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 27

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-i

 (B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 28
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 28
9.09 FIRE HYDRANTS ...................................................................................................................................... 29
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 29
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 29
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 30
9.10 COMBINATION AIR VALVE .................................................................................................................. 30
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 30
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 30
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 31
9.11 PIPELINE FITTINGS ................................................................................................................................ 31
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 31
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 31
9.12 DISINFECTING WATERLINES .............................................................................................................. 32
(A) SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................................... 32
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 32
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 32
9.13 TESTING OF WATER PIPES .................................................................................................................. 33
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 33
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 33
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 34
9.14 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) NON-PRESSURE PIPE................................................................... 35
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 35
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 35
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 36
9.15 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE .......................................................................................................... 38
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 38
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 39
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 40
9.16 MANHOLES AND INLETS ...................................................................................................................... 42
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 42
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 42
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 43
9.17 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWER PIPELINES AND MANHOLES .................................................... 44
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 44
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 44
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 44
(D) SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES ................................................................................................................... 46
9.18 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE ................................................................................................................ 47
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 47
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 47
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 48
9.19 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) ............................................................................................................. 49
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 49

9-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 49
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 50
9.20 PIPE BURSTING NON-PRESSURE PIPE .............................................................................................. 52
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 52
(B) MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................ 53
(C) EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................................ 53
9.21 TELECOMMUNICATION OR CABLE SYSTEM STANDARDS ....................................................... 53
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 53
(B) UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 54
(C) ABOVEGROUND FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 55
9.22 ELECTRIC POWER FACILITY STANDARDS .................................................................................... 57
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 57
(B) UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 57
(C) ABOVEGROUND FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 58
9.23 GAS DISTRIBUTION FACILITY STANDARDS................................................................................... 59
(A) GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 59
(B) UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 59
(C) TESTING REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................ 61
(D) ABOVEGROUND FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 61

LIST OF TABLES
Number Page

Table 9-1: Granular Bedding Material ....................................................................................................................2

Table 9-2: Flowable Fill Requirements ...................................................................................................................3
Table 9-3: Tube Size and Sheet Width for Pipe Diameter .................................................................................... 10
Table 9-4: Ductile-Iron Pipe Deflection ................................................................................................................ 12
Table 9-5: Pipe Laying .......................................................................................................................................... 17
Table 9-6: Required Manhole Diameters .............................................................................................................. 42
Table 9-7: Specifications for Air Testing of Sanitary Sewer Pipes ....................................................................... 45
Table 9-8 : Corrugated Base Metal Specifications ................................................................................................. 47

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-iii

9.01 General

(A) Intent
The Utilities Standards are intended to complement the design standards specified in Chapter 4,
“General Utilities Design,” Chapter 5, “Water Design,” Chapter 6, “Wastewater Design,” Chapter
7, “Storm Water Design,” and Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards, and provide
minimum standards for the construction of public utilities improvements in public rights-of-way
and public easements.

(B) Scope
These Standards apply to all city-operated public utility improvements within the City of Boulder
service area. This chapter describes the construction of public utilities and other work within the
public right-of-way and public easements including, but not limited to, work activities involved,
materials used, installation methods, and required testing. The utilities construction requirements
of this chapter are in addition to those set forth in Chapter 4, “General Utilities Design,” Chapter
5, “Water Design,” Chapter 6, “Wastewater Design,” Chapter 7, “Storm Water Design,” and
Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards and the B.R.C. 1981.

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, in order to protect the public health,
safety, and welfare, the Director of Public Works will specify the standards to be applied to the
design and construction of utilities and may refer to one or more of the references listed in the
References Section of these Standards.

(D) City Approval Required

All work associated with the construction of public utilities within or upon any City of Boulder
public right-of-way or public easement is subject to City of Boulder approval or permit issuance
as set forth in Chapter 8-5, “Work in the Public Right Of Way and Public Easements,” B.R.C.
1981.

9.02 Excavation and Trenching

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes excavation and trenching, which includes the following:
(a) Necessary clearing, grubbing, and preparation of the site;
(b) Removal and disposal of debris;
(c) Excavation and trenching as required;
(d) The handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of all excavated material;
(e) Necessary sheeting, shoring, and protection work;
(f) Preparation of subgrades;
(g) Pumping and dewatering as necessary or required;

9-1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (h) Protection of adjacent property
(i) Backfilling;
(j) Pipe embedment;
(k) Placement of fills;
(l) Surfacing and grading; and
(m) Other relevant work.
(2) Quality Assurance: All tests required for the preliminary review of materials shall be
made by an acceptable independent testing laboratory at the expense of the contractor.
Two initial gradation tests shall be made for each type of pipe bedding, fill, or backfill
material, and one additional gradation test shall be made for each additional 500 tons of
each material. The contractor shall pay for all in-place field density tests, Proctor
moisture-density tests, and relative density tests on the materials as required.

(B) Materials
(1) General: All bedding and backfill material shall be free of frozen material, organic
material, and debris.
(2) Pipe Bedding: Bedding materials shall conform to the following requirements:
(a) Bedding Materials: Bedding materials shall not contain cinders or other material
that may cause pipe corrosion.
(b) Concrete Arch Encasement: A concrete arch encasement is not required unless
improper trenching or unexpected trench conditions require its use, as determined
by the Director.
(c) Granular Bedding Material: Granular bedding material shall consist of well
graded sand or squeegee meeting a fine aggregate standard shown in Table 9-1,
“Granular Bedding Material.” Instead of a material meeting the requirements in
Table 9-1, the Director may approve 3/8-inch chips conforming to the grading
and composition requirements of Course Aggregate No. 8 in Table 703-1,
“Concrete Aggregate Gradation Table,” of the CDOT Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, 2017, due to lack of availability of the materials
meeting Table 9-1 requirements.

Table 9-1: Granular Bedding Material

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
3/8-inch 100%
No. 4 60-100%
No. 8 0-45%
No. 16 0-30%
No. 50 0-6%
No. 200 0-2%

(d) Compaction: All granular bedding material shall be compacted by vibrating or

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-2

 slicing with a shovel and placed in layers no more than 6 inches thick.
(3) Stabilization Material: Stabilization material shall be placed on suitably prepared
subgrades and compacted by vibration. Stabilization material shall be crushed rock or
gravel; free from dust, clay, or trash; and graded 1 ½ inch to No. 4 as defined in ASTM
C33, and shall be compacted to not less than 70 percent relative density as determined by
ASTM D4253 and D4254.
(4) Trench Backfill: Trench backfill is material placed above the pipe bedding and shall
meet specifications for Class 1 structural backfill material of Subsection 703.08
“Structural Backfill Material,” of the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (2017), or shall be flowable fill as specified in Subsection 9.02(B)(6) of
these Standards..
(5) Groundwater Barrier Material: Groundwater barrier material shall be flowable fill or
meet AASHTO soil classification SC or CL, free from stones, organic material or debris.
(6) Flowable Fill: Flowable fill, meeting the standards outlined in Table 9-2, “Flowable Fill
Requirements,” shall be used for trench backfill or for groundwater barriers.

Table 9-2: Flowable Fill Requirements

Ingredients Lbs./C.Y. Kg/m3
Cement 50 30
Coarse Aggregate (AASHTO No. 57 or 67) 1,700 1,009
Fine Aggregate (AASHTO M 6) 1,845 1,095
Water (39 gallons) (147L) 325 (or as needed) 193 (or as needed)
(a) Enough water shall be used so that the flowable fill flows into place properly
without excessive segregation. Approximately 39 gallons of water per cubic yard
(193 liters per cubic meter) of flowable fill is normally needed. Additional water
shall not be added to the mixture at the project site.
(b) The contractor may use aggregate that does not meet the specifications in Table
9-2, “Flowable Fill Requirements,” if the cement is increased to 100 pounds per
cubic yard (60 kilograms per cubic meter) and the aggregate conforms to
following gradation:
Sieve Size or Designation Percent Passing
1 inch (25.0 mm) 100%
No. 200 0-10%

(c) The contractor may make the following substitutions in the flowable fill mix:
(i) Thirty pounds per cubic yard (18 kilograms per cubic meter) of cement
and 30 pounds per cubic yard (18 kilograms per cubic meter) of fly ash
for 50 pounds per cubic yard (30 kilograms per cubic meter) of cement,
or
(ii) Sixty pounds per cubic yard (36 kilograms per cubic meter) of cement
and 60 pounds per cubic yard (36 kilograms per cubic meter) of fly ash
for 100 pounds per cubic yard (60 kilograms per cubic meter) of cement.

9-3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (d) The City reserves the right to review the use of recycled broken glass (glass
cullet) as part or all of the aggregate.
(e) Compaction of flowable fill shall not be required
(f) The maximum layer thickness for flowable fill shall be 3-feet. Additional layers
shall not be placed until the flowable fill has lost sufficient moisture to be walked
on without indenting more than 2-inches. Any damage resulting from placing
flowable fill in layers that are too thick or from not allowing sufficient time
between placement of layers shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
(7) Rock Backfill Material: Rock backfill material shall be an imported graded material
that meets either the 57/67 size requirements of ASTM C33 or the requirements for
stabilization material specified in Subsection 9.02(B)(3) of these Standards.

(C) Execution
(1) Site Preparation
(a) All sites to be occupied by permanent construction shall be cleared of all logs,
trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings, and other objectionable materials and debris.
All stumps shall be grubbed. All waste materials shall be removed from the site
and properly disposed.
(b) In natural areas where excavation will occur all topsoil shall be stripped or, in the
absence of topsoil, the top 6 inches of surface material shall be stripped and
stored separately from other excavated materials.
(c) For concrete walks, roadways, parking areas, and road crossings existing
pavement shall be cut full depth to a true line before excavation. For Portland
Cement pavements, cuts shall be made at existing joints.
(2) Classification of Excavated Materials: Excavated materials shall not be classified.
Excavation and trenching work shall include the removal and subsequent handling of all
materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the
type, character, composition, or condition thereof.
(3) Unauthorized Excavation: Undermining or tunneling under walls, footings, slabs on
grade, foundations, sidewalks, concrete or bituminous asphalt pavements, or any other
surface or subsurface facilities or structures shall not be permitted unless authorized by
the Director. If unauthorized tunneling or undermining occurs, the contractor shall pay
for all repairs and restorations the Director deems necessary. The repairs and restorations
may include removing and replacing part or all of the affected facility or structure.
(4) Stabilization of Subgrades
(a) Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense,
thoroughly compacted and consolidated, and free from mud and muck.
(b) Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms that are otherwise solid, but
become mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with
crushed rock or gravel meeting the requirements for stabilization material,
described in Subsection 9.02(B)(3) of these Standards and approved by the
Director.
(c) Stabilization material shall be spread and compacted to a depth of not more than
4 inches. However, if the required depth exceeds 4 inches, the subgrade for

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-4

 concrete structures or trench bottom shall be re-excavated and all mud and muck
removed and replaced with stabilization material, as required by Subsection
9.02(B)(3) of these Standards and approved by the Director.
(d) This material shall be placed, and compacted, as prescribed in these Standards.
The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades shall not be above subgrade
elevations indicated on the drawings.
(5) Blasting: Blasting or other use of explosives for excavation will not be permitted.
(6) Shoring
(a) All excavations shall be properly shored and braced to meet federal, state and
local laws governing safe working conditions. The shoring shall be arranged so
that no stress is placed on any portion of the completed work until the general
construction thereof has proceeded far enough to provide ample strength.
(b) Shoring shall be removed as the work progresses. Trench sheeting shall not be
pulled before backfilling unless the pipe strength is sufficient to carry trench
loads based on trench width to the back of sheeting, nor shall sheeting be pulled
after backfilling.
(c) Where trench sheeting is left in place, such sheeting shall not be braced against
the pipe, but shall be supported in a manner that will preclude concentrated loads
or horizontal thrusts on the pipe. Cross braces installed above the pipe to support
sheeting may be removed after pipe embedment has been completed.
(d) The contractor shall pay to repair any damage to pipes or structures resulting
from missing, failed or improper shoring, sheeting, or bracing or any negligence
on the part of the contractor.
(7) Water Control and Dewatering
(a) Dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove and dispose of all surface
water and groundwater entering excavations, trenches, or other parts of the work.
Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and until the
structure to be built or the pipe to be installed is completed to the extent that no
damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.
(b) All excavations for concrete structures or trenches that extend down to or below
the groundwater table shall be dewatered by lowering and keeping the
groundwater level 12 inches or more below the bottom of the excavation.
(c) Surface water shall be diverted or otherwise prevented from entering the
excavated areas or trenches to the greatest extent practicable without causing
damage to adjacent property.
(d) The contractor shall be responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit used
for drainage purposes. All such pipe or conduit shall be left clean and free of
sediment.
(8) Trench Excavation: Trenches shall be excavated so that pipes can be laid according to
the profiles, grades, elevations, and minimum cover shown on the drawings or specified
in these Standards. Trench subgrades shall be clean and free of loose material of any
kind.
(a) Excavation in Streets and Other Paved Surfaces: Excavations in streets with
asphalt paving must be confined to the minimum width required to maintain a

9-5 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 safe trench condition. The contractor shall pay for replacing any pavement
damage resulting from their construction work. The Director will determine the
limits of the damaged pavement needing replacement.
(b) Minimum Cover: Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the
approved plans, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a
minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe as follows:
(i) Water lines require at least 4.5 feet of cover;
(ii) Sanitary sewers require at least 3 feet of cover; and
(iii) Storm sewers require at least 1.5 feet of cover.
(c) Trench Widths
(i) Trench widths shall be as shown below where the maximum trench
width is measured at the top of the pipe barrel:
Pipe Diameter Maximum Trench Pipe Diameter Maximum Trench
Inches Inches Inches Inches
4 24 24 48
6 26 27 52
8 28 30 56
10 30 33 60
12 34 36 68
14 36 39 72
15 37 42 76
16 38 48 82
18 40 54 90
20 42 72 110
21 44

(ii) If the stated maximum trench widths are exceeded, and if the Director
determines that the combined dead- and live-loads will exceed the design
loadings on the pipe, the Director may require the contractor to either
cradle the pipe in concrete or use a pipe of a stronger class. Remedial
measures shall be entirely at the contractor’s expense.
(iii) As illustrated on Drawing No. 4.03 in Chapter 11, “Technical
Drawings,” of these Standards, the pipe trench shall be excavated to a
depth below the bottom of the pipe, backfilled with the specified granular
bedding material, and compacted to the requirements of these Standards.
(d) Trench Walls
(i) The contractor may slope or bench trench sidewalls in areas where an
increased trench width will not interfere with surface features or other
utilities. Such sloping or benching shall terminate at least 1 foot above
the top of the pipe barrel; from that point down, the trench wall shall be
vertical.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-6

 (ii) The trenching operation, including the spoil bank and the sloping of
trench sidewalls, shall be confined to the width of any permanent and
temporary rights-of-way or easements.
(iii) A sufficient clear area shall be maintained away from the top edge of the
excavation to avoid overloading that may cause slides or caving of the
trench walls. The excavated material shall be kept trimmed to avoid
inconveniencing the public and adjoining property owners. Unless
otherwise authorized by the Director, all public thoroughfares and
crossroads shall be kept open to traffic. When required by the Director,
the contractor shall, at their own expense, provide open-cut bridging at
street crossings, sidewalks, and other necessary points to prevent serious
travel interruptions and to provide access to fire hydrants and public and
private premises.
(e) Trench Preparation
(i) The trench shall be excavated only so far in advance of pipe laying as
permitted by the Director. Trench preparation shall also conform to the
details shown on the drawings in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of
these Standards.
(ii) Bell holes in the trench bottom shall be provided at each joint to permit
the jointing to be made properly and to prevent the pipe from bearing on
the pipe bells.
(iii) After excavation, the trench bottom shall be uniformly graded and hand-
shaped so that the pipe barrel (exclusive of the joint) will have uniform
and continuous bearing on thoroughly compacted pipe bedding material
throughout the length of the pipe.
(iv) The trench grade shall permit the pipe spigot to be accurately centered in
the preceding laid pipe joint, without lifting the pipe above the grade and
without exceeding the permissible joint deflection. If raising the pipe
subgrade is necessary, and approved by the Director, compacted bedding
material may be used at the contractor’s expense.
(f) Excavation Material: Excess excavated material shall be removed from the
construction site and disposed of by the contractor.
(g) Rock Excavation: In the event of rock excavation, the bottom of the trench shall
be lowered so that the bottom of the trench is 6 inches below the outside surface
of the pipe. The space between the rock and the pipe shall be filled with granular
bedding material. During its placement, the bedding material shall be shaped to
provide support along the full length of pipe.
(9) Installation of Pipe Bedding
(a) Pipe bedding material shall consist of the material as specified in Subsection
9.02(B)(2) of these Standards. Bedding material shall be placed to provide the
grade and elevation specified on the approved plans.
(b) After bedding material has been placed and approved, and after the pipe has been
installed and approved, the additional granular bedding material shall be installed
to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
(10) Installation of Trench Backfill

9-7 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (a) Backfilling during freezing weather shall not be performed, except by permission
of the Director. No backfill shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen
materials, snow, or ice be placed in any backfill.
(b) Unless accurate results cannot be obtained, the compaction requirements shall
conform to maximum dry density according to ASTM D698, Moisture- Density
Relations of Soils (Standard Proctor). When the ASTM D698 test is not
applicable, the percentage compaction requirements shall conform to ASTM
D2049 Test for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils.
(c) When required by the Director, the contractor shall excavate backfilled trenches
for purposes of performing compaction tests at locations and depths determined
by the Director. The contractor shall be responsible for reinstalling and
recompacting the test excavations.
(d) All backfill above the bedding material shall be carefully placed and compacted.
Except for the backfill requirements as set forth under Section 8-5-12, “Standards
for Repairs and Restoration of Pavement or Sidewalks,” B.R.C. 1981, approved
backfill material shall be placed in loose lifts, not exceeding 8 inches thick, and
shall be compacted by equipment and means approved by the Director. If the
contractor wishes to use equipment and means other than what was approved for
the project by the Director, the contractor shall submit, in writing, a request for
approval of the proposed equipment and means to the Director for review and
approval. Any approval by the Director, of an alternate method of compaction
shall not relieve the contractor from providing a finished product that meets or
exceeds all the intents and requirements of the approved plans and these
Standards.
(e) All backfill shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum laboratory dry density
or 70 percent relative density. The material shall be within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content.
(f) A loose layer of backfill material not more than 8 inches deep may be placed
over concrete arch encasement or concrete reaction blocking after the concrete
has reached its initial set, to aid curing. No additional backfill shall be placed
over arch encasement or blocking until the concrete has been in place for at least
3 days.
(11) Structural Excavation and Backfill
(a) All structural excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances
for the work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete
forms. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut for extended footings.
(b) The quality and moisture content of materials for backfill around and outside of
structures shall conform to the requirements for materials used for earthfills and
embankments. Backfill materials shall be placed in loose lifts, not to exceed 8
inches in thickness, and shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum
dry density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698.
Compaction of structure backfill by rolling will be permitted, provided the
desired compaction is obtained and damage to the structure is prevented.
Compaction of structure backfill by inundation with water will not be permitted.
(c) No backfill shall be deposited or compacted in water.
(d) Particular care shall be taken to compact structure backfill that will be beneath

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-8

 pipes, drives, roads, parking areas, walks, curbs, gutters, or other surface
construction or structures. In addition, wherever a trench is to pass through
structure backfill, the structure backfill shall be placed and compacted to an
elevation not less that 12 inches above the top of pipe elevation before the trench
is excavated. Compacted areas, in each case, shall be adequate to support the
item to be constructed or placed thereon.
(12) Restoration
(a) Streets and Roadways: Any pavements disturbed during construction shall be
repaired in accordance with the requirements as set forth in Section 8-5-12,
“Standards for Repairs and Restoration of Pavement or Sidewalks,” B.R.C. 1981.
All dirt and debris, including dust shall be removed from streets and paved
surfaces within 3 days of the restoration of streets and paved surfaces. Initial
removal of dirt and debris shall be made using a vacuum sweeper, after which the
paved surfaces shall be cleaned using water hoses.
(b) Fencing and Culverts: Restore all existing structures to conditions equal to or
exceeding existing structures.
(c) Landscape
(i) After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling and
embankments completed and settled, all areas that are to be graded shall
be brought to grade at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours. All
cuts, fills, embankments, and other areas that have been disturbed or
damaged by construction operations shall be surfaced with topsoil to a
depth of at least 4 inches. Topsoil shall be of a quality at least equal to
the existing topsoil in adjacent areas, free from trash, stones, and debris,
and well suited to support plant growth.
(ii) Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final
grading and dressing of slopes, provided the result is uniform and
equivalent to hand work. All surfaces shall be graded to secure effective
drainage. Unless otherwise indicated, a slope of at least 1 percent shall
be provided.
(iii) Final grading and surfacing shall be smooth, even, and free from clods
and stones larger than 1 inch in greatest dimension, weeds, brush, and
other debris.
(iv) The top portion of backfill beneath established lawn areas shall be
finished with at least 12 inches of topsoil corresponding to, or better
than, that underlying adjoining lawn areas.
(v) The Director will clarify restoration of other minor items as construction
proceeds. Such items must be restored to equal or exceed existing
conditions.
(13) Cleanup: The contractor shall maintain a clean site at all times. Prior to final inspection
and acceptance, the contractor shall remove all rubbish and excess materials and leave the
area in a neat, satisfactory condition.
(14) Maintenance of Backfill: All backfill shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition and
all places showing signs of settlement shall be filled and maintained for a period of 2
years following the date of final acceptance of all work. When the contractor discovers
or is notified by the City that any backfill is not in compliance with City standards, the

9-9 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 contractor shall correct such conditions. Any utilities and road surfacing damaged by
such settlement shall be repaired by the contractor to the satisfaction of the City. In
addition, the contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all claims for damages due to
settlement of backfilled areas.

9.03 Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of ductile iron pipe and
appurtenances for potable water mains, water services and fire lines in the pipe diameter
size range of 4 inches to 30 inches.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Ductile Iron Pipe
(a) Unless revised on the approved drawings, the ductile-iron pipe shall conform to
ANSI A21.51, AWWA C151, Class 52 thickness. The interior of each length of
pipe shall have a cement-mortar lining, conforming to the requirements set forth
in ANSI A21.4, AWWA C104, of standard thickness. The exterior of the pipe
shall be coated with standard coating approximately 1 mil thick.
(b) Unless otherwise specified, the pipe joint shall be the “push-on” type, made in
accordance with ANSI A21.11, AWWA C111, and the gaskets shall be standard
for buried water service and as provided by the pipe manufacturer.
(2) Polyethylene Wrap
(a) All ductile iron pipeline and fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene film in
accordance with the requirements of ANSI A21.5, AWWA C105 and in
accordance with all recommendations and practices of the AWWA M4 l, Manual
of Water Supply Practices - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
(b) The polyethylene wrap shall be overlapped 1 foot in each direction at all
connections.
(c) The polyethylene wrap shall consist of three layers of co-extruded linear low-
density polyethylene (LLD PE), fused into a single thickness of not less than 8
mils.
(d) The inside surface of the polyethylene wrap to be in contact with the pipe
exterior can be infused with a blend of anti-microbial biocide to mitigate
microbiologically influenced corrosion and a volatile corrosion inhibitor to
control galvanic corrosion.
(e) Tube Size or Sheet Width: Table 9-3, “Tube Size and Sheet Width for Pipe
Diameter,” shows the tube size or sheet width for each pipe diameter.

Table 9-3: Tube Size and Sheet Width for Pipe Diameter
Nominal Pipe Diameter (Inches) Flat Tube (Inches) Minimum Sheet Width (Inches)

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-10

 4” 16” 32”
6” 20” 40”
8” 24” 48”
10” 27” 54”
12” 30” 60”
14” 34” 68”
16” 37” 74”
18” 41” 82”
20” 45” 90”
24” 54” 108”

(C) Thrust Restraint

Where designated by the Engineer with expertise in thrust restraint systems, or where existing
conditions do not permit the use of concrete thrust blocks, individual joint restraint systems shall
be provided as follows:
(1) Alternative A: Full length tie rods between joints. “Star” systems fabricated from “Cor-
Ten” steel or an equivalent according to the requirements of ASTM A-242 with a
minimum yield stress of 46,000 psi. The number and diameter of tie rods shall be as
shown on the detail drawings.
(2) Alternative B: Pacific States Lock Mechanical Joint with Tyton Joint Core, or equivalent
fittings with ductile iron joint restraint features conforming to ANSI Standard A21.10.
Push-on joints for such fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard A121.11.
Assembly of the joint portion of the product shall be in accordance with AWWA C600-
77
(3) Alternative C
(a) Follower gland type systems may be used for 12-inch diameter pipe and smaller.
Pipe clamps shall be fabricated from “Cor-Ten” steel or an equivalent according
to the requirements of ASTM A-242 with a minimum yield stress of 46,000 psi.
The number and diameter of tie rods shall be as shown on the detail drawings.
The follower gland shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM
A536. Dimensions of the gland shall be such that it can be used with the
standardized mechanical joint bell and tee head bolts conforming to AWWA
C111 and C153.
(b) The restraint mechanism shall consist of numerous individually activated
gripping surfaces to maximize restraint capability. Twist-off nuts, sized the same
as tee head bolts, shall be used to ensure proper actuating of restraining devices.
When the nut is sheared off, a standard hex nut shall remain. The device shall
have a working pressure of at least 200-psi with a minimum safety factor of 2:1.
(c) Follower gland joint restraint devices shall be of the type listed below:
(i) “EBAA Iron, Inc.,” Megalug 1100 Series (4 -12 inches)
(ii) “Uniflange,”1400 Series (4 -12 inches)

9-11 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(D) Connections to the Existing System
(1) System Operation: Operation of the existing system must at all times remain under the
control of the Director. The contractor shall operate no valves or hydrants on the system
without permission from the Director.
(2) Connections: All points at which the existing water systems are to be disconnected and
connected to the new mains must be shown on the approved drawings.
(3) Utility Service Interruptions: The contractor shall take all precautions necessary to
minimize interruption of all utility services and will be responsible for the restoration of
the affected service. The contractor shall schedule existing valve locates with the Director
at least 3 days before scheduling a shutoff.
(4) Customer Notification: Unless otherwise specified, at any time a customer on the
existing system will be deprived of a supply of water, the contractor shall advise such
customer in writing 24 hours in advance of when the supply will be disconnected and
reestablished.

(E) Execution
(1) Installation of Ductile Iron Pipe: Except as specified herein or unless specifically
authorized by the Director, all installation of pipe shall conform to the recommendations
contained in “Installation Guide for Ductile Iron Pipe,” published by the Ductile Iron
Pipe Research Association. The contractor shall assure that a copy is available at the job
site.
(a) Pipe Laying
(i) Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying, unless
directed otherwise by the Director. Pipe shall be laid on the bedding
with support over the full length of the pipe barrel.
(ii) Table 9-4, “Ductile Iron Pipe Deflection,” shows the maximum
allowable pipe joint deflections.
(iii) The information in the columns referring to the deflection and the
approximate radii shall be adjusted for pipe lengths different than 18-foot
lengths. Shorter pipe lengths will be required if a shorter radius is called
for on the approved construction plans. Double hubs may be used to lay
pipelines on curved alignment.

Table 9-4: Ductile-Iron Pipe Deflection

Approximate Radius of Curve Produced by:

Size of Pipe (Inches) Bend in One Joint (%) Deflection in One 18- Succession of 18-Foot
Foot Length (Inches) Joints (Feet)
4 -12 4 15 250
14 - 24 2 7.5 510

(iv) Vertical deflections shall not exceed any of the above values.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-12

 (v) When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed
by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Director.
(vi) The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall
be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe
or cement lining so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of
the pipe. The flame cutting of pipe by means of an oxyacetylene torch
will not be allowed. The pipe end shall be beveled and free of sharp
edges that could damage the gasket during installation.
(b) Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints shall be installed per the manufacturer’s
specifications and guidelines.
(c) Push-On Joints: For push-on joints, the exterior 4 inches of the pipe at the spigot
end and the inside of the adjoining bell and particularly the groove for the gasket
shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, tar (other than standard coating),
and other foreign matter. The proper gasket supplied with the pipe shall be
placed in the bell in compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications and
guidelines so it will spring into its proper place inside the pipe bell. A thin film
of the pipe manufacturer’s joint lubricant shall be applied to the gasket over its
entire exposed surface. The spigot end of the pipe shall then be wiped clean and
inserted into the bell to contact the gasket by crowbar, or by jack and choker
slings. The location of the gasket shall be checked with a gauge or tool designed
for that purpose to assure that the gasket is in the proper position.
(d) Installation of Polyethylene Wrap
(i) All pipeline and fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene film in
accordance with the requirements of ANSI A21.5, AWWA C105 and in
accordance with all recommendations and practices of the AWWA M4 l,
Manual of Water Supply Practices -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings.
(ii) The polyethylene wrap shall be overlapped 1 foot in each direction at all
connections.
(iii) The polyethylene wrap shall consist of three layers of co-extruded linear
low-density polyethylene (LLD PE), fused into a single thickness of not
less than 8 mils.
(iv) The inside surface of the polyethylene wrap to be in contact with the pipe
exterior can be infused with a blend of anti-microbial biocide to mitigate
microbiologically influenced corrosion and a volatile corrosion inhibitor
to control galvanic corrosion.
(2) Installation of Thrust Restraint
(a) Thrust blocks shall be poured between undisturbed solid ground and the fitting to
be anchored. The area of bearing on the undisturbed trench wall shall be that
shown on the thrust block detail or directed by the Director. The concrete shall
be placed so that the pipe or fitting joints will be accessible for repair. A bond
breaker shall be placed over the fitting before placing concrete.
(b) Full length tie rods between joints with pipe clamps shall be assembled using
clamps on each side of pipe bells with tie rods extending the full pipe length for
the dimensions shown on the drawings each direction from the restrained fitting,
valve or joint. Clamps shall be installed tight enough to prevent twisting around
the pipe. A washer shall be used at each clamp and tie rods shall be located on

9-13 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 each side of the pipe. The tie rod nut should first be hand tightened with a 12-
inch wrench (approximately 50 to 100 foot-pounds torque). Threaded tie rods
shall extend two full threads past each nut in the final position.
(c) Follower gland type joint restraint systems shall be assembled according to
manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Testing: Testing of ductile iron pipe shall be as specified in Section 9.13, “Testing of
Water Pipes,” of these Standards.
(4) Backfilling and Restoring Surface Conditions: Surface conditions shall be backfilled
and restored as specified in Section 9.02, “Excavation and Trenching,” of these
Standards.
(5) Disinfecting Potable Pipelines: Ductile iron pipe shall be disinfected as specified
Section 9.12, “Disinfecting Waterlines,” of these Standards.

9.04 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
pressure pipe and appurtenances for potable water mains, water services and fire lines in
the pipe diameter size range of 4 to 12 inches.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) PVC Pressure Pipe
(a) All PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C-900-16, Polyvinyl
Chloride Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings (4 – 12 inches) and shall be
Pressure Class 305 psi (DR 14), or shall meet the requirements of AWWA C-
905-08, Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings (14 – 48
inches) and shall be Pressure Class 235 psi (DR 18).
(b) All pipe shall be suitable for use as a pressure conduit. Provisions must be made
for expansion and contraction at each joint with a rubber ring. The bell shall
consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross-section rubber ring which
meets the requirements of AWWA C-900-07.
(c) Laying length of pipe shall be 20 feet for all sizes of pipe.
(d) Each length of pipe shall bear the date manufactured, type, grade, length,
manufacturer's name, and NSF seal of approval.
(e) Pipe joints shall be made using an integral bell with an elastomeric gasket push-
on type joint.
(f) Solvent cement joints are prohibited.
(g) The manufacturer shall furnish a certified statement that all specified tests and
inspections have been made and the results thereof comply with the AWWA

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-14

 standards specified in this Subsection 9.04(B). A copy of the certification shall be
sent to the City upon request.
(2) Polyethylene Encasement
(a) All pipeline fittings and appurtenances shall be encased in polyethylene film in
accordance with the requirements of ANSI A21.5, AWWA C105.
(b) The finished polyethylene film shall have a minimum nominal thickness of
0.008-inch (8 mil), and the minus tolerance on thickness shall not exceed 10
percent of the nominal thickness. The film shall have at least 1200-psi tensile
strength of with an elongation of 300 percent minimum. The dielectric strength
shall be at least 800 volts per mil thick.
(3) Tracer Cable: Tracer wire shall be Type THHN, AWG size #12, UL listed with a single
copper conductor, PVC insulation, and nylon jacket. Test stations at fire hydrants shall
be CP Test Services, Glenn Series Glenn-4 with locking lid, 3½ x 4 inches, or approved
equal.

(C) Thrust Restraint

(1) Required: All fittings and joints shall be restraint from movement due to hydraulic
forces with concrete thrust blocks as shown in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of
these Standards except where existing conditions or other practical difficulties do not
permit the use of concrete thrust blocks. Where the applicant demonstrates to the
satisfaction of the Director that existing conditions or other practical difficulties do not
permit the use of concrete thrust blocks, individual restraint systems shall be provided
meeting one of the following:
(a) Alternative A - Full Length Threaded Tie Rods: Threaded rods shall be Type
316L stainless steel coated with an anti-galling compound. Connecting T-bolts
and nuts shall be Type 316L stainless steel coated with an anti-galling compound
or corrosion resistant fluorocarbon coating such as “NSS Industries” Cor-Blue or
“Star Pipe Products” Core Blue. The number and diameter of tie rods shall be as
shown on the approved plans.
(b) Alternative B - Follower Gland Type Mechanical Joint Restraint Systems:
Follower gland type mechanical joint restraint systems may be used only for 16-
inch diameter and smaller pipe. Restraint rings shall be manufactured of ductile
iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 with a factory applied fusion
epoxy coating. The mechanical joint follower gland shall be incorporated into the
restraint. Connecting T-bolts and nuts shall be as required in Alternative A.
(c) Alternative C - Bolt-Through Positive Restraint Mechanisms: A bolt-through
positive restraint mechanism may be used only for connecting 12-inch diameter
and smaller mechanical joint valves and fittings. It shall not be used for pipe
attachment or fire hydrant connections. Adaptor body shall be made of ductile
iron, conforming to ASTM A536 80-55-06 with styrene butadiene rubber gaskets
conforming to AWWA C111. Connecting T-bolts and nuts shall be as required in
Alternative A.
(2) Bell-And-Spigot Joints: Restraint devices for PVC pipe bell-and-spigot joints may be
used, if approved by the Director, for sizes 4 to 16 inches. Devices shall be of ductile
iron conforming to ASTM A536. Connecting T-bolts and rods as required in Alternative
A.

9-15 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (3) Mechanical Joint Restraint Required: Mechanical joint restraint devices are required for
the following installations:
(a) Fire hydrants;
(b) Fire line connections;
(c) Three inch and larger domestic line connections;
(d) Reducers;
(e) Vertical and horizontal offsets (all angles);
(f) Bends, line valves, and fittings;
(g) Bulkheads and plugs;
(h) Bored casing carrier pipe; and
(i) When the bearing capacity of the soil is not sufficient to provide adequate restraint,
as determined by the Director.
(4) Mechanical Joint Restraint Design Requirements: The mechanical restraint mechanism
shall consist of numerous individually activated gripping surfaces to maximize restraint
capability; or a series of machined serrations designed to grip the entire pipe surface; or a
system that is integral to the gasket. For twist-off nut-type designs, the nuts shall be sized
the same as T- bolts and be used to insure proper actuating of restraining devices. When
the nut head is sheared off, a standard hex nut shall remain. All devices shall have a
working pressure of at least 200 psi with a minimum safety factor of 2:1.
(5) Follower Gland Type Joint Restraints: Follower gland type joint restraint devices shall
be of the type listed below:
(a) “EBAA Iron”
(i) Megalug 2000 Series for PVC (4 to 16 inches)
(ii) Megalug 1600 Series for PVC (4 to 12 inches) Pipe Bell Joints
(iii) Megalug 2800 Series for PVC (14 inches and larger)
(b) “Star Pipe Products”
(i) Domestic PVC Stargrip Series 4000 (4 to 12 inches)
(ii) Domestic 1100C Bell Restrainers Series 1100 for PVC Pipe Bell Joints
(c) “U.S. Pipe”: MJ FIELD LOK Gasket with MJ FIELD LOK Gland, Series for PVC
(4 to 12 inches)
(d) “Romac Industries”: PVC RomaGrip Series, fusion bonded polyester coating is
required if using C909 PVC
(6) Bolt-Through Mechanical Joint Restraints: Bolt-through mechanical joint restraint
devices shall be of the type listed below:
(a) “Infact Corporation”: Foster Adaptor (4 to12 inches) with fusion bonded epoxy
coating. Standard foster adaptor accessory pak is required for restraining C153
compact fittings and valves

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-16

(D) Connections to the Existing System
(1) System Operation: Operation of the existing system must at all times remain under the
control of the Director. The contractor shall operate no valves or hydrants on the system
without permission from the Director.
(2) Connections: All points at which the existing water systems are to be disconnected and
connected to the new mains must be shown on the approved construction plans.
(3) Utility Service Interruptions: The contractor shall take all precautions necessary to
minimize interruption of all utility services and will be responsible for the restoration of
the effected service. The contractor shall schedule existing valve locates with the
Director at least 3 days before scheduling a shutoff.
(4) Customer Notification: Unless otherwise specified, at any time a customer on the
existing system will be deprived of a supply of water, the owner-developer-contractor
shall advise such customer in writing 24 hours in advance of when the supply will be
disconnected and when the supply will again be available.

(E) Execution
(1) Installation of PVC Pressure Pipe: Unless specifically authorized by the Director, all
pipe shall be installed as follows:
(a) Pipe Laying
(i) Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying. No
deflection in the joints shall be allowed. Whenever it is necessary to
deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane,
to avoid obstructions or to plumb valve operators, the pipe itself may be
uniformly curved as shown in Table 9-5, “Pipe Laying.”

Table 9-5: Pipe Laying

Approximate Pipe Size Offset in 20-Foot Length Radius of Curve
(Inches) (Inches) (Feet)
4” 15” 120’
6” 15” 160’
8” 15” 250’
10” 15” 300’
12” 15” 400’

(ii) Pipe deflection for curvature shall not be permitted at temperatures less
than 32o F ambient temperature.
(iii) When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed
by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Director.
(iv) The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall
be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe
so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Bevel
the end of the pipe with a beveling tool after the pipe is field cut. Place a

9-17 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 clearly visible position mark at the correct distance from the end of the
field cut pipe.
(v) Tracer wire shall be attached to the pipe as shown in Chapter 11,
“Technical Drawings,” of these Standards.
(b) Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints shall be installed per the manufacturer’s
specifications and guidelines.
(c) Push-On Joints: For push-on joints, the exterior 4 inches of the pipe at the spigot
end and the inside of the adjoining bell and particularly the groove for the gasket
shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit, tar (other than standard coating),
and other foreign matter. A thin film of the pipe manufacturer’s joint lubricant
shall be applied to the gasket over its entire exposed surface. The spigot end of
the pipe shall then be wiped clean and inserted into the bell to contact the gasket
by crowbar, or by jack and choker slings. The location of the gasket shall be
checked with a gauge or tool designed for that purpose to assure that the gasket is
in the proper position. Position the completed joint so that the joint mark on the
pipe end is in line with the end of the bell.
(2) Installation of Thrust Restraint
(a) Thrust blocks shall be poured between undisturbed solid ground and the fitting to
be anchored. The area of bearing on the undisturbed trench wall shall be that
shown on the thrust block detail or directed by the Director. The concrete shall
be placed so that the pipe or fitting joints will be accessible for repair. A bond
breaker shall be placed over the fitting before placing concrete.
(b) Full length tie rods between joints with pipe clamps shall be assembled using
clamps on each side of pipe bells with tie rods extending the full pipe length for
the dimensions shown on the drawings each direction from the restrained fitting,
valve or joint. Clamps shall be installed tight enough to prevent twisting around
the pipe. A washer shall be used at each clamp and tie rods shall be located on
each side of the pipe. The tie rod nut should first be hand tightened with a 12-
inch wrench (approximately 50-100 foot-pounds torque). Threaded tie rods shall
extend two full threads past each nut in the final position.
(c) Follower gland type joint restraint systems shall be assembled according to
manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Installation of Tracer Cable: Tracer wire shall be spirally wrapped around the pipe
exterior, 2 wraps minimum per 20-feet of pipe, as it is installed in the trench or taped to
the top of the pipe. Splices due to breaks in wire continuity shall be made by stripping
insulation coating from each wire with wire stripper pliers. Wires shall be joined with a
solderless connector, 3M Direct Bury Splice Kit or equivalent in suitability, strength,
effectiveness, and durability as approved by the Director. The join shall be made in
accordance with manufacturer instructions. The solderless connector shall be covered
with Emmerson Electric Seal-A-Conn II putty or approved equal.
The wire shall form a continuous electrical circuit between any 2 contact points on the
new pipeline, including branch lines and fire hydrant laterals. Wire shall be stubbed out
to the point where the new pipe connects to the existing main unless otherwise directed
by the Director. Where the wire terminates at a point where there is not an installed wire,
the ends of the wire shall be stripped bare a minimum of 18-inches and grounded into the

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-18

 native soil material. Special care should be taken to avoid contact from the tracer wire to
steel gas service lines.
(4) Testing: Testing of PVC pressure pipe shall be as specified in Section 9.13, “Testing of
Water Pipes,” of these Standards.
(5) Backfilling and Restoring Surface Conditions: Shall be as specified in Section 9.02,
“Excavation and Trenching,” of these Standards.
(6) Disinfecting Potable Pipelines: PVC pressure pipe shall be disinfected as specified
Section 9.12, “Disinfecting Waterlines,” of these Standards.

9.05 Water Services

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of water services and fire
lines in the pipe diameter size range of 3/4 to 2 inches. For water services and fire lines
greater than 2 inches in diameter refer to Section 9.03, “Ductile Iron Pipe,” Section 9.04,
“Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe,” Section 9.06, “Gate Valves,” and Section
9.08, “Tapping Sleeves and Valves,” of these Standards.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Pipe: Pipe shall be Type K copper, soft drawn, in accordance with ASTM B88.
(2) Curb Stops: All curb stops shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C800-05,
Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings, and shall be constructed of brass in
accordance with ASTM-B62 (common trade name 85-5-5-5). Curb stop valves shall be
ball type with a maximum working pressure of 300 psi and shall have compression
fittings.
(3) Corporation Stops
(a) All corporation stops and threaded brass fittings shall be manufactured in
accordance with AWWA C800-05, Underground Service Line Valves and
Fittings, and shall be constructed of brass in accordance with ASTM-B62
(common trade name 85-5-5-5). All corporation stops shall be tested at the
factory and shall meet the following minimum physical requirements:
(i) Tensile strength 30,000 PSI minimum.
(ii) Yield Strength 14,000 PSI minimum.
(iii) Elongation in 2 inches 20 percent minimum.
(b) Corporation stops shall be ball valve type designed for a maximum working
pressure of 300 psi. The inlet side shall have AWWA taper thread (CC thread)
and the outlet side shall have a compression fitting.
(c) Corporation stops shall be the following type or a corporation stop approved by
the Director as equivalent in design and composition to the following types:
(i) Ford – FB1000-3-NLG.

9-19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (ii) Mcdonald – 74701BQ No lead brass.
(iii) Mueller – B25008N.
(4) Water Meters
(a) General: All water meter installations shall be in accordance with the following
standards and the drawings in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these
Standards for all water services:
(i) All meters shall be “Badger” meters.
(ii) No connections shall be made in the meter pit other than those related to
the meter and bypass. Sprinkler system or backflow preventer
connections shall be made no closer than 5 feet from the meter pit or
vault on the downstream side of the meter.
(iii) The City will own and maintain the service line and fittings up to and
including the meter.
(iv) Residential 3/4-inch meters with transponders shall be provided and
installed by the City upon the contractor’s request for a final meter
inspection. All other meters and associated transponders shall be
purchased by the contractor and then provided to the City for testing
prior to installation.
(v) The contractor shall contact the City's Meter Shop prior to purchasing
meters and transponders to verify the type of meter that will be required.
The contractor shall also contact the City's Meter Shop to make an
appointment for delivery of the meter(s) to the City for testing. The
location of installation and manufacturer’s information shall accompany
the meter when delivered by the contractor to the City. The meter will be
tested and a schedule set for picking up the meter within two working
days by the contractor.
(b) 3/4-Inch and 1-Inch Meter Installations: 3/4-inch and 1-inch meter sets shall be
installed in accordance with the following standards and the drawings in Chapter
11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards:
(i) The meter shall be installed within right-of-way or a public easement.
(ii) No meter shall be set in a street, sidewalk, driveway alignment, or
other traffic or concrete area except where existing conditions or
other regulatory requirements prevent installation consistent with
this requirement. Where existing conditions or other regulatory
requirements prevent installation consistent with this requirement,
the Director may approve an alternative design that minimizes the
impact of meter maintenance and replacement activities on
adjacent structures, infrastructure, and paved surfaces.
(iii) In attached sidewalk areas, the meter shall be located a minimum of 18
inches from the back of the sidewalk to the edge of the meter lid.
(iv) Where no sidewalk exists, the meter shall be located a maximum of 6
feet behind the back edge of the curb.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-20

 (v) In detached sidewalk areas, the meter shall be located a maximum of 6
feet behind the back edge of curb but no closer than 18 inches from the
front edge of the sidewalk to the edge of the meter lid.
(vi) The dome or meter lid shall be level and 2 inches above the approved
final grade.
(vii) The copper setter shall be a minimum of 15 inches and a maximum of 17
inches below the meter pit lid.
(viii) Meter pits shall be constructed of modified hi-density polyethylene. The
size shall be as specified in the detail drawing in the appendix of this
Chapter. Grade adjustment shall be made at the top of the pit using
concrete rings. The trench floor under the concrete rings shall be
compacted earth. The concrete pit shall not bear on the service pipe.
(ix) Lids shall be a 12-inch cast iron lid and bonnet and shall have a 2-inch
diameter hole in the center to accommodate the transponder.
(x) Final inspections of the meter pit will be made at the time the meter is
set. The permit applicant is responsible for any required adjustments to
the copper setter or meter lid at that time.
(c) 1-1/2-Inch and 2-Inch Meter Installations: 1-1/2 -inch and 2-inch meter sets shall
be installed in accordance with the following standards and the drawings in
Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards:
(i) The meter model shall be Badger E112 SS 1 ½ Model 120 or Badger E2
SS 2 Model 170.
(ii) 1-1/2-inch and 2-inch meters shall be installed in a manhole.
(iii) A meter manhole shall be installed within the right-of-way or a public
utility easement.
(iv) No meter manhole shall be set in a street, sidewalk, driveway alignment,
or other traffic or concrete area except where existing conditions or other
regulatory requirements prevent installation consistent with this
requirement. Where existing conditions or other regulatory requirements
prevent installation consistent with this requirement, the Director may
approve an alternative design that minimizes the impact of meter
maintenance and replacement activities on adjacent structures,
infrastructure, and paved surfaces. If the meter manhole is approved for
construction in streets or other traffic areas the manhole shall use a 24-
inch cast iron ring and cover and shall be designed to accommodate and
protect the transponder.
(v) In attached sidewalk areas, the meter manhole shall be located a
minimum of 3 feet behind the sidewalk and in no case shall the manhole
be located more than 25 feet from the back edge of curb.
(vi) Where no sidewalk exists, the meter manhole shall be located a
maximum of 6 feet behind the back of curb.
(vii) In detached sidewalk areas, the meter manhole shall be located a
maximum of 6 feet behind the back edge of curb but no closer than 18
inches from the front edge of the sidewalk to the edge of the meter lid.

9-21 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (viii) Meter manhole lids shall be a maximum of 2 inches above the approved
final grade.
(ix) A curb stop is required on the service line behind the back of curb and
outside of the manhole.
(x) Meter manholes shall use a 24-inch aluminum ring and cover, and the
outside of the aluminum ring shall have 8 mils of tar applied. Once the
tar is set, a 12-inch wide by 6-inch thick concrete collar shall be placed
around the manhole ring.
(xi) The manhole cover shall have a 2-inch diameter recessed hole in the
center of the cover for the transponder, and the cover shall have the
lettering “Water Meter” cast into the lid.
(d) 3-Inch and Larger Meter Installations: 3-inch and larger meter sets shall be
installed in accordance with the following standards and the drawings in Chapter
11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards:
(i) 3-inch and larger meters shall be installed in a vault.
(ii) The entry hole through the roof of the vault shall be aligned
perpendicular to the service line and adjacent to the water meter.
(iii) Vaults shall be sealed at all joints and made watertight.
(iv) Meter vault lids shall be a maximum of 2 inches above the approved
final grade.
(v) In attached sidewalk areas, the meter vault shall be located a minimum of
5 feet behind sidewalk or back of curb and no more than 25 feet from the
back of curb.
(vi) Where no sidewalk exists, the meter shall be located a maximum of 6
feet behind the back of curb.
(vii) In detached sidewalk areas, the meter shall be located a maximum of 6
feet behind the back edge of curb but no closer than 18 inches from the
front edge of the sidewalk to the edge of the meter lid.
(viii) A curb stop is required on the service line behind the back of curb and
outside of the vault.
(ix) The meter vault shall be installed within the right-of-way or a public
utility easement.
(x) No meter manhole shall be set in a street, sidewalk, driveway alignment,
or other traffic or concrete area except where existing conditions or other
regulatory requirements prevent installation consistent with this
requirement. Where existing conditions or other regulatory requirements
prevent installation consistent with this requirement, the Director may
approve an alternative design that minimizes the impact of meter
maintenance and replacement activities on adjacent structures,
infrastructure, and paved surfaces. If the meter manhole is approved for
construction in streets or other traffic areas the manhole shall use a 24-
inch cast iron ring and cover and shall be designed to accommodate and
protect the transponder.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-22

 (xi) Meter vaults shall use a 24-inch aluminum cover and shall have the
lettering “Water Meter” cast into the lid.
(xii) A 24-inch x 36-inch aluminum cover adaptor and ring shall be used to
enlarge the access opening, and the adaptor shall have a 2-inch diameter
hole for the transponder. The outside of the aluminum ring shall have 8
mils of tar applied. Once the tar is set, a 12-inch wide by 6-inch thick
concrete collar shall be placed around the manhole ring.
(xiii) PVC pressure pipe shall be used on the service line outside the vault
except where the PVC pipe stubs through the vault walls. Ductile iron
pipe shall be used inside the vault.
(xiv) For all 3-inch and 4-inch meter settings, 4-inch service pipe will be
required on the City side of the meter. A reducer will be required before
the meter and on the bypass for 3-inch settings. Insulators shall be
provided between connections of dissimilar metals. Meter installations
larger than 4 inches shall require submittal of drawings for approval by
the Director.
(xv) A minimum of distance 5 times the pipe diameter of straight,
unobstructed pipe is required upstream of the meter.
(xvi) Final inspections of the meter vault will be made at the time the meter is
set.
(5) Service Saddles: Corporation stops require the installation of a bronze or brass bodied
service saddle with 304L stainless steel double straps and studs, equivalent in design and
composition to “Mueller” BR 2 S series or “McDonald" 3855 series for cast iron or
PVC. All saddles require an AWWA tapered thread (CC) outlet. No direct taps to PVC
pipe are allowed.
(6) Insulators (Ferrous Pipes only): Insulators shall be installed at the inlet end of the
corporation stop and shall be Ford Service Insulators or an approved equivalent for
service lines.

(C) Execution
(1) General
(a) Size as shown, lay to grades and lines in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s
specifications. Thoroughly clean pipe interiors of foreign matter before placing
into trench. Replace with new pipe any laid section of pipe found damaged or
defective. All pipe fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be installed
according to manufacturer’s instructions. Corporation stops shall be installed
with the appropriate tapping machine in the presence of the Director after the
waterline has been pressure tested.
(b) All bedding, pipe zone backfill, compaction, polyethylene sheathing and other
details of the water pipeline construction shall be returned to original condition
after service connections are completed.
(c) Service connections to all ferrous mains shall be electrically insulated by means
of a City approved insulating fitting.
(2) Pipe Cutting: Cutting shall be done neatly by methods that will not damage pipe.

9-23 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (3) Testing: Testing of water service pipe shall be as specified in Section 9.13, “Testing of
Water Pipes,” of these Standards.
(4) Backfilling and Restoring Surface Conditions: Backfilling and Restoring surface
conditions shall be as specified in Section 9.02, “Excavation and Trenching,” of these
Standards.
(5) Disinfecting Potable Pipelines: Water service pipe shall be disinfected as specified
Section 9.12, “Disinfecting Waterlines,” of these Standards.

9.06 Gate Valves

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of gate valves and
appurtenances for potable water service in the pipe diameter size range of 4 to 12 inches.
(2) Quality Assurance
(a) Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation recommendations shall
be provided to the City inspector prior to construction. Installation
recommendations shall be followed during construction.
(b) All valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C500 or C509. Certified
copies of the results of all tests, together with an affidavit of compliance shall be
provided to the City inspector prior to construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Gate Valves
(a) Gate valves are required for 4-inch through 12-inch valve sizes. The Director
may approve a different valve type where practical installation of a gate valve is
not feasible.
(b) Gate valves shall be iron body, resilient-seated gate valves with non-rising
bronze stems with design, construction, and pressure ratings conforming to
AWWA Specifications C-509-01, Resilient Seated Gate Valves, or C515-01,
Reduced Wall Resilient Seated Gate Valves, and with modifications specified
herein.
(c) Stem seals shall be triple "O" ring seals designed so that the seals above the stem
collar can be replaced with the valve under pressure and in full open position.
(d) Gate valves shall be one of the following types:
(i) American Flow Control, Series 2500 (C515 only).
(ii) Mueller, Series 2360 (C509 only).
(iii) American AVK.
(iv) Series 45 CLOW Valves, Models 2639 and 2640.
(e) With the exception of tapping valves and valves in vaults, gate valves shall have
mechanical joint ends.
(f) All ferrous internal and external surfaces of the valves shall be epoxy coated in
conformance with AWWA C116-03, Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coatings

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-24

 for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, and
C550-05, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. The coating shall
be a two-part thermosetting epoxy suitable for field over coating and for touch-up
with the same coating material without special surface preparation. The supplier
shall furnish detailed performance tests of adhesion, hardness, and abrasion
resistance of the furnished coatings when requested by the City. The coating shall
have a successful record of performance in valves, pipe, or other fittings for a
minimum of ten years.
(g) The resilient seat gate valve stem shall have external break-off capabilities for
over-torqueing and positive stop to prevent over compression.
(h) All external bolts, nuts, and washers used in conjunction with valves shall be
stainless steel, and tee-bolts shall be "Cor-blu".
(i) Valves shall be delivered complete with bolts, glands, and rubber gaskets in
conformance with AWWA C111-07, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron
Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
(2) Valve Boxes
(a) All buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be of
cast iron, 3 piece screw type, suitable for the depth of cover required by the
drawings. Valve boxes shall be 5 ½ inches in diameter, shall have a minimum
thickness at any point of 1/16 inch, and shall be provided with suitable cast iron
bases and stay-put covers. Covers shall have cast thereon “water” on the top.
They shall be Tyler 6860 series or approved equal.
(b) The valve box shall have at least 6 inches adjustment above and below specified
depth of cover over pipe.
(c) All parts of valve boxes, bases, and covers shall be coated by dipping in
bituminous varnish.
(d) Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed
directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the
finished grade. After being placed in proper position, earth shall be filled in
around each valve box and thoroughly tamped on each side of the box.
(4) Special Wrenches and Keys: All tools needed to operate valve and to open valve box
lid. At least one of each type as required for each style and size of box and lid shall be
furnished by the contractor. Provide 1 key for each valve. Key lengths shall be as
approved by the Director.

(C) Execution
(1) Handling: All valves and actuators shall be transported and stored in a manner that will
protect them from damage.
(2) Installation: Install valves as indicated in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these
Standards, and set plumb on a firm base. All foreign matter shall be removed from the
valve interior prior to installation.
(3) Valve Boxes: Install a valve box over the gate valve with the base section centered over
the operating nut and resting on well-compacted backfill. The top section shall be so set
as to allow equal movement above and below finished grade, with the final elevation to
be 1/4 inch below finished grade in roadways and 1 to 2 inches above grade outside of

9-25 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 roadways. The top of base section shall be placed approximately on line with the
operating nut at the top of the valve stem, and the entire assembly shall be plumb.
(4) Tests: Gate valve tests shall be with and part of the general tests on the companion water
lines.
(5) Disinfection: Gate valve disinfection shall be done with and as a part of the disinfection
to the companion water lines.

9.07 Butterfly Valves

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of butterfly valves and
appurtenances for potable water service in the pipe diameter size range of 12 inches to 24
inches.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s installation recommendations and certificates of
compliance shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction. Installation
recommendations shall be followed during construction.
(3) Testing: All valves shall be tested in accordance with Section 3.8 of AWWA C504.
Certified copies of the results of all tests, together with an affidavit of compliance shall
be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Butterfly Valves
(a) Butterfly valves shall be rubber-seated conforming to the AWWA C504 and
designed for buried service. The valves shall be designed to operate as open or
closed with a design velocity of 8 feet per second. The valves shall have a cast-
iron body with mechanical joint ends conforming to ANSI 21.11, AWWA C111
and shall be rated for a design working pressure of 150 psi. Butterfly valves shall
be one of the following types: Mueller, Lineseal III and XPII (sizes up to 48
inches), Pratt, Triton XR-70 (sizes 24 inches to 72 inches), or K-Flo 500 Series
(sizes up to 20 inches); unless a butterfly valve equivalent in design and
composition to these types has been approved by the Director.
(b) Discs shall be cast or ductile iron with stainless steel, type 304, either stub or one
piece shafts. Discs shall be secured to shafts by means of solid, smooth sided,
stainless steel or monel pins or dowel pins. Each taper pin or dowel pin shall
extend through or shall wedge against the side of the shaft and shall be
mechanically secured in place. The use of bolts, setscrews, knurled or fluted
dowel pins, expansion pins, roll pins spring pins, or other devices in lieu of the
pins specified herein will not be acceptable.
(c) Shaft bearings shall be the bushing type of nylon or Teflon. Thrust bearings that
are directly exposed to line liquid and that consist of a metal bearing surface in
rubbing contact with an opposing metal bearing surface will not be acceptable.
Shaft seals may be rubber ring or chevron packing.
(d) Seats shall be rubber vulcanized to the body and designed to provide bubble tight
shutoff with mating surface of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel or monel mounted

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-26

 on the discs. Valve seat configurations that rely on the mating pipe flange to
hold the seat in position in the valve body will not be acceptable.
(e) The valve operator shall be the traveling-nut type designed for previous stated
conditions, in an enclosed body, sealed to prevent the entrance of groundwater up
to the depth of 5 feet above the valve. The operator shall have travel limiting
devices to prevent over closing or opening damage to the valve. Valves shall
open counterclockwise with the use of a valve key on a 2-inch square operating
nut. The housing of traveling-nut type actuators shall be fitted with a removable
cover that shall permit inspection and maintenance of the operating mechanism
without removing the actuator from the valve.

(C) Execution
(1) Handling: All valves and actuators shall be transported and stored in a manner that will
protect them from damage.
(2) Installation: Install valves with the shaft horizontal according to the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures. Operate all valves from full open to full close
before installation. Check all seats, seat rings, shaft sleeves, disc connections, etc. prior
to installation.
(3) Valve Boxes: Install valve boxes over the valve operator with the base section centered
over the operator nut and resting on well-compacted backfill. The top section shall be set
to allow equal movement above and below finished grade, with final elevations to be 1/4
inch below finished grade in roadways and 1 inch to 2 inches above grade outside of
roadways. The top of base sections shall be placed approximately on line with the
operator nut at the top of the valve stem, and the entire assembly shall be plumb.
(4) Tests: Butterfly valve tests shall be done with and as a part of the general tests on the
companion water lines.
(5) Disinfection: Butterfly valve disinfection shall be done with and as a part of the general
disinfection to the companion water line.

9.08 Tapping Sleeves and Valves

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of tapping sleeves and
valves for potable water service in the pipe diameter size range of 4 inches to 12 inches.
(2) Quality Assurance
(a) Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation recommendations shall
be provided to the City inspector prior to construction. Installation
recommendations shall be followed during construction.
(b) The manufacturer of tapping sleeves and valves shall be experienced in their
design and construction, shall be regularly engaged in their manufacture, and
shall have produced tapping sleeves and valves of the sizes specified herein that
have given successful service for a period of at least 5 years.

9-27 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(B) Materials
(1) General
(a) All tapping sleeves shall be constructed of stainless steel that meets or
exceeds the requirements of ASTM A240 Type 304 UNS designated
S30400. Tapping sleeves shall be “Romac Industries” SST, “Mueller” H-
304L, “Ford” FTSS, “JCM” 432, or a tapping sleeve of equivalent design,
material, and rating approved by the Director.
(b) Extension stems, valve boxes, and special wrenches and keys shall be as
specified in Section 9.06(B), “Materials,” of these Standards.
(2) Flanges: Flanges shall be fabricated from steel plate, and all dimensions shall conform
to AWWA Standard C207, Class D. Flanges shall be machined to a flat rate with finish
of 250 micro inches or machined to a flat surface with a serrated finish in accordance
with AWWA Standard C207. In addition, the machined face shall also be recessed for
tapping valves in accordance with the MSS Standard SP-60.
(3) Gaskets: Gaskets shall be compounded from new materials, and the shape and cross-
section of the gasket shall provide adequate seal for the design pressure. Gaskets shall be
shop glued to the groove provided in the body section.
(4) Fasteners: Bolts and hex nuts shall be stainless steel or an approved equivalent for
corrosion control.
(5) Testing Outlet: A 3/4 inch NPT by welded coupling shall be attached to the outlet
nozzle of each tapping sleeve assembly, complete with a 3/4 inch square head pipe plug.
(6) Tapping Valves: With the exception of the valve ends and other modifications necessary
for tapping service, tapping valves shall be as specified in Section 9.06(B), “Materials,”
of these Standards. Each tapping valve shall be provided with a flanged inlet end
designed, faced and drilled for attachment to the outlet flange of the tapping sleeve; an
outlet end provided with a tapping flange for attachment of a standard drilling machine;
and a mechanical joint bell end for connection of the branch main. The size of the
waterway shall include the appropriate clearance for the diameter of the tapping machine
cutter recommended by the valve manufacturer. Tapping valves shall be Mueller “No.
H-667" or equal.
(7) Painting: All ferrous internal and external surfaces of the valves shall be epoxy coated in
conformance with AWWA C116-03, Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the
Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, and C550-05,
Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. The coating shall be a two-part
thermosetting epoxy suitable for field over coating and for touch-up with the same
coating material without special surface preparation. The supplier shall furnish detailed
performance tests of adhesion, hardness, and abrasion resistance of the furnished coatings
when requested by the City. The coating shall have a successful record of performance in
valves, pipe, or other fittings for a minimum of ten years.

(C) Execution
(1) Tapping Valves: Install tapping valves in the lines as indicated on the drawings, and set
plumb on a firm base. All foreign matter shall be removed from the valve interior prior
to installation. Valves shall be securely bolted to the tapping sleeve in accordance with

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-28

 the manufacturer’s instructions using the fasteners specified in Subsection 9.08(B)(4) of
these Standards.
(2) Tests: Valve tests shall be done with and as a part of the general tests on the companion
waterlines.
(3) Disinfection: Valve disinfection shall be done with and as a part of the general
disinfection to the companion waterline.

9.09 Fire Hydrants

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of fire hydrants for potable
water service.
(2) Quality Assurance
(a) Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation recommendations shall
be provided to the City inspector prior to construction. Installation
recommendations shall be followed during construction.
(b) All valves shall be tested in accordance with Section 5.1 of AWWA C502.
Certified copies of the results of all tests, together with an affidavit of compliance
shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.

(B) Materials
Fire hydrants shall be “Mueller” Super Centurion 250 A-423 or “CLOW” Medallion 395" (the
“CLOW” Medallion shall be a higher-pressure rating with chain tagged "heavy duty"), with
mechanical joint bottom connection and meet the following requirements:
(1) Inlet Pipe: 6-inch, mechanical joint inlet shoe and accessories.
(2) Trench Depth: 4-1/2 feet cover (Note: standard shipping depth is 5.0”).
(3) Operating Nut: 1-1/2-inch Pentagon National Standard Threads.
(4) Open: Left (CCW).
(5) Connection: Two 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one 5-1/4-inch pumper nozzle.
(6) Threads: National Standard Hose Threads.
(7) Pressure: 150 psi working pressure, 300 psi pressure.
(8) Break-Off Flange: Hydrants shall be provided with traffic break-off flange.
(9) Mechanical Joint Bolts and Nuts: The mechanical joint bolts and nuts shall be anti-
galling coated stainless steel, “NSS” Cor-Blue, or an equivalent in design, material, and
specifications.
(10) Shoe Nuts and Bolts: Shoe nuts and bolts shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel,
Grade 304.
(11) Color: Color shall be Rustoleum No. 831 “restful green” or KWAL “hydrant green”
except for bonnet, weather caps and nozzle caps, which must be Rustoleum No. 2766
“reflectorized white.”
(12) Spares: A set of spare break-off parts shall be furnished.

9-29 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(C) Execution
(1) Hydrants: Where applicable, hydrants shall be installed with pumper outlet facing the
adjacent roadway or parking area. Set hydrants at such elevations that the connecting
pipe shall drain to the main with a grade of not less than 1 percent, and upon a concrete
foundation not less than 6 inches thick and 18 inches square. The centerline of nozzles
shall be at least 18 inches above finished grade. Firmly block the back of the hydrant
opposite the pipe connection with a concrete thrust block braced against the vertical face
of the trench to prevent the hydrant from blowing off the line.
(2) Drainage Aggregate and Backfill: Place not less than 1/3 cubic-yard of approved clean
gravel or crushed rock around the base of each hydrant and 12 inches over the top of the
supply pipe to insure drainage. A layer of 30-pound asphalt-saturated felt paper or heavy
vinyl sheet shall be placed over gravel to keep backfill material from sifting into gravel.
Thoroughly compact the backfill around hydrants, to the grade line, in an approved
manner.
(3) Operations Check: Clean hydrant interiors of all foreign matter before installation.
Stuffing boxes shall be tightened and the hydrant inspected in opened and closed
positions to see that all parts are in working condition.
(4) General: Hydrants shall be tagged “out-of-service” until the water system is operational.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to notify Boulder Police Communications
regarding the location of the tagged hydrants.

9.10 Combination Air Valve

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of combination air valves
for potable water service.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Manholes: Refer to Section 9.16, “Manholes and Inlets,” of these Standards.
(2) Combination Air Valve: The valve shall be a 2-inch combination air release vacuum
valve, “Vent-O-Mat” Series 050 RB X 25 2 1, or approved equivalent in design, material,
and specifications. The combination air valve shall be provided with a 2-inch diameter
hand wheel operated gate valve.
(3) Hose Gate Valve: A 3/4-inch hose gate valve is to be installed in the air release valve
manhole. The valve shall have a bronze body, threaded end, solid wedge, union bonnet,
inside screw rising stem gate valve. These valves shall be “Powell” 375 HS. Each hose
gate valve shall be equipped with a brass cap and chain.
(4) Ball Valve: Ball valves shall be of bronze or brass construction with two-piece end entry
body, bronze or brass ball, Teflon or Viton stem seal, reinforced Teflon seats and thrust
washer, a removable operating lever, and threaded ends. Valves shall be rated not less
than 500 psi non-shock cold WOG and shall be drip-tight in both directions. Valves shall

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-30

 be “Conbraco Industries” Apollo 70-100 Series, “Powell” Fig 4210T, or “Stockham” S-
216.
(5) Corporation Stop: A corporation stop shall be as referenced in Subsection 9.05(B)(3), of
these Standards.
(6) Insulators: Insulators shall be as referenced in Subsection 9.05(B)(6), of these
Standards.

(C) Execution
(1) Installation: Install valve, manhole, and appurtenances as indicated on Drawing No.
5.22, in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards, and in accordance with
applicable provisions of the related sections.
(2) Tests: Valve tests shall done be with and as a part of the general tests on the companion
waterlines.
(3) Disinfection: Valve disinfection shall be done with and as a part of the general
disinfection to the companion waterlines.

9.11 Pipeline Fittings

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of pipeline fittings for
potable water service.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Gray or Ductile Iron: Fittings shall be made from gray iron or ductile iron and
manufactured in accordance with AWWA C110-08, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings,
or AWWA C153-06, Ductile Iron Compact Fittings.
(2) Rubber Gasket Joints: Fittings shall be furnished with rubber gasket joints in
accordance with AWWA C111-07, Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings.
(3) Design: Fittings shall be rated for a design working pressure of 350 psi pressure rating
and shall conform to the dimensions and weights shown in the tables of the AWWA
standards referenced in this Section 9.11(B) of these Standards.
(4) Certification: The manufacturer shall prepare a certified statement that the inspection
and all specified tests have been performed and the results thereof comply with the
requirements of the applicable AWWA standard(s) specified in Section 9.11(B) of these
Standards. The contractor shall cause a copy of the certification to be sent to the City
upon request.
(5) Ductile Iron Flanged Fittings: Ductile iron flanged fittings shall be manufactured in
accordance with the following:
(a) Integrally cast flange fittings: AWWA C110-08, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron

9-31 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 Fittings.
(b) Threated flange fittings: AWWA C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile
Iron or Gray Iron Threaded Flanges.
(c) Ductile iron flanged fittings shall be rated for 250 psi working pressure and shall
be installed with special gaskets that achieve 350 psi working pressure.
(6) 4 Through 6 Inch Fittings: 4 through 16-inch diameter fittings shall be furnished with a
fusion bonded epoxy inside and out, with a standard thickness as defined in AWWA
C116-03, Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior
Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. The Director may waive the requirement
for fusion bonded epoxy on fittings if the Director finds that specific fittings are not
available.
(7) Bolts and Nuts: Fittings shall be furnished with tee-head mechanical joint bolts and
hexagon nuts, fabricated from corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy steel such as
"Cor-Ten" or “Blue Bolts.”
(8) Connection fitting: Mechanical joint anchoring fittings (swivel) shall also be used.
Infact Corporation’s “Foster Adaptor” may also be used to connect between mechanical
joint fittings, valves and hydrant connections.

9.12 Disinfecting Waterlines

(A) Scope
This section describes the disinfecting of all portions of the potable water system, including
buried piping, valves, hydrants, and any portion of the existing connecting system that might have
become contaminated during construction activities, and also any temporary water service piping
used during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Chlorinating Material: The chlorinating material shall either be a hypochlorite solution,
tablets or granules.
(2) Tablet Attachment: The hypochlorite tablets shall be fastened to the top of the pipe
using Permatex No. 1.

(C) Execution
(1) Disinfection
(a) Care shall be taken to prevent contaminating materials from entering the water
mains during construction or repair. Such materials that may accidentally enter
the main shall be removed by flushing. This flushing shall be done prior to
disinfection unless the tablet method of disinfection is used. If, in the opinion of
the Director, the contaminated material that has entered cannot be removed by
flushing, the interior of the pipe shall be cleaned by mechanical means and then
swabbed with a 1 percent hypochlorite solution.
(b) Upon completion of the water pipelines, all new pipe, valves, hydrants, etc. shall
be thoroughly flushed and disinfected, using a continuous-feed method of

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-32

 hypochlorite and water mixture or hypochlorite tablets or granules in accordance
with AWWA Standard C-651, latest revision.
(c) The chlorinating material shall be introduced into the water lines and distribution
systems in a manner approved by the Director. After a contact period of not less
than 24 hours, the treated water in the lines shall contain not less than 10 mg per
liter chlorine using the continuous-feed method or 25 mg per l chlorine using the
tablet or granular method throughout the length of the line. The system shall be
flushed after successful completion of disinfection with clean water until the
residual chlorine content is no more than 1.0 mg per liter. All valves in lines
being disinfected, except those being used as bulkheads, shall be opened and
closed several times during the contact period. During flushing and disinfection
the contractor shall make sure that none of the disinfection solution enters any
existing water main.
(d) Flushing shall be done with a flushing velocity of at least 2 ½ feet per second.
The contractor shall provide all fittings required to flush the line. Flushing will
be accomplished in such a manner that no erosion will occur and there will be no
damage to street, fish, animals, plants or other property.
(2) Bacteriological Examination: After the system has been thoroughly flushed and before
the new water line is connected to the distribution system, samples shall be taken from
representative points in the system, at intervals of 1200 feet, in sterile bottles treated with
sodium thiosulfate. Labeled samples shall be submitted to the City Drinking Water
Program staff, or designated certified laboratory, for bacteriological examination.
Submitted samples shall meet all City and State bacteriological standards, showing the
absence of both coliform and heterotrophic bacterial growths. If the initial disinfection
fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological results, the new main shall be reflushed and
resampled. If check samples also fail to produce acceptable results, the main shall be
rechlorinated by the continuous feed or slug method until satisfactory results are
obtained.
(3) Disposal of Solution: Following testing, the solution and flushing water shall be
disposed of by the contractor into the nearest sanitary sewer line. The solution and
flushing water shall not be dumped into any lakes, streams, waterways, irrigation ditches
or stormwater drainage systems. If wasted water cannot be safely discharged into a
sanitary sewer system, and then a reducing agent shall be applied to the wasted water to
thoroughly neutralize the chlorine residual remaining in the water.

9.13 Testing of Water Pipes

(A) General
This section describes the testing of all water pipe including water mains, fire lines and services.

(B) Materials
The contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment including test pumps, pipe, connectors,
meters, gauges, instruments, and other equipment required. Pressure gauges used shall be
graduated in increments no more than 5 psi and shall have a range of approximately twice the test
pressure. Gauges meters and other instruments shall be calibrated prior to testing.

9-33 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

(C) Execution
(1) Notification and Witness
(a) The contractor shall notify the Director of all tests at least 48 hours prior to
testing so that the Director can witness the tests.
(b) The pipe may be subjected to hydrostatic pressure and inspected and tested for
leakage at any convenient time after the trench has been partially backfilled,
except at the joints, or backfilled as permitted by the Director. Where any
section is provided with concrete thrust blocks, the pressure test shall not be
made until at least 2 days have elapsed after the concrete was installed.
(2) Pressure Test
(a) All new pipe shall be pressure tested prior to connection to the existing system.
All pipe shall be tested at a pressure of 150 psi at the lowest point in each section
or 1½ times the working pressure, whichever is greater.
(b) Prior to testing, all equipment that would be damaged by the test pressure shall
be removed. This equipment shall be replaced in the system after testing is
complete. All pipe and appurtenances shall be backfilled except for joints unless
otherwise permitted by the Director.
(c) The contractor shall slowly fill the pipe with water prior to testing and remove all
air from the piping system. Each valved section, unless otherwise directed by the
Director, shall be tested prior to connection to the existing system. The duration
of each pressure test shall be at least 2 continuous hours. Test time will be
accrued only while full test pressure is on the system. All water used in testing
the pipelines shall be provided by the contractor from a potable water source.
(d) The specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the
pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Director. The contractor shall furnish all
necessary labor, equipment, and connection corporation stops to the pipeline to
perform the test.
(e) No testing shall be permitted against valves or fittings that are part of the existing
system unless specifically approved by the Director. All exposed pipes, fittings,
valves, hydrants, and joints will be carefully examined during the test. Any
cracked or defective pipe, fittings, valves, or hydrants discovered during the
pressure test shall be removed and replaced by the contractor with sound
material. The test shall be repeated until the test is satisfactory to the Director.
(3) Leakage Test
(a) A leakage test shall be conducted after the pressure test has been completed,
unless the pressure test indicates that there are no leaks. The contractor shall
furnish the pump, pipe, connections, meters and all other necessary apparatus,
and shall furnish all necessary assistance to conduct the test. The duration of
each leakage test shall be two hours, and, during the test, the main shall be
subjected to a hydrostatic pressure specified.
(b) No pipeline installation will be accepted until the leakage is less than the amount
computed by the following formula:
L= SD(P)0.5
133,200

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-34

 Where: L = Allowable Leakage (Gallons Per Hour)
S = Tested Length of Pipe (Feet)
D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (Inches)
P = Average Test Pressure During the Test (psi)
(c) The contractor shall, at their own expense, locate and repair the points of leakage
until the leakage is within the specified allowance.

9.14 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Non-pressure Pipe

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
non-pressure pipe and appurtenances for storm sewer mains, sanitary sewer mains and
sewer services in the pipe diameter size range of 4inches to 15inches.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) PVC Non-pressure Pipe
(a) PVC non-pressure pipe shall be type PSM polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a cell
classification of 12454 or 12454 or 13364 (with a minimum tensile modules of
500,000 psi) as defined in ASTM D1784. All PVC pipe and fittings shall meet
or exceed all of the material requirements of ASTM D3034 and thickness
requirements of SDR 35.
(b) Provisions must be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a
rubber ring and integral thickened bell as part of each joint. Gaskets shall
conform to ASTM F477. Pipe shall be supplied in laying lengths of 19-1/2 to 20
feet. All pipe and fittings shall be assembled with a non-toxic lubricant. Each
length of pipe and all fittings shall have marked on the exterior the following:
(i) Manufacturer’s Name or Trademark;
(ii) Nominal Pipe Size;
(iii) PVC Cell Classification (e.g. 12454-B);
(iv) Legend - Type PSM SDR-35 Sewer Pipe; and
(v) ASTM - D3034.
(c) All fittings and plugs to be used with the PVC pipe shall be those manufactured
by the manufacturer of the pipe. Each special fitting shall be a completely
manufactured unit with either bells or spigots on each connection that are an
exact duplication of the bells and spigots on the pipeline. Fittings with any other
type of connections will not be accepted.
(2) Plugs: Plugs shall be specifically manufactured for the pipelines where they are to be
installed. The plug shall be constructed of a material approved by the Director and shall
provide a permanent watertight installation.

9-35 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (3) Couplings
(a) Couplings shall be used only where shown on the approved drawings or where
approved in writing by the Director. The contractor shall provide a description of
an exact location of any couplings used.
(b) Flexible couplings shall consist of a rubber gasket or boot with a stainless steel
shield and tightening bands. Couplings shall be ASTM C1173 Type B couplings
and shall be “Fernco Strong Back” or an approved equivalent.
(4) Grout
(a) Grout shall conform to the specifications defined in Section 9.16(B)(5). The
contractor may substitute a two-component, 100 percent solids epoxy resin for
the specified grout.
(b) Grout used for sealing service connections shall be a 2-component, waterproof
epoxy grout specifically manufactured for this application. The grout shall
adhere to any of the dissimilar materials.
(5) Sealants: Sealants used on manholes or pipe connections shall be equal to
SIKAFLEX-la, a one component polyurethane base, elastomeric sealant. When required
due to moisture or immersion, provide SIKAFLEX 429 or an equivalent primer for
application onto the substrate according to manufacturer’s recommendation.

(C) Execution
(1) General
(a) Each pipe length and fitting interior, interior surface of bells, and exterior surface
of spigots shall be cleaned of all foreign material before placement in the trench
and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. Each item shall also be examined
for cracks and other defects before installation.
(b) Pipe shall be cut, only whenever necessary, to conform to location of manholes
or connections. All cuts shall be straight, true, and at right angles to the axis of
the pipe. The cutting process shall leave a smooth end without damaging the
pipe. All burrs shall be removed from the ends of cut pipe, and the end lightly
rasped or filed. All tools used in cutting pipe will be subject to the Director’s
approval.
(c) Pipe laying shall proceed with the spigot ends of pipe pointing in the direction of
the flow, unless otherwise approved by the Director. Each pipe length shall be
laid true to line and grade in such manner as to form a close concentric joint with
the adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to the flow line. Pipe shall be
laid in a dewatered trench and shall not be used for draining water from the
trench. Do not lay pipe when trenches or weather conditions are unsuitable for
such work.
(d) Whenever the pipe is left unattended or pipe laying is not in progress, temporary
plugs shall be installed at all openings. Temporary plugs shall be watertight and
of such design as to prevent debris and animals from entering the pipe. All
temporary plugs will be subject to approval by the Director.
(e) The contractor shall install the materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. If there is a conflict between the methods prescribed in the

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-36

 approved plans and the manufacturer’s instructions, the contractor shall obtain
resolution from the Director, before proceeding with the work.
(2) Pipe Installation
(a) Pipe Laying: No deflection in the joints shall be allowed. All pipe shall be fully
supported along the full length of pipe barrel without support by the bell
mounding.
(b) Pipe Joints
(i) The outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be thoroughly
wiped clean. Set the rubber ring in the bell with the marked edge facing
toward the end of the bell. Lubricate the spigot end using a thin film of
the manufacturer-supplied lubricant. Push the pipe spigot into the bell.
Position the completed joint so that the mark on the pipe end is in line
with the end of the bell.
(ii) Bevel the end of cut pipe with a beveling tool after the pipe is field cut.
Place a clearly visible position mark at the correct distance from the end
of the field-cut pipe.
(3) Connection of Pipe to Concrete Manhole Base
(a) The pipe shall be encased in the concrete poured for the manhole base as detailed
in Drawing No. 6.01, “Standard Sewer Manhole,” in Chapter 11, “Technical
Drawings,” in these Standards. Special provisions shall be made for water
tightness of the connection.
(b) The exterior circumference of the pipe where encased in concrete for water
tightness shall be uniformly roughened or scarified by sanding with coarse
sandpaper or emery cloth for at least 6 inches encased length.
(c) Additionally, gasket as specified elsewhere shall be stretched onto the pipe to
form a weep ring where encased in concrete. Any alteration to the above
specified methods for pipe connection to concrete shall be submitted to the
Director for approval.
(4) Grouting
(a) Any opening between the manhole wall and pipe made during construction shall
be closed and sealed with watertight grout. The opening shall be of sufficient size
to accommodate the pipe, “O” rings, and grout. The grout shall extend no less
than the full width of the manhole barrel.
(b) Channels that have been cut into concrete bases shall be smoothed to the
specified contour with grout. The grout shall extend no less than the full width of
the manhole barrel.
(5) Temporary Plugs: Where required on construction plans and at the end of each sewer
service stub out, the pipe shall be sealed with a removable plug. Plugs shall be
specifically manufactured for the pipelines where they are to be installed. The plug shall
be constructed of a material approved by the Director and shall provide a permanent
watertight installation without permanently sealing the joint.
(6) Sewer Services: The general location of the sewer service lines is detailed in Drawing
No. 6.06, “Sewer Service Line,” in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” in these
Standards. Actual locations of the service lines shall be determined by the approved

9-37 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 construction plans and in the field by the Director. The contractor shall notify the
Director prior to constructing each sewer main so that the Director may have adequate
time to determine the final location of each service tee or wye fitting to be installed in the
sewer main. Failure of the contractor to properly notify the Director as noted above may
result in the contractor’s removal of any portion of the sewer main that is necessary to
install the fittings in their proper location as determined by the Director.
(a) The contractor will be allowed to tap and install a service saddle to new sewer
mains only at those locations approved by the Director. Connections onto sewer
mains shall be made only by boring or drilling with equipment designed for this
purpose. Connections shall not be made by impact equipment. The contractor
shall request, in writing, Director approval of methods and equipment proposed
to be used for performing connections.
(b) The contractor shall remove from the sewer main all debris created by making
connections before the service line is connected.
(c) Service line saddle connections shall be attached to the sewer main with an
epoxy-bonding agent. Where the sewer main has been lined, the original sewer
main shall be removed and the saddle shall be attached directly to the liner. The
bonding agent shall be applied to a clean, dry surface. The connection shall
remain dry until the bonding material has set, depending upon environmental
conditions. Backfill around the connection shall not be attempted until the
material has hardened and been accepted by the Director.
(d) At the end of all sewer services, the contractor shall provide plugs and furnish
and set two marker posts. One marker post shall be buried at least 3 feet and
shall extend at least 2 feet above the ground surface and shall have a piece of
green flagging at the top or be painted green. The second marker shall extend
from the end of the service to 18 inches below the existing surface. The marker
posts shall be wood 2 x 4, 4 x 4 or #4 rebar.
(7) Backfilling and Restoring Surface Conditions: Shall be as specified in Section 9.02,
“Excavation and Trenching,” of these Standards.
(8) Testing: Testing of PVC non-pressure pipe shall be as specified in Section 9.17, “Testing
of Gravity Sewer Pipelines and Manholes,” of these Standards.

9.15 Reinforced Concrete Pipe

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of reinforced concrete pipe
and appurtenances for culverts and storm drains in the pipe diameter size range of 12
inches to 144 inches. Reinforced concrete pipe shall not be used for sanitary sewer mains.
(2) Quality Assurance:
(a) Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation recommendations shall
be provided to the City inspector prior to construction. Installation
recommendations shall be followed during construction.
(b) The pipe will be tested by the manufacturer based on the three-edge bearing test
for both the 0.01 inch crack and the ultimate strength as set forth in ASTM C-
497. The pipe shall be tested at the manufacturer’s plant. Not more than 1

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-38

 percent of the number of pipe lengths, but no fewer than two pipes, for each size
of pipe, will be tested. The contractor shall provide copies of the test results to
the Director for approval. The Director may select pieces to be tested.

(B) Materials
(1) Reinforced Concrete Pipe
(a) The reinforced concrete pipe shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C76.
The pipe shall be Class III unless noted otherwise on the approved construction
plans. The cement for the pipe shall conform to the requirements set forth in
ASTM 150 and shall be type II and shall have a minimum compressive strength
of 4,000 psi. All wall thicknesses shall be those established in “Wall B” in table
3, of said C76 specification, and the reinforcement shall be shown in the same
“Wall B.” Each section, or “stick”, of pipe shall be 7 feet-6 inches or greater in
length.
(b) No elliptical reinforcement will be permitted except for any elliptical reinforced
concrete pipe designated on the construction plans.
(c) Lifting holes will not be permitted in any of the pipe. The following shall be
clearly marked on the exterior surface of the pipe:
(i) ASTM Specification;
(ii) Date of manufacture;
(iii) Class and size; and
(iv) Name or trademark of manufacturer.
(d) The joint design shall be tongue and groove, or bell and spigot. Joints for the
circular reinforced concrete pipe shall be all rubber gasket conforming to ASTM
C-443, latest revision. The gasket shall be attached to the spigot of the pipe and
shall make the joint flexible and watertight. The contractor may use butyl mastic
joint sealant in rope or trowel applied form in lieu of rubber gaskets for circular
pipe if approved in writing by the Director. For all non-circular pipe and
culverts, butyl mastic joint sealant may be used. The contractor shall submit test
results and material specifications on the sealant to the Director before the
Director gives written approval of its use. This sealant shall be made specifically
for permanently sealing joints in tongue and groove concrete sewer pipe, must
adhere tightly to the pipe surface, and form a tight flexible joint. The gaskets or
sealants shall be installed as directed by the manufacturer of the pipe.
(e) Flared end sections, bends and tees shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
C76 and shall be the same class and shall have the same joint design as the pipe
described above.
(f) Visual inspections of all materials shall be made at the job site, and pipe will be
rejected on account of any deficiencies covered by ASTM Specification
Designation C76 or on account of the following:
(i) Porous spots, inside or outside, having a greater area than 10 square
inches and a depth of more than 1/4 inch;
(ii) Patched or repair of porous spots or other defects that are not approved
by the Director; or

9-39 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (iii) Exposure of reinforcement that indicates the reinforcement has been
replaced.

(C) Execution
(1) Laying Pipe
(a) All materials shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece-by-piece by means
of a derrick, ropes or other suitable tools or equipment, in such a manner as to
prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped
into the trench. All pipe shall be inspected for defects prior to installation. Any
defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be rejected.
(b) All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and fittings
before the pipe is lowered into its position in the trench. Every precaution shall
be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being
placed in the trench. If the pipe-laying crew is unable to place the pipe into the
trench without getting foreign matter or dirt into it, the Director may require that,
before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of
suitable size be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be
made to the adjacent pipes.
(c) An approved snug-fitting stopper or plug shall be installed in each pipe
immediately after it is laid and prior to any further excavating, or backfilling. All
openings along the line of the main shall be securely closed as directed and, in
the suspension of work at any time, stoppers shall be placed to prevent dirt or
other substances from entering the main. During laying operations, no debris,
tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
(d) Pipes shall be laid to a true line and at uniform rates of grade between manholes
as shown on the approved construction plans. Fine grading to the bottom of the
barrel shall proceed ahead of the pipe laying. The grade shall be accurately
established for each joint by laser beam, or other means approved in writing by
the Director. The laser beam shall be checked with a level each time it is moved
and each day before construction proceeds, and thereafter as required to assure
that it is set at the correct alignment. If any errors of grade are observed, pipe
laying shall stop until the grade is corrected.
(e) Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with the spigot ends pointed in the direction of
flow. No pipe shall be laid in water or when the trench conditions are unsuitable
for such work. The contractor shall make all connections of pipe to the manholes
that have previously been constructed. When connecting to existing sewers, the
contractor shall take every precaution necessary to prevent dirt or debris from
entering the existing lines.
(f) Bedding shall be placed under and on both sides of the pipe as each length of
sewer pipe is installed.
(2) Joining Pipe
(a) Use a method of joining pipe sections that ensures that ends are fully entered and
inner surfaces are flush and even. The equipment used to force the joints
together must be adequate enough to overcome the gasket pressure involved.
(b) Just prior to joining the pipes, the ends of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned to
remove all foreign substances that may have adhered to the pipe surface. All

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-40

 dust and dirt shall be removed with a clean rag. A lubricating solution that is not
injurious to the gasket or concrete, such as flax soap or water glass, shall be
liberally applied to the gasket groove and to the entire surface of the bell ring.
Following this operation, a thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the gasket
that shall then be snapped into place in the groove, after which a small diameter
smooth steel rod shall be inserted between the gasket and groove and run
completely around the gasket to equalize the gasket tension.
(c) In the event that any foreign matter becomes imbedded in the lubricant, or the
lubricant becomes contaminated by water or other substances before the joint is
started, the area affected shall be re-cleaned and new lubricant shall be applied.
(d) The pipe being jointed shall be carefully moved into position, be line and grade
checked, and as the spigot end is started into the bell of the section previously
laid, the gasket position shall be checked to ensure uniform entry into the bell at
all points.
(3) Testing and Flushing Pipe
(a) Prior to acceptance of each section of storm sewer line, the contractor shall jet
clean all sewers up through 18 inches in diameter. Larger storm sewers shall be
cleaned by other appropriate methods approved by the Director. All dirt and
debris shall be prevented from entering the existing storm sewer system by
means of watertight plugs or other suitable methods.
(b) If the Director finds it necessary to clean the mains immediately after
construction by rodding, jetting, or both, the Director shall assess the contractor
for the cleaning at a set per foot charge with a minimum dollar amount.
(c) The Director will televise all mains as part of public inspection, and will bill the
contractor for the televising at a set per foot charge with a minimum dollar
amount. Any defects found during the televising shall be repaired by the
contractor, in a manner approved by the Director.
(d) Any visible infiltration, that the Director finds to be the result of poor installation
of the specified materials, shall be repaired by the contractor in a manner
approved by the Director before the work will be accepted.
(e) Before acceptance of the work, the Director will survey the manhole invert and
surface elevations. Any inverts or surface elevations not meeting the approved
design in the construction plans shall not be approved and shall be redone to the
satisfaction of the Director.
(f) Upon completion of construction, the Director will carefully inspect all sewers
and appurtenances. Any unsatisfactory work shall be removed and replaced by
the contractor in a proper manner. The invert of sewer and manholes shall be left
smooth, clean, and free from any obstructions throughout the entire line.
Manhole rings and covers must be raised to finished grade before final
acceptance of the sewer.
(g) For sanitary sewers, testing shall be as specified in Section 9.17, “Testing of
Gravity Sewer Pipelines and Manholes,” of these Standards.

9-41 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

9.16 Manholes and Inlets

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of precast concrete
manholes, storm sewer inlets and appurtenances.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) General
(a) Manholes shall be constructed of precast concrete riser sections, in accordance
with Drawing No. 6.01, “Standard Sewer Manhole,” in Chapter 11, “Technical
Drawings,” of these Standards. The concrete sections shall conform to ASTM
C478. The top section required for change of diameter shall be concentric cone
or flat slab. Invert channel shall be smooth and semicircular in shape conforming
to the inside of the adjacent sewer section. The minimum internal diameter of
the manhole barrel shall be in Table 9-6, “Required Manhole Diameters,” for all
manhole installations:

Table 9-6: Required Manhole Diameters

Pipe Size (Diameter) Inner Manhole Section Diameter
18 Inches (and Smaller) 4 Feet
21 - 36 Inches 5 Feet
42 - 48 Inches 6 Feet
54 Inches (and Larger) Special Detail

(b) The minimum internal diameter of the manhole barrel may also be determined by
the number and size of pipes junctioning at a manhole. In such cases, the
Director may modify the minimum internal diameter of the manhole barrel as
required.
(c) To bring the manhole cover to the correct elevation, the adjustment section of
each manhole shall be constructed of brick that is sound and true in shape and
size and shall be Grade S-W from clay or shale. Precast concrete grade
adjustment rings may be substituted for the brick. These rings shall be not less
than 6 inches wide and furnished in heights to allow for 1-inch adjustment. Total
adjustment height, with grade rings or bricks, shall not exceed 12 inches.
(2) Joints: Precast manhole and inlet joints shall be made watertight with RUB’R-NEK,
Kent Seal No. 2, or LO-MOD GEL material, or approved equivalent. The diameter of
gasket shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Frame and Cover: Manhole frames and covers shall be of heavy duty traffic lids,
Colorado Springs pattern, round base, 22-1/8 inch opening lids 1 inch thick, non-locking
type with frame and cover weighing approximately 327 pounds. The cover and frame
seat shall be machine finished to prevent any rocking of the cover in its associated frame.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-42

 The cover shall have the word “SEWER” for sanitary sewer manholes, or “STORM
SEWER” for storm sewer manholes clearly cast on the surface. Covers for other utility
manholes shall also be marked with the appropriate utility designation. Frames and
covers shall be CASTINGS, INC. MH 310 COVER B, or approved equivalent.
(4) Manhole Steps: Manhole steps shall be built into and thoroughly anchored to the
manhole walls at time of fabrication and shall be positioned as shown on the approved
construction plans, and in accordance with the technical drawings in Chapter 11,
“Technical Drawings,” of these Standards. The steps shall be made of polypropylene
coated reinforcing steel.
(5) Grout: Grout shall be “non-shrink” type with aluminum filings; grout with iron filings is
not acceptable. Grout shall be “Five Star Grout,” “Embeco Grout” or equivalent.
(6) Concrete: Concrete for cast-in-place manhole bases shall have a 28-day compressive
strength of not less than 3,000 psi. The maximum water content shall be 0.5 pounds of
water per pound of cement. Entrained and entrapped air shall be between 4 and 9
percent. All reinforcement shall be standard deformed reinforcement conforming to the
requirements set forth in ASTM, A615, Grade 60.
(7) Inlets: Inlets shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and shall conform to the
dimensions and specifications as set forth for Type “R” Curb Inlets in Chapter 11,
“Technical Drawings,” of these Standards, and CDOT’s M & S Standards. Inlet steps
shall be built into and thoroughly anchored to the walls at the time of inlet construction.
These steps shall conform to the requirements for manhole steps and shall be positioned
as shown on the technical drawings.

(C) Execution
(1) Construction of Manholes
(a) Concrete bases shall be poured on undisturbed ground. Pipe sections shall be
flush on the inside of the structural wall (except as noted below) and project
outside sufficiently for proper connection to the next pipe section. All pipelines
into a manhole shall have a joint located no more than 12 inches from the
exterior wall. Where incoming pipes enter a storm drain manhole at an elevation
3 feet or greater above the base, the incoming pipe shall project 2 inches inside
the manhole. All annular spaces around the pipe opening shall be grouted.
(b) For all precast manhole bases, the ground surface below precast concrete bases
shall be excavated 6 inches below the elevation of the bottom of the base and
backfilled with bedding material, meeting the requirements of Subsection
9.02(B) of these Standards. The bedding material shall be carefully leveled and
smoothed as to give uniform support to the precast base over its entire area.
(c) The invert channels of manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the
Drawing No. 6.03, “Manhole Invert,” in Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of
these Standards. They shall be smooth and semicircular in shape, conforming to
the inside of the incoming and outgoing sewer pipelines. Changes in direction of
flow shall be made with a smooth curve of as large a radius as the size of the
manhole will permit. Where differences of 24 inches or less in invert elevations
are called for, sloped flow channels shall be formed so the water does not
undergo a vertical drop. A drop manhole shall be installed where the specified
distance in the manhole inverts exceeds 24 inches. The inlet channels may be
formed directly in the concrete of the manhole base. The floor of the manhole

9-43 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 outside of the channel shall be smooth and shall slope towards the channel not
less than 1 inch per foot nor more than 2 inches per foot. The manhole covers
shall be set with a final elevation of 1/4 inch below the finished grade in
roadways and 1 to 2 inches above grade outside of roadways. When a manhole is
located in the pavement area, it shall not be constructed to final grade until the
pavement has been completed, unless directed otherwise by the Director.
(d) Install joint material per manufacturer’s instructions so that no voids are present.
Grout all joints inside and outside after manhole assembly is completed.
(e) Gaskets for connecting PVC pipe to manhole sections shall be specifically
manufactured for that purpose. The gasket shall provide for at least five bearing
points on the pipe surface. The interior circumference of the gasket shall be
approximately 5 percent less than the exterior circumference of the pipe. The
gasket shall be as manufactured by Hamilton Kent Mfg. Co. of Kent, Ohio, or
approved equivalent. All annular spaces around pipe openings must be grouted.
(f) Stubs shall be provided at manholes when indicated on the construction plans.
Such stubs shall be sealed with a removable plug. Plugs shall be specifically
manufactured for the pipelines where they are to be installed. The plug shall be
constructed of a material approved by the Director and shall provide a permanent
watertight installation.
(2) Adjusting Manhole Tops: When grade adjustment of an existing structure is specified,
remove frames and covers and reconstruct as required. Reset cleaned frames at the
indicated elevation. Prior to final acceptance, clean structures of accumulations of silt,
debris, or foreign matter.
(3) Testing Manholes: Refer to Section 9.17, “Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipelines and
Manholes,” of these Standards.

9.17 Testing of Gravity Sewer Pipelines and Manholes

(A) General
This section describes the testing of gravity sewer pipelines and manholes including sanitary
sewers and storm drains.

(B) Materials
The contractor shall provide all equipment and material specifically designed for the testing
specified in this section.

(C) Execution
(1) Notification and Witness: The contractor shall notify the Director of all tests at least 48
hours prior to testing so that the Director can witness the tests.
(2) When to Test: The pipe shall be tested for leakage after the pipe has been installed and
the trench has been partially backfilled, except at the joints, or backfilled as permitted by
the Director.
(3) Testing Procedures

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-44

 (a) General: All sanitary sewer mains and appurtenances shall be cleaned, tested,
and PACP TV inspected after backfill operations have been completed. The
contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to
clean the pipe and appurtenances, perform the tests and all work incidental
thereto. Any damages to the pipeline caused by cleaning or testing operations
shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor
(b) Alignment and Grade: Gravity sewer pipelines will be checked by the Director
to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred after the trench
has been bedded. The maximum vertical deflection allowed for PVC pipe is five
percent. The City may require the contractor to perform deflection tests of the
pipe before acceptance. Optional devices for testing include calibrated television,
photography, properly sized go-no-go mandrel, sewer ball, or deflectometer. The
method used shall be approved by the City. To ensure accurate testing, the line
shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing.
(4) Air Tests
(a) Air testing of sanitary sewer pipes shall be done on all sections of pipe between
manholes. The pipe shall be cleaned and may be wetted before air testing. The
section of pipeline being tested shall be plugged at each manhole with pneumatic
balls.
(b) Low-pressure air shall be introduced into the plugged line until an internal
pressure of 4 psig greater than the average backpressure of any ground water
pressure that may submerge the pipe would cause. At least 2 minutes shall pass
to allow air temperature to stabilize before the test time is started.
(c) No pipeline installation will be accepted if the pressure drops 0.5 psig or more
during the time and for the length of pipe shown in Table 9-7, “Specifications for
Air Testing of Sanitary Sewer Pipes,” of these Standards:
(d) If the pipeline installation fails the air test, repairs shall be made and the pipe
shall be retested until it passes the air test.
(5) Deflection
(a) All PVC non-pressure pipes shall be tested for vertical deflection after placement
and compaction of backfill. The maximum deflection allowed is 5 percent.
(b) Method of testing shall be by calibrated television, photography, properly sized
go-no-go mandrel, sewer ball, or deflectometer. The method used shall be
approved by the Director. Any and all pipe with vertical defection greater than
the allowable shall be excavated, and removed from the pipeline, replaced,
backfilled and compacted as specified, and retested at the contractor’s expense.

Table 9-7: Specifications for Air Testing of Sanitary Sewer Pipes

Pipe Diameter Minimum Test Time for Maximum Pipe Length Minimum Test Time for
(Inches) Pipe Lengths up to Lengths for Minimum Time Pipe Lengths Greater than
in Column 3 (min:sec) Testing in Column 2 Column 3 (Seconds)
(Feet)
4 1:53 597 0.190 x Pipe Length (Feet)
2:50 398 0.427 x Pipe Length (Feet)
8 3:47 298 0.760 x Pipe Length (Feet)

9-45 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 10 4:43 239 1.187 x Pipe Length (Feet)
12 5:40 199 1.709 x Pipe Length (Feet)
15 7:05 159 2.671 x Pipe Length (Feet)

(6) Television
(a) Following completion of sewer line work, the contractor shall perform and
supply the City with a PACP TV inspection report and digital video of the sewer.
TV inspections shall be performed by a PACP certified inspector. Prior to
performing the TV inspection, the sewer improvements must be complete,
accessible, and cleaned using pressurized water sufficient to allow for a detailed
inspection. The City will not accept inspections for lines that have not been
cleaned.
(b) Following TV inspections and any necessary repairs that the contractor may have
identified, the City will review the inspection data. If the condition of the pipe is
determined to be free of structural defects, deflections, debris, defects in pipe
material, and other installation errors, the work will be eligible for acceptance.

(D) Sanitary Sewer Manholes

(1) General
(a) During the construction of the manholes, the contractor shall, in accordance with
good construction practice, insure that no earth, sand, rocks or other foreign
material exists on the joint surfaces during assembly of the sections. The
Director shall check each manhole to determine whether the manhole fulfills the
requirements of the construction plans and these Standards.
(b) The Director shall visually check each manhole, both exterior and interior, for
flaws, cracks, holes, or other inadequacies that might affect the operation or
watertight integrity of the manhole. Should any inadequacies be found, any
repairs deemed necessary by the Director shall be made by the contractor.
(c) Exfiltration tests as specified above shall be performed on all sanitary sewer
manholes.
(2) Vacuum Testing: When required by the Director, sanitary sewer manholes shall be
vacuum tested with the following procedure:
(a) Each manhole shall be tested immediately after assembly and prior to backfilling.
(b) All lift holes shall be plugged with an approved non-shrink grout.
(c) No grout will be placed in the horizontal joints before testing.
(d) All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely brace the
plugs from being drawn into the manhole.
(e) The test head shall be placed at the inside of the top of the cone section and the
seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
(f) A vacuum of 10 inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off.
With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum drop to 9
inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than 60 seconds for one 48
inch diameter manhole, 75 seconds for 60 inches, and 90 seconds for 72 inches.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-46

 (g) If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made with a non-
shrink grout while the vacuum is still being drawn. Retesting shall proceed until
a satisfactory test is obtained.

9.18 Corrugated Metal Pipe

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the furnishing and installation of corrugated metal pipe
and appurtenances for drainage culverts in the pipe diameter size range of 12 to 54
inches.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Corrugated Metal Pipe
(a) Pipe shall be fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) iron or steel sheets
conforming to AASHTO M-218 except as modified herein. The diameter or
span by rise dimensions indicated on the drawings shall mean the nominal inside
dimensions of the conduit. The widths of the laps and depths or corrugations
shall be as specified in AASHTO M-36. The pipe shall have the following
minimum gauge (specified thickness) for the sizes shown in Table 9-8,
“Corrugated Base Metal Specifications,” of these Standards:

Table 9-8: Corrugated Base Metal Specifications

Diameter (Inches) Gauge Number Specified Galvanized Specified Galvanized
Thickness (Inches) Thickness (Inches)
21 and Smaller 16 0.064 0.0598
24 14 0.079 0.0747
30 - 54 12 0.109 0.1046

(2) Dimpled Coupling Bands: The dimpled coupling bands shall be the same thickness as
that used for the pipe and shall be at least 12 inches wide. The dimples shall conform
substantially to the shape and depth of pipe corrugations and shall be in circumferential
rows. Each row shall contain dimples so spaced as to effectively engage all corrugations
of the pipe ends. All bands shall have at least two zinc coated bolts per connection,
conforming to ASTM A 307, grade A, electroplated in accordance with ASTM A 164,
Type RS, not less than ½ inch in diameter. The bands shall have end connection angles,
conforming to ASTM A 36, zinc-coated in accordance to ASTM A 153, not less than 2
inches by 2 inches by 3/16 inch by 11 inches, adequately fastened to the band.
(3) Fittings (Including Flared End Sections) and Specials: Fittings and specials shall be
of the same material, coating, and wall thickness, including the same structural qualities,
as the adjoining pipe. Steel flared end sections shall be furnished complete with field-
bolted toe plates.

9-47 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (4) Repair of Damaged Spelter Coatings: Units such as tees, angles or bends on which the
spelter coating has been burned by flame cutting and gas or arc welding, or otherwise
damaged in fabrication or shipping, shall be wire-brushed and painted with two coats of
Haltz-Rust HR-54-53 or equal conforming to Federal Specification and Standards, TT-P-
641, or as otherwise approved by the Director. Culverts, pipes, fittings, specials, etc., on
which the spelter coating has been bruised or broken either in the shop or in shipping, or
that shows defective workmanship, will be rejected.

(C) Execution
Installation of corrugated steel pipe is considered to be a flexible conduit and, therefore, special
care must be taken during the bedding and backfilling operations. Installation and backfilling
operations shall be in accordance with the recommended practices set forth in the “Handbook of
Steel Drainage and Highway Construction Projects,” published by the American Iron and Steel
Institute.
(1) Bedding
(a) All pipe shall be bedded with an approved granular bedding material. The pipe
shall be bedded true to line and grade with uniform and continuous support from
a firm base. Blocking shall not be used to bring the pipe to grade.
(b) The bedding material shall be placed evenly on both sides of the pipe to a point
12 inches above the top of the pipe. Special care shall be taken to insure that all
voids are filled beneath the pipe haunch and that the bedding material is properly
placed and compacted to provide lateral restraint. The trench sidewall shall be
adequately braced, shored or sheeted as necessary to stabilize the trench walls.
The trench shall not be any wider than necessary for proper installation, and pipe
jointing. The bedding material shall be placed under haunches and around the
pipe alternately in 6-inch layers on both sides of the pipe to permit thorough
consolidation of the bedding material. This material is placed alternately to keep
it at the same elevation on both sides of the pipe at all times.
(2) Backfilling: After the pipe has been properly installed and bedded, the remaining trench
excavation shall be restored as set forth in Section 8-5-12, “Standards for Repairs and
Restoration of Pavement or Sidewalks,” B.R.C. 1981. Pipe installed outside of public
rights-of-way where no pavement is impacted may be backfilled in the following manner.
The backfill shall be placed in 8 inch loose lifts and compacted to 90 percent Standard
Proctor density (AASHTO T-180) with mechanical hand tampers, for the first 2 feet. At
least 4 feet of cover over the top of pipe shall be provided before the use of wheel-
mounted mechanical tampers (free drop hammer), hydraulic tampers, (Hydraulic ram
hammers) or other heavy tamping equipment will be permitted. Puddling or jetting will
not be allowed.
(3) Removal of Trench Protection: Extreme care shall be taken in the removal of cribbing,
shoring, sheeting, etc., so as not to disturb previously constructed foundation, bedding
and initial backfill. If it was necessary to place or drive sheeting or other trench
protection below the top of the pipe, the sheeting, shoring, etc., shall be cut off at a point
1 foot above the pipe and the remaining material shall be left in place. Removal of this
portion could seriously jeopardize the side support necessary for “flexible conduits” and
create excessive lateral soils pressures and pipe deflections.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-48

 (4) Protection of Conduit During Construction: Maximum supporting strength in flexible
conduits does not develop until the fill consolidates. Therefore, excessive concentrated
loads or heavy equipment on top of or along side if the pipe shall be avoided.

9.19 Cured-in-Place Pipe (CIPP)

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the reconstruction of pipelines and conduits by the
installation of a resin-impregnated flexible tube that is inserted into the original non-
pressure conduit.
(2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Resin-Impregnated Tube
(a) The tube shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1216 and shall have a uniform
thickness that, when compressed at installation pressures, will equal the specified
nominal tube thickness, with a -5 percent manufacturing tolerance. The tube
shall be fabricated to a size that when installed will tightly fit the internal
circumference and length of the original pipe. Allowance should be made for
circumferential stretching during insertion. The minimum length shall be that
deemed necessary by the contractor to effectively span the distance between
respective access points unless otherwise specified. The contractor shall verify
the lengths and diameters in the field before fabricating the tube. Individual
insertion runs can be made over one or more manhole sections as determined in
the field by the contractor. The maximum allowed insertion run is 1,200 feet.
Intermediate manholes will be reopened as directed by the Director.
(b) The outside layer of the tube (before insertion) shall be translucent plastic coated
with a flexible material that clearly allows inspection of the resin impregnation
(wet-out) procedure. The translucent plastic coating on the tube will allow visual
proof that the resin has wet-out the entire tube and that there are no dry areas. A
vacuum shall be used to ensure the resin fills all dry areas. The plastic coating
shall not be subject to delamination after curing of the CIPP.
(c) The tube shall be homogenous across the entire wall thickness containing no
intermediate or encapsulated elastomeric layers. No materials will be allowed in
the tube that is subject to delamination of the cured CIPP.
(2) Resin: The resin system shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1216.
(3) Structural Requirements
(a) The CIPP wall thickness will be measured in accordance with the applicable
sections of ASTM Test Method D2122. Sufficient readings, at least eight, will
be made to ensure that the minimum thickness has been determined. A
cylindrical anvil tubing micrometer accurate to +0.02mm (+0.001 in) will be
used. The minimum wall thickness at any cross section shall meet or exceed
those shown on the proposal forms and the approved plans, with the allowable

9-49 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 minus five (-5) percent tolerance. The wall thickness tests will be performed by
a Certified Independent Laboratory, approved by the Director. All costs, for
testing, shall be borne by the contractor.
(b) The layers of the CIPP shall be uniformly bonded. It shall not be possible to
separate any two layers with a probe or point of a knife blade so that the layers
separate cleanly of the probe or knife blade moves freely between the layers, nor
shall separation of any layers occur during testing performed under the
requirements of this specification.
(c) The cured pipe material (CIPP) shall conform to the minimum structural
standards, as follows:
(i) Flexural Stress (ASTM D-790) 4,500 psi
(ii) Modulus of Elasticity (ASTM D-790) 250,000 psi
(d) The liner shall be designed assuming a fully deteriorated host pipe.

(C) Execution
(1) Cleaning
(a) The contractor shall be required to remove all internal debris from the line by use
of water jet equipment prior to inserting the CIPP tube. The cleaning operation
shall remove any and all debris so that each joint of pipe can be thoroughly
inspected and successfully reconstructed.
(b) All sludge, dirt, sand, rocks, grease and other solid or semi-solid material
resulting from the cleaning operation shall be removed at the downstream
manhole of the section being cleaned. Passing material from one manhole to
another will not be permitted.
(c) All such debris resulting from the cleaning operations shall be removed from the
site and disposed of in the proper manner. The contractor shall bear all costs
associated with testing of debris and proper dumping. Dumping of the debris
shall be in accordance with all local, state, and federal regulations.
(d) All debris shall be removed from the downstream manhole and the site no less
often than at the end of each workday. The contractor shall leave no debris
unattended at the site. Under no circumstances will the contractor be allowed to
accumulate debris beyond the stated time. In the event the contractor has not
removed the debris generated by the cleaning operation, the contractor will not
be allowed to proceed with the work until the debris is properly removed.
(e) During all sewer cleaning operations, satisfactory precautions shall be taken to
protect the sewer lines from damage that might occur by improper use of
cleaning equipment. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that the cleaning
operation will not cause any damage or flooding to public or private property
being served by the section of sewer line being cleaned. The contractor shall
bear all costs associated with any flooding or damage to basements or structures.
(2) Bypassing Flows: The contractor shall provide for flows around the section(s) of pipe
designated for rehabilitation. The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an
existing upstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump and bypass lines shall be of
adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. Bypassing includes any main lines and

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-50

 service lines, street gutters or open excavations. Any spills that occur must be
immediately cleaned and the affected area disinfected.
(3) Inspection of Pipelines: Inspections of pipelines shall be performed by trained personnel
experienced in locating breaks, obstacles and service connections by closed circuit
television. The inspection of pipelines is also to determine active service connections and
the addresses that they serve. The interior of the pipe shall be carefully inspected to
determine the location of any conditions that may prevent proper installation of the CIPP
into the pipeline and it shall be noted so these conditions can be corrected. The
contractor shall perform and supply the City with a PACP TV inspection report and
digital video of the sewer prior to and after installation of the CIPP lining.
(4) Line Obstructions: It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to clear the line of
obstructions such as solids and roots that will prevent the insertion of the CIPP. If pre-
installation inspection reveals an obstruction such as a protruding service connection,
dropped joint, or a collapse that will prevent the inversion process, and it cannot be
removed by conventional cleaning equipment, then the contractor shall repair the
excavation to uncover and remove or repair the obstruction. Such excavation shall be
approved in writing by the Director prior to the commencement of the work.
(5) CIPP Installation
(a) CIPP installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F1216, Section 7, with the
additional following requirements. The resin shall be cured by circulating hot
water within the tube. After curing, the finished pipe (CIPP) shall be continuous
and tight fitting.
(b) The contractor, and the Director, shall designate a location where the tube will be
impregnated with resin prior to installation, in order that an inspection can be
made to determine proper materials and procedures. A resin and catalyst system
compatible with the requirements of this method shall be used.
(c) The heat source shall be fitted with suitable monitors to gauge the temperature of
the incoming and outgoing heat supply. Another such gauge shall be placed at
the remote manhole to determine the temperature at that location during the cure.
If air pressure and steam are used with styrene based resins, the compressed
atmosphere shall be monitored with a safety gas detector to ensure that it does
not reach the explosive limit.
(d) The finished CIPP shall be continuous over the entire length of an insertion run
between two manholes and be free, as commercially practicable, from visual
defects such as foreign inclusions, dry spots, pinholes, and delamination. It shall
also meet the leakage/pressure test requirements specified below (water
tightness).
(e) Before the insertion process begins, the minimum pressure required to hold the
tube tight against the existing conduit and the maximum allowable pressure so as
not to damage the tube shall be provided by the tube manufacturer, and it will be
the contractor’s responsibility to obtain and submit this information to the
Director. Once the insertion has started, the pressure shall be maintained
between the minimum and maximum pressures until the operation has been
completed. If air pressure is used for inversion, the equipment shall be fitted
with a pressure gauge accurate to 0.01 psi. Should the pressure deviate from
within the range of minimum and maximum pressures, the installed tube will be
rejected and the contractor will remove and dispose of the tube, at their expense.

9-51 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (f) Before the curing process begins, the pressure required to hold the flexible tube
tight against the host pipe shall be provided by the tube manufacturer and
submitted to the Director prior to any inversion process. Once the cure has
started and dimpling for laterals is completed, the required pressure shall be
maintained until the cure is complete. Should the pressure deviate more than 1
psi (2.3 feet of water) from the required pressure during the critical curing period,
the tube will be rejected and the contractor will be responsible for its removal and
disposal and replacement with new CIPP at, at their expense. A complete log of
the pressures shall be maintained on site and shall be offered to the Director after
each inversion.
(6) Sealing at Manholes: A hydrophilic end seal shall be installed at the upstream and
downstream manholes prior to installation of the CIPP liner. The end seals shall be LMK
Insignia End Seals or equivalent.
(7) Service Connections
(a) After the curing of the CIPP is completed, the contractor shall restore the existing
active service connections and branch connections. The connections shall be
reopened without excavation, and in the case of non-man entry pipes, from the
interior of the pipeline utilizing a remotely controlled cutting device, monitored
by a closed circuit television camera, that re-establishes them to not less than 95
percent capacity, while conforming to the shape of the existing opening. All
reinstated openings shall be smoothed by brushing with a wire brush.
(b) The contractor shall verify the possession of at least two complete cutting devices
in good working order before each insertion.
(c) If excavations for the purpose of re-opening connections are required, the
contractor will be responsible for all costs and liability associated with such
excavation and restoration work.
(d) No service connection shall remain out of service for more than 24 hours at a
time unless the contractor has provided temporary facilities or other appropriate
accommodations for the affected service.
(8) Testing: CIPP samples shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM F1216,
Section 8.1, using both methods 8.1.1 and 8.1.2 if so required by the Director. The test
will be performed by a Certified Independent Laboratory, approved by the City. Tests
results shall be submitted to the Director. Costs of the tests are considered to be
incidental to the project.
(9) Visual Inspection: Visual inspection of the CIPP shall be in accordance with ASTM
F1216, Section 8.4. The contractor shall perform and supply the City with a PACP TV
inspection report and digital video of the sewer prior to and after installation of the CIPP
lining.

9.20 Pipe Bursting Non-Pressure Pipe

(A) General
(1) Scope: This section describes the reconstruction of pipelines and conduits by which a
bursting unit splits the existing pipe while simultaneously installing a new polyethylene
pipe of the same size or larger where the old pipe existed.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-52

 (2) Quality Assurance: Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance and installation
recommendations shall be provided to the City inspector prior to construction.
Installation recommendations shall be followed during construction.

(B) Materials
(1) Polyethylene Plastic Pipe: The pipe shall be high density polyethylene pipe and meet
the applicable requirements of ASTM F714 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).
Sizes of the insertions to be used shall be such to renew the pipe to its original or greater
flow capacity. The pipe shall be homogenous throughout and shall be free of visible
cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults.
(2) Dimension Ratios: The polyethylene pipe shall meet or exceed the thickness
requirement of SDR 17.

(C) Execution
(1) Bypassing Flows: The contractor shall provide for flow around the section(s) of pipe
designated for reconstruction. The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an
existing upstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump and bypass lines shall be of
adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. Bypassing includes any main lines and
service lines, street gutters or open excavations. Any spills that occur must be
immediately cleaned and the affected area disinfected.
(2) Inspection: Inspection of work shall be in accordance with Section 9.17, “Testing of
Gravity Sewer Pipelines and Manholes,” of these Standards.
(3) Equipment: The pipe bursting tool shall be designed and manufactured to force its way
through existing pipe material by fragmenting the pipe and compressing the old pipe
sections into the surrounding soil as it progresses. The bursting unit shall be pneumatic
and shall generate sufficient force to burst and compact the existing pipeline. The
bursting tool shall be selected in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to
meet the project specific requirements for the type and size of pipe being burst and
upsized if specified. The pipe bursting tool shall be pulled through the sewer by a winch
located at the receiver pit. The bursting unit shall pull the polyethylene pipe with it as it
moves forward.

9.21 Telecommunication or Cable System Standards

The installation and construction of telecommunication or cable systems shall comply with the
requirements as set forth in Chapter 11-6, “Boulder Cable Code,” B.R.C. 1981, and these
Standards.

(A) General
(1) Applicable National Standards: All telecommunications and cable system construction
shall conform to the requirements of the following standards:
(a) American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI), Electronic Industries
Association (EIA), and Telecommunications Institute of America (TIA)
Standards: EIA/TIA Standards Proposal No. 2840-A, Proposed Revision of
EIA/TIA-568 (if approved to be published as EIA/TIA-568-A), EIA/TIA-569
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces,

9-53 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 and TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements
for Telecommunications.
(b) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) C2-1993, published by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), Inc.
(c) National Electrical Code (NEC), published by the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA).
(d) Federal Communications Commission.
(e) Colorado Public Utilities Commission.
(f) Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
(2) Construction Plans Required: Detailed construction plans, as outlined in Chapter 1,
“General Requirements,” of these Standards, showing the specific underground and/or
aerial cable routing and associated conduit, manhole and/or pole locations and
specifications, shall be submitted to the Director’s office for review and approval.
(3) Protection of Systems: All systems shall be protected from washouts, floods, unstable
soil, landslides, or other hazards that may cause the facility to move or fail.

(B) Underground Facilities

(1) Cable Protection
(a) All buried telecommunications cable, shall be installed in conduit, PVC Schedule
40 or equivalent. Cable placement by means of direct plow-in will not be allowed
within the City’s rights-of-way.
(b) Major conduit duct banks (more than 4 conduits) and those comprising a portion
of the City’s telecommunications conduit backbone infrastructure shall be
encased in concrete with a minimum strength of 2000 psi. When encased in
concrete, conduit may be PVC Type EB, DB or equivalent. The concrete
encasement shall have a minimum thickness of 4 inches around the entire conduit
or duct bank.
(c) Multiple duct systems shall have spacers installed at intervals to allow the
concrete mix encasement throughout the entire duct structure.
(d) Conduit placed by directional bore method will be allowed subject to approval by
the Director.
(2) Depth of Cover: The minimum depth of cover over the conduit shall be 30 inches.
(3) Trench Specifications - Roadway and Other Paved Surfaces
(a) All trenches shall be open cut unless otherwise permitted by the City.
(b) Trenches shall have a minimum width of 10 inches.
(c) Trench backfill and surface restoration shall comply with the standards as set
forth in Section 8-5-12, “Standards for Repairs and Restoration of Pavement and
Sidewalks,” B.R.C. 1981.
(4) Trench Specifications - Landscaped Areas
(a) All trenches shall be open cut unless otherwise permitted by the City.
(b) Trenches shall have a minimum width of 10 inches.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-54

 (c) Trenches shall be backfilled and compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum
density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698.
(d) The City shall be contacted if there is any question whether or not the proposed
work will cause any damage to trees shrubs or other landscaping or if
construction is within 5 feet of a tree.
(5) Alternative Installation Methods: Boring methods may be allowed by the Director if
the Director finds that these methods are advantageous to the City or if open trench
methods are impractical.
(6) Joint Use Trench Requirements
(a) Joint trenching operations require advanced planning and coordination with the
utilities involved.
(b) Vertical and horizontal separations between telecommunications or cable systems
and other facilities shall be maintained as required by NESC Section 32,
Underground Conduit Systems. Conduit systems for telecommunications and
cable systems shall be separated from conduit systems for power supply systems
by:
(i) 3 inches of concrete,
(ii) 4 inches of masonry, or
(iii) 12 inches of well-tamped earth.
(7) Warning Tape: A cable warning tape shall be placed 12 to 18 inches above the conduit
in the trench.
(8) Manholes
(a) All cavities required for cable pulling purposes shall be constructed as load
bearing manholes or handholes. Handholes shall not be placed in any traveled
lane, road shoulders, sidewalk, multi-use path, or bike lane.
(b) Manholes or handholes shall be placed at maximum 1,200 feet intervals. In no
case shall conduit bend radius exceed 180 degrees between manholes. Manholes
shall be installed at each street intersection at a minimum. Manholes shall be
rectangular: 6 feet wide by 7 feet long by 4 feet deep; or circular 4 feet diameter
with a nominal depth of 4 feet minimum.
(c) Manholes or handholes shall be installed flush or ¼” below the surrounding
grade.

(C) Aboveground Facilities

(1) Facility Protection: All aboveground facilities shall be protected from accidental
damage by vehicular traffic impacts or similar causes either by being located a safe
distance away from traffic or by structural barricades.
(2) Obstruction to Traffic Prohibited: All aboveground facilities shall be located so as not
to cause unnecessary obstruction to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
(3) Clearances: All aboveground telecommunications facility construction shall conform
with the minimum clearances as specified in Section 23 of the NESC.

9-55 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (a) Cables shall maintain the following minimum clearances between any adjacent or
crossing power cables under all conditions of cable loading:
(i) Horizontal clearances shall be at least 5 feet from power cables at a
potential of up to 129 kV, and at least 5 feet plus 0.4 inches per kV over
129 kV from power cables exceeding a potential of 129 kV.
(ii) Vertical clearances shall be at least 4 feet from power cables at a
potential of up to 750 V, at least 6 feet from power cables at a potential
of 750 V to 22 kV, at least 6 feet plus 0.4 inches per kV over 22 kV from
power cables at a potential between 22 kV and 470 kV. Vertical
clearances shall comply with NESC Rule 233C3 for minimum clearance
from cables at a potential greater than 470 kV.
(b) Cables, poles, and stubs shall maintain the following minimum clearances from
power conductors, power poles and other objects:
(i) Poles shall have a minimum clearance of 4 feet from fire hydrants, signal
pedestals, and call boxes.
(ii) Cables shall have a minimum horizontal clearance from power poles in
no wind conditions.
(iii) Poles and stubs shall have a minimum horizontal clearance of 5 feet in
no wind condition from power wires up to 50 kV.
(c) Poles shall have a minimum separation of at least 2 feet from the street side of
the curb to the nearest part of the pole and shall be located a sufficient distance
from the street side of the curb to avoid contact with ordinary vehicles using the
road.
(d) Poles shall have at least 12 feet horizontal clearance from the nearest rail to the
nearest part of the pole.
(e) Cables shall have at least 2 feet vertical clearance from Police and Fire Alarm
facilities.
(f) Cables shall have at least 3 feet clearance in all directions from signs, chimneys,
tanks, and other installations.
(g) Cables shall maintain the following minimum vertical clearances as measured
from the lowest point of the cable when crossing the following objects:
(i) Roads, Streets, and all areas subject to truck traffic: 18 feet.
(ii) Alleys, Driveways, and Parking Lots: 18 feet.
(iii) Railroad tracks: 28 feet.
(iv) Roofs, not accessible: 4 feet.
(v) Spaces and Ways, accessible to pedestrians only: 12 feet.
(vi) Roofs, accessible to vehicular traffic, but not trucks: 12 feet.
(h) Cables shall maintain a minimum vertical clearances of 16 feet as measured from
the lowest point of the cable when running alongside but not overhanging roads,
streets, or alleys.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-56

 (i) A minimum vertical clearance of 40 inches shall be maintained between
telecommunications cables and power cables at the attachment points on joint use
poles.

9.22 Electric Power Facility Standards

The following standards shall apply to all electric power related facilities constructed within the
City’s public rights-of-way or easements.

(A) General
(1) Undergrounding Required: All electric power facilities constructed in the City’s public
rights-of-way or easements shall be underground unless otherwise permitted by franchise
or the Director.
(2) National Standards: All electric power facility construction shall conform to the
requirements of the following standards:
(a) 1993 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) C2-1993, published by the
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), Inc.
(b) National Electrical Code (NEC), published by the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA).
(c) Colorado Public Utilities Commission.
(d) Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
(3) Construction Plans Required: Detailed construction plans, as outlined in Chapter 1,
“General Requirements,” of these Standards, showing the specific underground and/or
aerial cable routing and associated conduit, manhole and/or pole locations and
specifications, shall be submitted to the Director for review and approval.
(4) Protection of Facilities: All facilities must be protected from washouts, floods, unstable
soil, landslides, or other hazards that may cause the facility to move or fail.

(B) Underground Facilities

(1) Underground Cable Protection
(a) All primary circuits (greater than 600 volts) located under concrete road surfaces,
where circuit density is high, and in all arterial roads shall be installed in conduit,
4 inch minimum diameter, PVC Type EB, DB or equivalent. All conduit joints
shall be solvent welded. The conduit shall be encased in concrete with a
minimum strength of 2000 psi and have a minimum thickness of 4 inches around
the entire conduit or duct bank.
(b) All secondary circuits (600 volts or less) supplying services larger than 800
amperes shall be installed in conduit, 2-inch minimum diameter, PVC Type EB,
DB or equivalent. All conduit joints shall be solvent welded. The conduit shall
be encased in concrete with a minimum strength of 2000 psi and have a
minimum thickness of 4 inches around the entire conduit or duct bank.
(c) Multiple duct bank systems shall have spacers installed at intervals to allow the
concrete mix encasement throughout the entire duct structure.
(2) Depth of Cover

9-57 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (a) The minimum depth of cover over primary circuits (greater than 600 volts) shall
be 42 inches.
(b) The minimum depth of cover over secondary circuits shall be 30 inches (600
volts or less).
(c) The minimum depth of cover over circuits for street lighting and signals shall be
18 inches.
(3) Trench Specifications - Roadways and Other Paved Surfaces
(a) All trenches shall be open cut unless otherwise permitted by the Director.
(b) Trenches shall have a minimum width of 10 inches.
(c) Trench backfill and surface restoration shall comply with the standards as set
forth in Section 8-5-12, “Standards for Repairs and Restoration of Pavement and
Sidewalks,” B.R.C. 1981.
(4) Trench Specifications - Landscaped Areas
(a) All trenches shall be open cut unless otherwise permitted by the Director.
(b) Trenches shall have a minimum width of 10 inches.
(c) Trenches shall be backfilled and compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum
density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698.
(d) The City shall be contacted if there is any question whether or not the proposed
work will cause any damage to trees, shrubs or other landscaping or if
construction is within 5 feet of a tree.
(5) Alternative Installation Methods: Boring methods may be allowed by the Director if
the Director finds that these methods are advantageous to the City or if open trench
methods are impractical.
(6) Joint Use Trench Requirements
(a) Joint trenching operations require advanced planning and coordination with the
utilities involved.
(b) Vertical and horizontal separations between electric power facilities and other
facilities shall be maintained as required by the NESC section 32 Underground
Conduit Systems.
(7) Warning Tape: A cable warning tape shall be placed 12 to 18 inches above the conduit
or cable in the trench.
(8) Manholes: All cavities required for cable pulling purposes shall be constructed as load
bearing manholes or handholes. Handholes shall not be placed in any traveled lane
including road shoulders, sidewalks, multi-use paths, or bike lanes.

(C) Aboveground Facilities

(1) General
(a) All aboveground facilities shall be protected from accidental damage by
vehicular traffic impacts or similar causes either by being located a safe distance
away from traffic or by structural barricades.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-58

 (b) All aboveground facilities shall be located so as not to cause unnecessary
obstruction to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
(2) Clearances: The minimum overhead transverse clearance shall conform to National
Electrical Safety Code Standards, but shall not be less than 18 feet measured from the
highest point of the road prism to the bottom of the cable.

9.23 Gas Distribution Facility Standards

The following standards shall apply to all gas distribution related facilities constructed within the
City’s public rights-of-way or easements.

(A) General
(1) Undergrounding Required: All gas distribution facilities constructed in the City’s
public rights-of-way or easements shall be underground unless otherwise permitted by
franchise or the Director.
(2) National Standards: All gas distribution facility construction shall conform to the
requirements of the following standards:
(a) Minimum Federal Safety Standards for Natural Gas Pipelines in the Code of
Federal regulations 49 Part 192.
(b) Colorado Public Utilities Commission.
(c) Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
(3) Construction Plans Required: Detailed construction plans, as outlined in Chapter 1,
“General Requirements,” of these Standards, showing the specific gas distribution line
and appurtenances locations and specifications, shall be submitted to the Director for
review and approval.
(4) Protection of Facilities: All facilities must be protected from washouts, floods, unstable
soil, landslides, or other hazards that may cause the facility to move or fail.

(B) Underground Facilities

(1) Materials
(a) Steel or plastic material shall be used for the gas distribution pipe.
(b) All plastic pipe must be installed below ground level.
(2) Depth of Cover
(a) Depth of cover shall be measured from the final grade to the top of the pipe.
(b) Minimum depth of cover for shall be 36 inches for transmission lines and 30
inches for distribution lines.
(c) Minimum depth of cover for service lines shall be 24 inches.
(d) Transmission and distribution lines installed under streams and ditches must have
minimum cover of 48 inches.
(3) Trench Specifications - Roadways and Other Paved Surfaces
(a) All trenches shall be open cut unless otherwise permitted by the Director.

9-59 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 (b) Trenches shall have a minimum width of 10 inches.
(c) Trench backfill and surface restoration shall comply with the standards as set
forth in Section 8-5-12, “Standards for Repairs and Restoration of Pavement and
Sidewalks,” B.R.C. 1981.
(4) Trench Specifications - Landscaped Areas
(a) All trenches shall be open cut unless otherwise permitted by the Director.
(b) Trenches shall be have a minimum width of 10 inches.
(c) Trenches shall be backfilled and compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum
density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698.
(d) The City shall be contacted if there is any question whether or not the proposed
work will cause any damage to trees, shrubs or other landscaping or if
construction is within 5 feet of a tree.
(5) Alternative Installation Methods: Boring methods may be allowed by the Director if
the Director finds that these methods are advantageous to the City or if open trench
methods are impractical.
(6) Joint Use Trench Requirements
(a) Joint trenching operations require advanced planning and coordination with the
utilities involved.
(b) Vertical and horizontal separations between gas distribution facilities and other
facilities shall be 6 inches minimum.
(7) Warning Tape: A cable warning tape shall be placed 12 to 18 inches above the conduit
in the trench.
(8) Components
(a) Transmission line valves shall be installed in boxes or be otherwise readily
accessible.
(b) Transmission line pressure relief and pressure limiting devices shall be installed
in underground vaults, unless aboveground installation is permitted by the
Director.
(c) All service lines shall be equipped with shutoff valves.
(d) An electrically conductive tracer wire shall be installed with all plastic and non-
conductive pipes.
(9) Casing Pipe: Gas pipe shall be installed in casings under all highways. Casing pipe shall
be steel pipe with a wall thickness of 1/4 inch minimum extending at least 5 feet beyond
the limits of any highway improvements.
(10) Corrosion Protection
(a) All pipes susceptible to corrosion shall be cathodically protected and have a
protective coating.
(b) All corrosion susceptible pipes must also be electrically isolated from other
metallic structures.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 9-60

(C) Testing Requirements
All newly constructed pipes shall be tested prior to placing the line in service. No pipe shall be
placed in service, or returned to service, with leaks or without adequate corrosion protection.
(1) Pressure Testing: All pipes shall be pressure tested for leakage as described in CFR 49
part 192. In order to establish the maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP), pipes
shall be tested at 1-1/2 times the MAOP.
(2) Corrosion Control Testing: Corrosion control devices shall be tested whenever the pipe
is exposed for maintenance or repair. Additionally, all corrosion control devices must be
tested at least once each calendar year.
(3) Records Retention: Records of the testing shall be maintained for the life of the pipe.

(D) Aboveground Facilities

(1) Facility Protection: All aboveground facilities shall be protected from accidental
damage by vehicular traffic impacts or similar causes either by being located a safe
distance away from traffic or by structural barricades.
(2) Traffic Obstruction Prohibited: All aboveground facilities shall be located so as not to
cause unnecessary obstruction to pedestrian and vehicular traffic.

9-61 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 10
STREETSCAPING STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page
10.01 GENERAL..............................................................................................................................................................................1
(A) INTENT .................................................................................................................................................................................1
(B) SCOPE...................................................................................................................................................................................1
(C) REFERENCE STANDARDS ....................................................................................................................................................1
(D) CITY A PPROVAL REQUIRED................................................................................................................................................1
(E) W ATER CONSERVATION .....................................................................................................................................................1
(F) PUBLIC LANDS OTHER THAN PUBLIC RIGHTS-OF -W AY ..................................................................................................1
10.02 SITE PREPARATION .........................................................................................................................................................1
(A) DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................................................1
(B) M ATERIALS .........................................................................................................................................................................1
(C) CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................................2
10.03 PLANTING............................................................................................................................................................................5
(A) DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................................................5
(B) M ATERIALS .........................................................................................................................................................................5
(C) CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................................7
10.04 SEEDING/SODDING........................................................................................................................................................11
(A) DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................................................................11
(B) M ATERIALS .......................................................................................................................................................................11
(C) CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................................16
10.05 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM...................................................................................................................19
(A) DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................................................................19
(B) M ATERIALS .......................................................................................................................................................................19
(C) CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................................24

LIST OF TABLES

Number Page

Table 10-1: Topsoil Mechanical Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 10-2

Table 10-2: Minimum Root Ball Sizes ....................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Table 10-3: Wildflowers............................................................................................................................................................ 10-14
Table 10-4: Grasses ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-15
Table 10-5: Soil Amendment Mix Mechanical Analysis ...................................................................................................... 10-15

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-i

10.01 General

(A) Intent
The Streetscaping Standards are intended to compliment the design standards specified in Chapter 3,
“Streetscape Design and Tree Protection,” of these Standards, and provide minimum standards for
the construction and planting of streetscapes in public rights-of-way.

(B) Scope
These Standards apply to streetscapes located, standing, or growing within or upon any City of
Boulder public right-of-way. The streetscape requirements of this chapter are in addition to those set
forth in Chapter 3, “Streetscape Design and Tree Protection,” and applicable streetscape drawings in
Chapter 11, “Technical Drawings,” of these Standards and the B.R.C. 1981

(C) Reference Standards

Where not specified in these Standards or the B.R.C. 1981, in order to protect the public health,
safety, and welfare, the Director of Public Works in consultation with the Director of Parks and
Recreation will specify the standards to be applied to the design and construction of streetscapes and
the planting of trees, and may refer to one or more of the references listed in the References Section
of these Standards.

(D) City Approval Required

All work associated with the planting, maintenance, and removal of trees and landscaping materials
located, standing, or growing within or upon any City of Boulder public right-of-way is subject to
City of Boulder approval or permit issuance as set forth in Chapter 8-5, “Work in the Public
Right-of-Way and Public Easements,” and Chapter 6-6, “Protection of Tree and Plants,” B.R.C.
1981.

(E) Water Conservation

All landscaping shall be designed for maximum water efficiency, as specified in Section 9-3.3-3,
“Landscape Design Standards,” B.R.C. 1981.

(F) Public Lands Other Than Public Rights-of-Way

Landscaping construction activities on public lands other than public rights-of-way, such as parks,
open space and greenway corridors, are exempt from the construction and planting requirements of
these Standards. However, these Standards may be used as a basis for construction and planting
activities on all public lands.

10.02 Site Preparation

(A) Description
Site preparation includes, without limitation, layout, tree protection, demolition, clearing, excavation,
fill and backfill, topsoiling, and finish-grading.

(B) Materials

(1) Imported Fill: Imported fill for landscaping shall be clean, fertile, sandy loam soil that is

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-1

 free from turf, lime, ashes, debris, noxious weeds, roots, stones over 4 inches in diameter,
harmful chemicals, or other materials that are detrimental to plant growth. Fill shall have a
pH of 6.0 to 8.0, salt of less than 2 mmhos/cm, sodium absorption ratio of less than eight,
and at least an 85 percent germination rate for narrow and broadleaf plants. Fill shall not be
hauled in a frozen, wet, or muddy condition.

(2) Topsoil

(a) Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, sandy loam topsoil. Topsoil shall be of any admixture
of subsoil or slag and shall be free of stones over 1 ½ inches in diameter, lumps,
refuse, plants or their roots, sticks, noxious weeds, salts, soil sterilants or other
material that is detrimental to plant growth. If topsoil is delivered, it shall be
obtained from a well-drained site that is free of flooding. Topsoil shall not be
delivered or used while in a frozen or muddy condition.

(b) Topsoil shall have an acidity range of pH 6.0 to 7.5 and contain not less than 5
percent organic matter as determined by loss on ignition of moisture-free samples
dried at 100 degrees Centigrade. Topsoil shall have salt of less than 2 mmhos/cm
and a sodium absorption ratio of less than eight.

(c) Topsoil shall meet the mechanical analysis outlined in Table 10-1, “Topsoil
Mechanical Analysis,” of these Standards:

Table 10-1: Topsoil Mechanical Analysis

Passing percent Retained percent
1-inch screen 100% 0 - 0%
½-inch screen 97 - 100% 0 - 3%
No. 100 mesh sieve 60 - 40% 40 - 60%

(d) Topsoil shall have at least an 85 percent germination rate for narrow and broadleaf
plants.

(C) Construction Requirements

(1) Layout

(a) The contractor is responsible for:

(i) Establishing and recording all necessary boundary points, lines, elevations,
grades, access points, and benchmarks onsite for proper control, landscape
protection, coordination with subcontractors, and execution of the work.

(ii) Verifying all furnished survey and topographic data, all points, lines, and
elevations.

(iii) Notifying the Director of any discrepancies between information on

approved construction plans and actual site or field conditions or
measurements and receive approval for required modification prior to

10-2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 continuing work.

(iv) Staking all cuts and fills on the sites as shown on the grading plan.

(b) Shoulders and toes of slopes shall be smoothly blended to the flat areas.

(c) No cut or fill is allowed within the dripline of existing trees without the prior
approval of the City.

(2) Clearing of Project Site: The contractor is responsible for:

(a) Removing from the site all trees and shrubs, brush and weed growth, stumps, and
root systems designated on the approved construction plans for removal.

(i) All trees to be removed shall be marked with an “X” in blue permanent
marking and approved by the City prior to removal.

(ii) All other plant material not designated for removal shall be protected and
maintained.

(iii) Stripped-off brush and weed growth shall be hauled offsite. No burning or
nesting of materials shall be permitted onsite.

(b) Maintaining adequate fire protection while clearing operations are underway.

(c) Replacing any existing sod damaged by construction operations. Replacement sod
shall meet the standards of Section 10.04, “Seeding/Sodding,” of these Standards.

(d) If specifically required on the approved construction plans, scalping the top of soil,
including grasses and roots, to a depth specified in the plans and stockpile onsite or
remove as indicated.

(3) Excavation: The contractor is responsible for:

(a) Stripping, stockpiling, and replacing existing topsoil in areas of fill on the finished
grade to at least 4 inches deep.

(b) Excavating so as to provide adequate drainage of the site at all times.

(c) Using hand methods of excavation within the dripline of trees.

(4) Fill and Backfill Operations: The contractor is responsible for the following:

(a) Obtaining the Director’s approval of the subgrade before commencing soil
preparation, topsoiling, finish grading or planting, and obtaining the Director’s
approval of the finish grade before commencing planting, mulching or other
subsequent operations. The following grading tolerances shall be applied:

(i) Tolerances shall not exceed 0.1 feet above or below desired subgrade
elevations in planted areas, and no tolerance will be allowed on subgrades

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-3

 prepared for paving or site improvements, or subgrades immediately
adjacent to curbs or island pavements.

(ii) Settling of finish grade shall not exceed 0.1 feet.

(b) Completing clearing operations before beginning any filling or backfilling.

(c) If sufficient suitable fill or backfill material is not available on the project site,
furnishing additional materials according to standards for hauled-in fill or topsoil, as
required in these Standards.

(d) Placing fill and backfill in layers not to exceed 6 inches in compacted depth with the
following compaction standards:

(i) Each layer shall be compacted to the specified density. Landscaping fill and
backfill shall be compacted to no less than 80 percent and no more than 85
percent density in areas to be planted.

(ii) Compaction shall not occur when soil is wet.

(e) Ensuring that filling and backfilling shall provide adequate site drainage at all times.
Fill or backfill shall not be placed on wet ground.

(5) Finish Grading

(a) Work in this section shall consist of cutting, filling, shaping, and grading according
to the lines, grades, elevations and cross sections on the approved landscaping plans.

(b) The contractor is responsible for the following:

(i) Completing all finish grading onsite. The top of the subgrade shall be the
depth below the finished grade as required for pavements, sod, walks,
mulches and other site improvements.

(ii) Protecting the finish grade areas and regrading to correct any irregularities
caused by hauling materials or by other operations over the finished grade.

(iii) Repairing any erosion or other damage resulting from weathering action
before final acceptance.

(c) Excavated and filled sections and adjacent transition areas shall be smooth, properly
compacted and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of finish grading
shall be that ordinarily obtained from either blade, grader, or scraper operations.
Where finishing cannot be satisfactorily completed with power equipment, hand
methods shall be used.

(d) Unless otherwise indicated, the subgrade shall be evenly sloped to provide drainage
away from site improvements or the centerline of medians. Swales shall be cut as
shown on the plans, but shall not reduce the thickness of the topsoil specified.

10-4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 (e) Finish grading shall conform to the grade elevations shown on an approved
landscaping plan and shall be free from debris and other materials that would be
detrimental to the subgrade. Settling of any finish grade shall not be more than 0.1
feet, and if settling is greater, the contractor shall bring the grade to specified
elevations.

10.03 Planting

(A) Description
Planting includes, without limitation, the placement of live trees and shrubs, the placement of
materials to protect and enhance plant growth, and the methods applied in planting and maintaining
landscape plants.

(B) Materials

(1) Edger: Ryerson or approved equivalent steel edger, 1/8-inch by 4- inch steel with steel
stakes, painted with rust-inhibiting black paint. The edger shall have a rolled or folded edge
or be capped with plastic safety-edged material.

(2) Filter Fabric: 30.1-mil DeWitt Weed Barrier or approved equivalent.

(3) Pesticides: Comply with the specifications of Section 6-10, “Pesticide Use,” B.R.C. 1981.

(4) Tree Wrapping Material: New, 4-inch wide, bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or
crepe paper, brown in color, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping. Tree wrapping
shall be fixed with pliable or nonbinding tape. No wire shall be used.

(5) Compost: Well-weathered and weed-free cow or sheep manure or other composted
materials. No mountain peat shall be used.

(6) Stakes: Green 8-foot steel tee posts with blade.

(a) Trees shall be secured to stakes using minimum 2 inch wide nylon and cotton blend
webbing with heat sealed ends, a tensile strength of 1000 pounds and brass
grommets for attachment of wire between strap and stake.

(b) Grommets shall be 1 ¼ - inch in diameter with a ½-inch diameter e ye that is set at
least ½-inch from end of strap.

(c) Wire shall be 12-gauge galvanized steel covered with a PVC sleeve.

(d) Straps shall be of sufficient length in relation to tree caliper so that grommets do not
touch trunk.

(e) A protective cap shall be secured to the top of all stakes.

(7) Mulch:

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-5

 (a) Wood chip mulch shall be clean wood chips free of soil or man-made debris
shredded into coarse pieces ranging in size from 1 inches to 3 inches. All median
landscape plantings shall be mulched with 4 to 6 inches of wood chips. 2 to 4 inches
of “Squeegee” (1/4-inch minus washed sand) may be substituted for wood mulch
for street median applications only.

(b) Rock mulch shall not be used in planting beds, except as a temporary mulch until
full plant coverage is achieved, or as permanent mulch under shrubs. Rocks used in
the public right-of-way or adjacent to sidewalks must be 1 ½to 3 inches in diameter.
Gravel or cobblestone shall not be used as mulch.

(c) For medians and bikeways, landscape fabric shall not be used as a weed barrier.

(8) Plant Materials:

(a) All plants shall be “Colorado Grown,” “Colorado Fielded,” or “Northern Grown” as
described below, unless otherwise specified in these Standards, except for plants of
the genus Juniperus.

(i) Colorado Grown: plants grown in Colorado nursery fields for the major
portion of their lives.

(ii) Colorado Fielded: plants shipped in or collected that have grown in Colorado
nursery fields for at least two full growing seasons prior to delivery.

(iii) Northern Grown: plants grown in nurseries for at least two full growing
seasons located in hardiness Zones 1 through 5, as shown on a United
States Department of Agriculture map.

(b) All plants shall be of species identified under and allowed by these Standards and
shall conform to the following:

(i) Selected to meet the goal of maximum water efficiency and zoned or
grouped according to their water requirements.

(ii) Individually identified on legible, weatherproof labels securely attached to

the plants. Labels shall be durable and shall remain legible for at least 60
days from site delivery.

(iii) Labels shall include the correct genus, species, variety name and accepted
common name of the plant as well as the size or grade of stock.

(iv) Labels shall remain until after City inspection and then shall be removed by
the contractor.

(c) Tree selection and placement shall be in accordance with Section 3.03, “Tree
Selection and Placement,” of the these Standards.

(d) Trees shall conform to and have the following characteristics:

10-6 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 (i) A well-developed branch structure typical of the size and species with no
“V” crotches, codominate stems, or included bark. The height of branching
should bear a relationship typical of size and species so that the crown of
the tree will be in balance as the tree grows.

(ii) Healthy buds, stems, and bark that are without mechanical, insect, or
disease injury.

(iii) Healthy, vigorous, and free from visual defects, mechanical injuries, plant
diseases, and all forms of insect infestation until final acceptance.

(iv) A well-branched and vigorous root system typical of size and species and
free from bent or kinked roots, roots girdling the trunk, and other defects.

(v) Root balls shall have a sufficient diameter for the fiberous and feeding root
system necessary to provide for full recovery of the tree following planting.
Minimum root ball sizes shall meet the following specifications outlined in
Table 10-2,
(vi)

Table 10-2: Minimum Root Ball Sizes

Caliper Minimum Root Ball Diameter Caliper Minimum Root Ball Diameter
1 ”½ 20” 3” 32”
1 ¾” 22” 3 ”½ 38”
2” 24” 4” 42”
2 ”½ 28” 4 ”½ 48”

(e) All trees and shrubs shall be freshly dug at time of delivery, unless they are
container-grown. Plants other than bare root stock that have been heeled-in for
more than 1 month or that exhibit roots outside the original ball shall not be
accepted. Bare root stock placed in cold storage for more than 2 months or that
exhibits new top growth will not be accepted.

(f) Moss rock shall be sandstone boulders with 75 percent or more exposed surface
covered with lichens. Boulders shall have rounded natural edges and a character and
shape consistent with native landscape rock settings. No split, bruised face, slab-
type, layered, or slide rocks shall be used without prior approval and acceptance by
the .

(C) Construction Requirements

(1) Layout and Identification: The contractor shall use stakes, flags, or containerized plants
to locate all trees and shrubs according to an approved landscape plan.

(2) Schedule

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-7

 (a) Nothing shall be planted between October 15 and March 1 without prior written
approval of the City. Stock, other than container-grown stock, shall not be planted
between June 1 and September 1 without prior written approval of the City. Bare
root stock shall not be planted after April 30 or if plants have begun to leaf out.

(b) Nothing shall be planted during freezing or excessively windy, hot, or wet weather
or when the ground conditions cannot be properly worked for digging, mixing,
raking, or grading.

(c) Nothing shall be planted until the adjacent site improvements, pavements, irrigation
installation and finish grading is completed. The contractor shall test the irrigation
system in the presence of the Director. The irrigation system shall be in approved,
operating condition prior to any planting.

(3) Plant Protection and Delivery

(a) The contractor shall protect all installed plant material from injury, excessive drying
or winds, improper ventilation, over watering, freezing, high temperatures, or any
other condition damaging to the plant until final acceptance. Any plants showing
evidence of poor care or that are molded, mildewed, wilted, or dried-out shall be
rejected. Colored waxes or other materials that coat the aerial parts of plants, or the
removal of primary buds and/or shoots, including terminal buds and first order
leaders, of plants are not acceptable.

(b) Plant materials shall be planted on the day of delivery if possible. All plants not
planted on day of delivery shall be placed in a temporary nursery, kept moist, shaded
and protected from sun and wind. If balled and burlapped plants are not planted on
the day of delivery, they shall be heeled-in immediately in the temporary nursery,
kept moist and protected with damp soil, moss, or other acceptable material. All
plants shall be planted within 48 hours after delivery. Plants shall not be bound with
wire or rope that may damage the bark or break branches. Plants shall be lifted and
handled from bottom of ball or container, and shall not be dropped or lifted by the
trunk, stem or foliage. Plants with balls that are loose, cracked, broken, man-made
or completely dry or plants with trunks loose in the ball before or during planting
operations shall not be accepted and shall be removed from the site at contractor's
expense. The root collar is not to be deeper than 4 inches below the top of the soil
ball.

(c) The contractor shall deliver all packaged landscape materials to the site in original
unopened containers bearing name, trade name, manufacturer, trademark, and
conformance to State Law.

(d) Existing trees shall be protected per Section 3.05, “Tree Protection for Construction
Sites,” of these Standards.

(4) Excavation of Planting Pit

(a) All plant pits shall be centered on the plant location and excavated in a cylindrical
shape with vertical sides and flat bottom. The depth of the plant pit shall be
measured from the finished grade of the soil, not from the mulch. The base of all

10-8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 soil balls shall be placed on undisturbed soil.

(b) Trees: The diameter of all tree pits shall be at least two times the diameter of the ball
or spread of the roots. Tree pits shall be excavated so that the top of the ball will be
3 inches above finished grade when irrigated and 2 inches when not irrigated.
(c) Shrubs: The diameter of all shrub pits shall be at least two times diameter of the ball
or spread of roots. Shrub pits shall be excavated so that the top of the ball will be 1
inch above finish grade.

(d) Vines and Ground Covers: The diameter of all vine and ground cover pits shall be
two times the spread of roots. The planting pit shall be excavated so that the top of
the ball is 1 inch above finish grade.

(e) All holes and pits shall be protected as specified in the General Conditions at all times
when work is not being carried on at the site of excavation.

(5) Planting and Staking for Plant Installation

(a) Plants shall be set in the center of the pit on the undisturbed subgrade. Immediately
after setting in the pit, all materials shall be completely removed from the ball and
trunk, including but not limited to plastic, metal, wire, wood, cardboard, paper,
fiber, burlap, and twine. Container removal and plant handling shall minimize injury
to the plant, the root system, and the soil ball. If the root system of a container
grown plant has become container-bound, the roots shall be gently vertically cut on
two sides of the root ball prior to planting.

(b) All plants shall be placed and kept plumb and straight as the pit is filled with backfill.
Any plant that is not plumb prior to final acceptance shall be rejected.

(c) After placing plant in the pit, the hole around the plant root system shall be halfway
backfilled and any large air pockets removed by hand with the blunt, handle end of a
shovel or other such hand tool. If the ball is excessively dry, the contractor shall
then insert a deep watering device into the ball at a 45 degree angle every 12 inches
for 1 minute. The pit shall then be lightly filled with backfill mix and compacted
again with the shovel. No mechanical compaction shall be allowed. The pit shall
then be watered by thoroughly saturating the backfill with water to a minimum depth
of 3 feet. No watering shall be done prior to this time. Watering shall be repeated
once when all free water has disappeared; this second watering shall not be
completed if the subgrade around the pit is already moist. After watering, the
contractor shall add the necessary soil to establish the finish grade level before
adding specified mulch. The contractor shall remove all surplus soil and debris, and
stake and guy trees immediately after planting.

(d) Unless otherwise specified, all areas designated for mass planting such as for ground
covers or vines shall be amended with 6 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet of
manure compost. The contractor shall first prepare the subgrade by discing or
rototilling the subgrade to a depth of 8 inches. No ripping or chiseling shall be
allowed. After preparing the subgrade, the amendments shall be thoroughly
rototilled into the soil to a depth of 8 inches. The contractor shall remove any

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-9

 rocks, debris or foreign matter in excess of 1 inch in length or diameter encountered
to an 8-inch depth.

(e) For all trees, the contractor shall drive stakes 3 feet vertically into firm soil outside
the plant pit with blade on tree side. The contractor shall run a double strand of
wire through one grommet in the strap, wrap the strap around trunk at no more than
one-third the height of tree, and run wire through other grommet and back to stake.
Strap and wire attachment between the stake and tree shall be adjusted so that
straps are under just enough tension to avoid visible sag in lines. Rigid guying shall
not be accepted. Straps and wires shall be placed so as to be perpendicular to the
trunk. Stakes shall be parallel or slightly angled away from the trunk.

(f) The contractor shall place stakes according to tree height or caliper as follows:
deciduous trees 2 inches and under - one stake oriented northwest; deciduous trees
larger than 2 inches but less than 3 inches and evergreen trees less than 5 feet in
height - two stakes oriented northwest and southeast; deciduous trees 3 inches and
larger and evergreen trees 5 feet and larger - three stakes with one oriented
northwest and the other two oriented 120 degrees in either direction form
northwest. All deciduous trees shall have a sod-free base at least 3 feet in diameter.
All evergreen trees shall have a sod free base extending to the dripline. This sod
free area shall be extended where necessary to include all stakes. The contractor
shall return to the site and remove stakes between May 21 and June 7 the following
spring.
(g) The contractor shall remove all stakes and guy wires no more than one year from
the date of tree installation.

(6) Spraying, Wrapping, Pruning, Watering and Mulching for Plant Installation

(a) All deciduous trees shall be wrapped by the contractor from November 1 - 15 of the
year in which they are planted. Specified tree wrap shall be cut in a continuous strip
of sufficient length to wrap the tree. This wrapping shall begin at the ground line
with overlapping wraps of 1½inches terminating above the lowest main branch of
the tree. Final wrap shall be secured with tape in at least three places. The
contractor shall return to the site and remove wrap from April 1 - 15 of the
following spring. The contractor shall notify the City at least 1 week prior to wrap
removal.

(b) After inspection, and with the approval of the City, the contractor shall prune plants
as necessary to remove only dead, injured, diseased, or crossing branches. All cuts
shall be made just outside of the flare (branch collar) of the branch base. All
pruning shall be executed so as to preserve the natural form and character of the
plant. The contractor shall return to the site between May 21 and June 7 the
following spring and prune all dead, diseased or injured branches from plants as
specified above. The contractor shall notify the City at least 1 week prior to
commencing pruning.

(c) After watering on the day of planting, and throughout the maintenance period, the
contractor shall ensure that plants are not over watered.

(d) Wood chip mulch shall be placed in all planting beds, shrub areas and the sod-free

10-10 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 area of a 3-foot radius at the base of each tree. The mulch shall be spread carefully
and evenly to a depth of 4 inches. Shredded wood chip mulch shall be watered
thoroughly two times to aid in matting the mulch in place. The mulched areas shall
be graded so that the top of the mulch will be flush with the top of the curb,
sidewalk, edging or sod.

(e) Rock mulch shall be placed evenly to a minimum depth of 2 inches.

(f) The contractor shall be responsible for damage to any underground utility, irrigation
line, paving, adjacent structures or other improvements. In the event a pipe, line,
rock formation, or other obstruction interferes with a plant location, the contractor
shall notify the Director to receive approval for a new plant location.

(7) Moss Rock Installation Procedure

(a) The contractor shall notify the Director prior to moss rock placement work in order
to direct the contractor in a continuous operation of placing the rock with the
designated quantities. The contractor shall provide manpower and equipment to
place rock in 1 day and shall haul excess rock away from site.

(b) The contractor shall install rock boulders according to the layout and configuration
of the rock work as shown on the plans. Moss rock shall be set on a compacted
base (to 90 percent Proctor Density within 2 percent optimum moisture content).
Rockwork joints shall be made tight by butting natural faces together in place. Soil
grades shall be adjusted to stabilize rocks in position and regraded in place to
establish the placement of each rock so that they blend into adjacent terrain. Rocks
are to be placed by terracing or stepped layers to achieve a naturalized effect. Finish
grades shall be re-established as necessary.

10.04 Seeding/Sodding

(A) Description

(1) Seeding/sodding includes, without limitation, the planting and installation of grasses,
preparation of soils and grading, and the methods to be applied in planting and maintaining
grasses.

(2) Medians less than 12 feet wide shall be landscaped with materials other than irrigated
turfgrass.

(B) Materials

(1) Fertilizer: Specified fertilizer shall be supplied in the original supplier's containers with label
and order form showing composition and quantity. Fertilizer shall be intact, free-flowing,
dry and in quantity, as specified for sodded or seeded areas, as shown on the plans.
Fertilizer for sod and seeding soil preparation shall be a compound equivalent to 0-46-0
applied at the rate of 10 pounds per 1,000 square feet.

(2) Bluegrass: Bluegrass shall be Colorado-grown, 100 percent certified Kentucky Bluegrass,

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-11

 of three improved bluegrass varieties complying with applicable Colorado and Federal
regulations. Newport, Park, Delta and Common Kentucky Bluegrass are not acceptable
varieties for the sod mixture. The sod shall have a vigorous and healthy root system and top
growth and shall have been regularly fertilized, watered, mowed, sprayed and shall be free
from objectionable weeds and/or grasses. Sod strip shall have from 5/8 inch minimum to 1
inch maximum thickness of soil adhering to root system, cut into strips 18-inch maximum
width by 4 feet minimum length. Sod that has dried out, or sod with adhering soil that
breaks, tears or crumbles away will not be accepted. Sod cut for more than 24 hours shall
not be accepted. Sod rolls shall be kept moist, protected from sun, heat or wind in transport
and after delivery. Prior to cutting, the sod shall be evenly mowed for a blade length of at
least 1 inch but not more than 2 inches.

(3) Turf-type Tall Fescue: Turf-type tall fescue seed or sod shall be purchased from a
reputable seed dealer, complying with requirements specified. Seed mixture shall be of at
least three varieties (a maximum of five) of dwarf type tall fescue (i.e., Monarch, El Dorado,
Rebel Jr., Crew Cut, SR 8200, or other approved varieties).

(a) PLS shall not be less than 88 percent.

(b) Specified PLS shall be calculated as shown in Section (5)

(4) Buffalo Grass: Buffalo grass shall be either seed, plugs, or sod.

(a) Buffalo grass seed shall be purchased from a reputable seed dealer, complying with
the requirements specified. Seed mixture shall be “Texoka” or “Sharp's Improved”
or approved equivalent.

(i) PLS shall not be less than 75 percent.

(ii) Specified PLS shall be calculated as shown in Subsection (B)(5).

(b) Buffalo grass plugs or sod shall be 100 percent certified turf-forming variety 609, or
approved equivalent. Buffalo grass imported from states south of Colorado may be
approved due to the difficulty in establishing sod in the front range climate.

(i) All sod shall be healthy, in vigorous condition, of natural green color, free of
disease and harmful insects. The sod shall be laid within 48 hours of
harvest.

(ii) Plugs shall be cut from sod as described in this Section. Nursery grown
plugs are acceptable with prior approval by the Director.

(c) If sod is to be used for medians larger than 12 feet wide, Buffalo grass is preferred.

(5) Native Seed: Native grasses and wildflowers for median plantings are listed in tables 10-3
and 10-4. Native grass seed shall be purchased from a reputable seed dealer, complying with
requirements specified. Seed mixture shall be “Foothills” mix as provided by Arkansas
Valley Seed Company (303.320.7500), or approved equivalent.

(a) PLS shall not be less than 80 percent (average for the seed mix).

10-12 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 (b) Quantity of bulk seed required to provide the specified PLS shall be calculated from
purity and germination percentage rates listed on the lot tag of seed actually
purchased, using the following two formulas:

Purity Percentage x Germination Percentage = PLS Percentage

lbs. PLS specified per 1000 square feet = Bulk lbs. required per
PLS percentage 1000 square feet

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-13

 Table 10-3: Wildflowers
Common Name Latin Name
Blanket flower Gaillardia aristata
Blue flax Adenolinum (Linum) lewisii
Broom snakeweed Gutierrezia sarothrae
Bush sunflower Helianthus pumilus
Fringed sage Artemisia frigida
Greenleaf penstemon (blue mist) Penstemon virens
Nelson's larkspur Delphinium nelsonii
One-sided penstemon Penstemon secundiflorus
Prairie clover Dalea purpurea
Prairie coneflower Ratibida columnifera
Prairie sage (Sagewort) Artemisia ludoviciana
Prickly pear cactus Opuntia macrorhiza (compressa)
Rocky Mountain beeplant Cleome serrulata
Scarlet globe mallow Sphaeralcea coccinea
Spiderwort Tradescantia occidentalis
Spiny goldenweed Machaeranthera pinnatifida
Spotted gayfeather (Dotted gayfeather) Liatris punctata

Sulphur flower Eriogonum umbellatum

Western wallflower Erysimum asperum
White evening primrose Oenothera caespitosa
White yarrow (Woolly yarrow) Achillea lanulosa
Wild bergamot (Horsemint or Beebalm) Monarda fistulosa

Wild verbena Glandularia (Verbena) bipinnatifida

Yellow stemless evening primrose Oenothera howardii (brachycarpa)

10-14 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 Table 10-4: Grasses

Common Name Latin Name Type

Arizona fescue Festuca arizonica Turf
Big bluestem Andropogon gerardii Ornamental
Blue grama Chondrosum gracile (Bouteloua gracilis) Ornamental/Turf
Bluebunch wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria (Agropyron) spicatum Ornamental
Buffalograss Buchloe dactyloides Turf
Indian ricegrass Achnatherum (Orzyopsis) hymenoides Ornamental
Junegrass Koeleria macrantha Ornamental/Turf
Little bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium Ornamental
Mountain muhly Muhlenbergia montana Ornamental/Turf
Needle-and-thread Hesperostipa (Stipa) comata Ornamental
New Mexico feathergrass Hesperostipa (Stipa) neomexicana Ornamental
Prairie dropseed Sporobolus heterolepis
Prairie sandreed Calamovilfa longifolia Ornamental
Sand dropseed Sporobolus cryptandrus
Side-oats grama Bouteloua curtipendula Ornamental
Western wheatgrass Pascopyrum (Agropyron) smithii Turf

Table 10-5: Soil Amendment Mix Mechanical Analysis

Percent (%) Passing Percent (%) Retained

2" Screen 100 0

1" Screen 90-100 0-10

½" Screen 50-80 20-50

#100 Mesh Sieve 0-15 85-100

(4) Soil Amendment: Soil amendment for sod and seed areas, shall be manure compost, and
shall contain at least 50 percent organic matter. The mixture shall be free from clay subsoil,
sawdust, commercial wood products, stones, lumps, plants, roots, sticks, weed stolons and
seeds, high salt content, and other materials harmful to plant life. The materials shall be
coarsely ground and thoroughly mixed together to ensure an even composition. Cow
manure or mushroom compost shall be free from lumps, debris or chemicals harmful to
landscape plantings. The soil amendment mix shall have an acidity from pH 5.5 to 8.0, and
meet the mechanical analysis outlined in Table 10-3, “Soil Amendment Mix Mechanical

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-15

 Analysis,” of these Standards.

(5) Erosion Control Netting: Jute mesh erosion control netting or approved equivalent shall be
used.

(C) Construction Requirements

(1) Subgrade and Soil Preparation

(a) The contractor shall lay out and stake the boundary of all areas to be sodded,
seeded, or plugged prior to commencing any work. After Director approval of
finish grades, the contractor shall prepare the subgrade of all seeded or sodded areas
by discing or rototilling the soil to a depth of 6 inches. No ripping or chiseling shall
be allowed. No rototilling or discing is to be done within the protection area of
existing trees. After the subgrade has been completed, soil preparation shall begin
by spreading the soil amendment evenly within the seeding or sodding limits at the
rate of 3 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet. If topsoil is used as the subgrade for
sod or seed, soil amendment will not be required. Soil amendment is not required in
areas to be seeded with native grasses.

(b) For sod, 0-46-0 fertilizer shall then be spread uniformly over the entire area at the
rates as specified for soil preparation. The area shall again be disced or rototilled at
right angles to the first tillage, then formed by rolling to provide a proper seed bed or
sodding surface. The sod or seed bed shall be totally free from rock, debris,
vegetable matter, noxious weeds or clay clods over ½inch diameter, prior to any
sodding or seeding operations.

(2) Finish and Fine Grading

(a) Positive Surface Drainage: The contractor shall finish and fine-grade the project
area to establish an even and well-matched grade over the entire surface. Positive
surface drainage shall be assured, and there shall be no depressions, subsequent
settling or irregularities in the finished grade.

(b) Transitional Areas: At any transitional point or line where one plane intersects
another, such as from a sloping area or berm to a level area, a smooth and gentle
transition shall be made. There shall be no abrupt changes in grade. There shall also
be a smooth transition between existing turf and the new sod. The grade elevations
of the two areas shall be matching.

(3) Schedule: All seeding shall be scheduled between March 1 and October 15 unless prior
written approval from the Director has been obtained.

(a) No sodding and seeding shall take place during inclement weather.

(b) No sodding and seeding work shall commence until the adjacent site improvements,
pavements, irrigation installation and finish grading is completed. The irrigation
system shall have been tested and be in operating order prior to any seeding or
sodding.

10-16 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 (c) The contractor shall barricade sodded area immediately after sod installation as
specified on the approved construction plans or in these Standards. The barricade
shall include the following:

(i) Standard construction lath at 5 foot intervals connected with three tiers of
colored plastic flagging.

(ii) “KEEP OFF THE SOD” signs attached to the barricading every 25 feet.

(4) Seeding

(a) Following approval of the seed bed by the Director, seeding shall be done with a
Brillion drill or approved mechanical seeder. Seed shall be evenly distributed on a
still day into a slightly moist seed bed. Seed shall be drilled 1/8 inch into the
prepared seed bed. If the slope is too steep to drill, seed shall be broadcast at double
the application rate and covered with 1/8 inch of soil with a harrow or hand rake for
small areas. The seeding shall be done in two separate applications crossing the area
at right angles to guarantee proper coverage. Drill seed across slopes rather than up
and down, following the contour to reduce erosion.

(i) Native grasses shall be seeded at a rate of 20 pounds PLS/acre when drilled
and 35 pounds PLS/acre when broadcast.

(ii) Buffalo grass shall be seeded at a rate of 3 pounds PLS/1000 square feet
when drilled and 5 pounds PLS/1000 square feet. when broadcast.

(iii) Turf type tall fescue shall be seeded at a rate of 6 pounds/1000 square feet
when drilled and 9 pounds/1000 square feet when broadcast.

(b) After seeding operations have been completed, the entire seeded area shall be
hydromulched with “Conwed 2000" or approved equal hydro mulch material. The
hydro mulch shall be applied by using mechanical hydromulcher, evenly distributed
on a still day. The hydro mulch material shall be applied at the rates recommended
by the manufacturer. Within 12 hours after seeding, the sprinkler system shall be
activated to moisten seeded areas to a depth of 1 inch. All seeded areas shall be kept
so moistened by frequent light watering until final acceptance of the project or as
required by City Land Use Regulations, and such watering shall be the responsibility
of the contractor.

(c) Protect seeded slopes (greater than 2.5 horizontal to one vertical) with erosion
control netting or other methods acceptable to the Director. Cover netting with
straw or other acceptable mulch.

(5) Bluegrass Sodding

(a) Sod shall be laid on a firm, premoistened bed with tight joints so that no voids occur
under or between strips. All end joints shall be staggered and the sod roll length
shall run perpendicular to all slope fall lines. Sod shall be tamped, rolled, and

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-17

 watered immediately after sodding operations are completed.

(b) No sod shall be installed within a radius of 3 feet around any tree within the project
limits. Shredded wood chips shall be installed to a 3 inch depth in this 3 foot area.
All rolls terminating at the project limits shall be cut in a straight line unless
otherwise specified and the exposed edge covered with topsoil. All sod installed
around planting beds shall be cut to conform to the shape of the bed as shown on
plan or laid out onsite. Sod shall be laid flush with paving, curbs and irrigation heads
and 1 inch below the top edge of steel edging.

(c) In the event that sod dries or shrinks, a mixture of screened topsoil and specified
bluegrass seed shall be brushed into the cracks and tamped flush. Excessively
shrunk sod (over 3/4 inch shrinkage) shall be replaced with new sod. Any sod laid
on slopes steeper than 3:1 (33 percent) shall be laid at a 90 degree angle to the slope
and held in place with two wooden dowels per sod piece.

(d) The contractor shall activate the sprinkler system to water sod immediately after
each section of sod is laid. The contractor shall operate the sprinkler to soak all sod
and the underlying soil to a depth of 2 inches and maintain this moisture level until
final acceptance. The contractor shall water the sod in the early morning and late
afternoon for the duration of this period.
(6) Buffalo Grass Sod

(a) Prior to sodding, the site should be lightly irrigated to alleviate “sod-wicking” and
desiccation. The sod shall be laid by staggering joints with all edges touching.
Installation shall be performed between April 1 to August 31. Immediately following
the laying of the sod, the sod should be rolled with a roller, weighing at least 150
pounds, heavy enough to imprint the sod into the soil.

(b) The contractor shall irrigate immediately after any sod installation, so that the sod
and underlying soil is completely wetted to a depth of 4 to 6 inches (saturated).
Subsequent irrigation shall be applied as necessary as determined by daily inspection
of the sod panels. Daily inspection should consist of manually raising several sod
panels and testing the level of moistness in the soil by pinching the soil together. If
the soil remains 'pinched' together, and is moist, and the panel's sod pad is also
moist, then the sod does not require watering that day. If the soil, after being
pinched, falls apart, the sod shall be irrigated to retain the required moisture level.
The sod soil pad and underlying soil should be moist at all times.

(c) Rainfall received during the establishment period may reduce the irrigation required.
If temperatures exceed 95 degrees for periods of several days, the sod may have to
be inspected more frequently and additional daily irrigation cycles may be required.
If the soil that has been sodded is extremely hard, or compacted, and not easily
saturated, or dries out quickly, the sod and soil shall be kept consistently moist the
first ten days.

(d) Normal establishment should display the following characteristics. Within 48 hours
of installation the sod should turn a straw color, which is called a dormant stage,
although the roots would continue to grow while the top growth is dormant. Within
5 to 7 days feeder roots should begin appearing. Within 14 to 21 days new green

10-18 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 top growth should be seen and the sod should be firmly rooted. Once this occurs,
daily manual inspections would no longer be required. Sod should then be watered
1½inches per week for 2 to three months, to prevent drought stress, until deeper
rooting takes place.

(e) The contractor is to thoroughly discuss required installation, establishment and post-
establishment methods, irrigation, and maintenance requirements with the sod
supplier (specifically for sod maintenance - weed control/removal, i.e., what
chemical can safely be used, etc.).

(7) Buffalo Grass Plugs

(a) Plugs shall be planted on 12 inch centers with a requirement of at least nine (9)
plugs per square yard of ground. Plugging machinery must convert 16 x 24 inch
sod panels into plugs and plant in one operation. Each 16 x 24 inch sod panel yields
24 4 inch square plugs, with a total of 81 plugs cut from a yard of sod. At least 80
percent of the plugs shall be a 4 inch square plug (4 x 4 inches); minimum
acceptable size for the remainder of the plugs is 2 x 4 inches, nor maximum size any
larger than 4 inch x 4 inch. Coordinate equipment passes to maintain parallel, evenly
spaced rows. Immediately following plugging, the plugs should be rolled with a
roller, weighing at least 150 pounds, heavy enough to imprint the plugs into the soil.

(b) All plugs shall be planted within 48 hours of harvest of the sod. All plugs shall be
healthy, in vigorous condition, of natural green color, free of disease and harmful
insects. Water after any portion of the plugging is complete, within 4 hours of
planting, so that the plugs are completely wetted and the underlying soil is wetted to
a depth of 4 to 6 inches.

(c) All buffalo grass sod establishment, irrigation, and maintenance requirements shall
apply to plugs. Plugs will require more frequent manual inspection and more
frequent watering. After the initial establishment period, plugs should be watered 1
inches per week until desired coverage is achieved.

10.05 Underground Irrigation System

(A) Description
Underground irrigation includes, without limitation, installing a complete underground irrigation
system consisting of irrigation pipelines, sprinklers, valves, and controllers as part of any landscaping
project.

(B) Materials

(1) Sprinkler System Components: All sprinkler system components shall be those of the
manufacturers specified in these Standards, or be an approved equivalent, and shall be
installed in accordance with these Standards.

(2) Sprinkler Heads: Pop-up rotary impact or stream spray sprinklers shall be used to water
sod and shrub areas, using full and part circle heads as specified on any approved landscape
plans. Requirements for the sprinklers include the following:

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-19

 (a) Sprinklers shall provide coverage as specified on any approved landscape plans, plus
or minus 5 percent of the flow rate and 2 ½feet within the design radius during a
low wind situation.

(b) Sprinkler heads shall meet the following specifications:

(i) Minimum pop-up height of 2-5/16 inches with heavy retract spring;

(ii) Part circle sprinklers shall be adjustable for any arc between 20 and 340
degrees;

(iii) Have built-in check valves in the head to control low head drainage and
reduce air compression in lines. The check valve shall be serviceable from
the top of the head without requiring excavation and removal of the head
from the riser.

(c) Sprinklers shall be vandal resistant, and shall have vandal-resistant cover screws or
no exposed screws in the cover.

(d) Sprinklers shall be tamper resistant to prevent changing the direction of throws by
means of locking friction collars, gear drives, and limited access features.

(e) Sprinklers shall have a drive mechanism that will ensure proper and even rotation
and coverage on 4:1 slopes.

(f) Sprinklers shall have rubber covers or similar protective devices.

(3) Bubblers: Requirements for bubbler heads shall include the following items.

(a) Heads shall operate properly between 10 psi and 80 psi;

(b) Heads shall have a molded plastic body with a ½inch female pipe thread;

(c) Heads shall have a nozzle flow adjusting screw, providing fully open to completely
closed positions;

(d) Heads shall have a plastic basket screen to protect nozzles from clogging.

(4) Automatic Control Valves

(a) Automatic electric remote control valves shall be slow acting diaphragm-type
electric solenoid valves. Solenoids shall be two-watt running, current 24 volt AC,
50/60 cycle operation. The valve shall be slow opening and closing by means of a
“shunt” resistor to avoid damage from surge pressures. Valve flow range shall be 1
to 200 gallons per minute depending on size with a pressure range of 10 to 200 PSI.

(b) All valve bodies and bonnets shall be constructed of heavy case bronze with
accurately machined valve seat surfaces and internal parts. Inlet part of diaphragm
chamber shall have a removable screen for easy cleaning, accessible without

10-20 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 removing bonnet from valve body. Valve bonnets shall be equipped with a slotted
plug or bleed screw for manual operation of valves at any time without energizing
the solenoid, and a manual flow control stem.

(5) Isolation Gate Valves: Isolation gate valves for installation on main lines shall be of brass
construction, designed for 200 psi working pressures, and have solid disc, non-rising stems
with a heel and screwed ends. Gate valves 3 inches or larger shall be brass or iron AWWA
gate valves with rubber gaskets or mechanical joints.

(6) Quick-Coupling Valves: Quick-coupling valves installed in main lines shall be of a cast
brass body construction, and have a self-closing and locking protective cover. The throat
shall incorporate a single keyway with positions for regulation of water flow, with a flow
range of 10 to 70 gallons per minute and a pressure range of 5 to 125 psi. Replaceable seals
shall be provided at the valve seat and throat, and the internal parts shall be removable for
service. Installation on a main line in shall include a 10-inch circular locking valve box over
the coupler body. Size shall be 1 inch. Quick-coupling valve keys shall have 1 inch male top
pipe threads. Swivel hose ells shall be 1 inch N.P.T. x 3/4 inch hose thread.
(7) Manual Drain Valves: The system shall be equipped with 3/4 inch manual globe drain
valves at all low points on main lines. Valves shall be of bronze construction with threaded
connections, cross handles, and operating keys. Install valves in a locking valve box. Angle
valves will not be accepted.

(8) Y-Strainers: Y-Strainers for installation on main line shall be bronze “Y” type strainers with
a screen mesh.

(9) Wire Connectors: All wire connections at electric control valves and all splices of wire in
the field shall be made using “snap-tits,” or an approved equivalent, wire connectors.
Significant requirements for connectors include the following items:

(a) Connectors shall be rated at 600 volts for PVC insulated copper wire, Underwriters
Laboratory listed, and water-resistant.

(b) Connectors shall consist of a PVC base socket, sealing plug, and wire crimping
sleeve and shall provide a permanent waterproof joint by using a sealer for joint
makeup.

(10) Controllers

(a) Automatic sprinkler controllers shall be completely automatic in operation, and shall
electrically start all sprinkler cycles and time the individual stations. Controllers shall
have standard 117 volt power inputs, 24.0 volt, 60 cycle outputs with separate
independent timing stations, 14 day programming, and be capable of automatically
starting a watering cycle at the beginning of any hour for 23 hours per day. Each
station shall have an “OFF” switch for “0" time and individual incremental timing
control for 0 to 60 minute station timing. Each station shall have an “ON-Repeat”
switch for eliminating one or more stations from initiating a repeat cycle on any or
all stations after the normal watering cycle has been completed. A 14 day clock
shall be provided for maximum programming versatility and any timer pins shall be
of the captive type to prevent loss. It shall be possible to operate controller manually

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-21

 and to select and operate manually any station. All controls shall be capable of being
manipulated at any time in any sequence without damage to controller. The
controller shall have the ability for dual programming and shall have soil moisture
sensing equipment.

(b) Soil moisture sensing equipment shall have an adjustable control module with an
override function, and at least two in-ground sensors/tensiometers. Sensors must
buffer salinity, and have the ability to withstand winter conditions without removal.

(c) A reset circuit breaker shall protect each controller from damage due to excessive
current. A master “ON-OFF” switch shall provide for turning controller “OFF”
during rainy weather, while allowing day and hour clocks to continue in operation.
The controller shall have as standard built-in features an electrical circuit to operate a
master valve and moisture sensor circuit to allow operation of controllers in
conjunction with a moisture sensing device. Install valve output surge protection
arresters for control wiring and common.
(d) All wiring to and from controllers shall be through color-coded plugs and sockets.
Controller cabinets shall be locking, weatherproof type, constructed of heavy gauge
steel with corrosion resistant enamel finish inside and out.

(e) Controllers shall conform to NEC Class 2 requirements of 24 volt valves.

Controllers shall be for wall or pedestal mounting.

(11) Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be sized to provide maintenance access to all valve and
controller component. The underside of all control valve boxes shall be clearly marked to
indicate controller numbers and valve numbers.

(12) Pipe

(a) Main Line Pipes:

(i) Main pressure line pipe shall be NSF approved virgin polyvinyl chloride
pipe. Pipe shall be suitable for use at maximum hydrostatic working
pressures of 200 PSI. Pipe shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF
approved, type 1, grade 1 PVC, conforming to Astin Resin specification
D1784-60 and project standard D2241 for PVC 1120 SDR 26 or SDR 21.
PVC pipe is to be belled end and solvent weld. Solvent cement and primer
shall be of the type prescribed by the manufacturer.

(ii) Gasket pipe and fittings shall be used for main lines 3 inches or larger.
Gasketed pipe shall be of the type prescribed by the manufacturer. No
insert gaskets or insert gasket fittings shall be accepted. Thrust blocks shall
be provided in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations.

(b) Marking and Declaration of Compliance: Pipe marking shall show the size, series,
identification, and manufacturer's trade name at intervals of not more than 20 feet.
Pipe shall include the seal of approval of the National Sanitation Foundation spaced
at intervals required by NSF regulations.

(c) PVC Fittings: All pipe fittings shall be schedule 40 PVC (ASTM D2466 and D1784).

10-22 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D2564.

(d) Brass Pipe and Fittings:

(i) Brass pipe shall be 85 percent red brass, (ANSI) Schedule 40.

(ii) Fittings shall be medium brass, 125 pound class, screwed type.

(iii) Dielectric unions shall be used wherever a copper based metal (copper,
brass, bronze) is connected to an iron based metal (iron, galvanized and
stainless steel).

(e) Copper Pipe: Copper pipe shall meet the requirements of Type K, ASTM B88.
Fittings shall be copper or cast bronze. Silver solder shall be used for joints.
(f) Lateral Line Pipes: Pipe for rotary sprinkler laterals shall be NSF approved
polyethylene, rated at 100 PSI, using nylon insert fittings and adjustable stainless
steel clamps with stainless steel screws. All piping shall be CS-256-63 ASTM
D2239, PE 2306-100. 3 inch or larger lateral piping shall meet the standards for
main line pipes.

(g) Static Pressure Reduction: Static pressure on the main line shall be relieved by the
installation of a “master” automatic control valve.

(13) Risers: Rotary pop-up sprinklers shall have an adjustable swing joint riser assembly
consisting of Schedule 80 PVC nipples, and marlex and Schedule 40 PVC ells.

(14) Irrigation Sleeves: All horizontal sleeves under paved areas and vertical sleeves shall be
PVC Class 200 pipe, 4 inch diameter for lines 2 inches and smaller, and 6 inch diameter for
lines 2 ½inches to 3 inches. A separate 2 inch diameter sleeve for control valve wires shall
be laid under any new pavements. This sleeve shall be placed next to the main line sleeve.

(15) Backflow Prevention Device: Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in accordance
with these Standards and B.R.C. 1981.

(16) Electrical Copper Wires: Electrical copper wires from valves to controller shall be 14
gauge or larger PVC-insulated copper and UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY approved for
direct burial. Use 10 inch valve boxes for all wire splice locations. Control wires shall be
red and common wires shall be white.

(17) Drip Valve Assemblies: Drip valve assemblies shall have strainers with a 120 mesh nylon
screen and ½inch blow-out. Pressure reducing valves shall have manual adjusting nuts.

(18) Drip Emitters and Tubing: Drip emitters shall use drip tubing conforming to ASTM D1248
and ASTM D3350. Capillary tubing shall have 1/8 inch i.d.

(19) Drip Line Blow Out Stubs: Drip line blow out stubs shall be installed at all ends of drip
tubing.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-23

(C) Construction Requirements

(1) Applicable Standards

(a) All work involving standard plumbing systems shall be executed by a licensed and
bonded plumber. Electrical services to controllers shall be installed by a licensed
electrician. All work shall be executed according to the B.R.C. 1981, and these
Standards. The contractor shall schedule inspection of electrical services to
controllers with the City and allow at least 7 working days for subsequent approval
and connection to the power source by the Public Service Company. The
contractor shall furnish any additional material and labor when required to comply
with the B.R.C. 1981, and these Standards.

(b) The contractor shall perform a leakage test on all systems on the site at normal
working pressures.

(c) The contractor shall guarantee irrigation application in accordance with any
approved landscape plan; any unwatered areas due to poor layout, placement of or
insufficient sprinklers shall be corrected by the contractor at their expense.

(d) Work shall be in accordance with good practices prevailing in the piping trades.

(e) All work shall be protected from vandals or flooding during construction.

(2) Layout of Work: Before any installation operations are started, the contractor shall
completely stake out the irrigation system on the site. Any discrepancies in irrigation water
coverage shall be reported and corrected at this time.

(3) Schedule

(a) No sprinkler system construction shall take place during wet weather or when
temperatures are less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

(b) All required sleeving shall be performed prior to any paving operations. All
procedures necessary for the insertion and installation of irrigation pipe and wires
into sleeves shall be performed after paving operations have been completed.

(c) Installation of the system shall not take place until all earthwork has been
substantially completed and compacted and all other site improvements, pavements,
etc. have been completed.

(4) Trenching and Piping

(a) The contractor shall perform all necessary excavation for installation of their work.
Over-excavations shall be backfilled and hand tamped prior to installing pipe. Any
pumping, shoring, or bracing shall be provided by contractor.

(b) Manufacturer's specifications covering installation of their material shall be followed.

Underground lines up to 2 inches shall have minimum horizontal clearance of 2

10-24 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 inches of each other, and larger lines shall have a clearance of 4 inches. No
sprinkler lines shall be stacked vertically in a common trench. Lines shall have
minimum horizontal clearance of 12 inches from the lines of other trades. There
shall be a minimum 2 inch vertical clearance between any lines crossing 45 degrees -
90 degrees. Minimum cover over lateral piping shall be 12 inches, or to a depth to
accommodate valves and other equipment, whichever is greater. All PVC main line
shall be at 18-inch minimum depth of bury. PVC main line is to be encased in sand
4 inches on all sides.

(c) Where trenches and lines run adjacent to existing irrigation lines and properties,
damage to these shall be avoided and shall be restored to their original condition

(d) When pipe laying is not in progress, or at end of each day, pipe ends shall be closed
with tight plug or cap. All work shall be performed in accordance with good
practices prevailing in the piping trades.

(e) Tunneling will be permitted where the pipe must pass under any obstruction that
cannot be removed. In backfilling the tunnel, the final density of the backfill must
match that of the surrounding soil. It shall be acceptable to use a casing of suitable
diameter that shall be installed first by tunneling or jacking, and the pipe shall then be
laid through the casing, observing the same precautions as though it were installed in
open trench.

(f) Trenches shall be cut to true line and grade, and shall be excavated so that the pipe
shall be supported uniformly. The contractor shall be responsible for staking the
trench lines. Minimum grade of piping to drain shall be 3 inches/100 feet.

(g) If ground water is encountered during trench excavation above the elevation of the
bottom of the pipe grade, such water shall be drained until the pipe has been
installed. Pipe joints and open ends shall be plugged to prevent ground water from
entering the pipe.

(h) Thrust blocks shall be installed behind all gasketed fittings, in line valves, and caps.
Gasket pipe fittings shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Concrete for thrust blocks shall cure for 72 hours before pressure is applied to the
system.

(5) Threaded Joints

(a) Field-threading of plastic pipe or fittings shall not be permitted. Only factory-
formed threads shall be used.

(b) Factory-made nipples shall be used wherever possible. Field-cut threads in metallic
pipe will be permitted only where absolutely necessary. When field threading, cut
threads accurately on axis with sharp dies.

(c) All threaded joints shall be assembled with pipe joint compound consisting of liquid
Teflon. The compound is to be applied to male threads only.

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-25

 (d) Where assembling soft metal (brass or copper) or plastic pipe, strap type friction
wrenches shall be used; metal-jawed wrenches shall not be used.

(6) Sleeves

(a) The contractor shall furnish and install sleeves of appropriate size, depth, and
location to accommodate all irrigation pipe beneath any paved surfaces prior to pipe
installation as specified herein, unless they have been previously installed. Where
irrigation lines run under proposed paved surfaces, the contractor shall sleeve the
lines a distance 2 feet beyond the edge of the surface. Sleeves shall be PVC Class
200 pipe.

(b) Installation of sleeves shall precede construction paving. Sleeves shall be encased in
sand 4 inches on all sides, with backfill compacted to 95 percent of standard
Proctor density. Sleeves shall be buried at a depth of 18 inches. Separate sleeves
placed at the 18 -inch bury depth shall be provided for wires passing under paved
sections.

(c) All sleeves shall be marked by the placement of nylon rope, or an approved
equivalent marking material.

(7) Backfilling

(a) Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests on the system have been
completed and until the line has been inspected and approved by the Director.
Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with suitable materials, free from stones larger
than 2 inches in maximum dimension, by depositing the material in 6 inch layers and
thoroughly compacting the backfill to 95 percent of standard Proctor density.

(b) Ponding and/or jetting may be used only if prior approval is obtained and only when
the backfill material is sandy or gravelly. An excess of water shall be avoided in
order to prevent disturbance of the earth under and around the pipe. Likewise the
amount of water used shall be controlled so as not to risk “floating” the pipe out of
position. Adequate dikes shall be constructed along the trench to retain and guide
the water. When jetting is used, jets shall be of an approved design and of sufficient
length to reach the bottom of each layer and the water supply shall be continuous.

(c) Site excavation material will generally be considered satisfactory for backfill
purposes provided that backfill materials are free from rubbish, vegetable matter,
frozen materials, or stones larger than 2 inches in maximum dimension. Any
material not meeting these specifications for backfill shall be removed from site.

(d) Backfilling shall not be performed in freezing weather. All trenches shall be left
slightly mounded to allow for settlement after the backfilling is completed. If
sinking of the trenches occurs, it is the responsibility of the contractor to correct
such conditions.

(8) Manual Drain Valves: Manual drain valves shall be located, furnished, and installed by the
contractor at all low points on sprinkler lines. A drain sump of not less than 6 cubic feet of

10-26 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 3/4 inch washed gravel shall be installed surrounding each drain valve. All manual drain
valves are to be installed with drain valve sleeves.

(9) Electric Control Valves

(a) Electric control valves shall be automatic and purchased from the manufacturer
specified, or be an approved equivalent, matching size, model and quantity as listed
on an approved landscape plan. All control valves shall be installed at the locations
shown on the approved landscape plan.

(b) Electric control valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. All valves shall have sufficient clearance from adjacent
obstructions to provide accessibility for maintenance. All valves shall be installed at
sufficient depth to provide at least 6 inches cover to finished grade. Only one
control valve per valve box shall be installed.

(c) Control wire shall have an 18-inch expansion loop at each valve and elsewhere as
necessary to prevent possible wire breaks. Where more than one control wire is
located in the trench, the wires shall be taped together at 20 foot intervals to
maintain orderly and efficient installation. All control wires shall be placed carefully
alongside and slightly below the main line for protection. Control wires not
protected by the irrigation main shall be laid in a 2 inch PVC class 200 sleeve.
Electrical control wires shall be extended along the irrigation main and connected to
the controller.

(d) Electrical control wires shall be connected with snap-tits connectors. Splicing will
be permitted only on runs exceeding 500 feet in length, and shall be located at valve
locations. Wires shall be bundled and taped at 20 foot intervals. A minimum wire
loop of 24 inches shall be provided at each control valve, splice, and every 100 feet
of wiring. Two spare #14-1 wires, blue in color, shall be installed along the entire
length of the main line from the controller to farthest control valve on each and
every branch of the main line.

(10) Pressure Reducing Valves: Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be installed to ensure
proper operating pressures at sprinkler locations.

(11) Valve Boxes: All automatic control valves, pressure reducing valves, backflow prevention
devices, isolation gate valves, manual drain valves, and quick-coupling valves are to be
installed in valve boxes. The valve box and cover shall be flush with the final grade and
level. The valve box shall be installed with a 2 inch layer of washed gravel on the sides and
below the box. If the box encloses a double check valve assembly, the gravel layer below
the box shall be equal in volume to the volume of the box.

(12) Quick-Coupling Valves: Quick-coupling valves shall be installed in conformance with

these Standards. Additional quick-coupling valves shall be located every 200 feet along the
main line. All valves shall be installed in separate 10-inch circular valve boxes placed flush
with the final grade and level.

(13) Isolation Gate Valves: Isolation gate valves on the main line shall be plumb with finished
grade and installed in a valve box placed flush with the final grade and level. Extensions may

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-27

 be added onto the valve box as necessary to level box with finish grade.

(14) Sprinklers

(a) Installation of sprinklers includes furnishing, installing, and testing, risers, fittings,
sprinkler heads, bubblers, and other sprinkler system components in accordance
with an approved landscape plan. Sprinkler piping shall be thoroughly flushed
before the installation of the sprinkler heads and bubblers.

(b) Sprinkler heads shall be set plumb and level with finished grade at locations shown
on an approved landscape plan. Sprinklers shall be set 3 inches behind concrete
improvements such as curb and gutter or sidewalks. Sprinklers installed where
grass has not been sodded shall be installed on temporary risers extending minimum
3 inches above grade. After finished grades are established and the ground has
settled, the contractor shall lower sprinklers to finished grade.

(c) Bubblers shall be set plumb and level before mulch is installed.

(d) Rotary pop-up sprinklers on swing joint risers shall be installed as shown in these
Standards and may be adjusted in the field as necessary.

(15) Drip Valve Assemblies: Installation of drip valve assemblies shall in conformance with
these Standards.

(16) Drip Emitters and Tubing: Installation of drip emitters and tubing shall be installed in
conformance with these Standards at a depth of 4 inches below top of grade. For this
purpose, top of grade does not include mulch or rock layers. Drip line blow-out stubs are to
be installed at all ends of drip tubing. Drip tubing may be installed in turf areas as lateral
piping.

(17) Controllers and Related Work: The controller shall be mounted on three wolmanized
CCA 6 inch x 6 inch ties, set at least 24 inches below grade and a maximum of 18 inches
above grade. The controller shall be located as shown on an approved landscape plan, and
be mounted inside a locking, weather-proof metal cabinet. The contractor shall provide and
install a 15-amp electrical circuit breaker in a locking, weatherproof box. The contractor
shall wire the circuit breaker and controller and run wire to the Public Service Company pull
box, leaving an 18-inch tail of wire in the pull box or sleeve. After connection, the
contractor shall notify the City’s Inspection Services to inspect controller and circuit breaker
wiring prior to notifying Public Service Company to connect power to the wiring. The
contractor shall be responsible for manual operation of the sprinkler system until power is
connected. All wiring shall be performed by a licensed electrician.

(18) Testing and Adjusting

(a) All main lines having continuous pressure shall be tested at a minimum pressure of
100 psi. Visual inspection shall be performed and any leak shall be repaired.
Repaired lines shall be retested until no leakage is occurring.

(i) Zone lateral lines shall be tested at the design operating pressure of the zone.
Any leaks found shall be repaired and the zone retested. All sprinklers shall

10-28 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 be operating at the same pressure plus or minus 7 percent.

(ii) The entire irrigation system shall be tested at normal working pressure for
leaks in the system and retested until no leakage is occurring. The pressure
test shall be performed under the observation of the Director for final
approval.

(iii) After testing, the entire irrigation system shall be thoroughly flushed with at
least 100 percent of operating flow passing through each pipe, beginning
with larger mains and continuing through smaller lines in sequence.

(b) The entire system shall be “fine-tuned” by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and
breakup arms, setting pressure reducing valves at proper pressure and similar, to
provide optimum and efficient coverage.

(c) Final inspection shall include observation and approval by the Director of the
performance, method of operation, and coverage of the irrigation system.

(d) The contractor shall furnish two sets of keys for all quick-couplers, manual drain
valves, gate valves, and controllers as well as padlocks and keys for controller
circuit breaker boxes, two sprinklers and nozzles of each type, hose ells for all quick
couplers, and all related loose parts necessary to operate the system, as part of the
final acceptance by the Director.

(19) Record Drawings (As-Builts): Upon completion of improvements and prior to final
acceptance, the contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the irrigation system to the
Director. The as-built drawings shall comply with the requirements of Subsection 1.03(G),
“As-Built Drawings,” of these Standards, and shall include the location of following items:

(a) Connection to existing water lines.

(b) Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (maximum 100 feet along routing).

(c) Sprinkler control valves.

(d) Quick coupling valves.

(e) Drain valves.

(f) Drip line blow-out stubs.

(g) Control wire routing if not with pressure main line.

(h) All gate valves.

(i) Other related equipment as directed by the City.

(20) Operation Instruction: Prior to final acceptance of improvements, the contractor shall
submit three written sets of operating instructions, with cut sheets of all products, and a

Effective: November 16, 2000 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 10-29

 guideline summer watering program.

(21) Controller Charts

(a) Controller charts shall be prepared for the Director once record (as-built) drawings
have been accepted.

(b) A controller chart shall be provided for each automatic controller installed.

(c) The controller chart may be a reproduction of the record drawing, if scale permits
fitting of the chart to the controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, the
reductions shall be sized to ensure full legibility.

(d) The controller chart shall represent the actual “as-built” system, showing the
specific area covered by that controller.

(e) The controller chart shall identify the area of coverage of each remote control valve,
using a distinctly different pastel color on drawing over the entire area of coverage.

10-30 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: November 16, 2000

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

CHAPTER 11
TECHNICAL DRAWINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Drawing Title Drawing Number/Page

GENERAL DRAWINGS

Drafting Standards .................................................................................................................................................... 1.01

TRANSPORTATION DRAWINGS

Curb and Gutter .................................................................................................................................................... 2.01.A

Curb and Gutter Joints .......................................................................................................................................... 2.01.B
Concrete Walk and Multi-Use Paths..................................................................................................................... 2.02.A
Integral Curbwalk ................................................................................................................................................. 2.02.B
Concrete Walk and Multi-Use Path Joints ............................................................................................................ 2.02.C
Multi-Use Path Section Detail .............................................................................................................................. 2.02.D
Crosspan and Radii Curb Return Accesses ............................................................................................................... 2.03
Flagstone Walk ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.05
Typical Alley Paving Section .................................................................................................................................. 2.06
Attached Sidewalk Curb Ramp Options .................................................................................................................. 2.07
Survey Monument Range Box .................................................................................................................................. 2.11
Intersection Pin Range Box ...................................................................................................................................... 2.12
Valve Box Adjustment.............................................................................................................................................. 2.13
Driveway Ramp, Detached Walk.............................................................................................................................. 2.21
Driveway Ramp, Curbwalk – CDOT Type 1 ........................................................................................................ 2.22.A
Driveway Ramp, Curbwalk – CDOT Type 2 ........................................................................................................ 2.22.B
Chase Drain, Curbwalk ............................................................................................................................................. 2.31
Chase Drain, Detached Sidewalk .............................................................................................................................. 2.32
Median, Paved Cover ............................................................................................................................................... 2.41
Median, Paved Curb Skirt..................................................................................................................................... 2.42 A
Median, Brick Curb Skirt ..................................................................................................................................... 2.42 B
Bicycle Path Cross-Section ....................................................................................................................................... 2.51
Inverted “U” Bicycle Racks .................................................................................................................................. 2.52.A
Inverted “U” Bicycle Racks .................................................................................................................................. 2.52.B
Accessible Parking Stall ........................................................................................................................................... 2.54
Non-Residential Street Cross-Section Examples .................................................................................................. 2.61 A
Non-Residential Street Cross-Section Examples .................................................................................................. 2.61 B
Non-Residential Street Cross-Section Examples .................................................................................................. 2.61 C
Residential Collector Cross-Section ......................................................................................................................... 2.63
Residential Street Cross-Section ............................................................................................................................... 2.64
Rural Residential Street Cross-Section ..................................................................................................................... 2.65
Residential Access Street Cross-Section ................................................................................................................... 2.66

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 11-i

Residential Access Lane Cross-Section .................................................................................................................... 2.67
Residential Alley Cross-Section ............................................................................................................................... 2.68
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ................................................................................................................... 2.71 A
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ................................................................................................................... 2.71 B
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ................................................................................................................... 2.71 C
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ................................................................................................................... 2.71 D
Straight Retaining Wall Expansion Joint .................................................................................................................. 2.72
Sign Installation Details ............................................................................................................................................ 2.81
Accessible Parking Sign Details ............................................................................................................................... 2.86
Street Name Sign Mounting Details ......................................................................................................................... 2.87

STREETSCAPE DRAWINGS

Streetscape Tree Spacing and Location .................................................................................................................... 3.01

Trees and Shrubs Planting Detail.............................................................................................................................. 3.02
Tree Grate for Sidewalk Planting ............................................................................................................................. 3.03
Grade Change Around Existing Trees ...................................................................................................................... 3.04
Sample Landscape Protection Plan ........................................................................................................................... 3.11
Protected Root Zone and Drip Line .......................................................................................................................... 3.12
Root Loss from Tunnelling ....................................................................................................................................... 3.13
Irrigation Pressure Vacuum Breaker ......................................................................................................................... 3.21
Irrigation Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly ..................................................................................................... 3.22
Irrigation Pressure Reducing Valve .......................................................................................................................... 3.23
Irrigation Gate Valve ................................................................................................................................................ 3.24
Irrigation Drain Valve............................................................................................................................................... 3.25
Irrigation Quick Coupling Valve .............................................................................................................................. 3.26
Irrigation Control Valve ........................................................................................................................................... 3.27
Irrigation Valve Assembly Spray .............................................................................................................................. 3.28
Irrigation Drip Valve ................................................................................................................................................ 3.29
Irrigation Quick Coupler........................................................................................................................................... 3.31
Irrigation Spray Head ............................................................................................................................................... 3.32
Irrigation Pop-Up Shrub Spray Head........................................................................................................................ 3.33
Irrigation Bubbler Detail........................................................................................................................................... 3.34
Irrigation Fixed Head and Riser................................................................................................................................ 3.35
Irrigation Rotary Head .............................................................................................................................................. 3.36
Irrigation Drip Details............................................................................................................................................... 3.37
Irrigation Typical Trickle Fittings ............................................................................................................................ 3.38
Irrigation Trenching and Pipe Installation ................................................................................................................ 3.39
Irrigation System Thrust Blocks ............................................................................................................................... 3.40
Irrigation System Controller ..................................................................................................................................... 3.41
Irrigation System Wire Connection .......................................................................................................................... 3.42

UTILITIES DRAWINGS

Utility Trenches, 16" Wide or Less .......................................................................................................................... 4.01

Utility Trenches, Wider than 16" .............................................................................................................................. 4.02
Pipe Bedding ............................................................................................................................................................ 4.03
Restoration of Asphalt Street Excavations, Streets Less Than 3 Years Old ............................................................. 4.04
Telecommunications Conduit and Cable Encroachments in Public Right-of-way .................................................... 4.05
Concrete Encasement ................................................................................................................................................ 4.06
Stream Crossing ........................................................................................................................................................ 4.07
Groundwater Barrier ................................................................................................................................................. 4.08
Pipe Casing With Casing Spacers ......................................................................................................................... 4.09 A

11-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019BD

Pipe Casing With Wood Skids.............................................................................................................................. 4.09 B

Water Line Lowering, Utility Line Crossing Only................................................................................................ 5.01 A

Water Line Lowering, Culvert Crossing Only ...................................................................................................... 5.01 B
Water Line Lowering, Drainageway Crossing Only ............................................................................................. 5.01 C
Sewer Crossing ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.02
Tie Rod Specifications.............................................................................................................................................. 5.03
Tie Rod and Washer Details ..................................................................................................................................... 5.04
Tie Rod Coupling ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.05
Flange Lug Detail ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.06
Clamp Details for Use with Ductile Iron Pipe Only ................................................................................................. 5.07
Table of Dimensions for Clamps .......................................................................................................................... 5.07 A
Combination Flanged Harness Lug Details .............................................................................................................. 5.08
Mechanical Joint Restraint Details ........................................................................................................................... 5.09
Buried Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Restraint for 12" and Smaller Pipe........................................................................... 5.10
Valve Box ................................................................................................................................................................. 5.11
Fire Hydrant Placement ............................................................................................................................................ 5.12
Fire Hydrant Installation, Types 1, 2, and 3.............................................................................................................. 5.13
Horizontal Thrust Block ........................................................................................................................................... 5.14
Vertical Thrust Block ............................................................................................................................................... 5.15
Standard 3/4"- 1" Service ..................................................................................................................................... 5.16 A
Standard Meter Pit, 3/4" - 1" Services .................................................................................................................. 5.16 B
Standard 1 1/2" - 2" Service ................................................................................................................................. 5.17 A
Standard Meter Setting, 1 1/2" - 2" Services ........................................................................................................ 5.17 B
Standard 1 1/2" - 2" Meter Setting........................................................................................................................ 5.17 C
Standard 1 1/2" - 2" Irrigation Service ................................................................................................................. 5.17 D
Large Meter in Precast Vault 3” or Larger ........................................................................................................... 5.18 A
Large Meter in Precast Vault 6” or Larger ........................................................................................................... 5.18 B
Meter Pit Depth Adjustment, 3" and 4” Service ................................................................................................... 5.18 D
Combination 3/4" Domestic/Fire Sprinkler Meter Setting ........................................................................................ 5.19
Combination 1" Domestic/Fire Sprinkler Meter Setting ........................................................................................... 5.20
Valve Box, 1 1/2" - 2" Fire Sprinkler Line ............................................................................................................... 5.21
Standard Combination Air Valve Manhole............................................................................................................... 5.22

Standard Sewer Manhole .......................................................................................................................................... 6.01

Standard Drop Sewer Manhole ................................................................................................................................. 6.02
Manhole Invert ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.03
Standard Manhole, Bolt-Down, Water-Tight, Frame and Cover .............................................................................. 6.04
Extruded Aluminum Manhole Step ...................................................................................................................... 6.05 A
Polypropylene Reinforced Plastic Manhole Step .................................................................................................. 6.05 B
Sewer Service Line ................................................................................................................................................... 6.06

Storm Sewer Manhole .............................................................................................................................................. 7.01

Storm Sewer Manhole Base ...................................................................................................................................... 7.02
Flat Top for Shallow Manholes Less Than 6' in Height............................................................................................ 7.03
Single No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ....................................................................................... 7.04 A
Single No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ....................................................................................... 7.04 B
Double No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ..................................................................................... 7.05 A
Double No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ..................................................................................... 7.05 B
Triple No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ....................................................................................... 7.06 A
Triple No. 16 Open Throat Inlet, Adjustable Curb Box ....................................................................................... 7.06 B
No. 16 Grate and Frame, Adjustable Curb Box ........................................................................................................ 7.07

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS 11-iii

Type “R” Curb Inlet.............................................................................................................................................. 7.08 A
Type “R” Curb Inlet.............................................................................................................................................. 7.08 B
Type “R” Curb Inlet.............................................................................................................................................. 7.08 C
Type “R” Curb Inlet.............................................................................................................................................. 7.08 D

.........................................................................................................................................................................................

11-iv DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019BD

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

GLOSSARY

SECTION 1: ABBREVIATIONS

Wherever the following abbreviations are used in these Design and Construction Standards (Standards), or
in association with these Standards, the intent and meaning shall be as follows:

AAN American Association of Architects

Nursery-men ASME American Society of Mechanical
AAR Association of American Engineers
Railroads ASTM American Society for Testing
AASHTO American Association of State and Materials
Highway and Transportation ATSSA American Traffic Safety
Officials Services Association
ABC Aggregate Base Course AWG American Wire Gauge
AC Asphaltic Cement AWPA American Wood Preservers
ACI American Concrete Institute Association
ADT Average Daily Trips AWS American Welding Society
AGCA Associated General Contractors AWWA American Water Works
of America Association
AI Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects BFD Boulder Fire Department
AISC American Institute of Steel BMP Best Management Practices
Construction BRC Boulder Revised Code, 1981
AISI American Iron and Steel
Institute CCA Colorado Contractors
AITC American Institute of Timber Association
Construction CDOT Colorado Department of
ANSI American National Standards Transportation
Institute, Inc.
APWA American Public Works CDPHE Colorado Department of Public
Association Health and Environment
ARA American Railway Association CDPS Colorado Discharge Permit
System
AREA American Railway Engineering CFR Code of Federal Regulations
Association CFS Cubic Feet per Second
ARTBA American Road and Transportation CLOMA Conditional Letter of Map
Builders Association Amendment
ASCE American Society of Civil CLOMR Conditional Letter of Map
Engineers Revision
ASLA American Society of Landscape CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS G-i

CP Colorado Procedure IMSA International Municipal Signal
CPUC Colorado Public Utilities Association
Commission IPCEA Insulated Power Cable
CRS Colorado Revised Statutes, 1973, as Engineers Association
amended ISO Insurance Service Office
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute ITE Institute of Transportation
Engineers
CUHP Colorado Urban Hydrograph LID Low-Impact Development
Procedure LLD PE Linear low-density polyethylene
LOMA Letter of Map Amendment
LOMR Letter of Map Revision
DHV Design Hour Volume LOS Level of Service
DIP Ductile Iron Pipe
DRCOG Denver Regional Council of
Governments
DWG Drawing
EDLA Equivalent Daily Load Applications MDCIA Minimizing Directly-Connected
Impervious Areas
EIA Electronic Industries Association
MIL Military Specifications
EPA Environmental Protection MPH Miles Per Hour
Agency MUP Master Utility Plan
MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic
FEMA Federal Emergency Control Devices
Management Agency
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FL Flowline NCAR National Center for Atmospheric
FPS Feet Per Second Research
FSS Federal Specifications and NEC National Electrical Code
Standards NEMA National Electrical
GIDM Gallons Per Inch Diameter Per Mile Manufacturers Association
GPAD Gallons Per Acre Per Day NESC National Electrical Safety Code
GPCD Gallons Per Capita Per Day NFPA National Fire Protection
GPM Gallons Per Minute Association
NIST National Institute of Standards
and Technology
HCM Highway Capacity Manual NOAA National Oceanic and
HBP Hot Bituminous Pavement Atmospheric Administration
HGL Hydraulic Grade Line
HSG Hydrologic Soil Group
NPK Nitrogen-Phosphorus-Potassium
ICBO International Conference of NSF National Sanitation Foundation
Building Officials
IFC International Fire Code
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health
IPC International Plumbing Code
Administration
IEEE Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers PC Point of Curve
IES Illuminating Engineering PCC Portland Cement Concrete or
Society
G-ii DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019
PLS Point of Compound Curve Pure VPC Vertical Point of Curve
Live Seed VPI Vertical Point of Intersection
PMR Physical Map Revision VPT Vertical Point of Tangent
POTW Publicly Owned Treatment
Works WQCV Water Quality Capture Volume
PRC Point of Reverse Curve
PRV Pressure Reducing Valve
PT Point of Tangent
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe

ROW Right of Way
RPA Receiving Previous Area
SAE Society of Automotive
Engineers
SCM Stormwater Control Measure or
Control Measure for Post-
Construction Stormwater
Quality
SDR Standard Dimensional Ratio
SEO State Engineer's Office
SHAC State Highway Access Code
SWMP Stormwater Management Plan

TC Top of Curb
TIA Telecommunications Institute of
America
TMDL Total Maximum Daily Load
TMP Transportation Master Plan, City
of Boulder

UBC Uniform Building Code

UDFCD Urban Drainage and Flood
Control District
UIA Unconnected Impervious Area
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UMC Uniform Mechanical Code

USDCM Urban Storm Drainage Criteria

Manual
USGS United States Geological Survey

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS G-iii

 SECTION 2: DEFINITIONS

Words and phrases contained in these Standards shall be read in context and construed according to the
rules of grammar and common usage. Words and phrases that have acquired a technical or particular
meaning, whether by definition, adoption herein, or otherwise, are intended to be construed accordingly.

Wherever the phrases "as directed", "as required", "as permitted", or phrases of like meaning are
used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirements or permission of the Director of Public Works
(Director) is intended. Similarly, use of the words "approved", "acceptable", and "satisfactory" shall
refer to approval of the Director.

The definitions in this Glossary apply throughout these Standards. The words or phrases presented have
the following meaning unless the context clearly indicates otherwise:

“Alteration” means a request to use a substitute or alternative material, method, or process which will
perform the same function as that provided in a particular standard.

“Approach” means the portion of an intersection leg which is used by traffic approaching the intersection.

"Approved plan" means the engineering design and construction drawings for public improvements,
prepared by an engineer, which has been granted final approval by the Director of Public Works in
accordance with these standards.

"As-built" means an engineering drawing of record, prepared under the direction of a licensed Colorado
registered professional engineer, reflecting the actual construction of public improvements in the service
area, including, but not limited to, final grading, alignments, dimensioning, elevations, locations and
materials sizing and type.

“Average Daily Trips (ADT)” means the volume of traffic passing through a given point during a given
time period, divided by the number of days in that time period.

"Backflow" means the reversal of the direction of flow of water or mixtures of water and other liquid,
gases, or other substances into the distribution pipes of a potable water supply from any source or sources
caused by backpressure and/or back-siphonage.

"Backflow prevention assembly" means any approved assembly, method, or type of construction
designed to prevent backflow or back-siphonage into a public water supply by isolating the owner's water
system from the public water system. In addition, see Section I. of these rules.

“Caliper” means a diameter measurement of a tree's trunk, and is measured around the trunk of the tree,
six inches above tree base grade for one to four inch caliper trees and 12 inches above tree base grade for
five to eight inch caliper trees. Trees measuring between four and five inch caliper shall be rounded off to
the nearest inch.

“Capacity” means the maximum number of vehicles that have a reasonable expectation of passing over a
given roadway or section of roadway in one direction during a given time period.

G-iv DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

“Certified Backflow Prevention Device Tester” means any person who has passed a State of Colorado
approved or sponsored certification examination, and who is listed as a certified backflow prevention
device tester with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment.

"City" means the City of Boulder, a Colorado home rule city in Boulder County, Colorado.

"City water system" means the source and distribution facilities of the water system to the point of
delivery to the owner water system. The source includes all components of the facilities utilized in the
production, treatment, storage, and delivery of water to the distribution system. The distribution system
includes the network of conduits used for the delivery of water from the source to the owner water system.

"Contractor" means a person, firm, partnership, subcontractor or corporation, licensed by the City that is
responsible for the construction of approved public improvements associated with a specific project, or
projects, within the City of Boulder service area. This term also includes the contractor’s superintendent
and on-site manager.

"Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual" means a manual published by the Colorado Department
of Public Health and the Environment addressing cross connection control practices, Fourth Edition -
Revised.

"Cross connection" means any physical arrangement whereby the city’s water supply system is
connected, directly or indirectly, with any other water supply system, sewer, drain, conduit, pool, storage
reservoir, plumbing fixture, or other device which contains, or may contain, contaminated water, sewage,
or other waste or liquid of unknown or unsafe quality which may be capable of imparting contamination to
the public water supply as a result of backflow. Bypass arrangements, jumper connections, removable
sections, swivel or changeover assemblies, and other temporary or permanent assemblies through which, or
because of which, backflow could occur are considered to be cross connections.

“Delay” means the stopped time per approach vehicle, in seconds per vehicle.

“Design Hour Volume” means the hourly traffic volume used for street design and capacity analysis,
usually one (1) or more peak hours during a 24 hour period.

“Design Speed” means five (5) to 10 miles per hour above the proposed or desired speed limit of the
facility under design.

“Design Vehicle” means that all public and private streets must be designed to accommodate an SU-30
vehicle. The definition of this vehicle type is found in AASHTO’s Geometric Highway Design Standards.

"Developer" means the person, owner, firm, or corporation responsible for the development and
completion of all public improvements associated with a proposed project in accordance with these
standards.

“Diameter” means the diameter size measurement of a tree's trunk, and is measured around the trunk at
4.5 feet above the tree base grade for trees greater than eight (8) inch caliper.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS G-v

“Director” or "Director of Public Works" means the authorized City employee, or his/her designee,
responsible for the enforcement of these standards and approval of the design and construction of public
improvements within the City of Boulder service area, and the overall management and direction of the
Public Works Department.

“Dripline” means the outermost edge of a tree's canopy, projected on the ground.

"Engineer" means the Colorado registered professional engineer responsible for the design of all public
improvements submitted to the City for a proposed project in accordance with these standards, including
all plans, calculations, specifications, and coordination of field surveys.

"Construction plan" means the engineering design and construction drawings for public improvements,
prepared by an Engineer which has been submitted for final approval by the Director of Public Works in
accordance with these standards.

“Hourly Volume” means the number of vehicles that pass over a given section of a lane or roadway
during one hour.

"Inspector" means the Director of Public Works, or his/her designee, responsible for the inspection of
public improvements construction.

“Level of Service (LOS)” refers to the definitions of LOS provided in the Highway Capacity Manual,
“Definitions and Concepts.”

"May" means is authorized to, or a permissive condition which indicates a choice between two (2) or
more alternatives.

“Modification” means a request to change or modify a standard or the parameters of a standard because
the particular application may not require the degree of rigor which the standard requires.

“Peak Hour” means the concept referring to the hour of a day when the highest volume of traffic occurs
on a transportation facility.

“Planting Strip” means the landscape area within a street median, the landscape planting strip between
the curb and detached sidewalk, or the landscape area between the back edge of a public sidewalk
(attached or detached) and the right-of-way/property line.

"Public improvements" means any public facility, system or infrastructure in the City of Boulder service
area including, but not limited to: earthwork or landscaping, streets, sidewalks, bike paths, trails, parking
and traffic control devices; water supply, treatment, storage and distribution systems; wastewater
collection and treatment systems; and stormwater and flood control collection and conveyance systems in
public easements or right-of-way.

“Public Sign” means any sign that is posted by a governmental entity within the right-of-way for the
purpose of directing traffic or parking.

G-vi DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Effective: June 20, 2019

"Record Set" means the engineering design and construction drawings for public improvements, sealed
and signed by an engineer, approved by the Director of Public Works in accordance with these standards,
and maintained on file in public records as the final approved construction document.

“Root Protection Zone” means the ground area surrounding the entire tree that extends from trunk to
dripline, or a minimum of fifteen feet for column-shaped trees, whichever is greater.

"Shall" means a mandatory duty to conform to the specified standard. Where certain requirements in
these standards are described with the "shall" stipulation, it is mandatory that these requirements be met or
exceeded.

"Should" means an advisory condition. Where "should" is used, it is considered to be recommended or

advisory, but not mandatory.

“Sidewalk, Attached” means a sidewalk and curb that are attached as one (1) continuous element.

“Sidewalk, Detached” means a sidewalk that is separated from the curb by a landscape planting strip.

“Sight Distance” means the length of roadway ahead visible to the driver. The minimum sight distance
available must be long enough to enable a vehicle traveling at or near the design speed to stop before
reaching a stationary object in its path.

“Speed Change Lane” means a separate lane for the purpose of enabling a vehicle entering or leaving a
roadway to increase (acceleration lane) or decrease (deceleration lane) its speed to a rate at which it can
more safely merge or diverge with through traffic. Includes tapered areas.

"Standards" means the "Design and Construction Standards" manual for the City of Boulder.

“Storage Lane” means additional length added to a deceleration lane, to store the maximum number of
vehicles likely to accumulate during a critical period without interfering with the through lanes.

“Street Tree” means any tree in the public right-of-way.

“Streetscape” means landscaping design for any streetside area, generally including but not limited to

planting strips and medians.

“Transportation Demand Management” means any action or set of actions aimed at reducing the
impact of traffic by influencing people’s travel behavior.

“Trips” means a vehicle moving from an origin point to a destination point. Trips are one-way.

“Waiver” means a request to delete or omit the application of a particular standard.

"Work" means any activity involved in the performance of constructing, installing, repairing or
maintaining public improvements.

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS G-vii

 CITY OF BOULDER
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

REFERENCES

Where not specified in these Standards or the Boulder Revised Code (B.R.C.) 1981, to protect the public
health, safety, and welfare, the Director of Public Works will specify the standards to be applied to the
design and construction of public improvements and may refer to one or more of the following
references:

GENERAL REFERENCES

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Colorado Revised Statutes (CRS)

TRANSPORTATION REFERENCES

Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Guidelines for Major Urban Street Design

ITE Trip Generation Manual

Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)

STREETSCAPE AND TREE PROTECTION

REFERENCES

American Standard for Nursery Stock, American Association of Nurserymen.

Guide for Plant Appraisal, International Society of Arboriculture.

Species Ratings and Appraisal Factors Guide, Rocky Mountain Chapter, I.S.A.

Standard Practices for Trees, Shrubs, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance (ANSI. A300), American
National Standard Institute.

Streetscape Standards for the Boulder Valley Regional Center.

Himelick’s Tree and Shrub Transplanting Manual, International Society of Arboriculture.

Valuation of Landscape Trees, Shrubs, and Other Plants, International Society of Arboriculture.

UTILITIES REFERENCES

Manual of Water Supply Practices, American Water Works Association (AWWA)

Insurance Services Office (ISO)

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS R-i

Denver, Colorado, Board of Water Commissioners, Engineering Standards

Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual

American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice -
Gravity Sanitary Sewer Design and Construction

Colorado Department of Health Design Criteria for Wastewater Treatment Works

International Plumbing Code (IPC)

International Fire Code (IFC)

CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 2017

Installation Guide for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association

Handbook of Steel Drainage and Highway Construction Projects, American Iron and
Steel Institute
STORM WATER REFERENCES

Urban Drainage and Flood Control District (UDFCD) Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Volumes 1,
2, and 3.

US Army Corps of Engineers Users and Programmers Manuals for HEC-1 (Flood Hydrograph
Package), HEC-2 (Water Surface Profiles), and HEC-RAS.

State of Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment §303(d) List of Water-Quality-
Limited Segments Requiring TMDLs or for which a Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) (Note: with
this list, adopted in 5 CCR 1002-93, the State of Colorado implements the requirements of §303(d) of
the federal Clean Water Act.)

Effective: June 20, 2019 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS R-ii